GOT2000 - UserManual Monitor - SH 081196 I PDF

GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL
GOT2000 Series
User's Manual (Monitor)
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT).
Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly
in advance to ensure correct use.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Always read these precautions before using this equipment.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product.
In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

WARNING resulting in death or severe injury.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.
Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances. Always
follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.
Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
Some failures of the GOT, communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off.
Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch.
An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a
serious accident.Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident.
An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device
that displays and outputs serious warning.
Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
A-1
WARNING
When the GOT backlight has a failure, the GOT status will be as follows.Failure to observe this
instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
• GT27,GT25,GT23
When the GOT backlight has a failure, the POWER LED blinks (orange/blue) and the display
section dims. In such a case, the input by the touch switch(s) is disabled.
• GT21
When the GOT backlight has a failure, the display section dims. In such a case, the input by the
touch switches is disabled.
Even if the display section dims on the liquid crystal of the GOT, the input by the touch switch(s) may
remain enabled. This may cause a malfunction of the touch switch.
For example, if an operator assumes that the display section has dimmed because of the screen
save function and touches the display section to cancel the screen save, a touch switch may be
activated.
The GOT backlight failure can be checked with a system signal of the GOT.
The display section of the GOT is an analog-resistive type touch panel.
When multiple points of the display section are touched simultaneously, an accident may occur due
to incorrect output or malfunction.
• GT27
Do not touch three points or more simultaneously on the display section. Doing so may cause an
accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
• GT25,GT23,GT21
Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the display section. Doing so may operate the
switch located around the center of the touched point, or may cause an accident due to an
incorrect output or malfunction.
When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by the GOT are
changed, be sure to reset the GOT, or turn on the unit again after shutting off the power as soon as
possible.
Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
If a communication fault (including cable disconnection) occurs during monitoring on the GOT,
communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative.
For bus connection (GT27,GT25 Only) : The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes
inoperative.
For other than bus connection : The GOT becomes inoperative.
A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the
system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT
communication fault will occur.
Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
A-2
CAUTION
Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring.
Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart.
Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to the noise.
Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver.
Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section.
When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network, the available IP address is restricted according
to the system configuration.
• When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network :
Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network.
• When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network :
Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the controllers except the GOT in the network.
Doing so can cause the IP address duplication.
The duplication can negatively affect the communication of the device with the IP address
(192.168.3.18).
The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system.
Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they
communicate with the GOT.
Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT.
When the GOT is subject to shock or vibration, or some colors appear on the screen of the GOT, the
screen of the GOT might flicker.
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the GOT main unit to/from the panel.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the option unit onto/from the GOT. (GT27,GT25 Only)
A-3
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual.
Not doing so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration.
When mounting the GOT to the control panel, tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque
range with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2.
• GT27,GT25,GT23
Specified torque range (0.36 N•m to 0.48 N•m)
• GT21
Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the
GOT.
When mounting a unit on the GOT, tighten the mounting screws in the following specified torque
range.
• GT27,GT25
When loading the communication unit or option unit other than wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it
to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque
range (0.36 N•m to 0.48 N•m) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2.
When loading the wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it to the side interface of GOT and tighten the
mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.10 N•m to 0.14 N•m) with a Phillips-head
screwdriver No.1.
When the GOT is installed vertically, its side interface is positioned on the bottom.
To prevent the falling of the wireless LAN communication unit from the side interface, install or
remove the unit while holding it with hands.
• GT21
When mounting the SD card unit on the GOT, fit it to the side of the GOT and tighten the tapping
screws in the specified torque range (0.3 N•m to 0.6 N•m) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2.
Under tightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
When closing the USB environmental protection cover, fix the cover to the GOT by pushing the
[PUSH] mark on the latch firmly to comply with the protective structure.(GT27,GT25 Only)
Remove the protective film of the GOT.
When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed.
In addition, for the models equipped with the human sensor function, using the GOT with the
protective film may cause the human sensor not to function properly
Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight, high temperature, dust, humidity,
and vibrations.
When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals, use the protective cover for oil.
Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT.
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions.
A-4
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
Make sure to ground the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section to the
protective ground conductors dedicated to the GOT with a ground resistance of 100 Ω or less. (GT21
does not have the LG terminal.)
When tightening the terminal screws, use a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2.
Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range.
• GT27,GT25,GT23
For a terminal processing of a wire to the GOT power supply section, use the following terminal.
• GT27,GT25,GT23
Use applicable solderless terminals for terminal processing of a wire and tighten them with the
specified torque.
Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.
• GT21
Connect a stranded wire or a single wire directly, or use a rod terminal with an insulation sleeve.
Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal
arrangement of the product.
Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.
Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range.
• GT27,GT25,GT23
• GT21
Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the module.
Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.
The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts,
from entering the module during wiring.
Do not peel this label during wiring.Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label
because of heat dissipation. (GT27,GT25 Only)
Plug the communication cable into the GOT interface or the connector of the connected unit, and
tighten the mounting screws and the terminal screws in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller(A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into the
connector of the connected unit until it "clicks".
After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly.
Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.(GT27,GT25 Only)
A-5
[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen (such as turning ON or
OFF bit device, changing the word device current value, changing the settings or current values of
the timer or counter, and changing the buffer memory current value), read through the manual
carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method.
During test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant
operation for the system.
False output or malfunction can cause an accident.
[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
When power is on, do not touch the terminals.
Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction.
Correctly connect the battery connector.
Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire.
Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire.
Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all
phases.
Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction.
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
A-6
[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
Do not disassemble or modify the unit.
Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire.
Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly.
Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure.
The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.
Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental
pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.
When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull from the cable portion.
Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable
connection fault.
Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock. A module damage may result.
Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit.
Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery.
If the battery is dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using.
Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metals, etc. to discharge static electricity from
human body, etc.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
Use the battery manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Use of other batteries may cause a risk of fire or explosion.
Dispose of used battery promptly.
Keep away from children.Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.
Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply before replacing the battery or using the
dip switch of the terminating resistor.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction by static electricity.
[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION
For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required.
However, the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period
of use elapses.
When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, execute the touch
panel calibration.
When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other object may be
activated.
This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction.
A-7
[PRECAUTIONS WHEN THE DATA STORAGE IS IN USE]
WARNING
If the SD card is removed from drive A of the GOT while being accessed by the GOT, the GOT may
stop processing data for about 20 seconds.
The GOT cannot be operated during this period.
The functions that run in the background including a screen updating, alarm, logging, scripts, and
others are also interrupted.
Remove the SD card after checking the following items.
• GT27,GT25,GT23
After checking the light off of SD card access LED, remove the SD card.
• GT21
After disabling SD card access on the utility screen of the GOT and checking that the SD card
access LED is off, remove the SD card.
CAUTION
If the data storage is removed from the GOT while being accessed by the GOT, the data storage and
files may be damaged.
Before removing the data storage from the GOT, check the SD card access LED, system signal, or
others to make sure that the data storage is not accessed.
Turning off the GOT while it accesses the SD card results in damage to the SD card and files.
When using the GOT with an SD card inserted, check the following items.
• GT27,GT25,GT23
When inserting a SD card into the GOT, make sure to close the SD card cover.
Failure to do so causes the data not to be read or written.
• GT21
When using an SD card connected to the SD card unit or the GOT, enable the SD card access in
the GOT utility in advance.
Failure to do so causes the data not to be read or written.
When removing the SD card from the GOT, make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop
out.
Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.
When inserting a USB device into a USB interface of the GOT, make sure to insert the device into
the interface firmly.
Failure to do so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.
Before removing the USB device from the GOT, follow the procedure for removal on the utility screen
of the GOT.
After the successful completion dialog is displayed, remove the USB device by hand carefully.
Failure to do so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.
A-8
[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.
When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations.
(Refer to GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) for details of the battery directive in the EU
member states.)
[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.
(Refer to GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) for details of the regulated models.)
Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be
exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this
manual, as they are precision devices.
Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail.
Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation.
When fumigants that contain halogen materials such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine are
used for disinfecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects, they cause malfunction when
entering our products.
Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enter
our products, or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation (heat method).
Additionally, disinfect and protect wood from insects before packing products.
A-9
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................................................................A - 1
CONTENTS ............................................................................................................................................A - 10
List of Manuals for GT Works3 ...............................................................................................................A - 19
Abbreviations, Generic Terms, the meaning of the icon .........................................................................A - 20
1. FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITER
1.1 Each function and related manuals ................................................................................................. 1 - 1
1.2 Required system application (Extended function) for the function................................................... 1 - 2
1.3 Displayable languages for each function ......................................................................................... 1 - 2
2. SYSTEM LAUNCHER
2.1 Features........................................................................................................................................... 2 - 1
2.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................... 2 - 1
2.2.1 System configuration ............................................................................................................ 2 - 1
2.2.2 Precautions........................................................................................................................... 2 - 3
2.3 Operations for Display ..................................................................................................................... 2 - 3
2.4 Operating Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 2 - 6
2.4.1 System configuration screen ................................................................................................ 2 - 6
2.4.2 Online module change screen .............................................................................................. 2 - 8
3. DEVICE MONITOR
3.1 Features........................................................................................................................................... 3 - 1
3.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................... 3 - 4
3.2.2 Devices that can be monitored ............................................................................................. 3 - 7
3.2.3 Access range ...................................................................................................................... 3 - 11
3.2.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 11
3.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen .............................................................................. 3 - 12
3.3.1 Displaying the monitor screen ............................................................................................ 3 - 12
3.3.2 Names of each section of monitor screen .......................................................................... 3 - 15
3.3.3 Display format of the monitor screen ([One large screen], [4 screens]) ............................. 3 - 16
3.3.4 Destination path setting ([Connect]) ................................................................................... 3 - 17
3.3.5 Entering devices ([Register]) .............................................................................................. 3 - 20
3.3.6 Deleting a device ([Delete]) ................................................................................................ 3 - 22
3.3.7 Deleting devices at a time ([Delete all]) .............................................................................. 3 - 23
3.3.8 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])..................................................................... 3 - 24
3.3.9 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])........................... 3 - 28
3.3.10 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor]) .......................................................................... 3 - 29
3.3.11 File switching for comment display ([Change comment]) ................................................... 3 - 31
3.3.12 Screen transition (common operation)................................................................................ 3 - 32
3.4 Entry Monitor ................................................................................................................................. 3 - 34
3.5 Batch Monitor................................................................................................................................. 3 - 36
3.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters) .............................................................................. 3 - 38
3.7 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory)........................................................................................ 3 - 41
3.8 Error Messages and Corrective Actions ........................................................................................ 3 - 43
A - 10
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER, R LADDER)
4.1 Features........................................................................................................................................... 4 - 1
4.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................... 4 - 4
4.2.2 Devices and range that can be monitored ............................................................................ 4 - 6
4.2.3 Access range ........................................................................................................................ 4 - 8
4.2.4 Precautions........................................................................................................................... 4 - 8
4.3Display Operation .......................................................................................................................... 4 - 10
4.3.1 Setting ladder data storage location ................................................................................... 4 - 16
4.3.2 Reading comment files from data storage (Supported by
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 the sequence program monitor (ladder) only)................ 4 - 16
4.3.3 Program update check ....................................................................................................... 4 - 19
4.3.4 Setting the security ............................................................................................................. 4 - 20
4.4Setting Display Format .................................................................................................................. 4 - 22
4.4.1 Switching languages of sequence programs
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only).............. 4 - 22
4.4.2 Switching comment display mode
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　(Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only)............... 4 - 22
4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen................................................................................................ 4 - 23
4.5.1 Displayed contents ............................................................................................................. 4 - 23
4.5.2 Key functions ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 25
4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen ........................................................................................ 4 - 28
4.6.2 Key functions ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 29
4.6.3 Menus ................................................................................................................................. 4 - 29
4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen........................................................................................... 4 - 32
4.7.2 Key functions ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 40
4.7.3 Menus ................................................................................................................................. 4 - 41
4.8Find/Replace Operation................................................................................................................. 4 - 51
4.8.1 Device/Contact/Coil search ................................................................................................ 4 - 51
4.8.2 Factor search...................................................................................................................... 4 - 53
4.8.3 Replace device (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only) ................... 4 - 55
4.8.4 Change open/close cantact
　　　　　　　　　　　　　(Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only) .................. 4 - 56
4.9 Test Operation ............................................................................................................................... 4 - 57
4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action .......................................................................................... 4 - 59
5. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)

5.1 Features........................................................................................................................................... 5 - 1
5.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................... 5 - 4
5.2.2 Devices and range that can be monitored ............................................................................ 5 - 6
5.2.3 Access range ........................................................................................................................ 5 - 7
5.2.4 Precautions........................................................................................................................... 5 - 7
5.3.1 Setting SFC data storage location ...................................................................................... 5 - 11
5.3.2 Reading comment files from SD card ................................................................................. 5 - 12
A - 11
5.3.3 Setting Display Format ....................................................................................................... 5 - 14
5.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen................................................................................................ 5 - 16
5.4.2 Key functions ...................................................................................................................... 5 - 19
5.5 How to Operate Block List Screen ................................................................................................. 5 - 22
5.5.2 Key functions ...................................................................................................................... 5 - 23
5.5.3 Menus ................................................................................................................................. 5 - 23
5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen ............................................................................. 5 - 24
5.6.2 Key functions ...................................................................................................................... 5 - 27
5.6.3 Menus ................................................................................................................................. 5 - 28
5.7 Test Operation ............................................................................................................................... 5 - 37
6. NETWORK MONITOR
6.1 Features........................................................................................................................................... 6 - 1
6.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................... 6 - 3
6.2.2 Network information that can be monitored .......................................................................... 6 - 5
6.2.3 Access range ........................................................................................................................ 6 - 7
6.2.4 Precautions........................................................................................................................... 6 - 8
6.3 Operations for display .................................................................................................................... 6 - 10
6.4 Operation Procedures.................................................................................................................... 6 - 14
6.4.1 Line monitor ........................................................................................................................ 6 - 14
6.4.2 Detailed monitor.................................................................................................................. 6 - 17
6.4.3 Other station monitor .......................................................................................................... 6 - 26
6.4.4 Other station communication status monitor ...................................................................... 6 - 27
6.4.5 Other station data link status monitor ................................................................................. 6 - 28
6.4.6 Other station parameter status monitor .............................................................................. 6 - 29
6.4.7 Other station CPU operation status monitor ....................................................................... 6 - 30
6.4.8 Other station CPU RUN status monitor .............................................................................. 6 - 31
6.4.9 Other station loop status monitor........................................................................................ 6 - 32
6.5 Error Message and Corrective Action ............................................................................................ 6 - 33
7. Q MOTION MONITOR
7.1 Features........................................................................................................................................... 7 - 1
7.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................... 7 - 3
7.2.2 Access range ........................................................................................................................ 7 - 5
7.2.3 Precautions........................................................................................................................... 7 - 5
7.4.1 System configuration screen layout.................................................................................... 7 - 10
7.4.2 Setting method for other station monitoring........................................................................ 7 - 11
7.4.3 Monitor Menu screen .......................................................................................................... 7 - 13
7.4.4 Present Value Monitor screen ............................................................................................ 7 - 14
7.4.5 SFC Error History screen.................................................................................................... 7 - 15
A - 12
7.4.6 Error List screen ................................................................................................................. 7 - 16
7.4.7 Error List Designated-Axis screen ...................................................................................... 7 - 18
7.4.8 Positioning Monitor screen ................................................................................................. 7 - 20
7.4.9 Servo Monitor screen ......................................................................................................... 7 - 22
7.4.10 Present Value History Monitor screen ................................................................................ 7 - 23
7.4.11 Parameter setting screen ................................................................................................... 7 - 25
7.4.12 Hard copy output ................................................................................................................ 7 - 28
8. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR

8.1 Features........................................................................................................................................... 8 - 1
8.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................... 8 - 3
8.2.2 Access range ........................................................................................................................ 8 - 5
8.2.3 Precautions........................................................................................................................... 8 - 6
8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen ................................................................... 8 - 11
8.4.1 Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions ................................... 8 - 11
8.4.2 Setting method for other station monitoring........................................................................ 8 - 13
8.4.3 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions .................................... 8 - 15
8.4.4 Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions ............................................. 8 - 21
8.4.5 Composition of the intelligent module monitor screen and key functions ........................... 8 - 26
8.4.6 Specifying a module to monitor and selecting monitor menu ............................................. 8 - 27
8.4.7 Testing of the intelligent function module ........................................................................... 8 - 28
8.5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens ............................................................................................... 8 - 30
8.6 Operating I/O Module Monitor Screen ........................................................................................... 8 - 31
8.6.1 Specifying the module to be monitored .............................................................................. 8 - 31
8.6.2 Monitor screen configuration and key functions ................................................................. 8 - 32
9. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR

9.1 Features........................................................................................................................................... 9 - 1
9.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................... 9 - 3
9.2.2 Access range ........................................................................................................................ 9 - 6
9.2.3 Precautions........................................................................................................................... 9 - 6
9.3 Operations of Display ...................................................................................................................... 9 - 7
9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens............................................................................. 9 - 10
9.4.1 Servo amplifier monitor....................................................................................................... 9 - 10
9.4.2 Setup .................................................................................................................................. 9 - 11
9.4.3 Monitor functions ................................................................................................................ 9 - 13
9.4.4 Alarm function..................................................................................................................... 9 - 15
9.4.5 Diagnostics function ........................................................................................................... 9 - 18
9.4.6 Parameter setting ............................................................................................................... 9 - 25
9.4.7 Test operations ................................................................................................................... 9 - 31
9.4.8 Hard copy output ................................................................................................................ 9 - 40
A - 13
10. BACKUP/RESTORATION
10.1 Features......................................................................................................................................... 10 - 1
10.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................. 10 - 3
10.2.1 System configuration .......................................................................................................... 10 - 3
10.2.2 Access range .................................................................................................................... 10 - 13
10.2.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 13
10.3 Operations for Display ................................................................................................................. 10 - 19
10.3.1 Setting storage location for backup data .......................................................................... 10 - 23
10.3.2 Security and password ..................................................................................................... 10 - 24
10.3.3 Trigger backup.................................................................................................................. 10 - 30
10.3.4 Network batch backup/restoration .................................................................................... 10 - 37
10.4 Operation Procedures.................................................................................................................. 10 - 41
10.4.1 Main menu ........................................................................................................................ 10 - 41
10.4.2 Progress screen (backup)................................................................................................. 10 - 42
10.4.3 Data list (restoration) ........................................................................................................ 10 - 43
10.4.4 Progress screen (restoration) ........................................................................................... 10 - 44
10.4.5 Controller list screen ......................................................................................................... 10 - 45
10.4.6 Controller selection screen (Restoration) ......................................................................... 10 - 46
10.4.7 Individual restoration screen (Restoration) ....................................................................... 10 - 47
10.5 Backup Data Conversion Tool ..................................................................................................... 10 - 48
10.5.1 Operating environment ..................................................................................................... 10 - 48
10.5.2 How to install and start Backup Data Conversion Tool..................................................... 10 - 49
10.5.3 How to use Backup Data Conversion Tool ....................................................................... 10 - 49
10.5.4 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 51
10.6 Errors and Corrective Actions ...................................................................................................... 10 - 52
11. MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING

11.1 Features......................................................................................................................................... 11 - 1
11.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................. 11 - 2
11.2.2 Access range ...................................................................................................................... 11 - 2
11.3 Operation for Display ..................................................................................................................... 11 - 3
12. LOG VIEWER

12.1 Features......................................................................................................................................... 12 - 1
12.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................. 12 - 2
12.2.2 GOT Side Settings.............................................................................................................. 12 - 3
12.2.3 Access range ...................................................................................................................... 12 - 3
12.2.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 12 - 4
12.3 Operations for Display ................................................................................................................... 12 - 5
12.3.1 Changing screens when view logged device is selected.................................................... 12 - 6
12.3.2 Changing screens when manage log file is selected.......................................................... 12 - 7
12.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens .................................................................................. 12 - 8
12.4.1 How to operate target setting window................................................................................. 12 - 8
A - 14
12.4.2 How to operate target selection screen .............................................................................. 12 - 9
12.4.3 How to operate Main Menu screen................................................................................... 12 - 13
12.4.4 How to operate file selection screen................................................................................. 12 - 14
12.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer ................................................................................................ 12 - 17
12.5.1 Data log viewer screen ..................................................................................................... 12 - 17
12.5.2 Legend display ................................................................................................................. 12 - 19
12.5.3 Upper and lower limit values setting ................................................................................. 12 - 20
12.5.4 Cursor position information............................................................................................... 12 - 21
12.5.5 Selecting data ................................................................................................................... 12 - 22
12.5.6 Searching data ................................................................................................................. 12 - 23
12.5.7 Help .................................................................................................................................. 12 - 24
12.6 Error Messages and Corrective Actions ...................................................................................... 12 - 25
13. FX LADDER MONITOR

13.1 Features......................................................................................................................................... 13 - 1
13.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................. 13 - 3
13.2.2 Devices and range that can be monitored .......................................................................... 13 - 4
13.2.3 Access range ...................................................................................................................... 13 - 4
13.2.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 13 - 5
13.3 Operation for Display ..................................................................................................................... 13 - 7
13.3.1 Display .............................................................................................................................. 13 - 12
13.3.2 Searching from the monitor screen .................................................................................. 13 - 14
13.4 Operation Procedure Common.................................................................................................... 13 - 16
13.4.1 Information and key functions displayed on the screen.................................................... 13 - 16
13.4.2 Hard copy output .............................................................................................................. 13 - 19
13.5 Switching the Display Format ...................................................................................................... 13 - 20
13.5.1 Display switching of 16-bit (one-word)/32-bit (two-word) modules ................................... 13 - 20
13.5.2 Display switching of decimal numbers/hexadecimal numbers.......................................... 13 - 21
13.5.3 Switching comment/no-comment display ......................................................................... 13 - 22
13.6 Search Operation......................................................................................................................... 13 - 23
13.6.1 Device search ................................................................................................................... 13 - 23
13.6.2 Contact point search......................................................................................................... 13 - 25
13.6.3 Coil search........................................................................................................................ 13 - 27
13.6.4 Step search ...................................................................................................................... 13 - 29
13.6.5 Ladder end search............................................................................................................ 13 - 30
13.6.6 Defect search ................................................................................................................... 13 - 31
13.7 Test Operation ............................................................................................................................. 13 - 35
13.7.1 Displaying the test menu screen ...................................................................................... 13 - 35
13.8 Error Messages and Corrective Action ........................................................................................ 13 - 36
14. MOTION SFC MONITOR

14.1 Features......................................................................................................................................... 14 - 1
14.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................. 14 - 2
14.2.2 Devices and range that can be monitored .......................................................................... 14 - 3
14.2.3 Access range ...................................................................................................................... 14 - 3
14.2.4 Readable motion SFC programs ........................................................................................ 14 - 3
A - 15
14.2.5 Displayable character codes............................................................................................... 14 - 4
14.2.6 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 14 - 4
14.3.1 Setting motion SFC program storage location.................................................................... 14 - 8
14.4.1 SFC diagram monitor screen.............................................................................................. 14 - 9
14.4.2 Detailed program window ................................................................................................. 14 - 13
14.4.3 Step list window ................................................................................................................ 14 - 15
14.4.4 Active step list window...................................................................................................... 14 - 16
14.4.5 Program batch monitor window ........................................................................................ 14 - 17
14.4.6 Communication setting window ........................................................................................ 14 - 18
14.4.7 Password input window .................................................................................................... 14 - 19
15. FX LIST EDITOR

15.1 Features......................................................................................................................................... 15 - 1
15.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................. 15 - 3
15.2.2 Access range ...................................................................................................................... 15 - 5
15.2.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 15 - 5
15.4.1 Key arrangement and a list of key functions....................................................................... 15 - 9
15.4.2 Selection and operation of modes .................................................................................... 15 - 11
15.4.3 Sequence program display ............................................................................................... 15 - 12
15.4.4 Searching commands and devices................................................................................... 15 - 14
15.4.5 Writing commands ............................................................................................................ 15 - 16
15.4.6 Changing operands, set values ........................................................................................ 15 - 19
15.4.7 Deleting commands .......................................................................................................... 15 - 20
15.4.8 Sequence program all clear.............................................................................................. 15 - 21
15.4.9 PLC diagnostics................................................................................................................ 15 - 22
15.4.10 Parameter setting ............................................................................................................. 15 - 24
15.4.11 Keywords .......................................................................................................................... 15 - 27
15.4.12 List monitor ....................................................................................................................... 15 - 29
15.4.13 Hard copy output .............................................................................................................. 15 - 31
15.4.14 Action for an incorrect key input ....................................................................................... 15 - 31
16. R MOTION MONITOR

16.1 Features......................................................................................................................................... 16 - 1
16.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................. 16 - 3
16.2.2 Access range ...................................................................................................................... 16 - 4
16.2.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 16 - 4
16.4.1 System configuration screen .............................................................................................. 16 - 8
16.4.2 Setting procedure for monitoring other stations.................................................................. 16 - 9
16.4.3 Monitor menu screen ........................................................................................................ 16 - 11
16.4.4 Present value monitor screen ........................................................................................... 16 - 12
A - 16
16.4.5 Motion error history monitor screen .................................................................................. 16 - 14
16.4.6 Error list designated-axis screen ...................................................................................... 16 - 16
16.4.7 Positioning monitor screen ............................................................................................... 16 - 18
16.4.8 Servo monitor screen ....................................................................................................... 16 - 20
16.4.9 Present value history monitor screen ............................................................................... 16 - 21
16.4.10 Parameter setting screen ................................................................................................. 16 - 23
16.4.11 Hard copy output .............................................................................................................. 16 - 25
16.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action ........................................................................................ 16 - 26
17. CNC MONITOR

17.1 Features......................................................................................................................................... 17 - 1
17.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................. 17 - 2
17.2.2 Access range ...................................................................................................................... 17 - 4
17.2.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 17 - 4
18. CNC DATA I/O

18.1 Features......................................................................................................................................... 18 - 1
18.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................. 18 - 1
18.2.2 Access range ...................................................................................................................... 18 - 3
18.2.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 18 - 3
19. CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT

19.1 Features......................................................................................................................................... 19 - 1
19.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................. 19 - 1
19.2.2 Access range ...................................................................................................................... 19 - 2
19.2.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 19 - 2
19.5 Error Messages and Corrective actions....................................................................................... 19 - 11
20. NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY

20.1 Features......................................................................................................................................... 20 - 1
20.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................. 20 - 1
20.4 Display Contents............................................................................................................................ 20 - 3
21. iQSS UTILITY
A - 17
21.1 Features......................................................................................................................................... 21 - 1
21.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................. 21 - 1
21.2.2 Access range ...................................................................................................................... 21 - 4
21.2.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 21 - 4
21.3 Preparing profile data .................................................................................................................... 21 - 4
21.4.1 Screen transition................................................................................................................. 21 - 6
21.5 Operating Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 21 - 7
21.5.1 iQSS utility screen .............................................................................................................. 21 - 7
21.5.2 Device list information screen............................................................................................. 21 - 9
21.5.3 Monitoring information screen .......................................................................................... 21 - 11
21.5.4 Parameter information screen .......................................................................................... 21 - 14
22. MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR

23. MOTION PROGRAM I/O
REVISIONS
WARRANTY
A - 18
List of Manuals for GT Works3
For the manuals related to this product, install the manuals with the drawing software.
If you need a printed manual, consult your local Mitsubishi representative or branch office.
■1. List of Manuals for GT Designer3(GOT2000)

(1) Screen drawing software manuals
Manual number
Manual name
(Model code)
GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual -
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help -
SH-080862ENG
GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3
(1D7MB2)
GOT2000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Version1 SH-081228ENG
(2) Connection manuals
Manual number
Manual name
(Model code)
SH-081197ENG
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
(1D7MJ8)
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081198ENG
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 2) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081199ENG
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals) For GT Works3
SH-081200ENG
Version1
(3) GT SoftGOT2000 manuals
Manual number
Manual name
(Model code)
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual SH-081201ENG
(4) GOT2000 manuals
Manual number
Manual name
(Model code)
SH-081194ENG
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)
(1D7MJ5)
SH-081195ENG
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
(1D7MJ6)
SH-081196ENG
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor)
(1D7MJ7)
A - 19
Abbreviations, Generic Terms, the meaning of the icon
The following shows the abbreviations and generic terms used in Help.
■1. GOT
Meaning of icon
Abbreviations and generic terms Description Not
Support
support
GT27-X GT2715-X GT2715-XTBA, GT2715-XTBD
GT2712-S GT2712-STBA, GT2712-STWA, GT2712-STBD, GT2712-STWD

GT27-S
GT2710-S GT2710-STBA, GT2710-STBD
GT27 GT27-V GT2710-V GT2710-VTBA, GT2710-VTWA, GT2710-VTBD, GT2710-VTWD
GT27-S GT2708-S GT2708-STBA, GT2708-STBD
GT2708-V GT2708-VTBA, GT2708-VTBD

GT27-V
GT2705-V GT2705-VTBD
GT25-S GT2512-S GT2512-STBA, GT2512-STBD
GT25 GT2510-V GT2510-VTBA, GT2510-VTWA, GT2510-VTBD, GT2510-VTWD

GT25-V
GT2508-V GT2508-VTBA, GT2508-VTWA, GT2508-VTBD, GT2508-VTWD

GT23 GT23-V
GOT2000
GT21
Series
GT21-R GT2104-R GT2104-RTBD
GT2103-PMBD
GT21
GT2103-PMBDS
GT21-P GT2103-P
GT2103-PMBDS2
GT2103-PMBLS
GT SoftGOT2000 GT SoftGOT2000 Version1
GOT1000 Series GOT1000 Series -
GOT900 Series GOT-A900 Series, GOT-F900 Series -
GOT800 Series GOT-800 Series -
A - 20
■2. Communication unit
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL,

Bus connection unit
GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE
MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15-J71GP23-SX
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13
Wireless LAN communication unit GT25-WLAN
Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M
Connection conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S
Field network adapter unit GT25-FNADP
■3. Option unit
Printer unit GT15-PRN
Video input unit GT27-V4-Z (A set of GT16M-V4-Z and GT27-IF1000)
RGB input unit GT27-R2, GT27-R2-Z (A set of GT16M-R2-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Video/RGB unit
Video/RGB input unit GT27-V4R1-Z (A set of GT16M-V4R1-Z and GT27-IF1000)
RGB output unit GT27-ROUT, GT27-ROUT-Z (A set of GT16M-ROUT-Z and GT27-IF1000)
Multimedia unit GT27-MMR-Z (A set of GT16M-MMR-Z and GT27-IF1000)
Video signal conversion unit GT27-IF1000
External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR
Sound output unit GT15-SOUT
SD card unit GT21-03SDCD
■4. Option
NZ1MEM-2GBSD, NZ1MEM-4GBSD, NZ1MEM-8GBSD, NZ1MEM-16GBSD,

SD card
L1MEM-2GBSD, L1MEM-4GBSD
Battery GT11-50BAT
GT27-15PSGC, GT25-12PSGC, GT25-10PSGC, GT25-08PSGC, GT25-

05PSGC, GT21-04RPSGC-UC, GT21-03PSGC-UC, GT27-15PSCC, GT25-
Protective sheet 12PSCC, GT25-10PSCC, GT25-08PSCC, GT25-12PSCC-UC, GT25-
10PSCC-UC, GT25-08PSCC-UC, GT25-05PSCC, GT21-04RPSCC-UC,
GT21-03PSCC-UC
GT20-15PCO, GT20-12PCO, GT20-10PCO, GT20-08PCO, GT25-05PCO,

Protective cover for oil
GT10-20PCO
USB environmental protection cover GT25-UCOV, GT25-05UCOV
GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, GT15-60STAND, GT05-

Stand
50STAND
GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96, GT15-

Attachment
60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77
A - 21
■5. Software
(1) Software related to GOT
GT Works3 SW1DND-GTWK3-J, SW1DND-GTWK3-E, SW1DND-GTWK3-C
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT2000/GOT1000 series
GT Designer3
Screen drawing software for GOT2000 series included in GT Works3
GT Designer3 (GOT2000)
GT Designer3 (GOT1000) Screen drawing software for GOT1000 series included in GT Works3
GT Simulator3 Screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT2000/GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT SoftGOT2000 Monitoring software GT SoftGOT2000 series
GT Converter2 Data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Classic Screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
DU/WIN Screen drawing software FX-PCS-DU/WIN for GOT-F900 series
(2) Software related to iQ Works
Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT

iQ Works
iQ Works
Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the

SW DNC-IQWK (iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT
MELSOFT Navigator
iQ Works)
(□ indicates a version.)
A - 22
(3) Other software
SW□DND-GXW3-E (-EA) type programmable controller engineering software

GX Works3
SW□DNC-GXW2-□ type programmable controller engineering software

GX Works2
GX Simulator3 Simulation function of GX Works3
GX Simulator2 Simulation function of GX Works2

Controller simulator
SW□D5C-LLT-E (-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software package
GX Simulator (SW5D5C-LLT (-V) or later versions)
SW□D5C-GPPW-E (-EV)/SW□D5F-GPPW (-V) type software package

GX Developer
SW□DNN-VIEWER-E type software package

GX LogViewer
SW□D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control

PX Developer
Motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2(SW□DND-

MT Works2 MTW2-E)
SW□RNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller

MT Developer Q series
C Controller module configuration and monitor tool (SW1DND-RCCPU-E)

CW Configurator
SW□DNC-MRC2-E type servo configuration software

MR Configurator2
MRZJW□-SETUP type servo configuration software

MR Configurator
Inverter setup software (FR-SW□-SETUP-WE)

FR Configurator
NC Configurator2 CNC parameter setting support tool (FCSB1221)
NC Configurator CNC parameter setting support tool
Parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for FX3U-

FX Configurator-FP 20SSC-H (SW□D5CFXSSCE)
FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)
RT ToolBox2 Robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)
MX Component Version□(SW□D5C-ACT-E, SW□D5C-ACT-EA)

MX Component
MX Sheet Version□(SW□D5C-SHEET-E, SW□D5C-SHEET-EA)

MX Sheet
CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool CPU module logging configuration tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)
A - 23
■6. License key (for GT SoftGOT2000)
License key GT27-SGTKEY-U
■7. Others
IAI IAI Corporation
AZBIL Azbil Corporation
OMRON OMRON Corporation
KEYENCE KEYENCE CORPORATION
KOYO EI KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
JTEKT JTEKT Corporation
SHARP Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation
SHINKO Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.
CHINO CHINO CORPORATION
TOSHIBA TOSHIBA CORPORATION
TOSHIBA MACHINE TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.
PANASONIC Panasonic Corporation
PANASONIC IDS Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
HITACHI IES Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
HITACHI Hitachi, Ltd.
FUJI FUJI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
YASKAWA YASKAWA Electric Corporation
YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Electric Corporation
RKC RKC INSTRUMENT INC.
ALLEN-BRADLEY Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.
GE GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc.
HMS HMS Industrial Networks
LS IS LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
MITSUBISHI INDIA Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd.
ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.
SCHNEIDER Schneider Electric SA
SICK SICK AG
SIEMENS Siemens AG
PLC Programmable controller manufactured by each corporation
Control equipment Control equipment manufactured by each corporation
Temperature controller Temperature controller manufactured by each corporation
Indicating controller Indicating controller manufactured by each corporation
Controller Controller manufactured by each corporation
A - 24
1. FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITER 1
FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITOR
1.1 Each function and related manuals
Functions Related manuals
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)

System launcher
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help

Device monitor

Sequence program monitor (Ladder, R ladder, or SFC)

Network monitor

Q Motion monitor

Intelligent unit monitor

Servo amplifier monitor

Backup/restoration

LOG Viewer

FX Ladder monitor

FX List editer

R Motion monitor

CNC monitor

CNC data I/O

CNC machining program edit

iQSS utility
Motion program editor

For these functions, contact your local sales office.
Motion program I/O
1. FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITER 1-1

1.1 Each function and related manuals
1.2 Required system application (Extended function) for
the function
Required system application (Extended function) for the function, refer to the following.
Function name Required system application (Extended function) name
System launcher System launcher
Device monitor Device monitor
Sequence program monitor (Ladder)
Sequence program moniotr (Ladder) GOT Platform Library
GOT Function Expansion Library
Sequence program monitor (R ladder)
Sequence program monitor (R ladder) GOT Platform Library
GOT Function Expansion Library (Added/MELSEC iQ-R)
Sequence program monitor (SFC)
Sequence program monitor (SFC) GOT Platform Library
GOT Function Expansion Library
Network monitor Network monitor
Q Motion monitor Q Motion monitor
Intelligent module monitor Intelligent module monitor
Servo amplifier monitor Servo amplifier monitor
backup/restore backup/restore
Log Viewer Log Viewer
FX Ladder Monitor FX Ladder Monitor
FX List Editer FX List Editer
R Motion monitor R motion monitor
CNC monitor CNC Monitor
CNC data I/O CNC Data I/O
CNC machining program edit CNC Manufacturing Program Editor
iQSS utility iQSS utility
Motion program editor Motion Program Editor
Motion Program Input/Output

Motion program I/O
GOT Platform Library
1.3 Displayable languages for each function

Languages available for each function are shown in the following table.
○:Displayed ×:Not displayed Eng.:Displayed in English
Chinese Chinese
Function Japanese English Korean
(Simplified) (Traditinal)
Utility function ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
System launcher ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Device monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
File name, Title, Comment, Note,

○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Sequence program monitor (Ladder Statement
or R ladder)
Over than the above ○ ○ × × ○*1
Sequence program monitor (SFC) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Network monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Q Motion monitor ○ ○ Eng. Eng. Eng.
Intelligent module montor ○ ○ Eng. Eng. Eng.
Servo amplifier monitor ○ ○ Eng. Eng. Eng.
Backup/restoration ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Log viewer ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1-2 1. FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITER

1.2 Required system application (Extended function) for the function
Function Japanese English
Chinese
(Simplified)
Chinese
(Traditinal)
Korean 1
FX ladder monitor ○ ○ × × ×
FX list editer ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
R Motion monitor ○ ○ Eng. Eng. Eng.
FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITOR
CNC monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
CNC data I/O ○ ○ ○ Eng. Eng.
CNC machining program edit ○ ○ ○ Eng. Eng.
iQSS utility*2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Motion program editor ○ ○ Eng. Eng. Eng.
Motion program input/output ○ ○ Eng. Eng. Eng.
*1 For further information, see the following:
4.4.1 Switching languages of sequence programs (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only)
*2 The language used to display profile data depends on the language version of the data.
1. FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITER 1-3

1-4 1. FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITER
2. SYSTEM LAUNCHER
2
2.1 Features
SYSTEM LAUNCHER
The system launcher enables the following functions for the devices connected to the GOT.
• Displaying the status of a module
• Starting the extended functions applicable to a module
• Replacing a module of a PLC while the PLC is on line (Online module change)
2.2 Specifications
➠ 2.2.1 System configuration
2.2.2 Precautions
2.2.1 System configuration

This section explains the system configuration of the system launcher.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit, cable, and connection type, refer to the
following.
➠ GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
■1. Target controller

Controller
QCPU (Q mode)*1
LCPU
Motion controller CPU (Q series)
CNC C70
Robot controller*2
*1 Includes the QnP(R)(H)

*2 Only CRnQ700 is supported.
2.1 Features 2-1

■2. Connection type
This function can be used in the following connection types.
○ : Available, ×: Unavailable
Function Connection type between the GOT and controller
Ethernet CC-Link IE CC-Link

Ethernet
connection MELSECNET/H Controller connection
Direct CPU Serial connection
Bus (using connection, connection,
Name Description *1
connection communication (using
connection Ethernet MELSECNET/ CC-Link IE
(Serial) connection Ethernet ID G4
port built in 10 connection Field
module)
the CPU) connection
Displaying
the status of
modules
Starting
System
extended ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
launcher
functions
Online
module
change
*1 The LCPU does not support the connection type.
■3. Required system application (extended function)

For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
➠ 1.2 Required system application (Extended function) for the function
(1) System application (extended function)
Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the system launcher to the GOT.
To use an extended function compatible with the system launcher, write the package data that contains the
corresponding system application (extended function) to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
➠ GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
(2) System application (extended function) size
To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
■4. Extended function compatible with the system launcher

The following table shows the extended functions that can be started from the system launcher.
Extended function
Device monitor
Sequence program monitor (Ladder)
Sequence program monitor (SFC)
Network monitor
Q motion monitor
Intelligent module monitor
Backup/restoration*1
Motion SFC monitor
CNC monitor
CNC data I/O
CNC machining program edit
iQSS utility
*1 The CPU number setting is not transferred. Only the channel of the connected controller is in its selected state.
2-2 2.2 Specifications

■5. Online module change
To enable the online module change, configure the setting in [System Launcher] of [Ext. func. set] in the utility.
Set [Online module change] to [Effective].
➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) 2
2.2.2 Precautions
■1. Display of the system configuration diagram
SYSTEM LAUNCHER
The system configuration diagram has two types: the system configuration diagram for the system launcher and the
one for the extended function.
When you select a module supported by the system launcher, the system configuration diagram for the system
launcher appears.
When you select a module unsupported by the system launcher, the system configuration diagram for the extended
function used appears if it is available.
For the screen transition of the system configuration diagram for the extended function, refer to the extended function
used.
When the system application (extended function) for the system launcher is not installed on the GOT, even though you
select a module supported by the system launcher, the system configuration diagram for the extended function used
appears.
■2. Precautions for online module change

When you replace a module of a PLC while the PLC is on line, the target module stops its operation.
Check that the operations of the PLC are not affected, and then replace the module.
The following shows the applicable modules.
• QCPU(Q mode)
Input module, Output module, Input/Output module, Analog input module, Analog output module, Temperature input
module, Temperature control module, Loop control module, Pulse input module
For the details of the online module change, refer to the following.
➠ Manual of the CPU or module used
2.3 Operations for Display

This section explains how to display the system launcher screen after the GOT is turned on.
Step 1. Turn on the GOT.
Step 2. Display the system configuration screen by one of the following methods.
• Starting from the special function switch (System launcher) set in the project
For how to set special function switches, refer to the following.
• Starting from the utility
In the utility, touch [Monitor] → [System launcher] from the main menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
2.3 Operations for Display 2-3

Step 3. The [Select channel] window appears only at the first startup of the system launcher.
Set the channel number of the PLC connected to the GOT.
When the channel number is not set, touching the [×] key closes the [Select channel] window and sets the
channel number to [1].
Select channel key
[Select channel] window
Step 4. The system configuration screen appears.

To change the connection destination, touch the select channel key on the system configuration screen.
➠ 2.4 Operating Procedure
2-4 2.3 Operations for Display

■1. Screen transition
At the second and
subsequent startups, Start
or at a startup when
a connection destination
2
is specified on [×] key or [End] key
the user-created
Utility Main Menu
monitor screen
or
SYSTEM LAUNCHER
user-created monitor screen
At the first startup (when no connection

[Select channel]
destination is specified on the user-created
window
monitor screen)
Select a connection destination.
Select channel
key Select
the system configuration diagram.
[×] key
[Legend] key
[×] key
[Cancel] key
or return key [×] key Select a module.
Select [Online Select System application

module change]. an extended function. (extended function)
Extended function selection screen
2.3 Operations for Display 2-5

2.4 Operating Procedure
This section explains screen operations for the system launcher.
The display screen of the system launcher differs depending on the GOT used.
➠ 2.4.1 System configuration screen
2.4.2 Online module change screen
2.4.1 System configuration screen

This section explains the structure of the screen and the common operations when the system launcher is executed.
■1. Display contents and key functions

The following explains the structure of the system configuration screen and the function of the keys displayed on the
screen after the system launcher is started.
(1) Displayed contents
2) 2)
1) 2)
2) 4)
3)
1) Module status display

Displays the information about [CPU No.], [Model], [Points], and [Start I/O] of the modules.
2) Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the system configuration screen
3) Message display
If communication with the connected PLC cannot be established, [Communication error] appears.
4) [Total num of bases]

The number of base units displayed in the system configuration diagram.
When the monitoring target is the LCPU, [Total num of blocks] is displayed.
2-6 2.4 Operating Procedure

(2) Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the system configuration screen.
1) 2) 3)
2
SYSTEM LAUNCHER
Function list
4)
5)
1) Module status display

Touch the display position of a target module to list the applicable functions.
2) Select channel key

Displays the [Select channel] window.
3) [×] key
Exits the system configuration screen and returns the screen to a screen from which the system launcher was
started.
4) Scroll key
Scrolls the display up or down one stage to display the system configuration of the undisplayed stage
immediately before/after the currently displayed stage.
5) [Legend] key
Displays the [case] window.
[×] key
 [×] key
Exits the [case] window and returns the screen to the system
configuration screen.
 Legend display area
Lists the descriptions of the icons appearing on the system
configuration diagram.
Legend display area
2.4 Operating Procedure 2-7

2.4.2 Online module change screen
This section explains the structure of the screen and the common operations when the online module change is executed.
The following shows the procedure of the online module change.
Step 1. Check the following items, and then touch the [Execute] key.
• The message [Exchange module selection completed] is displayed in [Status].
• The lamp of [Execute module change] is on in [Operation].
• The Y signal of the target module is off.
Step 2. The confirmation dialog for the module change appears.

Touch the [OK] key, and then check the following items.
• The message [Module replaceable] is displayed in [Status].
• The lamp of [Check installation] is on in [Operation].
To cancel the operation and return the screen to the system configuration screen, touch the return key or
[Cancel] key and then touch the [OK] button in a dialog appearing immediately after the cancellation.
Step 3. Replace the target module, and then touch the [Execute] key.
Step 4. When the module is correctly mounted, the following appears.

• The message [Module change completed] is displayed in [Status].
• The lamp of [Restart module control] is on in [Operation].
To cancel the operation and return the screen to the system configuration screen, touch the return key or
[Cancel] key and then touch the [OK] button in a dialog appearing immediately after the cancellation.
Step 5. Touch the [Execute] key. When the module control is properly restarted, the screen returns to the system
configuration screen.

The following explains the structure of the [Online module change] screen and the function of the keys displayed on the
screen.
6)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6) 6)
1) [Module name]
Displays the module name.
2) [Start I/O]
Displays the module start I/O.
3) [Status]
Displays the status of [Operation].
4) [Operation]
Displays the items executed in the actual operation.
The lamp of the item to be executed is on.
2-8 2.4 Operating Procedure

5) [Status/guidance]
Displays the procedure or precautions for [Operation].
6) Touch key
The keys used for [Operation] on the [Online module change] screen 2
(2) Key functions
1)
SYSTEM LAUNCHER
2) 1)
1) Return key, [Cancel] key

Exits the [Online module change] screen and returns the screen to the system configuration screen.
Cancels the operation during the module change and returns the screen to the system configuration screen.
2) [Execute] key
Executes the item whose lamp is on in [Operation].
2.4 Operating Procedure 2-9

2 - 10 2.4 Operating Procedure
3. DEVICE MONITOR
For using the device monitor function on GT21, refer to the following.
3.1 Features
DEVICE MONITOR
The device monitor function monitors and changes the devices of a PLC CPU or an intelligent module.
Using this function, you can troubleshoot the system and streamline maintenance.
■1. Monitoring devices on four dedicated screens

The device monitor function comprises four monitors: entry monitor, batch monitor, T/C monitor, and BM monitor. You
can monitor any device according to the application.
(1) Entry monitor
Monitors the devices registered by the user.
➠ 3.4 Entry Monitor
(2) Batch monitor

Monitors the devices starting from the one specified by the user in a batch.
➠ 3.5 Batch Monitor
3. DEVICE MONITOR 3-1

3.1 Features
(3) TC (timer, counter) monitor
Monitors the current values, set values, contacts, and coils of timers, retentive timers, and counters of the PLC
CPU in a batch.
➠ 3.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters)
(4) BM (buffer memory) monitor

Monitors the buffer memories of the intelligent module in a batch.
➠ 3.7 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory)
■2. Switching between the full mode and quad mode

The full mode and the quad mode can be switched using the screen switching button as needed.
The GOT in the full mode displays one monitor screen to display many devices at once.
The GOT in the quad mode divides one screen into four windows to display four monitor screens.
➠ 3.3.3 Display format of the monitor screen ([One large screen], [4 screens])
The full mode

and the quad
mode can be
switched.
3-2 3. DEVICE MONITOR

3.1 Features
■3. Changing device values using the test operation
The following values can be changed by the test operation.
• Current values of word devices and bit devices
• Current values and set values of timers, counters, and retentive timers
• Current values of buffer memories
➠ 3.3.8 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
■4. Switching the display format and displaying device comments 3

The display format of device values can be switched among binary, decimal, and hexadecimal formats.
Device comments can be displayed on the entry monitor, batch monitor, and TC monitor.
➠ 3.3.9 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])
DEVICE MONITOR
■5. Monitoring other stations
You can monitor other stations in the data link system, network system, and CC-Link system containing the GOT (or
GOT-connected station).
For the details of the connection types that can be monitored, refer to the following.
■6. Switching the display languages and supporting multiple languages

Monitor screens are displayed with the language set in the function setting of the utility.

3.1 Features
3.2 Specifications
3.2.2 Devices that can be monitored
3.2.3 Access range
3.2.4 Precautions
This section describes the names of controllers and connection types that can be monitored using the device monitor
function.
For the details of the communication units cables used for each connection type, refer to the following.

Controller
QCPU (Q mode)
C Controller module
QSCPU*1
LCPU
QnACPU*2
FXCPU*3
Motion controller CPU (Q series)*3
MELDAS C6/C64
Robot controller (CRnQ-700, CRnD-700)
MELDAS C70
The GOT cannot write data to devices in the QSCPU. (The test operation is not available.)
If the number in the DATE column on the rating plate is earlier than 9707B, set values of timers, counters, and retentive timers cannot
be monitored.
Buffer memories of the following CPUs cannot be monitored.
• FX1, FX2
• Q172CPU, Q173CPU

3.2 Specifications
The device monitor function can be used for the following connection types.
○ : Available, ×: Not available
CC-Link
Serial CC-Link IE Field
Direct CPU Ethernet CC-Link IE Controller connection
Function Controller communication Network
connection connection Network connection
connection connection ID*1 G4*2
Basic model
3
○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○
QCPU
High Performance
○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○
model QCPU
Process CPU ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○
QCPU (Q mode) Redundant CPU
DEVICE MONITOR
○ × ○ ○ × ○ ○
(main base)
Redundant CPU
× ○ ○ × × ○ ○
(extension base)
Universal model
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
QCPU
Device monitor C Controller module ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
QSCPU × × ○ ○ × × ×
LCPU ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
QnACPU ○ ○ ○ × × ○ ×
Motion controller (Q series) ○ ○ ○ ○*3 ○*4 ○ ○
CNC C70 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
MELDAS C6/C64 ○ × ○ × × ○ ×
CRnQ-700 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Robot controller
CRnD-700 × × ○ × × × ×
FXCPU ○ × ○*5 × × × ×
The GOT is connected as an intelligent device station.

The GOT is connected to the CC-Link system via AJ65BT-G4-S3 or AJ65BT-R2N.
Not available for the following models.
• Q172CPU, Q173CPU
• Q172CPUN, Q173CPUN
• Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU
Only available for the following models.
• Q170MCPU(-S1)
• Q170MSCPU(-S1)
Only available for FX3U(C).

To use the device monitor function, install the following system application (Extended function)s to the GOT.
• Device monitor
• GOT Platform Library

3.2 Specifications
■4. Required hardware
To display device comments on the device monitor, the data storage such as a SD card or USB memory is required.
Storing comment files used for the sequence program monitor into the data storage enables displaying the device
comments on monitor screens.
Comment files in a GX Developer-format project also can be used for displaying device comments.
In this case, store the comment files into the data storage as shown below.
SEQCMNT
CHxx: "xx" indicates a channel No. (01 to 04)

NETxxx: "xxx" indicates a network No. (000 to 239)
STxxx: "xxx" indicates a station number.
(000 to 064, 255 (host station))
CPUxx: "xx" indicates a CPU No.
(00 to 04)
SJIS
Project folder of GX Developer ASCII
Resources
Others GB
Comment files Store each file into
the folder whose name
and the character code
Big5
xxxxxxxx.WCD of the file to be stored
correspond.
KS
xxxxxxxx.WCD

3.2 Specifications
3.2.2 Devices that can be monitored
Devices that can be monitored differ depending on the monitor type and the controller used.
➠ ■1. Entry Monitor
■2. Batch monitor
■3. TC monitor
■4. BM monitor
■5. Test operation 3
■1. Entry Monitor
The following lists the devices that can be monitored on the entry monitor.
(1) Bit device
DEVICE MONITOR
C CNC C70, Robot controller
QCPU (Q QnAC Motion controller
Device Controlle LCPU QSCPU MELDAS C6/ FXCPU
mode) PU (Q series)
r module C64 CRnQ-700 CRnD-700
Input (X) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Output (Y) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Internal relay (M) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ○
Latch relay (L) ○ × ○ ○ × ○ ○ × × ×
Annunciator (F) ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ×
Link relay (B) ○ ○*1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ×
Special relay (SM) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ×
Special relay for link (SB) ○ × ○ ○ ○ × × × × ×
GOT bit register (GB) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Only Q24DHCCPU-V can be monitored.
(2) Word device

mode) PU (Q series)
Data register (D) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Special data register (SD) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ×
Link register (W) ○ ○*1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ×
Timer (current value) (TN) ○ × ○ ○ ○ × ○ × × ○
Counter (current value) (CN) ○ × ○ ○ ○ × ○ × × ○
Retentive timer (current

○ × ○ ○ ○ × × × × ×
value) (SN)
Link special register (SW) ○ × ○ ○ ○ × ○ × × ×
File register (R) ○ × ○ ○ × × ○ × × ×
Extension file register (ZR) ○ × ○ ○ × × × × × ×
Index register (Z) ○ × ○ ○ × × ○ × × ×
Link register (for writing)

○*2 ○*2 ○*2 ○*2 × ○*2 ○*2 ○*2 × ×
(Ww)
Link register (for reading)

○*2 ○*2 ○*2 ○*2 × ○*2 ○*2 ○*2 × ×
(Wr)
Motion device (#) × × × × × ○ × × × ×
GOT data register (GD) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GOT special register (GB) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Multiple CPU high speed

transmission memory (U3E1 × ○ × × × × × ○ × ×
to U3E3)

Can be monitored only when the host station is monitored with the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).

3.2 Specifications
■2. Batch monitor
The following lists the devices that can be monitored on the batch monitor.
(1) Bit device
mode) PU (Q series)
Input (X) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Output (Y) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Internal relay (M) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ○
Latch relay (L) ○ × ○ ○ × ○ ○ × × ×
Annunciator (F) ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ×
Link relay (B) ○ ○*1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ×
Special relay (SM) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ×
Special relay for link (SB) ○ × ○ ○ ○ × × × × ×
(2) Word device

mode) PU (Q series)
Data register (D) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Special data register (SD) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ×
Link register (W) ○ ○*1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ×

○ × ○ ○ ○ × × × × ×
value) (SN)
Link special register (SW) ○ × ○ ○ ○ × ○ × × ×
File register (R) ○ × ○ ○ × × ○ × × ×
Index register (Z) ○ × ○ ○ × × ○ × × ×
Link register (for writing)

○*2 ○*2 ○*2 ○*2 × ○*2 ○*2 ○*2 × ×
(Ww)

○*2 ○*2 ○*2 ○*2 × ○*2 ○*2 ○*2 × ×
(Wr)
Motion device (#) × × × × × ○ × × × ×
GOT data register (GD) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GOT special register (GB) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

transmission memory (U3E1 × ○ × × × × × ○ × ×
to U3E3)


3.2 Specifications
■3. TC monitor
The following lists the devices that can be monitored on the TC monitor.
(1) Bit device
mode) PU (Q series)
Timer (contact) (TT) ○ × ○ ○ ○ × × × × ○ 3

Timer (coil) (TC) ○ × ○ ○ ○ × × × × ○
Counter (contact) (CT) ○ × ○ ○ ○ × × × × ○
Counter (coil) (CT) ○ × ○ ○ ○ × × × × ○
DEVICE MONITOR
Retentive timer (contact)
○ × ○ ○ ○ × × × × ×
(SS)
Retentive timer (coil) (SC) ○ × ○ ○ ○ × × × × ×
(2) Word device

mode) PU (Q series) CRnQ-700 CRnD-700
r module C64
Timer (set value) ○ × ○ ○ ○ × ○ × × ○
Counter (set value) ○ × ○ ○ ○ × ○ × × ○

○ × ○ ○ ○ × × × × ×
value) (SN)
Timer (set value) ○ × ○ ○ ○ × × × × ×

3.2 Specifications
■4. BM monitor
The following lists the devices that can be monitored on the BM monitor.
(1) Word device
mode) PU (Q series)
Buffer memory (intelligent

○ ○ ○ ○ × × × × × ×
function module) (BM)
■5. Test operation

The following lists the devices for which the test operation can be performed.
(1) Bit device
mode) PU (Q series)
Input (X) ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Output (Y) ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Internal relay (M) ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ × × ○
Latch relay (L) ○ × ○ ○ × ○ ○ × × ×
Annunciator (F) ○ × ○ ○ × ○ ○ × × ×
Link relay (B) ○ ○*1 ○ ○ × ○ ○ × × ×
Special relay (SM) ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○ ×
Special relay for link (SB) ○ × ○ ○ × × ○ × × ×
Available for only Q24DHCCPU-V.
(2) Word device

mode) PU (Q series)
Data register (D) ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Special data register (SD) ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ×
Link register (W) ○ ○*1 ○ ○ × ○ ○ × × ×
Timer (current value) (TN) ○ × ○ ○ × × ○ × × ○
Timer (set value) ○ × ○ ○ × × × × × ×
Counter (current value) (CN) ○ × ○ ○ × × ○ × × ○
Counter (set value) ○ × ○ ○ × × × × × ×

○ × ○ ○ × × × × × ×
value) (SN)
Timer (set value) ○ × ○ ○ × × × × × ×
Link special register (SW) ○ × ○ ○ × × ○ × × ×
File register (R) ○ × ○ ○ × × ○ × × ×
Index register (Z) ○ × ○ ○ × × ○ × × ×
Buffer memory (intelligent

○ × ○ ○ × × × × × ×
function module) (BM)

○*1 × ○*2 ○*2 × ○*2 ○*2 × × ×
(Wr)
Motion device (#) × × × × × ○ × × × ×
GOT data register (GD) ○ × ○ ○ × ○ ○ × × ○
GOT special register (GB) ○ × ○ ○ × ○ ○ × × ○
Available for only Q24DHCCPU-V.

3 - 10 3. DEVICE MONITOR
3.2 Specifications
3.2.3 Access range
When the GOT is connected to the remote I/O station in the MELSECNET/H network system, only the master station can
be monitored.
The access range other than the above is the same as the one for when the GOT is connected with a controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
3.2.4 Precautions
3
■1. Monitoring word devices by 32 bits
When word devices are monitored by 32 bits (two words), those with 32 bits of data remaining are monitored.
Devices with 16 bits (one-word) of data remaining are not monitored.
If an odd number is specified for the first monitor device number, the last device number of the specified controller will
DEVICE MONITOR
not be displayed.
D11129 D11130 D11131 D11132 D11133 D11134 D11135 (Device name)
Unit of the monitor display Nothing is displayed.
■2. Changing the set values of timers and counters of the QnACPU and displaying device
comments
For only QnACPUs whose number in the DATE column on the rating plate is [9707B] or later, the set values of timers
(T) and counters (C) can be changed and device comments can be displayed.
PROGRAMMBLE CONTROLLER
DATE 9707 B
Function version
Manufacture year and month
■3. Monitoring local devices using multiple software

When monitoring local devices, do not monitor the devices of the same PLC CPU simultaneously using multiple
software (including GT Designer3 and GX Works2). Otherwise the local devices cannot be monitored properly.
3. DEVICE MONITOR 3 - 11
3.2 Specifications
3.3 Operations Common for Each Monitor Screen
This section describes the operations that are common for each monitor screen.
➠ 3.3.1 Displaying the monitor screen
3.3.2 Names of each section of monitor screen
3.3.3 Display format of the monitor screen ([One large screen], [4 screens])
3.3.5 Entering devices ([Register])
3.3.6 Deleting a device ([Delete])
3.3.7 Deleting devices at a time ([Delete all])
3.3.8 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
3.3.9 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])
3.3.10 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor])
3.3.11 File switching for comment display ([Change comment])
3.3.12 Screen transition (common operation)
3.3.1 Displaying the monitor screen
This section describes the flow until the device monitor screen is displayed after the device monitor (system application
(Extended function)) is installed in the GOT.
The display method of the device monitor screen differs between for the first time and later.
■1. Displaying the device monitor screen for the first time
Follow the procedure described below to display the device monitor screen.
1. Start the device monitor.

The following two methods are provided for starting the device monitor.
• Using the special function switch (device monitor) set for the project
Touch the special function switch (device monitor) placed on the monitor screen.
For the setting method of the special function switch, refer to the following.
If the project has not been written into the GOT yet, start the device monitor from the Utility.
• Starting the device monitor from the utility
Display the utility screen and select the [Monitor] tab and [Device monitor].
For the display method of the utility, refer to the following.
2. The communication setting window appears.

Select the connection destination and communication driver of the controller to be monitored.
➠ 3.3.4 ■2. Communication setting dialog
3. The [Device monitor] window appears.
DEVICE MONITOR
■2. Displaying the device monitor screen for the second time and later
Follow the procedure described below to display the device monitor screen.
1. Start the device monitor.

The following three methods are provided for starting the device monitor.
• Using the special function switch (device monitor) set for the project
Touch the special function switch (device monitor) placed on the monitor screen.
For the setting method of the special function switch, refer to the following.
If the project has not been written into the GOT yet, start the device monitor from the Utility.
• Starting the device monitor from the utility
Display the utility screen and select the [Monitor] tab and [Device Monitor].
For the display method of the utility, refer to the following.
• Touching [Device monitor] on the [MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen
When [MELSEC-L troubleshooting] is used, touch the [Device monitor] button.
➠ 11. MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
2. The [History] dialog appears.

Select the monitor history to be recovered and touch the [OK] key.
If you want to change the monitor target, touch the [Cancel] button.
The communication setting dialog appears.
Select the connection destination and communication driver of the controller to be monitored.
3. The [Device monitor] screen appears.
3.3.2 Names of each section of monitor screen
3)
4)
1)
2) 5)
3
6) 7)
DEVICE MONITOR
8)
9)
1) Monitor category display

Displays a monitor category of the monitor screen that is currently displayed.
2) Monitor category change key

Use this button to select a monitor category.
Select from [Selected], [Series], [TC monitor], and [BM monitor].
3) Screen switch key

Switches the screen display between the full screen display and the quad screen display.
4) [Exit] key
Exits the device monitor.
5) Monitor target display

Displays the channel No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the monitor target.
6) Monitor device display area

Displays the monitor device display area.
7) Scroll key
Scrolls the monitor device display up and down.
8) Message display
Displays error messages.
9) Sub menu key

Use this key to register a device, execute test operation, or switch the display format on each monitor screen.
Keys to be displayed vary depending on the monitor category.
3.3.3 Display format of the monitor screen ([One large screen], [4 screens])
In the device monitor, the screen display format can be switched between the full mode and the quad mode.
■1. How to switch the display format

To switch the display format from the full mode to the quad mode, touch the [4 screens] key.
[4 screens] button
To switch the display format from the quad mode to the full mode, touch the [One large screen] key.
[One large screen] button
3.3.4 Destination path setting ([Connect])
■1. Setting procedure for the destination path

1. Touch the [Connect] key on a device monitor screen.
DEVICE MONITOR
[Connect] key
2. The communication setting dialog appears.

Set the destination path with referring to the following.
■2. Communication setting dialog
Configure the communication setting with the monitor target when starting monitor in this dialog.
(1) Screen display
1) 2) 1) 2)
3) 4) 3) 4)
5) 6)
When the CH No. is input When the network No., station No.,
and CPU No. are input
1) CH No. input area

Set the CH No. for the target controller.
The setting range is [1] to [4].
2) Network No. input area

Set the network No. for the target controller.
The setting range differs depending on the connection type.
• Bus connection, direct CPU connection, serial communication connection: [0]
• Ethernet connection: [1] to [239]
• MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: [0] (host loop), [1] to [255] (specified loop)
• CC-Link IE Controller Network connection: [1] to [239]
• CC-Link IE Field Network: [1] to [239]
• CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: [0]
3) Station No. input area

Set the station No. of the target controller.
When the station No. is set to the host station (FF), set the network No. to 0.
The setting range differs depending on the connection type.
• Bus connection, direct CPU connection, serial communication connection: [FF] (host station)
• MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: [0] (control station), [1] to [64] (normal station)
• CC-Link IE Controller Network connection: [1] to [120]
• CC-Link IE Field Network connection: [0] (master station), [1] to [120] (local station)
• CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: [0] (master station), [1] to [64] (local station)
4) CPU No. input area

Set the CPU No. of the multiple CPUs.
This setting can be configured only the multiple CPUs are monitored.
5) CH No. selection key

Select the CH No. for connecting the monitor target.
6) Keys
Keys for operations in the communication setting window are displayed.
(2) Key functions
2) 2)
3)
3)
1) 3
4) 5) 6)
DEVICE MONITOR
Select the CH No. for connecting the monitor target.
2) [×] key
Closes the communication setting window.
When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is not set,
the communication setting window does not close.
3) Input area move key

Moves the cursor among the input areas.
4) [Enter] key
Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No. input area.
When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station No. are
completed, the communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.
5) [Del] key
Deletes an input value or character.
6) [AC] key
Deletes all the input values and characters.
3.3.5 Entering devices ([Register])
Enter devices to be monitored for all monitor categories.
■1. Entering procedure for the monitor device

The entry monitor is taken here as an example to describe the entry procedure for the monitor device.
1. Display the window for entering the device by either of following operations in each monitor.
• Touching the [Register] key
• Touching the monitor device display area
When using other than the entry monitor, the window for entering the device is displayed only when no
device is entered.
When using the entry monitor, the window for entering the device is displayed even when a device is
entered.
Monitor device
display area
[Register] button
2. The window for entering the device appears.

Set the destination with referring to the following.
➠ 3.3.5 ■2. Window for entering the device
3. When a password is not set for a sequence program, touch the [ENTER] key to enter the specified device.
When a password is set for the sequence program, the dialog for canceling the password appears when the
[ENTER] is touched.
Inputting the correct password enters the specified device.
4. When using the entry monitor, the window for entering the device is displayed successively.
After entering the device, close the dialog with the [×] key.
Entry device
[x] key
3
DEVICE MONITOR
■2. Window for entering the device
The display contents of the window for entering the device differ depending on the monitor category.
Entry monitor, batch monitor, and TC monitor BM monitor

4) 4)
1) 2)
6)
3) 3)
5)
9) 8) 7) 7) 8) 9)
1) Device display area

Set a device to be entered when using the entry monitor, batch monitor, and TC monitor.
2) Memory address display area

Set the memory address to be entered when using the BM monitor.
3) Input keys for device and memory address

Use these keys to input a device or a memory address.
4) [×] key
Closes the window for entering the device.
5) Character type switch key

Switches the character type of the key.
• [a-z] key: Switches the character type to alphabetic characters (lowercase).
• [A-Z] key: Switches the character type to alphabetic characters (uppercase).
• [Sign] key: Switches the character type to symbol.

Use this key only when using the BM monitor.
7) [Enter] key
Enters the device input in the device display area or the memory address area.
8) [Del] key
9) [AC] key
3.3.6 Deleting a device ([Delete])
Delete a device entered in the entry monitor.
■1. How to delete a device

1. Touch a device to be deleted in the entry monitor.
2. Touch the [Delete] key.
1. Touch a device
to be deleted.
2. Touch the
[Delete] key.
3. The confirmation dialog appears.

Touch the [OK] key to delete the selected device.
3.3.7 Deleting devices at a time ([Delete all])
Delete all the registered devices entered in the entry monitor at a time.
■1. How to delete devices at a time

1. Touch the [Delete all] key in the entry monitor.
DEVICE MONITOR
Touch the
[Delete all] key.

Touch the [OK] key to delete all the selected devices.
Test devices.
WARNING
Before performing the quick test operations of the system monitor function (such as turning ON or OFF bit device,
changing the word device current value, changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter, and changing the buffer memory
current value), read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method.
During quick test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system.
False output or malfunction can cause an accident.
■1. Operating procedure of the test

This subsection takes a test operation of the D100 device as an example to describe the test operation procedure.
1. Touch the [Test] key in each monitor.
[Test] key

Touch the [Yes] key to switch the mode to the test mode.
3. When switching the device value display format, touch the corresponding device value display format.
Display format of
the device value
4. Touch a device targeted to the test operation.
3
The device
to be tested
DEVICE MONITOR
5. A dialog for setting the device value according to the device display format appears.
Set the device value with referring to the following.
After setting the device value, touch the [ENTER] key.
➠ 3.3.8 ■3. Dialogs for setting the device value
6. The set value is reflected in the device.
■2. Ending the test mode
To end the test mode, touch the [Test] key.
[Test] key
■3. Dialogs for setting the device value

The display contents of the dialogs for setting the device value differ depending on the device display format.
For decimal number For binary or hexadecimal number For real number
3) 3) 3)
1) 1) 1)
4) 4) 5)
2) 2) 2)
6) 7) 8) 9) 7) 8) 9) 6) 7) 8) 9)
1) Device value display area

Set the device value to be input.
2) Device value input key

Use this key to input the device value.
3) [×] key
Closes the window for entering the device.
4) [DEX/HEX] key
Switches the key type between the decimal and hexadecimal.
5) [FIX/EXP] key
Switches the display format of the device value display area between the exponential representation (EXP) and
the floating point representation (FIX).
6) [+/-] key
Switches positive and negative of the input value.
7) [Enter] key
Determines the device input area input in the device value display area.
8) [Del] key
9) [AC] key
■4. Display format dialog
3)
1)
3
2)
4)
DEVICE MONITOR
1) [Data size]
Represents the data formats of the device.
The following shows the selectable items.
• [16bit(W)]
• [32bit(D)]
• [64bit(L)]
2) [Data type]
Represents the displayable display formats for the device value.
The following shows the selectable items.
• [Signed decimal(K±)]
• [Unsigned decimal(K+)]
• [Hexadecimal(HEX)]
• [Binary(BIN)]
• [Floating(EXP)]
• [Fixed(FIX)]
3) [Cancel] key
Closes the display format dialog without reflecting the settings.
4) [OK] key
Closes the display format dialog after reflecting the settings.
3.3.9 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])
Switch the displayed number of device columns and display or non-display of the comments.
■1. Procedure for switching the display

The entry monitor is taken here as an example to describe the switch procedure for the display.
1. Touch the [Layout] key in the entry monitor.
[Layout] key
2. The display item dialog appears.

Set the display format and touch the [OK] key.
3)
1)
2)
4)
1) [Number of columns]
Represents the number of the columns of the devices.
2) [Display comments]
Switches whether to display or hide the device comments.
3) [Cancel] key
Closes the display item dialog without reflecting the settings.
4) [OK] key
Closes the display item dialog after reflecting the settings.
3. The display items are switched.
3.3.10 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor])
Monitor local devices.
POINT
Scan time while the GOT is using the local device monitor
When the GOT is using the local device monitor, the scan time for the PLC increases.
■1. Monitoring procedure of local devices

3
The entry monitor is taken here as an example to describe the switch procedure for the display.
1. Touch the [Local monitor] key in each monitor.
DEVICE MONITOR
[Local monitor] key
2. The program list dialog appears.

Select the target file for the local device monitor and touch the [Cancel] key.
2)
1)
3)
1) Program file list

Represents the program file list of the local device monitor target.
A file can be selected by touching the file name.
2) [Cancel] key
Closes the program list dialog without starting the local device monitor.
3) [OK] key
Starts the local device monitor of the selected program.
Touching the [OK] key starts the local device monitor.
Touching the [Cancel] key cancels the local device monitor.
■2. Ending the local device monitor

To end the local device monitor, touch the [Local monitor] key.
[Local monitor] key
3.3.11 File switching for comment display ([Change comment])
The comment file to be displayed can be switched.

This function cannot be used with the BM monitor.
■1. Comment files that can be displayed with the device monitor
With the device monitor, comment files used for the sequence program monitor (ladder) can be displayed.
The following lists the types of comment file that can be displayed.
• Common comment files 3
• Comment files for the target programs for monitoring
The comment files can be displayed only when the local device monitor or TC monitor is used.
• All the comment files stored in a data storage installed on the GOT
The comment files can be displayed only when the local device monitor or TC monitor is unused.
DEVICE MONITOR
• Comment files specified with the parameters of PLCs
The comment files specified for [Comment File Used in a Command] of the PC parameter with GX Works2 or GX
Developer are displayed.
■2. Procedure for switching

The entry monitor is taken here as an example to describe the procedure for switching comment files.
1. Touch the [Comment] key.
[Change comment] key
2. The comment file list dialog appears.

Select the comment file to display and touch the [Change] key.
2)
1)
3)
1) [Comment list]
Lists the comment files displayed with the device monitor.
2) [Cancel] key
Closes the comment file list dialog.
3) [OK] key
Closes the comment file list dialog and displays the selected comment file.
When four screens are displayed and a comment file is set for one of the four screens, the comment file is also
set for other screens connected to the same monitor target and no comment file is set for.
3. The comment file on display is switched.
3.3.12 Screen transition (common operation)
Starting the device monitor Starting the device monitor

from the utility from the special function switch Starting the device monitor
(system monitor) from the MELSEC-L troubleshooting
1. Display the utility.
1. Touch the special function 1. Touch the [Device monitor]
switch (system monitor) on the MELSEC-L
on the monitor screen. troubleshooting screen.
2. Touch the [Devie monitor]

in the [Monitor] tab.
First-time startup From the second-time startup
Set the communication In the monitor history

path in the communication list, select the past
[Cancel] monitor entry to use.
setting dialog.
[OK]
[ENTER]
The device monitor starts. (Example. Entry monitor)

Screens that started
[End] the device monitor
·Utility screen
·User-created screen
·MELSEC-L
troubleshooting screen
[4 screens]
[One large screen]
[Series]
Display format
[Change [Connect] [TC Monitor]

[Register] [Layout]
comment]
[Local
monitor] Program list *1
Display format [BM Monitor]
Display items
Device entry *1 Communication setting

Comment file list *1
Program list *1
When a password or keyword is set for the controller, the password entry dialog appears.
■1. Starting the function by using the special function switch (System launcher)
You can start the device monitor from a user-created screen by selecting the connection destination with a special
function switch (System launcher).
User-created screen
(special function switch The device monitor is started.
(system launcher)) System configuration screen (Example: Entry monitor)
Start the system launcher. Select the target function. 3

[×] key
DEVICE MONITOR
[End] key
POINT
When the system launcher does not support the connection destination
When the system launcher does not support the set connection destination, a dialog appears at the startup.
For the details of the system launcher function, refer to the following.
➠ 2. SYSTEM LAUNCHER
3.4 Entry Monitor
The entry monitor is a function that registers the devices to monitor beforehand and monitors only the registered devices.
■1. Screen display and the key function

3)
4)
1)
2) 5)
6)
7)
8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15)


Select from [Series], [TC monitor], and [BM monitor].
3) Screen switching key ([4 screens], [One large screen])

4) [Exit] key


Device number Device value

Device name
Device comment
Bit device
Device value Device value

Device name Display format
Device comment
Word device
 Device name
Displays the device name of the monitor device.
 Device number
Displays the device number of the monitor device.
 Device comment
Displays the device comment set for the monitor device.
3.4 Entry Monitor
 Device value
Displays the device value of the monitor device.
If a bit device is the target, the status is indicated as shown below.
• ●: Bit ON
• ○: Bit OFF
 Display format
Represents the display format of the device value.
The character on the left represents the data range of the device.
• [W]: Word (16 bits)
• [D]: Double-word (32 bits)
3
• [L]: Longword (64 bits)
The character string on the right represents the display format of the device value.
• [K±]: Signed decimal
DEVICE MONITOR
• [K+]: Signed decimal
• [HEX]: Signed decimal
• [BIN]: Signed decimal
• [EXP]: Exponential notation (floating point type real)
• [FIT]: Decimal representation (fixed-point arithmetic)
The display format can be changed when touched.
7) Message display
8) [Register] key
Registers devices.
Displays the device entry window when touched.
9) [Delete] key
Deletes a selected registered device.
➠ 3.3.6 Deleting a device ([Delete])
10) [Delete all] key
Deletes all the registered devices.
➠ 3.3.7 Deleting devices at a time ([Delete all])
11) [Test] key
Carries out a test operation.
12) [Layout] key
Changes the display of items.
The display of the following items can be changed.
• Number of the columns of the devices to be displayed
• Comments (can be switched between displaying and hiding)
13) [Change comment] key
Touch the key to display the comment file list dialog.
➠ 3.3.11 File switching for comment display ([Change comment])
14) [Local monitor] key
Starts or ends the local device monitor.
➠ 3.3.10 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor])
15) [Connect] key
Switches the monitor target for the device monitor.
Touch the key to display the communication setting dialog.
3.4 Entry Monitor
3.5 Batch Monitor
The device monitor is a function that specifies the start device in a range of devices and monitors the start and the
following successive devices in a batch.

3)
4)
1)
2) 5)
6)
7)
8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13)


Select from [Selected], [TC monitor], and [BM monitor].

4) [Exit] key



Device name
Device comment
Bit device

Device comment
Word device
 [Previous Device]
Displays the devices preceding those on display. (Displays another part of the range.)
 [Next Device]
Displays the devices following those on display. (Displays another part of the range.)
3.5 Batch Monitor
 Device name
If a bit device is the target, the status is indicated as shown below.
• ●: Bit ON
• ○: Bit OFF
 Device number
 Device comment
Displays the device comment set for the monitor device. 3
 Device value
 Display format
DEVICE MONITOR
• [L]: Longword (64 bits)
7) Message display
8) [Register] key
Registers the start device of monitor targets.
9) [test] key
10) [Layout] key
13) [Connect] key
3.5 Batch Monitor
3.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters)
The TC monitor is a function that monitors only timers (T) and counters (C).
At the start of the TC monitor, the program list dialog appears.
Select the target program for monitoring and start monitoring.
2)
1)
3)
1) Program file list

Lists program files that can be the targets for the TC monitor.
2) [Cancel] key
Closes the program list dialog without starting the local device monitor.
3) [OK] key
Starts the local device monitor of the selected program.

3)
4)
1)
2) 5)
6)
7)
8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14)


Select from [Selected], [Series], and [BM monitor].
3) Screen switching key ([4 screen], [One large screen])

4) [Exit] key

Device value (current value)
Device value (set value)
Device number Display format
Device name
Device comment
Contact, coil display 3
 Device name
DEVICE MONITOR
 Device number
 Device comment
 Device value (current value)
Displays the current value of the monitor device.
 Device value (set value)
Displays the set value of the monitor device.
 Display format
 Contact, coil display
Indicates the status of the contact or coil.
· Contact
: Bit ON : Bit OFF
· Coil
: Bit ON : Bit OFF
7) Message display
8) [Register] key
Registers devices.
9) [Test] key
10) [Layout] key
13) [Connect] key
3.7 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory)
The BM monitor is a function that monitors the buffer memory of special function modules.

3)
4)
1) 3
2) 5)
DEVICE MONITOR
6)
7)
8) 9) 10) 11)


Select from [Selected], [Series], and [TC monitor].

4) [Exit] key



Device comment
Word device
 Device name
 Device number
 Device comment
 Device value
 Display format
• [L]: 64 bits
7) Message display
8) [Register] key
Registers devices.
9) [Test] key
10) [Layput] key
11) [Connect] key
3.8 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
The following table lists error messages displayed when the device monitor is carried out and describes the
corresponding corrective actions.
Error message Explanation Action
• Check the connection (a connector disconnection, a break in a cable)

between the PLC and GOT.
Failed to communicate with CPU.
Communication with the target PLC for monitoring
cannot be established.
• Check if the PLC has caused an error.
• Refer to the following to check if a network error has occurred. 3
➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor)
Because the data range was changed to one with

a larger number of bits, a device that has
A device has exceeded a specified device range. Change the data rage back in the previous number of bits.
exceeded the range is included in the targets for
DEVICE MONITOR
display.
The number of the target devices for the The number of the target devices for monitoring beyond its maximum cannot
The number of the target devices for monitoring
registration for monitoring is larger than its be registered.
has exceeded its maximum.
maximum. Delete unnecessary registered devices before registering.
Displaying device comments has failed. No device comment file exists. Create a device comment file.
The target program for local device monitoring Start the local device monitor again and select a program from the
Local device monitoring has failed.
does not exist or has been deleted. alternatives in the list.
The target device for writing a value does not exist

Failed to write the value to the device. Check the range of devices with the parameter of the PLC.
or the target device is outside the range.
A device outside the range is included in those on

A device that cannot be monitored exists. Change the display position of devices.
display.
During GOT startup, the parameter of the PLC

The device range has been changed. was changed then a device on display has fallen Restart the GOT.
outside the range.
The target program for writing a timer or counter Start the TC monitor again and select a program from the alternatives in the
Writing a TC set value has failed.
setting value does not exist or has been deleted. list.
The device that has been specified as a device

The device that has been specified as a security test authorization device for the system security • Check the range of devices with the parameter of the PLC.
condition is invalid. setting does not exist or is outside the device • Check the device test authorization device for the system security setting.
range.
• If drive A has been specified in the GOT setup

as the destination for saving data: The SD card
slot cover on the GOT is open. • Close the SD card slot cover and select the comment file again.
Reading a comment file has failed.
• No stored comment file exists on the SD card or • In the comment file list dialog, select an existing comment file.
USB memory that has been connected to the
GOT.
To the PLC, write a PC parameter and sequence program that are consistent
Obtaining the program name has failed. No program has been written to the PLC CPU.
with each other.
In using the TC monitor, there is no program being

No program is in execution. Start to scan a program.
scanned.
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR
(LADDER, R LADDER)
The sequence program monitor has two types: the sequence program monitor (Ladder) for QCPU and LCPU, and the
sequence program monitor (R ladder) for RCPU.
The sequence program monitor (R ladder) supports the RCPU ladder monitor only. 4
4.1 Features
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER) AND (R LADDER)

With the sequence program monitor (ladder), the GOT can monitor and edit a sequence program in the ladder diagram
format of a controller, and changing current device values of the program is available.
With the sequence program monitor (R ladder), the GOT can monitor a sequence program of a controller in the ladder
diagram format.
The following shows features of the sequence program monitor (Ladder) and the sequence program monitor (R ladder).
 Editing sequence programs by using the sequence program monitor (Ladder) on the
GOT
Sequence programs are editable in the ladder diagram format by using the sequence program monitor (Ladder).
X10 X10 SM401

Y22 Y22
Touch a position to input a contact. The contact (Always OFF) is input.
The following screens are displayed with the sequence program monitor (ladder).
• PLC read screen ( 4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen)
• Ladder monitor screen ( 4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen)
• Ladder editor screen ( 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen)
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER, R LADDER) 4-1

4.1 Features
 Switching display formats, device comment display, and languages by using the
sequence program monitor (Ladder)
The following are available.
• Switching whether to display or hide device comments
• Switching languages for file names of sequence programs, comments, and others
(1) Switching device comment display
Whether to display or hide device comments used in sequence programs can be switched.
(2) Switching languages
Preparing a comment file created in either of the following character codes enables character code switching of
the header and comment of a file following the language switching in the utility.
• SJIS
• GB
• Big5
• KS
• ASCII
For the sequence program monitor (Ladder), when comment files created in each character code are stored in a
data storage, you can switch the language to display a comment by switching comment files, regardless of the
language selected in the utility.
 Displaying registered ladder blocks is available

On the Ladder registration monitor window, displaying registered ladder blocks is available.
4.6.3 Display menu (1) Ladder registration monitor window
M12
21 Y43
Y44
M13
24 Y45
Ladder registration monitor window

Y46
M12
21 Y43
Y44
M110 M112
85 Y6F 90 Y72
M111
87 Y70
Y71
M112
90 Y72
4-2 4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER, R LADDER)

4.1 Features
 Enhanced interaction with objects (one-touch ladder jump function)
(1) Interaction with the special function switch
The automatic PLC read or the device automatic search can be executed at startup of the sequence program
monitor (Ladder) or sequence program monitor (R ladder) by the following method. Place a special function
switch on a user-created screen, specify the search file and search device in the special function switch setting,
and then touch the special function switch.
Even a person who is not the operator familiar with the equipment inside can trace the source of the equipment
error without fail by simple operations, reducing time to stop the error.
Example) Coil searching by touching a special function switch
(User-created screen) (Ladder monitor screen)
4
Operation flow screen Lifter lower
end Hand close
X13 M52 M54
Home position
M53 Lifter up

M53
Lifter down Lifter down
Hand open Lifter upper

Hand close end
Lifter up
The sequence program X10 M53 M55
Lifter up Lifter up monitor (ladder) starts M54 Forward
and searches for coil
M54
"M53" automatically.
Forward Back
"Forward operation M54" was not turned

Touch the special function button of error process
on since the lifter upper-end sensor (X10)
Special function switch setting was not turned on.
Ladder Search Device: M53
Ladder Search Mode: Coil
(2) Interaction with the alarm display (user) or simple alarm display
The sequence program monitor (Ladder) or the sequence program monitor (R ladder) can be started to search
for a device having an alarm by the following method. Select an alarm in the alarm display, and touch a key code
switch (Display ladder (Ladder Editor)).
(User-created screen) (Ladder monitor screen)
Occurred Comment M12

Y43
09/8/1 14:46:49 Temp. error
09/8/1 13:30:14 Fuse error Y44
X13
The sequence program Y45
Display Ladder monitor (ladder) starts
(Ladder Editor) and searches for the Y46
device of alarm
automatically.
The search result is displayed.

Select an alarm and touch the key code switch.
Key code switch setting
Code setting:
FFBD : Sequence program monitor (ladder)
FFBA : Sequence program monitor (R ladder)

4.1 Features
4.2 Specifications
This section explains the system configuration of the sequence program monitor (Ladder) and the sequence program
monitor (R ladder).
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
 Target controller
Controller
*1
RCPU
QCPU*2*3, motion controller (Q series)*4
LCPU
CNC (C70)
*1 Only the ladder monitor is supported.

*2 Excluding the Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU, Q04UDPVCPU, Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU,
Q26UDPVCPU, Q12PRHCPU, Q25PHCPU.
*3 For creating a multiple CPU system with the Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and/or Q25HCPU,
use CPUs with the function version B or later.
*4 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU can be monitored.
 Connection type
( : Available, : Unavailable)
Function Connection form between GOT and controller
CC-Link IE CC-Link
Direct MELSECNET/H
Bus Serial Ethernet controller connection
CPU connection*1,
Name Description connection communication connection connection*1*4,
connection MELSECNET/10
*1 connection *9 CC-Link IE field ID*7 G4*8
*2 connection*1*3
connection*5*6
Monitors and edits a

sequence sequence program in
program the ladder diagram
monitor format in a controller, or
(ladder) changes current device
values of the program.

*2 When the GOT is connected to LCPU, use L6ADP-R2.
*3 For the MELSECNET/10 connection, use a QCPU and network module (QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25,
QJ71LP21G, and QJ71BR11) with the function version B or later.
*4 Indicates the CC-Link IE controller network connection.
*5 Indicates CC-Link IE field network connection.
*6 Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU are not available.
*7 Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station).
*8 Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4).
*9 Ladder editor cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.

4.2 Specifications
 Required system application (Extended function)
The system application (Extended function)s shown below are required.
(1) System application (Extended function)
Write the package data that contains the system applications (extended functions) for the sequence program
monitor (Ladder) and the sequence program monitor (R ladder) to the GOT.
To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required. 4
 Required hardware

The following hardware is required.
Hardware
Data Storage (SD card, USB memory, and etc)

4.2 Specifications
4.2.2 Devices and range that can be monitored
The device range varies depending on the CPU to be used.
 When RCPU is connected

( : Possible, : Impossible)
Device monitor
Device*1 Device range Program display Search operation
display
Input X0 to 1FFF, DX0 to FFF
Output Y0 to 1FFF, DY0 to FFF
Internal relay M0 to 94773247
Latch relay L0 to 32767
Link relay B0 to 5A61FFF
Timer T0 to 5265151
Long timer LT0 to 1480831
Retentive timer ST0 to 5265151
Long retentive timer LS0 to 1480831
Counter C0 to 5265151
Long counter LC0 to 2787391
Data register D0 to 5923327
Link register W0 to 5A61FF
Annunciator F0 to 32767
Edge relay V0 to 32767
R0 to 32767
File register
ZR0 to 5832703
Link special relay SB0 to 5A61FFF
Link special register SW0 to 5A61FF
Step relay - - - -
Index register Z0 to 23
Long index register LZ0 to 11
Special relay SM0 to 4095
Special register SD0 to 4095
Function input FX0 to F
Function output FY0 to F
Function register FD0 to 4
Link direct device J \
U \
Module access device
U3En \
Nesting N0 to 14
Pointer P0 to 32767 *2
Interrupt pointer I0 to 1023 *2
SFC block device - - - -
SFC transition device - - - -
Network No. specification device J0 to 255
U0 to 1FF
I/O No. specification device
3E0 to 3
Macro instruction argument device - - - -
Module refresh device RD0 to 1048575
*1 For applicable devices and device ranges, refer to manual of the PLC CPU.
*2 Device cannot be replaced.

4.2 Specifications
 When QCPU or LCPU is connected
Device monitor
Device*1 Device range Program display Search operation
display
Internal relay*1 M0 to 8191 to 61439
Link relay*2 B0 to 1FFF to EFFF
Timer T0 to 32767
4
Counter C0 to 32767

Link register W0 to 1FFF
R0 to 32767
File register
ZR0 to 4849663
Extended data register*2 D0 to 4910079
Extended link register*2 W0 to 4AEBFF
Link special relay SB0 to 7FFF
Link special register SW0 to 7FFF
Index register Z0 to 19
Link direct device J \
J \
U3En \
Nesting N0 to 14
Pointer P0 to 8191 *3
Interrupt pointer I0 to 255 *3
SFC block device BL0 to 319
SFC transition device TR0 to 511, BL \TR
U0 to 1FF
3E0 to 3
Macro instruction argument device VD0 to
*1 The GOT can monitor local devices. For applicable devices and device ranges, refer to manual of the PLC CPU.
*2 The extended data register and extended link register are applicable to Universal model QCPU only.
*3 Device cannot be replaced.

4.2 Specifications
4.2.3 Access range
The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller.
4.2.4 Precautions
 Precautions for sequence program monitor (Ladder)

(1) Operation while the sequence program monitor (Ladder) is running
Do not perform the following operations with the GOT during sequence program monitor (Ladder) startup.
Doing so may cause the stored data to be deleted, or the sequence program monitor (Ladder) to run improperly.
• Opening the SD card cover (when an SD card is used)
• Installing/removing the data storage (SD card or USB memory)
(2) Backup
Before editing a sequence program with the sequence program monitor (Ladder), make sure to back up the
program with the backup/restoration function so that you can restore the original program.
(3) Precautions for the online program change
Precautions for the online program change are the same as the online program change with GX Works2/GX
Developer, except the followings.
For details of precautions on the online program change, refer to the followings.
GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual (Common)
GX Developer Version8 Operating Manual
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
The following items are the difference between GX Works2/GX Developer online program change.
• Online program change is not available for programs other than program memories.
• Online program change cannot be executed with the pointer at the top. Do not execute the online program
change simultaneously from multiple points.
• Online program change is not available by file unit.
• No option setting is available for preventing from executing the fall instruction.
• Online program change is not available when the reserved area is exceeded by the change. Execute Write to
PLC when the reserved area is exceeded.
• The setting whether to transfer or not to the program memory cannot be changed after the writing is
completed. When the online program change to the universal model QCPU is executed, all the program
cache memory information is transferred at once, after the online program change.
• If the setting of GOT days and time is February 29th when using the Q00JCPU, Q01CPU or Q00CPU, the
online program change cannot be executed. Change days and time of the GOT to something other than
February 29th and execute the online program change again.
(4) Precautions for creating the program
The sequence program monitor (ladder) is not available for the program which uses labels.
When using the sequence program monitor (ladder), create the program in the simple project which does not
use labels.
 Precautions for sequence program monitor (R Ladder)

(1) Operation while the sequence program monitor (R ladder) is running
Do not perform the following operations on the GOT while the sequence program monitor (R ladder) is running.
Doing so may cause the stored data to be deleted, or the sequence program monitor (R ladder) to run
improperly.
• Opening the SD card cover (when an SD card is used)
• Installing/removing the data storage (SD card or USB memory)
(2) Backup
Before editing a sequence program with the sequence program monitor (R ladder), make sure to back up the
program with the backup/restoration function so that you can restore the original program.

4.2 Specifications
(3) Files and programs that cannot be displayed on the ladder display
The ladder display does not support the following functions.
• File with a security key
• File with a block password
• Program of a project that includes FBs/FUNs
• Ladder block that includes structured text/inline structured text
(4) Display comment
The sequence program monitor (R ladder) does not display comments.
(5) Display label name
The sequence program monitor (R ladder) does not display label names.
4
(6) Ladder display different from GX Works3
The sequence program monitor (R ladder) may display some new instructions of the MELSEC iQ-R series
differently from GX Works3 or other software.

4.2 Specifications
4.3 Display Operation
This section explains how to display the operation screen for the sequence program monitor (Ladder) or the sequence
program monitor (R ladder) after the GOT is turned on.
1. Power on the GOT.
2. Display the sequence program monitor (Ladder) screen or the sequence program monitor (R ladder) screen.
The display methods include the following two types.
• Using the special function switch (Sequence program monitor (Ladder) or Sequence program monitor (R ladder))
set in the project
For how to set the special function switch, refer to the following.
To start the sequence program monitor (Ladder), touch [Monitor] → [Seq.program monitor(Ladder)] from the main
menu.
Touch [Monitor] → [Seq. program monitor] from the Main Menu.
To start the sequence program monitor (R ladder), touch [Monitor] → [Seq. program monitor (R Ladder)] from the
main menu.
3. Set the channel No., network No., station number, and CPU number in the communication setting dialog.
4.5.2 (1) Communication setting window
4. Read data from the PLC and display the program list window.
4.5.2 (2) Program list window
Reading data from the PLC is not required when the GOT is restarted, because sequence programs and comment
files are stored in a data storage with the sequence program monitor (Ladder).
Reading data from the PLC is not required when the GOT is restarted, because sequence programs are stored in a
data storage with the sequence program monitor (R ladder).
Reading data from the PLC is not required when the GOT is restarted, because sequence programs are stored in a
data storage with the sequence program monitor (R ladder).
5. Select a program to be displayed from the program list and display the ladder monitor screen.
4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen
6. Display the ladder editor screen from the edit menu of the ladder monitor screen.
4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
For information on how to start the sequence program monitor (Ladder) or the sequence program monitor (R ladder)
using the one-touch ladder jump function, refer to the following.
Start operation when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
For the changing screens for the security setting, refer to the following.
4.3.4 Setting the security
4 - 10 4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER, R LADDER)

 Start operation when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
By using a special function switch, alarm display (user), or others, you can start the sequence program monitor
(Ladder) or the sequence program monitor (R ladder) to automatically read sequence program files or search for a
device.
The following shows objects which can use the One-touch Ladder Jump function.
Object
Special function switch, alarm display (user), simple alarm display
POINT
4
Before executing the automatic PLC read
(1) Setting the automatic PLC read
When reading a sequence program file or a comment file from controllers, the automatic PLC read have to be

set on GT Designer3 (GOT2000) or in the utility.
For the setting of automatic PLC read, refer to the following.
(2) Specifying an automatic PLC read file
With the special function switch or alarm display (user), the target sequence program of automatic PLC read
can be specified.
However, the operation differs depending on the automatic PLC read setting on GT Designer3 (GOT2000) or
in the utility.
Automatic PLC read setting of File name specification in

Operation
GT Designer3/utility objects
Done The specified sequence program file is read automatically.

Done
None All sequence program files are read automatically.
No sequence program file is read.

To search automatically, if a sequence program file of the specified
Done
file name among the sequence program files read in the GOT
None exists, it is executed.

None To search automatically, if a sequence program file read in the GOT
exists, it is executed to all files.
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER, R LADDER) 4 - 11

(1) Starting from the special function switch
To start the sequence program monitor (Ladder), touch a special function switch that has the following settings:
[Sequence Program Monitor (Ladder)] is selected for [Switch Action], and [Use One-touch Ladder Jump] is
selected.
To start the sequence program monitor (R ladder), touch a special function switch that has the following settings:
[Sequence Program Monitor (R ladder)] is selected for [Switch Action], and [Use One-touch Ladder Jump] is
selected.
Operation at start differs depending on the setting contents of the special function switch.
For the setting items for the special function switch, refer to the following.
( : Set, : Not set)
Setting Operation for touching the special function

Search Method Specify Search File switch
(a)
Specify Search Device*1
(b)
(c)
Specify Connected Station*2
(d)
*1 When [Specify Search Device] is selected, set [Ladder Search Device] and [Ladder Search Mode].
The setting of PLC station number is included in the [Ladder Search Device] setting.
*2 When [Specify Connected Station] is selected, set [CH No.] and [Network].
If [Other] in [Network] is selected, also set [Net No.], [Station No.] and [CPU Machine].
(a) Operations for searching a device with specifying the file name
Start sequence program Automatic PLC read Automatic search for Ladder monitor screen
monitor (Ladder) or (The set sequence Ladder Search Device (The search result is
(R ladder) program file) (Coil/Factor) displayed.)
(b) Operations for searching a device without specifying the file name
monitor (Ladder) or (All sequence program Ladder Search Device (The search result is
(R ladder) files) (Coil/Factor) displayed.)
(c) Operations for searching a connected station with specifying the file name
Start sequence program Automatic PLC read

monitor (Ladder) or (The set sequence Ladder monitor screen
(R ladder) program file)
(d) Operations for setting a connected station without specifying the file name
Start sequence program

monitor (Ladder) or PLC read screen
(R ladder)
HINT
Operations for the special function switch when not using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
When the [Use One-touch Ladder Jump] is not selected, the operation for touching the special function switch is
the same as when starting from the utility.
4.3 Starting from the special function switch

(2) Starting from the alarm display (user)
The sequence program monitor (Ladder) or (R ladder) can be started and a device having an alarm can be
searched for by selecting an alarm in an alarm display (User) and touching a key code switch (to which a key
code for [Display Ladder (Ladder Editor)]) is set).
Operation at start differs depending on the setting contents of the user alarm observation.
For the setting items for user alarm observation, refer to the following.
( : Set, : Not set)
Ladder search setting*1

Operation for touching the key code switch
Ladder Search Mode Specify Search File
4
(a)
(b)
*1 The setting of PLC station number is included in the target device.

(a) Operations for setting the Ladder Search Mode and file name
monitor (Ladder) or (The set sequence Ladder Search Device (The search result is
(R ladder) program file) (Coil/Factor) displayed.)
(b) Operations for setting the Ladder Search Mode
(R ladder) files) (Coil/Factor) displayed.)
(3) Starting from the simple alarm display

By selecting an alarm in the simple alarm display and touching the key code switch (setting the key code of the
[Display ladder (Ladder Editor)]), the sequence program monitor (ladder) can be started and the device of alarm
can be coil-searched.
(R ladder) files) (Coil) displayed.)
For the simple alarm display, refer to the following.


 Changing screens
The following describes how to change the screen.
Start
Utility Main Menu

or

At the first startup Ladder registration Device test window
monitor window
Communication setting
window
Factor search window
Password input window
PLC read screen
Program list window
Jump window Device search window
Ladder monitor screen
*1
Comment file list window
*1
Ladder editor screen
(Continued to next page) *1 Only for the sequence program monitor (Ladder)

From previous page
*1
Replace device window Change open/close
cantact window *1
4
*1 *1
Verify result window Remote operation window

*1
Copy program memory Enter ladder program window
data into ROM window *1
*1 Only for the sequence program monitor (Ladder)
POINT
(1) Changing screens when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
For changing screens when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function, refer to the following.
4.3 Start operation when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
(2) Changing screens when setting the security
For changing screens when setting the security, refer to the following.

4.3.1 Setting ladder data storage location
 Setting ladder data storage location

Up to 512 files of ladder data (sequence programs and device comments) used for the sequence program monitor
(Ladder) or the sequence program monitor (R ladder) can be stored in a selected drive.
Only the A drive (standard SD card) or B drive (USB drive) is available for storing ladder data.
For the ladder data storage destination setting, refer to the following.
When setting with GOT utility
When setting with GT Designer3 (GOT2000)
4.3.2 Reading comment files from data storage (Supported by the sequence
program monitor (ladder) only)
The Sequence program monitor (Ladder or R ladder) uses comment files that are stored in the data storage (such as SD
card and USB memory) installed to the GOT.
 Procedure for using comment files stored in data storage

The following shows the procedure for using a comment file stored in a data storage.
(1) When displaying comments in language set for language switching of GOT utility
Store comment files in a data storage on the PLC read screen.
For how to store comment files in a data storage on the PLC read screen, refer to the following.
4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
(2) When displaying comments in any language regardless of language set for language switching of
GOT utility
1. Create a SEQCMNT folder in a data storage.

When the SEQCMNT folder already exists, creating a new SEQCMNT folder is not required.

2. In the SEQCMNT folder, create folders for CH No., network No., station No., and CPU number of the
monitored controller with a hierarchy as shown below.
Channel No.
Network No.
Station No.
CPU No.
Item Folder name

4
CH No. CH**
Network No. NET***

Station No. ST***
CPU No. CPU**
Assign numbers to "*" marks.

(When the CH No. is 1, the folder name is CH01. When the monitor target is the host station, the folder
name is ST255.)
3. In the CPU No. folder, create folders for storing comment files by character code.
CPU No.
For storing comments with ASCII code
For storing comments with Big5 code
For storing comments with GB code
For storing comments with KS code
For storing comments with SJIS code
Item Folder name
Folder for SJIS code SJIS
Folder for GB code GB
Folder for Big5 code Big5
Folder for KS code KS
Folder for ASCII code ASCII
4. Copy a comment file (.wcd) in the saved project.
When the GX Works2 project is used, the creation method of a comment file (.wcd) differs depending on
whether the project used can be or cannot be saved in the GX Developer format.
• Project that can be saved in the GX Developer format
A comment file (.wcd) is created when the project is saved in the GX Developer format.
• Project that cannot be saved in the GX Developer format
Export the project by using [Write IC Memory Card] of GX Works2, and change the extension of the
comment file from [.qcd] to [.wcd].

5. Store the copied comment files in the folders for each character code in the data storage.
Example: Storing comment files with ASCII code in the ASCII folder.
6. Install the data storage with the comment file on the GOT.
Switch comment files on the Ladder monitor screen for displaying the comments in appropriate language.
POINT
Restrictions on using comment files
If the comments of a comment file stored in the data storage are displayed, the comments that are assigned to the
bits of word devices cannot be displayed.

4.3.3 Program update check
The GOT checks if there is any difference between sequence program files read in the GOT and sequence programs
stored in controllers, while the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder Editor screen is displayed.
Only the sequence program monitor (Ladder) supports the program update check.
 Specification of the program update check

(1) Check criterion
The updated dates and times of sequence program files are compared.
(2) Check timing
The program update is checked when the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder editor screen are displayed.
After that, it is checked in a five minutes cycle while the Ladder monitor screen is displayed and in a two minutes
4
cycle while the Ladder Editor screen is displayed.
 Operations for the program update check

Display the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder
editor screen.
The updated dates and times of sequence

program files read in the GOT are set as
targets to be compared.
The updated dates and times of sequence · While the Ladder monitor screen is displayed
program files in controllers are acquired. : Wait for five minutes
· While the Ladder editor screen is displayed
: Wait for two minutes
Are the updated
dates and times of a target
to be compared the same as those of Yes
a sequence program file, acquired
from controllers?
No
The updated dates and times acquired from
If the updated dates and times of sequence controllers are set as targets to be compared.
programs are different, the following dialog box
is displayed.
Touch the [Cancel] button.
Touch the [OK] button.
The PLC Read Screen is displayed with

sequence program files different in their dates
and times selected in the File list
(target controller).

The device test window and Ladder editor screen displays can be limited by passwords.
 Specification of the security setting

(1) Security types
Type Description
The changing screens is restricted by the Authorization Device.

Restriction by bit devices
The changing screens is authorized when the Authorization Device is ON.
The changing screens is restricted by a Password.

Restriction by a password
When changing screens, the security password input dialog box is displayed.
The restriction types above can be used together.

(2) Setting method for security
Set the security setting in the [Functional Operation Security] tab in the [Environmental Setting] dialog (Security)
on GT Designer3 (GOT2000).
The following shows the setting method for each security type.
Type Setting method
Select the [Authorization Device] check box of [Device Test Operation] or [Ladder Editor
Restriction by bit devices
Screen Display] and set bit devices.
Restriction by a password Set [Password] of [Device Test Operation] or [Ladder Editor Screen Display].
For the setting of the [Environmental Setting] dialog, refer to the following.
 Changing screens when setting the security

Perform the operation to switch to the
device test window or Ladder editor screen.
No
Is the password set?
No Yes
Is the Authorization Device set?
Yes The security password input dialog

box is displayed. Input a password. Touch the
key.
No
Is the Authorization Device ON?
Yes An error message is displayed.
An error message is displayed.
No
Is the password correct?
Yes
The device test window or Ladder editor screen is displayed.

 perations for the security password input dialog box
(1) Displayed screen
The following table shows the displayed contents.

No. Item Description
1) Password type Displays the type of the password to be input. (Device test password/Ladder editor password)
2) Password input area Set the password.
3) Keys Keys for operations in the security password input window.
(2) Key functions
Key Function
[X] Closes the security password input window and cancels the password input operation.
[0-9] Switches the key type to the value.
[A-Z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).
[a-z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).
[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Del] Deletes an input value or character.
[Enter] Verifies the password set in the password input area.

4.4 Setting Display Format
On the screen of the sequence program monitor (Ladder) or (R ladder), the display format of word device values or
display language can be switched and the display mode of sequence programs can be changed.
4.4.1 Switching languages of sequence programs (Supported by the sequence

program monitor (ladder) only)
The display languages (Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, or Korean) can be switched for the
Sequence program monitor (Ladder or R ladder) at monitoring.
For switching languages, comment files in the language to be displayed must be created in advance.
4.3.2 Reading comment files from data storage (Supported by the sequence program monitor
(ladder) only)
The following shows the relations between the language selected in the GOT utility and comment files with each
character code.
Language Comment file
Japanese Comment files with SJIS code
Simplified Chinese Comment files with GB code
Traditional Chinese Comment files with Big5 code
Korean Comment files with KS code
Other than the above Comment files with ASCII code
4.4.2 Switching comment display mode (Supported by the sequence program

monitor (ladder) only)
For the sequence program monitor (Ladder), whether to display or hide comments, statements, and notes can be
selected on the ladder monitor screen or ladder editor screen.
4.6.3 Display menu
For the sequence program monitor (R ladder), whether to display or hide comments, statements, and notes can be
selected on the ladder monitor screen.

4.4 Setting Display Format
On the PLC read screen, the GOT reads sequence programs and comment files used for the sequence program monitor
(Ladder) or (R ladder).
The following describes how to operate the PLC read screen.
4.5.1 Displayed contents
This section explains the structure of the PLC read screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen after the
sequence program monitor (Ladder) or (R ladder) is started.
1) 5) 2)
4
3)
3)

4)
3)
6)
8) 9)
10) 7) 3)
1) PLC name Displays the label set in the PLC name setting for the target PLC CPU.
2) Target controller Displays CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the target PLC CPU.
3) Keys Keys for operations on the PLC read screen shown in section 4.5.2. (Touch input)
Displays the target PLC CPU model and the drives in a list.
Selecting a drive displays files within the drive in the file list (target controller).
4) Target drive list (target controller)
For the drive that stores files selected in the file list (target controller), [*] is displayed to the left of
the drive name.
Displays the program types, file names, titles, sizes, dates, and times of all the files within the
drive selected in the target drive list (target controller).
(The date and time show those of updated files.)
A file to be read can be selected from the file list. (The selected file is highlighted.)
When the connection destination is an RCPU, only file names are displayed. (You cannot select a
5) File list (target controller) file.)
For program files, only sequence program files in the program memory can be selected.
For selecting the file name selected in the file list (GOT), the file selection in the file list (GOT) is
canceled.
When a password is set for the selected file, the password input window appears.
( (1) Password input window)
Displays the drive set for [Data save location] in the sequence program monitor settings. (Only
the A drive (standard SD card) or B drive (USB drive) is available.)
6) Target drive list (GOT)
For the drive that stores files displayed in the file list (GOT), [*] is displayed to the left of the drive
name.
(Continued to next page)

Displays the program types, file names, titles, sizes, dates, and times of all the files within the
drive selected in the target drive list (GOT).
When the connection destination is an RCPU, only the program files read from the RCPU are
7) File list (GOT)
displayed. Other files in the same drive are not displayed.
For selecting the file name selected in the file list (target controller), the file selection in the file list
(target controller) is canceled.
8) Total file size Displays the total data size of files selected in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT).
9) Number of selected files Displays the total number of files selected in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT).
10) Message display area Displays error messages and others.
(1) Password input window

(a) Displayed screen
1) 2) 1) 2)
3) 3)
4) 4)
3) 3)
(For alphabet input) (For numerical input)
Displays the type of the password to be input. (Program password/Comment password/

1) Password type
Parameter password)
3) File name Displays the file name.
4) Keys Keys for operations in the password input window shown in (b)
(b) Key functions
No. Description
[X] Closes the password input window and cancels the password input operation.
[Sign] Switches the key type to the symbol.
Verifies the password set in the password input area.

[Enter] When the password verification for the first file is successful, the password verification for the other
files is automatically executed with the same password.

4.5.2 Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys used for operating the PLC read screen.
Key Function
Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the PLC read screen appears.
[←Back]
The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user-created monitor screen.
Displays the communication setting window.

[Select CPU]
( (1) Communication setting window)
Exits the sequence program monitor (ladder) and returns the screen to the sequence program monitor (ladder) startup
[X]
screen.
4
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.

This key can be used when program files are displayed in the target drive list (connection destination). (This key
cannot be used in the sequence program monitor (R ladder).)
Touching the key selects all the sequence program files, common comment files, and comment files for the selected
sequence program files in the file list (target controller).
When files with the same name are displayed in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT), touching the key
selects a file as shown below.
• For sequence program files
[Recommend] When the updated dates and times differ between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list (target
controller).
When the updated dates and times are the same between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list
(GOT).
• For comment files
When the updated dates and times differ between the files, touching the key selects the latest file.
(GOT).
Writes the file selected in the file list (target controller) into the data storage displayed in the target drive list (GOT).
When the connection destination is an RCPU, data is read from the data storage.
The file written into the data storage on the PLC read screen is stored in the SEQDAT folder.
[Proceed]
After writing, among files other than comment files in the data storage, files that are not selected in the file list (GOT)
are deleted. Then, the program list window appears.
( (2) Program list window)

(1) Communication setting window
1) 3) 4) 2) 1) 3) 4) 2)
5) 5)
1) CH No. input area Set the CH No. for the target controller.
2) Network No. input area Set the network No. for the target controller.

4) CPU No. input area Set the CPU No.
5) CH No. selection key Select a CH No.
6) Keys Keys for operations in the communication setting window shown in (b). (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key Function

[X] When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is
not set, the communication setting window does not close.
Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No.
input area.
[Enter]
When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station
No. are completed, the communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.

(2) Program list window
Displaying the read sequence programs in a list is available.
1) 2)
4

3)
Displays the file names and execution statuses of the read sequence programs.
1) Sequence program file list The execution statuses show execution types set for the programs.
A touched sequence program file is highlighted.
2) Keys Keys for operations in the program list window shown in (b). (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key Function
[X] Closes the Program List window.
Displays the sequence program file selected in the sequence program file list on the Ladder monitor
[Display] screen.
( 4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen)

On the Ladder monitor screen, the GOT displays the read sequence program.
The following describes how to operate the Ladder monitor screen.
The following describes the configuration of the Ladder monitor screen, menus and key functions on the screen.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 5)
5)
7)
5)
8)
Displays the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No of the target PLC CPU as shown below.
2) Target controller
• CH No. network No.-station No./CPU No.
3) Program name Displays the file name of the displayed sequence program.
4) Number of steps Displays the number of steps for the displayed sequence program.
5) Keys Keys operations for the Ladder monitor screen shown in 4.6.2. (Touch input)
Displays the read sequence program.

By touching a device, it is selected and surrounded with a green frame.
• The following shows the conductive status
Non-conductive status Conductive status
Contact
Coil
6) Ladder display area *1

Instruction
• When contacts, coils, and outputs are the selection status, touching the area displays the device
search window.
( 4.8.1 Device/Contact/Coil search)
• Displaying the first step number
When the Ladder registration monitor window is opened, the first step number of registerable
ladder blocks is highlighted. Touching the area registers the specified ladder block in the window.
(For the Factor mode, it is not registered even if it is touched.)
( 4.6.3 Display menu (1) Ladder registration monitor window)

7) Current device value display area Displays the current value of the displayed word device.
*1 The conductive status of the following instructions is displayed only on the screen.
SET, RST, PLS, PLF, SFT, SFTP, FF, DELTA, DELTAP, MC
4.6.2 Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys used for operating the Ladder monitor screen.
Key Function
4
Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the Ladder monitor screen appears.
[←Back]
Sets the device test mode.

[Device test] Touching the key in the device test mode cancels the device test mode.
( 4.9 Test Operation)
Displays the Edit menu. Touching [Start editing] displays the Ladder editor screen.
[Edit]
( 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen)
Displays the Find menu.

[Find]
( 4.6.3 Find menu)
Displays the Display menu.

[Display]
( 4.6.3 Display menu)
Displays the Monitoring Mode menu.

[Monitoring mode]
( 4.6.3 Monitoring Mode menu)
The comment and note of the touched line can be displayed/hidden.

If the touched line is the first line in the ladder block, the statement of the touched ladder block can be displayed/
hidden.
4.6.3 Menus
The following shows operations for the menus displayed on the Ladder monitor screen.
 Edit menu
Key Function Reference section
[Start editing]*1 Switches to the Ladder editor screen. 4.7
*1 This key is not available in the sequence program monitor (R ladder).

 Find menu
4.7.3 Find/Replace
[Jump] Displays the jump window.
menu (1)
[Find device] Displays the device search window. 4.8.1
[Find contact] Displays the device search window 4.8.1
[Find coil] Displays the device search window 4.8.1
[Factor search] Displays the Factor window. 4.8.2
 Display menu
[Hide comments] Hides the comments, statements or notes in the ladder display area.
4.4.2
[Show comments] Displays the comments, statements or notes in the ladder display area.
[Comment change]*1 Displays the comment file list window. 4.7.3 Display menu (1)
[Device Monitor] Displays the window for the device monitor. 3.
[Ladder registration monitor] Displays the Ladder registration monitor window. (1)
[Delete all registered ladder] Deletes all registered ladder blocks in the Ladder registration monitor window. (1)
[Program list] Displays the program list window 4.5.2 (2)
*1 Displays the PLC diagnosis screen. 4.7.3 Online menu (2)

[PLC diagnosis]]
[PLC read] Displays the PLC read screen. 4.5

(1) Ladder registration monitor window
Displaying or deleting the registered ladder blocks is available.
1)
2) 4

2)
A ladder block selected on the Ladder monitor screen is added as the last registered
ladder block on the Ladder registration monitor window.
1) Ladder display area
Touching the first step number displays the dialog box to delete the ladder block. (For the
Factor mode, it is not deleted even if it is touched.)
2) Keys Keys for operations in the Ladder registration monitor window shown in (b).
(b) Key functions
Item Description
[X] Closes the Ladder registration monitor window.
Scrolls the display area right and left by one column.
Scrolls the display area right and left by one page.
 Monitoring Mode menu
*1 Displays local devices monitored by the GOT. (1)

Local device monitor
(1) Monitoring local devices

(a) When the GOT monitors local devices, the scan time increases.
(b) When local devices are displayed on the screen, touching the [local device monitor] key cancels the display
of local devices.
(c) When the Ladder monitor screen is switched to other screen, or the displayed program is switched to other
program, the GOT cancels the display of local devices.

On the Ladder editor screen, editing sequence programs, finding devices, and displaying comments are available.
The ladder editor is supported only by the sequence program monitor (Ladder).
The following describes how to operate the Ladder editor screen.
 Ladder editor screen

The following describes the configuration of the Ladder editor screen, menus and key functions on the screen.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
6)
6)
7)
8)
Displays the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the target PLC CPU as shown
2) Target controller below.
3) Drive name Displays the drive of the controller for the displayed sequence program.
4) Program name Displays the file name of the displayed program.
5) Number of steps Displays the number of steps for the displayed sequence program.
6) Keys Keys for operations for the Ladder editor screen shown in 4.7.2. (Touch input)
Displays the read sequence program.

By touching a contact, coil, statement, or note, the item is highlighted and the Ladder input
window is displayed.
( (1) Enter ladder program window)
Touch [Show comments] from the [Display] menu to display the comments, statements or
7) Ladder display area notes.
Touch [Hide comments] from the [Display] menu to hide the comments, statements or notes.
Displays the first step number of ladder blocks.
Touching the first step number of ladder blocks highlights the touched position, and displays the
Enter ladder program window.
( (1) Enter ladder program window)

POINT
(1) Restrictions on ladder blocks that can be edited with the sequence program monitor (ladder)
In the sequence program monitor (ladder), ladder blocks exceeding 25 lines cannot be edited.
Even ladder blocks displayed within 24 lines with GX Works2/GX Developer may be displayed exceeding 25
lines on the GOT.
(2) Displaying the Ladder editor screen when setting the security
By setting the security on GT Designer3 (GOT2000), the display of the Ladder editor screen can be limited.
For the security setting, refer to the following.
4
(1) Enter ladder program window
Editing sequence programs is available.

2)
3)
1)
3)
1) 3)
(Reduced size)
2)
1) Ladder symbol display area Displays the ladder symbol selected in the ladder display area.
Displays devices, sequence programs, statements, and notes selected in the Ladder
symbol display area.
The cursor is displayed at the position to be input.
If devices, sequence programs, statements, and notes are not fully displayed in the
2) Text display area display area, move the cursor to the border of the side where the display was cut, and
touch the cursor to scroll the displayed contents.
Only one-byte alphanumeric characters can be input for statements and notes.
If characters other than one-byte alphanumeric characters input on GX Works2/GX
Developer are deleted on the GOT, they cannot be input again.
3) Keys Keys for operations in the Enter ladder program window shown in (b).
POINT
Types of statements and notes that can be entered
Statements and notes that can be entered are integrated statements and notes.
Peripheral statements and notes cannot be entered.
(If the * is entered at the start of statements and notes, an error occurs.)

(b) Key functions
Key Function
[X] Closes the Enter ladder program window. The displayed contents are not reflected.
Touch the key to input a normally open contact.
Touch the key to input a normally closed contact.
Touch the key to input a leading edge pulse.
Touch the key to input a trailing edge pulse.
Touch the key to input a leading edge pulse rejection.
Touch the key to input a trailing edge rejection.
Touch the key to input a conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse.
Touch the key to input a conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse.
Touch the key to input a coil.
Touch the key to input an application instruction.
Touch the key to input a vertical line.
Touch the key to delete a vertical line.
Touch the key to input a horizontal line.
Touch the key to delete a ladder.
[Insert row] Inserts one row in the specified position.
[Delete row] Deletes the specified row.
[Insert column] Inserts one column in the specified position.
[Delete column] Deletes the specified column.
[ENT] Reflects the displayed contents, and closes the Enter ladder program window.
Reduces the size of the Enter ladder program window.
Changes the Enter ladder program window from the reduced size to the default size.
[Cap] Switches the alphabetic characters between the uppercase and the lowercase.

(c) Inputting or deleting ladders
• Inputting contacts or instructions
(Operation example: Inputting a contact (X0))
1. Touch a position to input a contact (X0).
4
2. The Enter ladder program window appears.

3. Touch the key.
The ladder symbol corresponding to the touched
key is displayed on the ladder symbol display
area.
Input X0 in the text display area, and touch the
[ENT] key.
4. The contact (X0) is input.

• Deleting contacts or instructions
(Operation example: Deleting a contact (X0))
1. Touch a contact (X0) to be deleted.
3. Touch the [X] key.

Touch the end position of the contact (X0).
Touch an end position.
4. The contact (X0) is deleted.

• Inputting vertical lines or horizontal lines
(Operation example: Inputting a vertical line)
1. Touch a position to input a vertical line.
2. The Enter ladder program window appears. 4

3. Touch the key.
Touch the end position to input the vertical line.
4. The vertical line is input.

• Deleting vertical lines or horizontal lines
(Operation example: Deleting a vertical line)
1. Touch a position to delete a vertical line.
3. Touch key.
Touch the end position to delete the vertical line.
4. The vertical line is deleted.

• Inputting rows and columns
(Operation example: Inputting a row)
1. Touch a position to insert a row.
2. The Enter ladder program window appears. 4

3. Touch the [Insert row] key.
The Enter ladder program window is closed, and
the row is inserted.
• Deleting rows and columns

(Operation example: Deleting a row)
1. Touch a position to delete a row.
3. Touch the [Delete row] key.

The Enter ladder program window is closed, and
the row is deleted.

4.7.2 Key functions
The following shows the functions of keys used for operating the Ladder editor screen.
Key Function
Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the Ladder editor screen appears.
[←Back]
Displays the Edit menu.

[Edit]
( 4.7.3 Edit menu)
Displays the Find/Replace menu.

[Find/Replace] When the Find/Replace menu is displayed, touching the key closes the menu.
( 4.7.3 Find/Replace menu)
Displays the Convert menu.

[Convert]
( 4.7.3 Convert menu)

[Display]
Displays the Online menu.

[Online]
( 4.7.3 Online menu)
[X] Exits the Ladder editor screen and returns the screen to the sequence program monitor (ladder) startup screen.
The comment and note of the touched line can be displayed/hidden.

If the touched line is the first line in the ladder block, the statement of the touched ladder block can be displayed/
hidden.

4.7.3 Menus
The following shows operations for the menus displayed on the Ladder editor screen.
 Edit menu

Undoes the last edit operation.
The GOT can be returned to the state right after the last but one
[Undo] -
conversion, write during RUN, Replace Device or Change open/
close contact.
[Redo] Redoes the operation which was undone using the [Undo] key. -
[Restore program to the state after conversion] Restores the edited ladder to the state just after conversion. -
Executes the program check to check if programs have consistency

[Check program] -
or double coils do not exist.
POINT
Deleting ladders which are not converted
When deleting ladders which are not converted, a dialog box is displayed.
When touching the [OK] button in the dialog box, the ladders which are not converted are deleted, as well as the
operation history. Therefore, the [Undo] and [Redo] keys do not operate.
Also, touch the [Cancel] button to return to the previous screen.

 Find/Replace menu
[Jump] Displays the jump window. (1)
[Find device] Displays the device search window. 4.8.1
[Find contact] Displays the device search window. 4.8.1
[Find coil] Displays the device search window. 4.8.1
[Replace device] Displays the replace device window. 4.8.3
[Change open/close contact] Displays the change open/close contact window. 4.8.4

(1) Jump window
1)
2)
2)
4
(a) Displayed contents

Jump destination step

1) Displays the input step number.
number input area
2) Keys Keys for operations in the jump window shown in (b). (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key Function
[X] Closes the jump window.
[Enter] Displays a row that includes the input step number on the center of the ladder display area.
 Convert menu
[Convert] Convert the editing program to the execution program. -
Convert the editing program to the execution program and execute the online
[Convert (Online change)] -
change to controllers.
POINT
Precautions for the online change
For the precautions for the online change, refer to the following.
4.2.4 Precautions
Instruction Manual of the controller to use

 Display menu
[Hide comments] Hides the comments, statements or notes in the ladder display area.
4.2.4
[Show comments] Displays the comments, statements or notes in the ladder display area.
[Comment change] Displays the comment file list window. (1)
[Program list] Displays the program list window 4.5.2 (2)
[PLC diagnosis] Displays the PLC diagnosis screen. 4.7.3 Online menu (2)

(1) Comment file list window
The GOT displays the comment file list.
1) 2)
4

2)
Among comment files stored in the data storage, the file names and titles of the comment
files, and common comment files used for the displayed sequence program are displayed.
1) Comment file list
For switching comments, select a comment file to be used.
A selected comment file is highlighted.
2) Keys Keys for operations in the comment file list window shown in (b) (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key Function
[X] Closes the Comment file list window.
Closes the Comment file list window and displays the ladder display area with the comments of the
[Apply changes]
file selected from the comment file list.

 Online menu
Checks the edited sequence program, and writes the program into the PLC
CPU.
Set the PLC CPU to the STOP status, and write the program into the PLC CPU.
[Write to PLC] -
To execute the online change, execute it using the [Convert (Online change)] in
the [Convert] menu.
( Convert menu)
Verifies the sequence program displayed on the ladder display area and the
[Verify with PLC] program in the PLC CPU. (1)
If the programs do not match, the Verify result window is displayed.
[PLC diagnosis] Displays the PLC diagnosis screen. (2)
[Remote operation] Displays the Remote operation window. (3)
[Write the program memory to

Displays the Copy program memory data into ROM window. (4)
ROM]
[Start monitor] Displays the Ladder monitor screen. 4.6

(1) Verify result window
Displaying the result of the program verification with the PLC is available.
2)
1) 4)
4

3)
Displays the unmatched items.

Verification result display
1) Up to 100 items are displayed. The program verification is stopped when unmatched
area
items are more than 100.
2) Program name display area Displays the file name of the verified program.
Unmatched item count

3) Displays the number of unmatched items displayed on the Verify result window.
display area
4) Keys Keys for operations in the Verify result window shown in (b). (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key Function
[X] Closes the Verify result window.

(2) PLC diagnosis window
Displays the PLC diagnosis screen.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Displays the error number of the destination PLC found by PLC diagnosis.
1) Error No.
Displays [No errors exist.] when no error occurs.
2) Error contents Displays the message corresponding to the error number of the destination PLC.
3) Occurrence date and time Displays the error occurrence date and time when an error occurs in the destination PLC.
Displays the program name when the error in the destination PLC is a program error.
4) Program name
If the error is not a program error, [----] is displayed.
Displays the sequence step number highlighted in yellow when the error in the destination
PLC is a program error.
By touching the sequence step number where an error occurs, the PLC diagnosis dialog
5) Step No. box will be closed and the screen will be switched to the ladder display.
The screen jumps to sequence step number where the error occurs and the area of error
is highlighted in a red rectangle.
If the error is not a program error, [----] is displayed.
(b) Key functions
Key Function
[X] Closes the PLC diagnosis window.

(3) Remote operation window
Changing the operation status of the PLC CPU by using the remote operation is available.

Select an operation (RUN or STOP key), and touch the [Execute] key.
1) Operation RUN : The PLC CPU becomes the remote RUN status.
STOP : The PLC CPU becomes the remote STOP status.
Set the status of devices and signals when executing the remote RUN.
Device memory
Do not clear : The PLC CPU operates device values prior to the remote
STOP.
Clear all except latch : Clears all device values to zero except the latched devices.
2) STOP RUN operation Clear all : Clears all device values to zero.
Signal flow
Save : Keeps signals prior to the remote STOP, and outputs the
signals.
Turn OFF : Turns off the signal.
Turn ON : Turns on the signal.
3) [Execute] Executes the remote RUN or STOP.

(4) Copy program memory data into ROM window
Writing data in the program memory into a ROM is available.
Touch the target ROM.
1) Target Standard ROM : Set the standard ROM in the PLC CPU as the target.
IC card (ROM) : Set the IC memory card (Flash card) inserted in the PLC CPU as
the target.
2) [Execute] Touching the key writes data in the program memory into the target ROM.

4.8 Find/Replace Operation
4.8.1 Device/Contact/Coil search
Ladder blocks including the set devices are searched.

They can be searched continuously in multiple sequence program files.
1. Execute any of the following operations to display the device search window.
• Touch the [Find] [Find device]/[Find contact]/[Find coil] menu on the Ladder monitor screen.
• Touch the [Find/Replace] [Find device]/[Find contact]/[Find coil] menu on the Ladder editor screen. 4
2. Set a device to be searched and touch the / /[Enter] key
• Displayed screen

1) 1)
2) 2)
Set a device to be searched.

Bit device words cannot be specified.
1) Device input area
The device can be input also by selecting a device on the ladder monitor screen, ladder editor
screen, Ladder registration monitor window.
2) Keys Keys for operations in the device search window shown in (b).
• Key functions
Key Function
[X] Closes the device search window.
[A-Z] Switches the key type to the alphabet.
Searches the input device in descending order of the step number.
Searches the input device in ascending order of the step number.

If the device is selected on the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder editor screen, the search starts from the
selected device.

Key Function
Searches the input device in ascending order of the step number.

If the device is selected on the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder editor screen, the search starts from the
selected device.
[Enter]
However, the search starts always from the start of the program in the following conditions.
• When searching for the first time after the device search window is displayed.
• When starting to search consecutively after searching
3. The ladder block which has the searched device is displayed and the device is surrounded with a green frame.

4.8.2 Factor search
The contact point that affected the set device status (ON/OFF) is searched backwards in ladder blocks.
1. Touch the [Find] [Factor] menu from the Ladder monitor screen to display the factor search window.
2. Set a device to be searched, and touch the [Enter] key

1) 1)
2) 2)

Set a device to be searched.

1) Device input area Bit device words cannot be specified.
Also, by selecting a device on the Ladder monitor screen, the device can be input.
2) Keys Keys for operations in Factor search window.
• Key functions
Key Function
[X] Closes the Factor search window.
[A-Z] Switches the key type to the alphabet.
By touching the key, the Factor search window is closed and the Ladder registration monitor window is
displayed. The search starts from the last step.
[Enter]
If the device is selected on the Ladder monitor screen, the search starts from the selected device.
When the search is executed, ladder blocks registered in the Ladder registration monitor window are deleted.
The following shows the target instructions and coils for Factor search.
Instruction, coil Target of the search operation
Instruction LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI
Coil OUT, OUTH

3. The Factor search window is closed and the Ladder registration monitor window is displayed.
The sequence programs displayed on the ladder monitor screen are searched. Then, the factor ladder blocks for
the set device are registered in order.
The ladder blocks newly registered are always displayed in the Ladder monitor window during the factor search.
The factor devices are highlighted.
For the Ladder registration monitor window, refer to the following.

4.6.3 Display menu (1) Ladder registration monitor window
4. The message [Factor search is completed.] is displayed in the message area when the search is completed.
When closing the Ladder registration monitor window, the factor search mode is released.
POINT
Cancellation of the factor search
(1) When there are multiple factor contacts
The message [Factor search was aborted because there were multiple factor contact points.] is displayed in
the message area on the ladder monitor screen.
When continuing the factor search based on the interrupted result, execute the factor search based on one of
the found contacts.
(2) When the ladder blocks registered in the Ladder registration monitor window exceed 100
The message [Factor search was aborted because the number of ladder blocks exceeded 100.] is displayed
in the message area on the ladder monitor screen.
When restarting the factor search, proceed the factor search based on the contact of the 100th ladder block.

4.8.3 Replace device (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only)
The device replacement is available only in the sequence program monitor (Ladder).
1. Touch the [Find/Replace] [Replace device] menu on the Ladder editor screen to display the Replace device
window.
2. Set the current device and new device, and touch the [Enter] key.
1) 1)
2) 2) 4

3) 3)
Set a current device.

1) Current device display area
The device can be input also by selecting a device on the Ladder editor screen.
Set a new device.

2) New device display area
The device can be input also by selecting a device on the Ladder editor screen.
3) Keys Displays the keys used in the operation in the Replace device window.
• Key functions
Key Function
[X] Closes the Replace device window.
Touching the key after inputting a current device moves the cursor to the new device display area.
[Enter] Replaces the current device to the new device.
3. All the old devices in the sequence programs displayed on the Ladder editor screen are replaced with new devices.

4.8.4 Change open/close cantact (Supported by the sequence program monitor
(ladder) only)
The normally open/close contact switching is supported by the sequence program monitor (Ladder).
1. Touch the [Find/Replace] [Change open/close cantact] menu on the Ladder editor screen to display the Change
open/close cantact window.
2. Set the device to change the contact and touch the [Enter] key.
1) 1)
2) 2)
Set a device for changing a normally open contact or a normally closed contact.
1) Device input area
The item can be set also by selecting in the ladder editor screen.
2) Keys Displays the keys used in the operation in the Change open/close cantact window.
• Key functions
Key Function
[X] Closes the Change open/close cantact window.
[Enter] Changes a normally open contact or a normally closed contact.
3. The contacts of devices in the sequence program displayed in the Ladder editor screen are changed from A to B or
B to A.

4.9 Test Operation
In the device test mode, device values can be changed on the screen.
For setting the device test mode, refer to the following.
4.6.2 Key functions
The test operation of devices is available by touching devices on the following screens in the device test mode.
Screen applicable to device test mode Reference section
Ladder monitor screen 4.6.2
4
POINT
Displaying the device test window when setting the security
By setting the security on GT Designer3 (GOT2000), the display of the device test window can be limited.

For the security setting, refer to the following.
Touching a device displays the device test window.

(1) When touching bit devices
A bit device is switched between ON and OFF states in the device test window.
(2) When touching word devices
The GOT writes the value input in the device test window into the selected word device.
 How to operate device test window

(1) Bit devices
1)
2)
2)
1) Device Displays the selected device.
2) Keys Keys for operations in the device test window shown in (b).
(b) Key functions
Key Function
[X] Closes the device test window.
[ON] Turns on the bit device and writes the device state to the PLC CPU.
[OFF] Turns off the bit device and writes the device state to the PLC CPU.

4.9 Test Operation
(2) Word devices
1) 2) 3) 1) 2) 3)
4) 4)
(Monitoring mode : 16-bit integer (DEC)) (Monitoring mode : 32-bit integer (HEX))
2) Device value input area Set the value to be written into the selected device.
3) Input mode Displays the current input mode. (DEC: decimal number. HEX: hexadecimal number)
(b) Key functions
Key Function
[X] Closes the device test window.
[DEC/HEX] Switches the input modes. (DEC, HEX)
[Enter] Writes the value input in the device value input area into the PLC CPU.

4.9 Test Operation
4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action
This section explains the error messages displayed when the sequence program monitor (Ladder) or the sequence
program monitor (R ladder) is executed, and the corrective actions.
 Error messages for data-storing destination access

Error message Description Corrective action
• No data storage is inserted in the GOT.

• The SD card cover is opened. • Insert a data storage without a format error in the GOT.
• A data storage with a format error is
inserted in the GOT.
•
•
Close the SD card cover.
Delete files in the data storage.
4
File access error. Please check the
• The data storage has insufficient free • Insert a data storage with a large capacity.
[drive name] drive.
space for writing a file. • Cancel the write-protect setting for the folder that is used
• The folder for the sequence program for the sequence program monitor (ladder) in the data
monitor (ladder) in the data storage is storage.

write-protected.
• No data storage is inserted in the GOT.

• The SD card cover is opened. • Insert a data storage without a format error in the GOT.
• A data storage with a format error is • Close the SD card cover.
Failed to write the (file name) to the inserted in the GOT. • Delete files in the data storage.
[drive name] drive. Please check the • The data storage has insufficient free • Insert a data storage with a large capacity.
[drive name] drive. space for writing a file. • Cancel the write-protect setting for the folder that is used
• The folder for the sequence program for the sequence program monitor (ladder) in the data
monitor (ladder) in the data storage is storage.
write-protected.
The [drive name] drive has insufficient The data storage has insufficient free space • Delete files in the data storage.
free space. The file cannot be saved. for writing a file. • Insert a data storage with a large capacity.
The file (file name) is broken. The file is The read file in the data storage is
Read the file from the PLC CPU again.
unselected. corrupted.
• The temporary file used on the Ladder

editor screen or the Ladder monitor
• Read the file from the PLC CPU again.
The file (file name) is broken. Perform screen in the data storage is corrupted.
• Delete unnecessary files in the data storage. Or insert a
PLC Read and read the file again. • The writing of files into data storage is
data storage with a larger free space.
failed due to an insufficient capacity of
data storage.
The temporary file used on the Ladder editor

The file (file name) is broken. Please Select the program displayed in the Program list window
screen or the Ladder monitor screen in the
read the file in the program list again. again.
data storage is corrupted.
When searching for devices in an

The file (file name) is broken. undisplayed program, a file in the data Read the file from the PLC CPU again.
storage is corrupted.
• Insert a data storage without a format error in the GOT.

• Close the SD card cover.
• Delete files in the data storage.
Failed to check program. Please check The GOT cannot access the temporary file
• Insert a data storage with a large capacity.
the [drive name] drive. in the data storage during a program check.
• Cancel the write-protect setting for the folder that is used
for the sequence program monitor (ladder) in the data
storage.
• Insert a data storage without a format error in the GOT.

• Close the SD card cover.
The GOT cannot access the temporary file • Delete files in the data storage.
Failed to verify with PLC. Please check
in the data storage during the PLC program • Insert a data storage with a large capacity.
the [drive name] drive.
verification. • Cancel the write-protect setting for the folder that is used
for the sequence program monitor (ladder) in the data
storage.
Parameter file is corrupted. The parameter file in the data storage is Exit the sequence program monitor (ladder), and then start
Please restart the ladder editor. corrupted. the function again.

 Error messages for communication
• Check the line status between the GOT and the PLC CPU,
The GOT cannot communicate with the PLC and make the GOT communicate with the PLC CPU.
CPU. • Check if the PLC CPU supports the sequence program
monitor (ladder).
• Check the line status between the GOT and the PLC CPU,
The GOT cannot communicate with the PLC and make the GOT communicate with the PLC CPU.
CPU. • Check if the PLC CPU supports the sequence program
monitor (ladder).
Failed to get the information of CPU The GOT cannot communicate with the PLC Check the line status between the GOT and the PLC CPU,
because of bad connection. CPU. and make the GOT communicate with the PLC CPU.
• Check the communications between the GOT and PLC

CPU, and make sure that the GOT communicates with the
• The GOT cannot communicate with the PLC CPU.
Failed to get the information. PLC CPU. • Select the file after changing the message display
• A file with faulty file name is selected. language to one which can display the file name in the
utility.
• Change the file name with GX Works2/GX Developer.
• The system protect switch of the PLC

The CPU protect switch is ON. Turn • Turn off the system protect switch of the PLC CPU.
CPU is on.
OFF the protect switch. • Wait until the boot process of the PLC CPU is completed.
• The PLC CPU is in the boot process.
The CPU is not in STOP mode. Please Any operation that the PLC CPU cannot
Set the PLC CPU to the STOP status.
change the CPU to STOP mode. execute during running is performed.
CPU drive error. Please confirm the

The target drive does not function. Format the target drive by using GX Works2/GX Developer.
drive status.
The specified file does not exist in the The specified file does not exist in the PLC
Check files in the specified drive of the PLC CPU.
CPU. Please confirm the file in the drive. CPU.
The specified file in the CPU is invalid. The specified file in the PLC CPU is Delete the specified file by using GX Works2/GX Developer,
Please confirm the file in the drive. corrupted. and then create the file again.
• Other GOTs or GX Works2/GX Developer

• Access the file when other devices do not access the
The file cannot be accessed while it is access the connected PLC CPU.
connected PLC CPU.
being accessed by other connected • The QCPU transfers program files from
• Access the file after QCPU completes the transference
equipment or it is being transferred. the program cache memory to the
from the program cache memory to the program memory.
program memory.
The data cannot be written to the

The specified drive of the PLC CPU runs out
specified CPU because the total data Reduce the capacity of the file to be written.
of space.
size may exceed the drive capacity.
The specified file in the PLC CPU is Format the target drive by using GX Works2/GX Developer,
The specified file is invalid.
corrupted. and then write the specified file.
There is no consecutive free space in

The specified drive of the PLC CPU does Execute [Arrange PLC memory] with GX Works2/GX
the drive of the specified CPU. Please
not have consecutive free space. Developer.
clean up the drive.
Failed to write data to the specified CPU.

An error occurs when writing/deleting data
Please check if the target flash ROM has Check the specified drive by using GX Works2/GX Developer.
to/from the specified drive of the PLC CPU.
an error or not.
The specified drive or file does not exist in Read data from the PLC, and check if the specified drive
The specified file does not exist.
the PLC CPU. exists.
When reading data from the PLC, the

The file (file name) does not exist.
program file corresponding to the specified
Please check if the file exists using PLC Read data from the PLC, and check if the specified file exists.
program on the ladder display area does not
Read.
exist in the PLC CPU.
• Execute [Format PLC memory] with GX Works2/GX

The specified CPU drive has an error. Developer.
The specified drive of the PLC CPU is faulty.
Please check the drive. • If the specified drive is the flash ROM, write data to the PLC
(flash ROM) again.
The specified drive of the PLC CPU is in

The specified file is under processing. Execute the same operation later.
use.

The password to access the specified file is

Invalid password. Input the correct password.
incorrect.
The specified CPU drive is write- Data is written to the write-protect drive of Cancel the write-protect setting for the specified drive of the
protected. the PLC CPU. PLC CPU.
Too many files are being accessed at Other devices are accessing too many files
Reduce the number of files being accessed by other devices.
the same time. in the PLC CPU at the same time.
The specified CPU drive cannot be The specified drive does not exist in the Read data from the PLC, and specify a drive that exists in the
accessed. PLC CPU. PLC CPU.
• Insert a memory card in the specified drive of the PLC

4
• No memory card is inserted in the
Failed to access the specified CPU CPU.
specified drive of the PLC CPU.
drive. Please check the drive status. • Format the memory card in the specified drive by using GX
• The memory card is faulty.
Works2/GX Developer.
The specified CPU drive has an error. The specified drive in the PLC CPU does Format the specified drive by using GX Works2/GX
Please check the drive status. not function. Developer.

The specified CPU drive is not The specified drive of the PLC CPU is not Format the specified drive by using GX Works2/GX
formatted. formatted. Developer.
No memory card is inserted in the specified

CPU memory card is not inserted. Insert a memory card in the specified drive.
drive of the PLC CPU.
• An unsupported memory card is inserted

in the specified drive of the PLC CPU.
• Insert a supported memory card in the specified drive.
The type of the CPU memory card is • No memory card is inserted in the
• The program memory of QnUDVCPU cannot be written to
wrong. Please check the memory card. specified drive of the PLC CPU.
the ROM.
• The program memory of QnUDVCPU is
written to the ROM.
The CPU is write protected. Please

The PLC CPU is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect setting for the PLC CPU.
remove the protection.
The specified CPU drive cannot be The specified drive of the PLC CPU does Read data from the PLC, and check if the specified drive
used. Please check the drive. not exist. exists.
PLC types of the program (file name)

The PLC CPU type of the program file
and the connected PLC are not the
stored in the data storage differs from the Read a program file that exists in the PLC CPU.
same. Perform PLC Read and read the
connected PLC CPU type.
data again.
The program before modification on the

When a program is written into the PLC, the
GOT and the program being registered
target file does not exist in the PLC CPU, or
on the CPU do not match. Please Read a program file that exists in the PLC CPU
the type of the program differs from that of
perform PLC Read and read the
the target file.
program again.
The GOT cannot write device values to the

Failed to write the value to the device. Read the program being displayed from the PLC again.
PLC CPU with the device test.
Parameter file is corrupted. The ladder The GOT cannot read parameters from the Write the parameters to the PLC CPU by using GX Works2/
editor cannot be used. PLC CPU. GX Developer.
• The date of the GOT is wrong. • Set the date of the GOT properly.
The file has invalid date or timestamp. • PC writing or online change is executed • When executing PC writing or online change to the
Please check the GOT clock data. to Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, or Q01CPU Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, or Q01CPU, set the date of the GOT
when the date of the GOT is Feb. 29th. other than Feb. 29th.
• Execute after registering the online debug function (online

change, trace, monitor with conditions, etc.) in GX Works2/
Communication of the online debug Communication of the online debug function
GX Developer.
function failed. failed.
• Execute after confirming the communication path such as
communication cables.
• Execute after registering the online debug function (online

change, trace, monitor with conditions, etc.) in GX Works2/
Specified contents of the online debug Specified contents of the online debug
GX Developer.
function are invalid. function are invalid.
• Execute after confirming the communication path such as
communication cables.

An error occurred when verifying the

The sequence program after modification of Execute the online change after executing PLC read to
specified program and the program in
the online change operation differs from the equalize the sequence program of the GOT and PLC CPU by
the CPU.
program before modification. PLC read.
Please read the file again.
END instruction cannot be written to a • Check the contents of the specified sequence program file.
The END instruction is inserted or deleted
CPU module while the module is • Write the program after setting the PLC CPU to the stop
by the online change.
running. status.
Reserved area for online change is • Check the capacity of the specified sequence program file.
The file capacity is exceeded by the online
insufficient. • Write the program after setting the PLC CPU to the stop
change.
Online change cannot be performed. status.
An instruction, which is not compatible with

• Check if the PLC CPU type is correct.
There are instructions that cannot be the CPU type set in the project, exists in the
• Check the sequence program and delete the invalid
handled in the CPU. sequence program executing the online
instruction.
change.
• The step to be written is invalid. • Write the program after setting the PLC CPU to the stop
• The start position of the online change status.
The step to be written is invalid.
was not specified with a correct program • Check if the GX Works2/GX Developer is compatible with
step No. the CPU type and CPU version set in the project.
• Execute the online change again.

The instruction that was written during The instruction of the online change is
• Write the program after setting the PLC CPU to the stop
online change is invalid. wrong.
status.
The number of blocks to be written by Block size error (The number of the online
Check the number of the block for the online change.
online change is invalid. change is invalid.)
A program file exceeding 260k steps was

The specified file is too large to read. Split the program to sections within 260k steps.
read.
The parameter file cannot be read. The Write the parameter file using the peripheral software of the
No parameter file exists.
ladder editor function cannot be used. PLC CPU.
• The function that is not supported by the

The function is not supported by the specified PLC CPU is used.
The executed function cannot be used.
specified CPU version. • The program memory of QnUDVCPU is
written to the ROM.
• The specified drive stores a sequence

program containing FBs/FUNs.
The executed function cannot be used.
• The specified file is protected with a
The specified file can not be accessed. Delete programs from the PLC CPU, initialize the memory,
security key.
and then write the project data again.
• The specified file is protected with a block
password.
 Error messages for editing

The instruction is incorrect. The input instruction is incorrect. Input the correct instruction.
The specified device is not available. The input device name is incorrect. Input the correct device name.
The device number outside the range is

The device number is out of range. Input the correct device number.
input.
Too many rows are being edited. Data On the edited ladder, 49 or more rows are
Delete rows to be 48 or less per edited ladder.
cannot be entered. input.
The ladder block is too large. Data On a ladder block, 25 or more rows are
Delete rows to be 24 or less per ladder block.
cannot be entered. input.

• A specified position is incorrect to input a

ladder.
• A space of a specified position is too
narrow to input a ladder.
• A start position and end position are not
specified in the same column to input a
• Input a ladder in a correct position.
vertical line.
• Insert columns, and then input a ladder.
• An end position is specified in an upper
The edit position is incorrect. • Specify a correct end position for a vertical line or
row of the start position to input a vertical
horizontal line, and then input the line.
line.
• Specify a correct end position, and then delete a ladder.
specified in the same row to input a
horizontal line.
4
specified in the same row to delete a
ladder.

Too many ladders are not converted. The Reduce the ladders which are not converted before
The data being edited is too large.
data cannot be converted. conversion.
Line statements exist in the ladder

program and the data cannot be edited. A vertical line that overlaps an interlinear
Delete the interlinear statement, and then input a vertical line.
Please delete the line statements from statement is input.
the ladder program.
PI devices exist in the ladder program

and the data cannot be edited. Please A vertical line that overlaps a pointer or Delete the pointer or interrupt pointer, and then input a vertical
delete the PI devices from the ladder interrupt pointer is input. line.
program.
• Edit the ladder block in 24 rows or less by using GX

Works2/GX Developer, and then write the program into the
There is a ladder block which cannot be • On a ladder block, 25 or more rows are
PLC CPU.
displayed in the ladder program. Data edited.
• Write the program into the PLC CPU by using GX Works2/
cannot be edited. • An incomplete ladder block is edited.
GX Developer again because the program may be
corrupted.
Statements should be 64 characters or A statement with 65 characters or more was

Enter statements with 64 characters or less.
less. entered.
A note with 33 characters or more was

Notes should be 32 characters or less. Enter notes with 32 characters or less.
entered.
• Check the communication setting.

Conversion (online change) failed due to The GOT fails to communicate with the PLC • Check cables.
communication error. during conversion (online change). • Verify with PLC.
• Operate the GOT for reading the program from the PLC.
Peripheral statements cannot be

A peripheral statement was entered. Delete the peripheral statement.
entered.
Peripheral notes cannot be entered. A peripheral note was entered. Delete the peripheral note.
 Error messages for conversion

The data being edited is too large. Too many ladders are not converted. The Reduce the ladders which are not converted before
Please reduce the data being edited. data cannot be converted. conversion.
There is a ladder which cannot be

When a ladder block is converted, the
converted. Complete the ladder block, and then convert the ladder block.
ladder block is not completed.
Correct the ladder at the cursor position.
The ladder block is too large to convert.

Too large ladder blocks are not converted.
Please reduce the size of the ladder Delete or split the ladder block before conversion.
The data cannot be converted.
block.

 Error messages for file selection
• Use the sequence program monitor (SFC) to monitor SFC

You cannot select programs other than A program that is not a ladder program is programs.
ladder programs. selected. • Use GX Works2 or GX Developer to monitor SFC
programs.
A program file having 260k steps or more is

The specified file is too large to read. Split the program.
selected.

5. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR
(SFC)
5.1 Features
With the SFC monitor function, the GOT can monitor SFC programs of controllers, and changing device values of the
programs is available.
The function improves the efficiency in troubleshooting and maintenance of PLC systems with SFC programs.
5
The following shows features of the SFC monitor function.
 Displaying SFC programs in SFC diagram format
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)

The GOT can monitor SFC programs of the PLC CPU and display the programs in the SFC diagram format
(MELSAP3 or MELSAP-L format).
SFC diagram monitor screen
The following screens are displayed with the SFC monitor function.
• PLC read screen
( 5.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen)
• Block list screen
( 5.5 How to Operate Block List Screen)
• SFC diagram monitor screen
( 5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen)
5. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5-1

5.1 Features
Touching a step or transition condition on the SFC diagram monitor screen displays an enlarged operation output/
transition condition sequence program.
 Switching display formats, device comment display, and languages

The following are available.
• Switching the display formats of device values
• Switching whether to display or hide device comments
• Switching languages for file names of SFC programs, comments, and others
(1) Switching display formats
On the SFC diagram monitor screen, the display formats for the current values of word devices can be switched
between decimal and hexadecimal numbers.
(2) Switching device comment display
Whether to display or hide device comments used in SFC programs can be switched.
(3) Switching languages
Block titles, file titles and comments can be displayed in the language set for the language switching in the GOT
utility with comment files created with the SJIS code, KS code, GB code, and/or ASCII code.
With a SD card storing comment files created with the SJIS code, KS code, GB code, and/or ASCII code,
comments can be displayed in the language corresponding to any character code in the SD card, regardless of
the language set in the GOT utility.
5-2 5. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)

5.1 Features
 Interaction with ladder monitor function
By only selecting a device on the SFC diagram monitor screen and starting the ladder monitor, the GOT can search
and display the device in a ladder program.
The function is useful for searching for a device used within both a SFC program and a ladder program in the ladder
program.
Example) When turning on Y22 device with ladder program including interlock circuit
1
<PLC CPU>
5
<Sensor>
6
<GOT>

X1 OFF
Monitor screen (GOT)

2
SFC monitor Ladder monitor
3 M10 X1
M10 Y22
Searching in
ladder program
4
1. Finding that the machine stops
2. Checking an active step with the SFC monitor
3. Checking that the machine operation command (M10) is on
4. Touching M10 and starting the ladder monitor
5. Finding out that Y22 (machine operation) is off because X1 is off
6. Finding out that the machine stops because the door is open (X1 is off)

5.1 Features
5.2 Specifications
This section describes the system configuration for the SFC monitor function.
following.
Controller
QCPU (Q mode)*1
LCPU
*1 For creating a multiple CPU system with the Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and/or
Q25HCPU, use CPUs with the function version B or later.
 Connection type
Function Connection form between GOT and controller
CC-Link IE CC-Link
MELSECNET/H
Bus Direct CPU Serial Ethernet controller connection
connection*8,
Name Description connection connection communication connection connection*2*8,
*8
MELSECNET/10
*9 connection *7 CC-Link IE field
ID*4 G4*4*5
connection*1*8
connection*3
SFC Monitors SFC *6*7

monitor programs.
*1 For the MELSECNET/10 connection, use a QCPU and network module (QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, and
QJ71BR11) with the function version B or later.
*6 The Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU are not available.
*7 SFC monitor cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.

5.2 Specifications
Write the package data that has the system application (Extended function) for the sequence program monitor
(SFC) to the GOT.
5
Hardware

Data storage (Such as an SD card and USB memory)

5.2 Specifications
The device range varies depending on the CPU to be used.

Device monitor
Device Device range Program display Search operation
display
Internal relay M0 to 61439
Link relay B0 to FFFF
Timer T0 to 32767
Counter C0 to 32767
Link register W0 to 1FFF
R0 to 32767
File register
ZR0 to 4184063
Extended data register D0 to 4212223
Extended link register W0 to 4045FF
Link special relay SB0 to 7FF
Link special register SW0 to 7FF
Step relay S0 to 8191, BL ¥S

Z0 to 19 *1
Index register
Link direct device J ¥

U ¥
U3En ¥
Nesting N0 to 14
Pointer P0 to 4095
Interrupt pointer I0 to 255
SFC block device BL0 to 319
SFC transition device TR0 to 511, BL ¥TR

U0 to 1FF
3E0 to 3E3
Macro instruction argument device VD0 to
*1 When a ZZ device is used, "ZZ" can be displayed.

5.2 Specifications
5.2.3 Access range
5.2.4 Precautions
(1) Precautions for operations during SFC monitor startup

Do not operate the following with the GOT during the SFC monitor startup.
Doing so may delete stored data and cause the SFC monitor to operate incorrectly.
• Opening and closing of the SD card cover
• Inserting or removing a SD card
(2) Precautions for devices 5
(a) The GOT cannot search for indexing devices.
(b) The GOT cannot monitor local devices.
(3) Precautions for setting [Locus] for line graphs

The SFC monitor function is not available when [Locus] is set for line graphs.
For using the SFC monitor function, do not set [Locus] for line graphs.
(4) Precautions for file names (program names) of comment files to be read
Only files with the file names (program names) with one-byte alphanumeric characters are applicable to the
GOT.
When project data are created on GX Developer, use only one-byte alphanumeric characters for file names
(program names).
(5) CPU with a security key
(a) When RCPU or the motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) is used
The backup/restoration can be executed even for a CPU module to which a security key is set.
(b) When QnUDVCPU, QnUDPVCPU, Q17nDSCPU, or Q170MSCPU is used
The backup/restoration cannot be executed on the CPU on which the security key is set.
To execute the backup/restoration, check the setting of the CPU.
When the target controllers of the backup/restoration include both the CPU with the security key and the
CPU without the security key, the backup/restoration is executed only for the CPU without the security key.

5.2 Specifications
This section explains how to display the operation screen for the sequence program monitor (SFC) after the GOT is
turned on. The GOT must have the GOT Platform Library and GOT Function Expansion Library (system applications
(extended functions)) installed on it.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT Starting from a special

Starting from the utility function switch (SFC monitor)
set in the project data
Display the utility. Touch the special function switch.
Refer to the following manual for how to set the special

After the utility is displayed,
touch [Monitor] [SFC monitor] from the Main Menu. function switch.
For how to display the utility, refer to the User's Manual GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
for the GOT used.
Set the channel No., network No.,

station No., and others.
( 4.5.2 (1) Communication
setting window)
Communication setting window
Operate the GOT for reading data

from the PLC and for displaying
the program list window.
( 4.5 How to Operate
PLC Read Screen)
(Continued to next page) (Continued to next page)

Specifying [Block List] for [Display Screen]
From previous page in the SFC monitor detail settings of the From previous page
special function switch
Select a program from the program list

to display the block list screen.
( 4.6 How to Operate Block

List Screen)
Specifying [SFC Diagram] for [Display Screen]

in the SFC monitor detail settings of the special
function switch 5
Select a block on the block list screen to

display the SFC diagram monitor screen.
( 4.7 How to Operate SFC Diagram

Monitor Screen)
End
POINT
(1) How to display the utility
User's Manual for the GOT used
(2) Reading data from PLC when reclosing GOT
Reading data from the PLC is not required when reclosing the GOT power, because SFC programs and
comment files are stored in a SD card for the SFC monitor function.
5.3.1 Setting SFC data storage location
(3) When GOT has no project data
The SFC monitor can be started with the utility even though the GOT has no project data.

Start
Utility Main Menu

or
At the first startup

13.7.3  (3) Active block 13.7.3 
list window (1) Comment file list
window
13.5.2(1) Communication
setting window
13.7.3  13.7.3 
(2) Active step list window (3) Step list window
13.5.1 (1) Password
input window
13.7.3  13.7.3 
(2) Step No./transition (1) Device/contact/coil
13.5.2 (2) Program list window condition No. search search window
window
13.8  (1) Bit devices 13.7.1 

(1) Zoom window
5.5 How to Operate Block List Screen
5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
5 - 10 5. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)

5.3.1 Setting SFC data storage location
 Setting SFC data storage location

The selected drive of the GOT (SD card) can store up to 512 files of SFC data (SFC programs, device comments)
used for the SFC monitor function.
SFC data are stored in the storage location that stores ladder data for the ladder monitor function.
Only the A drive (standard SD card) or B drive (extended memory card) is available for storing SFC data.
5
5. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5 - 11

5.3.2 Reading comment files from SD card
The SFC monitor function uses comment files stored in a SD card installed in the GOT.
 Procedure for using comment files stored in SD cards

The following shows the procedure for using a comment file stored in a SD card.
(1) When displaying comments in language set for language switching of GOT utility
Store comment files in a SD card on the PLC read screen.
For how to store comment files in a SD card on the PLC read screen, refer to the following.
(2) When displaying comments in any language regardless of language set for language switching of
GOT utility
1. Create a SEQCMNT folder in a SD card.

When the SEQCMNT folder already exists,
creating a new SEQCMNT folder is not
required.
2. In the SEQCMNT folder, create folders for CH

No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of
Channel No. the monitored controller with a hierarchy as
shown left.
Network No.
Station No. Item Folder name
CPU No. CH No. CH**
Network No. NET***
Station No. ST***
CPU No. CPU**
Assign numbers to "*" marks.

(When the CH No. is 1, the folder name is
CH01. When the monitor target is the host
station, the folder name is ST255.)

CPU No. 3. In the CPU No. folder, create folders for storing
comment files by character code.
For storing comments with
ASCII code
For storing comments with Item Folder name
GB code
For storing comments with Folder for SJIS code SJIS
KS code
For storing comments with Folder for KS code KS
SJIS code
Folder for GB code GB
Folder for ASCII code ASCII
4. Copy a comment file (.wcd) in the saved project.

When the GX Works2 project is used, the
creation method of a comment file (.wcd) differs
depending on whether the project used can be
or cannot be saved in the GX Developer format.
• Project that can be saved in the GX 5
Developer format
A comment file (.wcd) is created when the
project is saved in the GX Developer format.

• Project that cannot be saved in the GX
Developer format
Export the project by using [Write IC Memory
Card] of GX Works2, and change the
extension of the comment file from [.qcd] to
[.wcd].
5. Store the copied comment files in the folders for
each character code in the SD card.
Comment character code Storage folder name
SJIS code SJIS
KS code KS
GB code GB
ASCII code ASCII
6. Install the SD card with the comment file on the

GOT.
(Example: Storing comment files with ASCII code in the ASCII folder.) Switch comment files on the SFC diagram
monitor screen for displaying the comments in
an appropriate language.

5.3.3 Setting Display Format
The display format of word device values displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen, language, the display mode of
SFC programs, and others can be set.
 Switching languages of SFC programs

Languages (Japanese/Korean/Simplified Chinese) of comments to be displayed on the SFC monitor screens can be
switched during monitoring.
For switching languages, comment files in the language to be displayed must be created in advance.
5.3.2 Reading comment files from SD card
The following shows the relations between the language selected in the GOT utility and comment files with each
character code.
Language Comment file
Japanese Comment files with SJIS code
Korean Comment files with KS code
Simplified Chinese Comment files with GB code
Other than the above Comment files with ASCII code
 Setting display mode of SFC programs

The display mode of SFC programs on the SFC diagram monitor screen can be set.
The MELSAP-L program display mode is available regardless of the read SFC program format (MELSAP3,
MELSAP-L).
In the MELSAP-L program display mode, operation output/transition condition sequence programs are displayed as
[?????] when the GOT displays a SFC program with the MELSAP3 format.
The following shows how the GOT displays sequence programs with and without the MELSAP-L program display
mode.
Item With MELSAP-L program display mode Without MELSAP-L program display mode
The GOT displays a sequence program in

Displayed operation output/transition The GOT displays a sequence program on the zoom window by touching a step or
condition sequence program the SFC diagram monitor screen. transition condition on the SFC diagram
monitor screen.
 Setting zoom comment display mode

Whether to display or hide comments and notes in the zoom window can be set.
5.6.3 Monitoring Mode menu
 Switching display formats between decimal and hexadecimal numbers

The display formats of word device values on the SFC diagram monitor screen can be switched between decimal and
hexadecimal numbers.

 Setting automatic scroll mode
The automatic scroll can be switched between enabled or disabled states.
In the automatic scroll mode, the GOT displays active steps on the SFC diagram monitor screen by automatically
scrolling the screen when all the following conditions are satisfied.
• No active step is displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
• The displayed block has an active step.
5
The step status becomes inactive. An active step in the block is
displayed by automatically
scrolling the screen.

For setting the automatic scroll mode, refer to the following.
For the SFC diagram monitor screen, refer to the following.

On the PLC read screen, the GOT reads SFC programs and comment files used for the SFC monitor function from the
PLC.
The following describes how to operate the PLC read screen.
The following describes the configuration of the PLC read screen displayed after the SFC monitor starts and key
functions on the screen.
1) 5) 2)
3)
3)
4)
3)
6)
8) 9)
10) 7) 3)
2) Target controller Displays CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the target PLC CPU.
3) Keys Keys for operations on the PLC read screen shown in section 13.5.2. (Touch input)
Displays the target PLC CPU model and the drives in a list.
Selecting a drive displays files within the drive in the file list (target controller).
4) Target drive list (target controller)
For the drive that stores files selected in the file list (target controller), [*] is displayed to the left of
the drive name.
Displays the program types, file names/titles, sizes, dates, and times of all the files within the drive
selected in the target drive list (target controller).
5) File list (target controller) For program files, only SFC program files in the program memory can be selected.
For selecting the file name selected in the file list (GOT), the file selection in the file list (GOT) is
canceled.
When a password is set for the selected file, the password input window appears.
( (1) Password input window)

Displays the drive set for [Data save location] in the MELSEC-Q/QnA ladder monitor settings. (For
the SFC monitor function, only the A drive (standard SD card) or B drive (extended memory card)
6) Target drive list (GOT) is available.)
For the drive that stores files displayed in the file list (GOT), [*] is displayed to the left of the drive
name.
Displays the program types, file names/titles, sizes, dates, and times of all the files within the drive
selected in the target drive list (GOT).
7) File list (GOT)
For selecting the file name selected in the file list (target controller), the file selection in the file list
(target controller) is canceled.
8) Total file size Displays the total data size of files selected in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT).
9) Number of selected files Displays the total number of files selected in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT).

5

(1) Password input window
After the password authentication has succeeded, the password is authenticated automatically for the following
files with the same password.
(The password input window is not displayed.)
1) 2) 3)
4)
4)
1) Password type Displays the type of the password to be input. (Program password/Comment password)
3) File name Displays the file name.
4) Keys Keys for operations in the password input window shown in (b) (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key Function
Closes the password input window and cancels the password input operation.
Switches the key type to the value.
Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).
Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).
Authenticates the password set in the password input area.

5.4.2 Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys used for operating the PLC read screen.
Key Function
Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the PLC read screen appears.

( 13.5.2 (1) Communication setting window)
Exits the SFC monitor and returns the screen to the SFC monitor startup screen.

5
Available only when [0:Program Memory] is selected from the target drive list (target controller).
Touching the key selects all the SFC program files, common comment files, and comment files for the selected SFC
program files in the file list (target controller).
When files with the same name are displayed in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT), touching the key

selects a file as shown below.
• For SFC program files
When the updated dates and times differ between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list (target
controller).
(GOT).
• For comment files
When the updated dates and times differ between the files, touching the key selects the latest file.
(GOT).
Writes the file selected in the file list (target controller) into the SD card displayed in the target drive list (GOT).
The file written into the SD card on the PLC read screen is stored in the SEQDAT folder.
After writing, among files other than comment files in the SD card, files that are not selected in the file list (GOT) are
deleted. Then, the program list window appears.

1) 3) 4) 2) 1) 3) 4) 2)
5) 6)
(When the CH No. is input) (When the network No., station No.,
and CPU No. are input)

(b) Key functions
Key Function

When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is
input area.

The GOT displays the read SFC programs in a list.
1)
2)
5
3)

Displays the file names and execution statuses of the read SFC programs.
1) SFC program file list The execution statuses show execution types set for the programs.
A touched SFC program file is highlighted.
2) Keys Keys for operations in the program list window shown in (b). (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key Function
Displays the blocks of the SFC program file selected in the SFC program file list on the block list
screen.

On the block list screen, the GOT displays blocks within the read SFC program in a list.
The following describes how to operate the block list screen.
The following describes the configuration of the block list screen, menus and key functions on the screen.
1) 2) 3)
4)
4)
6)
5)
4)
7)
Displays the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No of the target PLC CPU as shown
3) Program name Displays the file name (without the extension) of the displayed program.
4) Keys Keys for operations on the block list screen shown in section 13.6.2. (Touch input)
Displays the block numbers and block titles in the displayed program.
The block numbers are not displayed with no block.
5) Block list Active blocks are highlighted.
Selecting a block title displays the block data on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
( 5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen)
Displays block information for each block.

6) Block information list When devices are set for the block information, the set devices are displayed in the corresponding
cells.

5.5.2 Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys used for operating the block list screen.
Key Function
Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the block list screen appears.

Touching the key in the device test mode cancels the device test mode.
Displays menus used for operations on the block list screen.


5

5.5.3 Menus
The following shows operations for the menus displayed on the block list screen.
 Display menu
Displays the comment file list window. 13.7.3  Display menu (1)
Displays the program list window. 13.5.2 (2)
Displays the PLC read screen. 5.4

On the SFC diagram monitor screen, the GOT monitors and displays data of the block selected on the block list screen in
the SFC diagram.
The following describes how to operate the SFC diagram monitor screen.
 SFC diagram monitor screen

The following describes the configuration of the SFC diagram monitor screen, menus and key functions on the
screen.
1) 2) 3) 4) 11)
5) 5)
6)
Step status display
7)
8) Active :
Inactive :
9) 5)
10)
12) 13) 14)
Displays the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the target PLC CPU as shown
2) Program name Displays the file name of the displayed program.
3) Block No. Displays the block No. of the displayed block.
4) Block title Displays the block title of the displayed block.
5) Keys Keys for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen shown in section 13.7.2. (Touch input)
Displays the block No. of the block displayed in the SFC diagram display area.
6) Block switching tab Touching a tab displays the corresponding block data in the SFC diagram display area. (Tabs
displayed to the right of the touched tab are removed.)
Displays the block information of the displayed block.

When the displayed block is in any status of the block information, the corresponding device is
7) Block information display area
highlighted.
When the block information is set, the set devices are displayed.
8) Column No. Displays the column numbers.
9) Row No. Displays the row numbers.

Displays a SFC program in the SFC diagram format.

• Step display
Step No.
Step
Operation output sequence program*1
Comment
Jump destination block No.

10) SFC diagram display area Touching a step displays the zoom window.
( (1) Zoom window)
Touching a step with a jump destination block No. displays a block switching tab, and then
5
the jump destination block data is displayed in the SFC diagram display area.
• Transition condition display
Transition condition No.

Transition condition
Transition condition sequence program*1
Comment
Touching a transition condition displays the zoom window.
( (1) Zoom window)
11) Device current value display area Displays the current values of word devices displayed in the SFC diagram display area.
Displays [Scrolling automatically] with the automatic scroll mode.

13) Automatic scroll status display area Nothing is displayed without the automatic scroll mode.
( n Setting automatic scroll mode)
Displays the number of active steps in the displayed block.

14) Number of active steps Touching the item displays the active step list window.
( 13.7.3  (2) Active step list window)
*1 Operation output/transition condition sequence programs are displayed in the MELSAP-L program display mode only.
POINT
Displayed contents of SFC diagram monitor screen
(1) Display mode at first display of SFC diagram monitor screen
The display mode state at the first display of the SFC diagram monitor screen differs depending on the SFC
program format.
SFC program format State at the first display
MELSAP3 format Without MELSAP-L program display mode
MELSAP-L format With MELSAP-L program display mode
For the display mode of SFC programs, refer to the following.

n Setting display mode of SFC programs

(2) Comment display at first display of SFC diagram monitor screen
The following shows the order of comment files to be used at the first display of the SFC diagram monitor
screen after reading data from the PLC. (When the SD card has no comment file, no comment is displayed.)
Priority order Comment files used for SFC diagram monitor screen
1 Comment files by program within the SEQCMNT folder in the SD card
2 Common comment files within the SEQCMNT folder in the SD card
3 Comment files by program within the SEQDAT folder in the SD card
4 Common comment files within the SEQDAT folder in the SD card
(1) Zoom window

The GOT can display operation output/transition condition sequence programs in the ladder format.
1)
2) 3)
ON/OFF status display of contacts and coils

ON :
OFF :
• For displaying operation output sequence program

The step number and step comment are displayed.
1) Type
• For displaying transition condition sequence program
The transition condition number and transition condition comment are displayed.
Displays an operation output/transition condition sequence program.

2) Ladder program display area Comments and notes are displayed in the zoom comment display mode.
3) Keys Keys for operations in the zoom window shown in (b). (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key Function

5.6.2 Key functions
The following shows the functions of keys used for operating the SFC diagram monitor screen.
Key Function
Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the SFC diagram monitor screen appears.

Touching the key in the device test mode cancels the device test mode.
Displays menus used for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
( 5.6.3 Search menu)
5
( 5.6.3 Monitoring Mode menu)


5.6.3 Menus
The following shows operations for the menus displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
 Search menu
Displays the device/contact/coil search window. (1)
Displays the step No./transition condition No. search window. (2)
Displays the step No./transition condition No. search window. (2)
Displays the step list window. (3)
Displays the block list screen. 5.5

(1) Device/contact/coil search window
The GOT can search for devices in a SFC program.
1) 1)
2) 2)
(For alphabet input ) (For numerical input)

5
1) Device input area Set a device to be searched.
2) Keys Keys for operations in the device/contact/coil search window shown in (b) (Touch input)

(b) Key functions
Key Function
Switches the key type to the alphabet.
Searches for the input device in the upward direction.

When multiple blocks are set, the GOT searches for the device in descending order of the block No.
When the device is found without the MELSAP-L program display mode, the GOT displays an
operation output/transition condition sequence program corresponding to the step or transition
condition with the device in the zoom window.
Search for the input device in the downward direction.

When multiple blocks are set, the GOT searches for the device in ascending order of the block No.
When the device is found without the MELSAP-L program display mode, the GOT displays an
operation output/transition condition sequence program corresponding to the step or transition
condition with the device in the zoom window.
HINT
Precautions for device/contact/coil search window
Searching for any bits in word devices is not available.
Specify word devices for searching for any bits.

(2) Step No./transition condition No. search window
The GOT can search for steps and transition conditions in a block.
1) 2) 1) 2)
3) 3)
(Step No. search window) (Transition condition No. search window)
Set the block No. of the block to be searched.

1) Block No. input area
The GOT searches for a step or transition condition in the set block.
Step No./transition condition Set the step No. or transition condition No. of the step or transition condition to be
2)
No. input area searched.
Keys for operations in the step No./transition condition No. search window shown in (b)
3) Keys
(Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key Function
• When the cursor is in the block No. input area

Moves the cursor to the step No./transition condition No. input area.
• When the cursor is in the step No./transition condition No. input area
Searches for a step or transition condition in the set block.
When the searched step or transition condition is found, the step No./transition condition No.
search window closes and the GOT displays data of the step or transition condition on the SFC
diagram monitor screen. (The step or transition condition is highlighted.)

(3) Step list window
The GOT displays steps in a block.
1)
2)
3) 2)

2) Keys Keys for operations in the step list window shown in (b) (Touch input)
Displays the step numbers and step comments of the steps in the displayed block.
3) Step list Selecting a step searches for the step, and the GOT displays the step data on the SFC
diagram monitor screen. (Active steps are highlighted.)
(b) Key functions
Key Function
Displays the active step list window.

( (2) Active step list window)

 Display menu
Sets the MELSAP-L program display mode.

5.3.3 Setting display
Touching the key in the MELSAP-L program display mode cancels the
mode of SFC programs
MELSAP-L program display mode.
Sets the zoom comment display mode.

5.3.3 Setting zoom
Touching the key in the zoom comment display mode cancels the zoom
comment display mode
comment display mode.
Displays the comment file list window. (1)
Sets the automatic scroll mode.

5.3.3 Setting automatic
Touching the key in the automatic scroll mode cancels the automatic
scroll mode
scroll mode.
Displays the active step list window. (2)
Displays the active block list window. (3)
Displays the program list window. 13.5.2 (2)
Displays the PLC read screen. 5.4
Starts the ladder monitor.

Touching the key with a device selected can automatically search for the 13.
device with the ladder monitor.*1
*1 For the automatic search with the ladder monitor, settings for automatically reading sequence programs are required.
For settings for automatically reading sequence programs, refer to the following.

(1) Comment file list window
The GOT displays the comment file list.
1) 2)
5
2)

Among comment files stored in the SD card, the file names and titles of the comment files
and common comment files used for the displayed SFC program are displayed.
1) Comment file list For switching comments, select a comment file to be used.
For hiding comments, select [Do not display comments].
A selected comment file is highlighted.
2) Keys Keys for operations in the comment file list window shown in (b) (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key Function
Closes the comment file list window and displays the SFC diagram monitor screen with the
comments of the file selected from the comment file list.

(2) Active step list window
The GOT displays active steps in the displayed block.
1)
2)
3) 2)
2) Keys Keys for operations in the active step list window shown in (b) (Touch input)
Displays the step numbers and step comments of the active steps in the displayed block.
3) Active step list Selecting a step searches for the step, and the GOT displays the step data on the SFC
diagram monitor screen.
(b) Key functions
Key Function
Displays the step list window.

5.6.3 Search menu (3) Step list window
POINT
Precautions for active step list window
When the statuses of steps change, the displayed contents of the active step list in the active step list window
change. Therefore, selecting a step may be difficult depending on the frequency of the step status change.
When selecting a step is difficult, select a step from the step list in the step list window.
5.6.3 Search menu (3) Step list window

(3) Active block list window
The GOT displays active blocks in the read SFC program.
1)
2) 1)
5
1) Keys Keys for operations in the active block list window shown in (b) (Touch input)

Displays the block numbers and block titles of active blocks in the read SFC program.
2) Active block list
Selecting a block displays the block data on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
(b) Key functions
Key Function
Displays the block list screen.

POINT
Precautions for active block list window
When the statuses of blocks change, the displayed contents of the active block list in the active block list window
change. Therefore, selecting a block may be difficult depending on the frequency of the block status change.
When selecting a block is difficult, select a block from the block list on the block list screen.

 Monitoring Mode menu
5.3.3 Switching display

Displays the device values in the device current value display area as 16-bit
formats between decimal
decimal numbers.
and hexadecimal numbers


decimal numbers.


floating-point numbers with the exponential representation.

5.7 Test Operation
In the device test mode of the SFC monitor, device values can be changed on the screen.
For setting the device test mode, refer to the following.
5.5.2 Key functions
5.6.2 Key functions
The test operation of devices is available by touching devices on the following screens in the device test mode.
Screen applicable to device test mode Reference section
Block information list on the block list screen 5.5.1 Displayed contents
SFC diagram display area on the SFC diagram monitor screen 5.6.1 SFC diagram monitor
Device current value display area on the SFC diagram monitor screen screen
Ladder program display area in the zoom window

5.6.1 SFC diagram monitor
screen (1)
5
Touching a device displays the device test window.
(1) When touching bit devices

A bit device is switched between ON and OFF states in the device test window.
(2) When touching word devices
The GOT writes the value input in the device test window into the selected word device.
 How to operate device test window

(1) Bit devices
1)
2)
(b) Key functions
Key Function
Turns on the bit device and writes the device state to the PLC CPU.
Turns off the bit device and writes the device state to the PLC CPU.

5.7 Test Operation
(2) Word devices
1) 2) 3) 1) 2) 3)
4) 4)
(Monitoring mode : 16-bit integer (DEC)) (Monitoring mode : 32-bit integer (HEX))
2) Device value input area Set the value to be written into the selected device.
3) Input mode Displays the current input mode. (DEC: decimal number. HEX: hexadecimal number)
(b) Key functions
Key Function
Closes the device test window.
Switches the input modes. (DEC, HEX)
Writes the value input in the device value input area into the PLC CPU.

5.7 Test Operation
The following shows the error messages for the SFC monitor and the corrective actions.
(1) Check the communications between the GOT and PLC

In the device test mode, the GOT fails to CPU, and make sure that the GOT communicates with the
Failed to write the value to the device. write the value into the device of the PLC PLC CPU.
CPU. (2) Check if the target device is writable with prameters of the
target PLC CPU.
Check the communications between the GOT and PLC CPU,

The GOT cannot communicate with the
Failed to communicate with CPU. and make sure that the GOT communicates with the PLC
target PLC CPU.
CPU.
(1) When no SD card is installed, install a SD card.
File access error. Confirm the SD card. A file access error occurs.
(2) When the SD card access switch is off, turn on the switch.
(3) Check if the SD card is formatted with FAT16. 5
When the SD card is not formatted with FAT16, format the
SD card with FAT16 and install the card in the GOT.
• Check the communications between the GOT and PLC

CPU, and make sure that the GOT communicates with the

• The GOT cannot communicate with the PLC CPU.
Failed to get the information. PLC CPU. • Select the file after changing the message display
• A file with faulty file name is selected. language to one which can display the file name in the
utility.
• Change the file name with GX Developer.
Failed to save files because of an The SD card has insufficient space for (1) Delete files in the SD card.
insufficient capacity of SD card. storing files. (2) Install a large capacity SD card.
The file(file name) is broken. The file is (1) Do not select broken files.
The file read from the SD card is broken.
unselected. (2) Overwrite the broken file with the unbroken file.
(1) When no SD card is installed, install a SD card.

(2) When the SD card access switch is off, turn on the switch.
(3) Check if folders and files within the SEQDAT folder in the
The GOT fails to write the file into the SD SD card are writable. When the folders and files are not
Failed to write (file name) to SD card.
card. writable, make sure that the folders and files are writable.
(4) Check if the SD card is formatted with FAT16.
When the SD card is not formatted with FAT16, format the
SD card with FAT16 and install the card in the GOT.
The SFC monitor is started with [Data save

Set [Data save location] to [A: Built-in SD card] or [B:Memory
Change the Data save location of location] is set to a drive other than [A: Built-
card] in the MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor setting of the
Q/QnA ladder monitor to A: or B: in SD card] and [B:Memory card] in the
GOT utility.
MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor setting.
The GOT cannot display a sequence

program in the zoom window because the
The ladder block is too big to display. Split the ladder block.
program has a ladder block with 25 or more
lines.
The GOT cannot display the specified block

The specified block does not exist. Correct the program with GX Developer and operate the GOT
data in the SFC diagram because the
Confirm the program. for reading the file from the PLC.
specified block does not exist.
The GOT cannot display the program file

The file(file name) is broken. Perform data on the block list screen or SFC diagram
Operate the GOT for reading the file from the PLC.
PLC Read and read the file again. monitor screen because the program file is
broken.
The GOT cannot read the target device

The device range has been changed. values of the SFC monitor because the
Operate the GOT for reading the file from the PLC.
Please read the file again. device range is changed in the PLC
parameter setting during the SFC monitor.
The program file specified by a key on the

Cannot read programs other than SFC Specify a SFC program by a key on the block list screen or
block list screen or the SFC diagram monitor
program. the SFC diagram monitor screen.
screen is not a SFC program.

6. NETWORK MONITOR
6.1 Features
The network monitor function enables the GOT to monitor and display the statuses of the MELSECNET/H,
MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET(II), CC-Link IE controller networks, and CC-Link IE field networks.
The features of the network monitor are described below.
 Selectable from detailed monitoring or other station monitoring for a desired network by
the line monitor
The line monitor enables you to monitor the statuses of all network lines connected to the host.
In addition, you can also perform detailed monitoring of a desired network and monitoring of other stations by touch
input on the line monitor. 6
NETWORK MONITOR
(GOT wirh VGA or higher resolution) (GOT wirh QVGA resolution)
 Monitoring available for the detailed network information with the detailed monitor
Dedicated monitor screens are displayed according to the network type of the connected host.
Network type:MELSECNET(II), master station
MELSECNET(II), local station
MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H, control station and normal station
MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H, remote master station
CC-Link IE controller network, control station and normal station
CC-Link IE field network, master station and local station
6. NETWORK MONITOR 6-1

6.1 Features
 Monitoring available for other stations statuses with the other station monitor
You can monitor the following statuses of other stations connected to the network.
• Communication status of each station
• Data link status of each station
• Parameter status of each station
• CPU action status of each station
• CPU RUN status of each station
• Loop status of each station
Other station monitor menu
Other station communication status monitor
6-2 6. NETWORK MONITOR

6.1 Features
6.2 Specifications
This section describes the system configuration of the network monitor.

following.
Controller
RCPU
QCPU (Q mode), motion controller (Q series)*1
LCPU
QnACPU
ACPU/QCPU (A mode)
6
Motion controller (A series)
*1 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be
monitored.
NETWORK MONITOR
 Connection type
(1) RCPU
( : Available, : Partly restricted, : Unavailable)
Function Connection type between GOT and controller
MELSEC CC-Link IE CC-Link

NET/H controller connection
Direct Serial
Bus Ethernet connection, connection*1,
Name Description CPU communication
connection connection MELSEC CC-Link IE
connection connection
NET/10 field ID*3 G4*4
connection connection*2
Monitors the statuses of

the following networks.
Network • CC-Link IE controller
monitor network
• CC-Link IE field
network


6.2 Specifications
(2) When the GOT is connected to a QCPU (Q mode), motion controller (Q series), QnACPU, or motion
controller (A series)
MELSEC CC-Link IE CC-Link

NET/H controller connection
Direct Serial Ethernet
Bus connection, connection*1,
Name Description CPU communication connection
connection MELSEC CC-Link IE
connection connection *6
NET/10 field ID*3 G4*4
*5
connection connection*2
Monitors the statuses of

the following networks.
• MELSECNET/H
network
• MELSECNET/10
Network network *5
monitor • MELSECNET(II)
network
• CC-Link IE controller
network
• CC-Link IE field
network

*5 When the GOT is connected to the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10, use a QCPU and a network module (QJ71LP21,
QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, QJ71LP21G, or QJ71BR11) of function version B or a later version.
*6 Network monitor cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.
(3) When the GOT is connected to an ACPU/QCPU (A mode)

CC-Link
Bus Direct CPU Computer link Ethernet MELSECNET/10 connection
Name Description
connection connection connection connection connection
ID*1 G4*2
Monitors the statuses of the

following networks.
• MELSECNET/H network
Network *3
• MELSECNET/10 network
monitor
• MELSECNET(II) network
• CC-Link IE controller network
• CC-Link IE field network

*3 Monitoring is not possible when the target CPU is AnUCPU and a MELSECNET/10 network module is used.


Write the package data that has the system application (Extended function) for the sequence program monitor
(SFC) to the GOT.


6.2 Specifications
6.2.2 Network information that can be monitored
The network information that can be monitored with the network monitor and the link types are as follows.
( : Can be monitored, : Cannot be monitored)
MELSEC
MELSEC MELSEC
NET/10, CC-Link IE CC-Link IE CC-Link IE CC-Link IE
MELSEC MELSEC NET/10, NET/10,
MELSEC controller controller field field
NET(II) NET(II) MELSEC MELSEC
Function Network Information NET/H network network network network
master local NET/H NET/H
remote control normal master local
station station control normal
master station station station station
station station
station
Network category display
Network number display
Station number display
Host operation mode
Line monitor Host loop line status
Loopback execution status
Link scan time display 6

Data link system loop status
Host communication status *1
NETWORK MONITOR
Host number
Host
Host
information
Network number
Group number
Specified control station
Current control station
Control station Communication information

information
Sub-control-station link
Detailed monitor
Remote-I/O-master-station
station number
Total of linked stations
Largest connected stations
Largest data-linked station

Data link
information Communication status
Causes of interrupted
communication
Causes of data link stoppage
Constant link scan Constant link scan
BWY receive BWY from the master station
BW from the master station in

BW receive
the higher loop

6.2 Specifications
MELSEC
MELSEC MELSEC
NET/10, CC-Link IE CC-Link IE CC-Link IE CC-Link IE
MELSEC MELSEC NET/10, NET/10,
MELSEC controller controller field field
NET NET MELSEC MELSEC
Function Network Information NET/H network network network network
(II) master (II) local NET/H NET/H
remote control normal master local
station station control normal
master station station station station
station Station
station
Forward loop status *2 *2 *2 *3 *3
Reverse loop status *2 *2 *2 *3 *3
Loopback station (forward loop) *2 *2 *2 *3 *3
Loopback station (reverse loop) *2 *2 *2 *3 *3
Loop switching frequency *2 *2 *2
Loopback
PORT1 Loop *4
Detailed monitor
PORT2 Loop *4
Loop Back Sta.1 *4
Loop Back Sta.2 *4
#of Loop Switching
Parameter settings
Designation of reserved station
Host status Communications mode
Designation of transmission *2 *2 *2
Transmission status *2 *2 *2
Communication status of each

station
Communications status of each

station
Parameter status of each station

Other station monitor
CPU action status of each
station
CPU RUN status of each station
Loop status of each station *2 *2 *2
*1 Monitoring is only possible when connected to a MELSECNET(II) local station.

*2 Monitoring is possible only when using a MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 loop system.
*3 The loop names vary depending on the network system to be monitored as shown below.
MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10,
CC-Link IE controller network
MELSECNET(II) network systems
Forward loop OUT-side loop
Reverse loop IN-side loop
*4 Monitoring is possible only when using a loopback function.

6.2 Specifications
6.2.3 Access range
In the bus connection, direct CPU connection, serial communication connection, or Ethernet connection, only the host
station can be monitored.
In MELSECNET/H connection or MELSECNET/10 connection, only the control station can be monitored.
In CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station), only the master station can be monitored.
In CC-Link connection (via G4), only the host and master stations can be monitored.
When the GOT is connected to the remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system, no stations can be monitored.
The GOT cannot monitor stations on the MELSECNET/G network system.
The access range other than above is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller.
NETWORK MONITOR

6.2 Specifications
6.2.4 Precautions
(1) Station monitored as the host

The station monitored as the host differs depending on the connection type.
Connection type Station monitored as the host
Bus connection, direct CPU connection, serial communication

Connected station (target)
connection
Station set as the host with the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3

Ethernet connection
(GOT2000)
MELSECNET/H connection,
MELSECNET/10 connection Control station
CC-Link IE controller network connection
CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station),

CC-Link connection (Via G4), Master station
CC-Link IE field network connection
(2) When the network monitor cannot be displayed correctly

The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly in the following cases.
(a) When the network module is performing offline testing
The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly during offline testing.
Set the network module mode to online.
(b) When the network parameter has been changed
The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly when the network parameter is changed.
Restart the network monitor.
(c) When there is a network parameter error
The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly when there is a network parameter error.
Review the network parameter.
(d) When the network parameter has not been set to the QCPU
The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly when the network parameter is not set to the QCPU.
Be sure to set the network parameter when monitoring the network with the GOT.
(e) When changing the head addresses on CPU side to which refresh parameter is set
The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly if the SB and SW head addresses on CPU side are
changed while refresh parameter is set in the network parameter for the QCPU.
To monitor the network with the GOT, set the SB and SW head addresses on CPU side to default.
However, for CC-Link IE field network connection, set the SB and SW head addresses on CPU side
according to the position where the network module is installed.
Installation position of the network module
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
0000 0200 0400 0600
(3) When monitoring MELSECNET/H, CC-Link IE controller network, or CC-Link IE field network
Even if a network module on the MELSECNET/H, CC-Link IE controller network, or CC-Link IE field network is
being monitored, a MELSECNET/10 display is provided in either of the following cases:
• The normal station has been started due to a communication error (cable disconnection, etc.)
• The monitor target is the remote master station.
(4) When monitoring MELSECNET(II)
When connected to a QnACPU and the master station of the MELSECNET(II), monitoring cannot be done with
the keyword being defined.
(5) When the CPU type of the connection target of the GOT is AnNCPU or AnACPU
Even when using the network module of the MELSECNET/10, the network information that can be monitored is
the content of the MELSECNET(II).

6.2 Specifications
(6) Display of loop status for CC-Link IE field network
In ring topology with CC-Link IE field network, if an error occurs in a local module which is not directly connected
to a master module and the network comes into loopback status, information cannot be acquired from the
master station.
Therefore, in the above case, the loop status cannot be displayed on the line monitor normally.
・When an error occurs in a local station which is directly connected to a master station
Local station
Error The loop status can

be displayed normally.
Master station Local station
GOT
・When an error occurs in a local station which is not directly connected to a master station
Local station
The loop status cannot

be displayed normally. 6
Error
Master station Local station
NETWORK MONITOR
GOT

6.2 Specifications
6.3 Operations for display
This section explains how to display the network monitor screen after the GOT is turned on.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT. Starting from the special

function switch
(Network monitor) set in the
Starting from the utility project data
After the utility is displayed, Refer to the following manual for how to set the special
touch [Debug] [Network monitor] from the Main Menu. function switch.
For how to display the utility, refer to the User's Manual
for the GOT used. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
Set the channel number.
Set the channel number of the

controller targeted to the network.
The network monitor startup
The network monitor starts after a

channel number is selected.
Exit
6 - 10 6. NETWORK MONITOR
POINT
(2) Displaying communication setting window
After turning on the GOT, the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the network
monitor only.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the Ch : button on the
network monitor screen. ( 6.4 Operation Procedures)
(3) If the project data has not been downloaded
The network monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the
GOT.
NETWORK MONITOR
6. NETWORK MONITOR 6 - 11
Utility Main Menu
or
END
Touch Ch :
Line monitor Other station monitor menu screen
END
Touch a
module.
RET
Touch a box.
(Select a box)
RET
RET (Select a
menu item)
Detailed monitor Other station monitor screen
END
END
(1) Starting the function by using the special function switch (System launcher)
You can start the network monitor from a user-created screen by selecting the connection destination with a
special function switch to which [System Launcher] is set.
User-created screen
(special function switch
(system launcher)) System configuration screen The network monitor is started.
Start the system launcher. Select the target function.
[×] key
[End] key
POINT
6
2. SYSTEM LAUNCHER
NETWORK MONITOR
6.4 Operation Procedures
This section describes the information and key functions displayed on the network monitor screen.
The display screen of the network monitor varies depending on the GOT used.
6.4.1 Line monitor
This section describes the structure of the monitor screen and the common operations used when executing the line
monitor.
 Display contents and keys functions

This section describes the line monitor screen configuration and the function of keys displayed on the screen after
starting the network monitor.
1)
2) 7)
3)
4) 8)
5)
9) 6)
No. Display contents
1) This shows the operation mode of the host. (On-line, Off-line, Test*1)
2) This shows the status of the F-loop (Forward loop). (OK, NG)*2
3) This shows the status of the R-loop (Reverse loop). (OK, NG)*2
4) This shows whether the loopback was executed or not. (Executed, Not executed)
This shows the link scan time required for the control station and the normal station, for the remote master station and the remote I/O
station, and for the master station and all the sub-stations.
5) Maximum (the maximum value of link scan time)
Minimum (the minimum value of link scan time)
Current (the current value of link scan time)
This shows the communication status of the host. (Only for MELSECNET(II) local station)
P-MTR WAIT :Ready to receive parameters from the master station.
6)
Cyclic com :Normal communication
Com. suspension :Communication is suspended because the host is disconnected.
7) This shows the network category, network number, and station number.
For the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network systems, the loop status is displayed as shown below.
(Forward loop: F, Reverse loop: R)
(a) Forward loop: OK (b) Forward loop: OK (c) Forward loop: NG

Reverse loop: OK Reverse loop: NG Reverse loop: OK
F F F
R R R
(d) Loopback in execution (e) Forward loop: NG (f) MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus (g) MELSECNET/10 coaxial
Reverse loop: NG (OK) bus (NG)
F
F
R R
For the MELSECNET(II)network system, the loop status is displayed as shown below. (Forward loop: F, Reverse loop: R) 6
(a) Data link in execution in forward loop (b) Data link in execution in reverse loop. (c) Loopback is performed in the forward/
reverse loop direction.
F
F F
NETWORK MONITOR
R R
(d) Loopback is performed in the forward loop (e) Loopback is performed in the reverse (f) Data link is not available.
direction only. loop direction only.
8)
F F
F
R
R R
For the CC-Link IE controller network, the loop status is displayed as shown below.
(a) Normal status (b) Loopback in execution (c) All stations with errors
For the CC-Link IE field network, the loop status is displayed as shown below.
(a) Normal status (ring topology) (b) Loopback in execution on PORT1 side (c) Loopback in execution on PORT2 side
(ring topology) (ring topology)
PORT1 PORT1
PORT2 PORT2
(d) Error status (ring topology) (e) Normal status (star topology/line (f) Error status (star topology/line topology)
topology)
9) This shows the number of installed network modules.
*1 [Test] is only displayed when using MELSECNET(II).
When using a system other than MELSECNET(II), [Off-line] is displayed even during testing of the forward or reverse loop.
*2 The loop names vary depending on the network system to be monitored as shown below.
MELSECNET/H,
MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE controller network CC-Link IE field network
MELSECNET(II) network systems
Forward loop OUT-side loop PORT1-side loop
Reverse loop IN-side loop PORT2-side loop
POINT
When the GOT target is AnACPU or AnNCPU
"MELSECNET(II)" is displayed even if a MELSECNET/10 network module is installed.
In addition, if there is a master station and local station, module 1 of the line monitor is displayed as "Master
station".
Network module Display on the GOT
1st module 2nd module Module 1 Module 2
Local station Master station Master station Local station
(2) Key functions

This section describes the function of keys to be used for the line monitor operations.
Key Function
Exits the line monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started.
Switches to the detailed monitor screen that corresponds to the module displayed on the current monitor
screen.
This key is effective for each screen.
Switches to the other station monitor menu that corresponds to the network displayed on the current
monitor screen.
This key is effective for each screen.
Changes the monitoring destination CPU using the controller number.

(For multi-CPU system connection only)
The controller number is displayed according to the number of CPUs loaded.
Touch to switch the displayed module to the next one.

/
Touch to switch the displayed module to the previous one.
6.4.2 Detailed monitor
This section describes the detailed monitor and the common operations used when executing the line monitor.
 Display contents and keys functions: acting as a MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10

Control station/normal station
This section describes the contents of the detailed monitor and the function of on-screen keys. All these are
displayed and used when the host acts as the control station/normal station on the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/
10.
1) 4)
5)
2)
6)
3) 6
NETWORK MONITOR
No. Item Display contents
• This Station's # : Indicates the station number of the host.

1) TsSt' Info • Network # : Indicates the network number.
• Group # : Indicates the group number.
• Spc Ctrlr Sta : Indicates the station number of the station that is specified as a control
station.
• Curr Ctrl Sta : Indicates the station number of a station that is currently acting as the
control station.
• Com Info : Indicates whether the host is communicating with the control station or the
2) Ctrl St Info
sub-control station.
• SubCtrl Sta Com : Indicates whether there is a sub-control station link.
• Rmt I/OMstSt*1 : Displays the station number of the remote I/O master station for X/Y
communication block1 and block 2.
Displays "None" when there is no setting.
• Total of L-Sta : Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked. The maximum
number is defined by common parameters.
• Largest Nrm Sta : Indicates the maximum station number of the station performing a
communication in a normal condition.
• Largest DL-Sta : Indicates the maximum station number of the station that is data-linked.
• Com Status : Shows the current communications status of the host. (D-Link in prog/D-
Link Stop (A)/D-Link Stop (H)/B-Pass excut/Disconnection/Loop test/Set
3) D-Link Info
Conf. test/Sta Odr. Conf./Com. test/Offline test/Reset. in prgr.)
• Causes of Ssp : Indicates the causes why the communications were interrupted. This
indicates "Normal" if communications are normal. (Normal/Offline/Offline
Test/Line error/Disconnection/Initialize/Others (error codes))
• Causes of Stop : Indicates the causes why the data link was stopped. This indicates
"Normal" if communications are normal. (Stop disignat/No common para/
Host Para error/Host CPU error/Com. suspension/Others)
4) Constant LS Indicates the predetermined time of constant link scans.
• FLoop : Shows the status of the forward loop lines of the host.
(Normal/LoopBK Trans/D-Link Impo)
• RLoop : Shows the status of the reverse loop lines of the host.
• FLoop Back Station : Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along
*2
the forward loop.
5) LoopBK Info
Displays "---" when the loopback is operating normally.
• RLoop Back Station : Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along
the reverse loop.
• # of Loop Switching : Indicates the cumulative number of times for which loops have been
switched.
• Parameter Setting : Common Param, Common + Spec if, Default Param, Default + Specif
• Reserved Sta : Indicates the availability of a reserved station. (Have/None)
6) TsSt' Sta • Communication Mode : Indicates either "Normal mode" or "Constant LS."
• Transmission Mode : Indicates either "Normal Trans" or "Multiple Trans."*2
• Transmission Stat : Indicates either "Normal Trans" or "Multiple Trans."*2
*1 This is not displayed when the CPU type of the GOT connection target is AnNCPU or AnACPU
*2 "---" is displayed when coaxial bus connections are established.
(2) Key functions

The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed monitor.
Key Function
Returns to the line monitor.
Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was executed.
 Display contents and keys functions: acting as a MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 remote
master station
This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the function of on-screen keys when the
host acts as the remote master station on the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10.
1) 4)
5)
2)
6)
3)
6
• This Sations # : Indicates the station number of the host.
NETWORK MONITOR
1) TsStí Info • Network # : Indicates the network number.
• Group # : Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)
• Spc Ctrl Sta : Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)

• Curr Ctrl Sta : Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)
2) Ctrl St Info
• Com Info : Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)
• SubCtrl-Sta Com : Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)
• Total of L-Sta : Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked, which is set by
common parameters.
• Largest Nrm Sta : Indicates the maximum station number of the station that is connected in a
normal condition.
• Largest DL-Sta : Indicates the maximum station number of the station that is performing
data link.
• Com Status : Shows the current communications status of the host. (D-Link in prog/D-
3) D-Link Info Link Stop (A)/D-Link Stop (H)/B-Pass excut/Disconnection/Loop test/Set
Conf. test/Sta Odr. Conf./Com. test/Offline test/Reset. in prgr.)
• Causes of Ssp : Indicates the causes why the communications were interrupted. This
indicates "Normal" if communications are normal. (Normal/Offline/Offline
Test/Line error/Disconnection/Initialize/Others (error codes))
• Causes of Stop : Indicates the causes why the data link was stopped. This indicates
"Normal" if communications are normal. (Stop disignat/No common para/
Host Para error/Host CPU error/Com. suspension/Others (error codes))
4) Constant LS Indicates the predetermined time of constant link scans.
• FLoop : Shows the status of the forward loop lines of the host.
• RLoop : Shows the status of the reverse loop lines of the host.
*1
the forward loop.
5) LoopBK Info
the reverse loop.
switched.
• Parameter Setting : Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)

• Reserved Sta : Indicates the availability of a reserved station. (Have/None)
6) TsSt' Sta • Communication Mode : Indicates either "Normal mode" or "Constant LS."
• Transmission Mode : Indicates either "Normal Trans" or "Multiple Trans."*1
• Transmission Stat : Indicates either "Normal Trans" or "Multiple Trans."*1
*1 "---" is displayed when coaxial bus connections are established.
(2) Key functions

Key Function
Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started.
 Display contents and keys functions: acting as a MELSECNET(II) master station
host acts as the master station on the MELSECNET(II).
1)
3)
2)
1) TsStí Info
This Stationís # : This shows the station number of the host. 6
This Stationís : Indicates the category of the host.
2) D-Link Info Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked, which is defined by common parameters.
• FLoop : Shows the status of the forward loop lines of the host. (Normal/NG)
NETWORK MONITOR
• RLoop : Shows the status of the reverse loop lines of the host. (Normal/NG)
the forward loop.
When loopback is normal, "---" is displayed.
When there is no loopback station, "F" is displayed.
3) LoopBK Info
the reverse loop.
When loopback is normal, "---" is displayed.
When there is no loopback station, "R" is displayed.
switched.
(2) Key functions

Key Function
 Display contents and keys functions: acting as a MELSECNET(II) local station
host acts as the local station on the MELSECNET(II).
1)
6)
2)
3)
4)
5)
• This Station's # : Indicates the station number of the host.

1) TsStí Info
• This Station's : Indicates the category of the host.
• Total of L-Sta : Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked, which is
2) D-Link Info
defined by common parameters.
This shows the communication status of the host.

3) Com status
(Parameter wait/Cyclic comm/Com. suspension)
This shows the status of receiving Device BWY from the master station.
4) BWY From Master OK: Data is being received by cyclic communication.
NG: Unable to receive because the host is disconnected, etc.
This shows the status of receiving Device BW from the master station of a dual-layer system.
5) BW From Hostmaster OK: Data is being received by cyclic communication.
NG: Unable to receive because the host is disconnected, etc.
• FLoop : Shows the status of the forward loop lines of the host. (Normal/NG)
• RLoop : Shows the status of the reverse loop lines of the host. (Normal/NG)
6) LoopBK Info • FLoop Back Station : Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)
• RLoop Back Station : Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)
• # of Loop Switching : Not displayed. ("---" is displayed.)
(2) Key functions

Key Function
 Display contents and keys functions when monitoring CC-Link IE controller network
This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the functions of on-screen keys when the
GOT monitors a control station or normal station on the CC-Link IE controller network set as the host station.
1) 4)
5)
2)
6)
3)
No. Item Display contents 6

• This Station's# : Displays the host station number.
1) TsSt' Info • NetWork# : Displays the network number of the host station.
• Group# : Displays the group number.
NETWORK MONITOR
• Spc Ctrl Sta : Displays the station number set as the control station.
• Curr Ctrl Sta : Displays the station number of the station currently operating as the
control station.
• Com Info : Displays whether the GOT communicates with the control station or sub-
2) CtrlSt Info control station.
• SubCtrl Sta Com : Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
• RmtI/OMstSta : Displays the station numbers of the I/O master stations for block 1 and
block 2.
[None] is displayed with no setting.
• Total of L-Sta : Displays the total number of stations on the monitored network set for
common parameters.
• Largest Nrm Sta : Displays the maximum station number of the station communicating
normally.
• Largest DL-Sta : Displays the maximum station number of the station performing a data
link.
• Com Status : Displays the current communication status of the host station.
(D-Link in prog., D-Link stopped, B-Pass excut, B-Pass stopped, Offline
test, Offline)
3) D-Link Info
• Cause of Ssp*1 : Displays the reason for the interrupted communication.
[Normal Comm] is displayed with normal communications.
(Cable disconnct, Wrong cable, Checking cables, Disconnct/retrn, Offline
mode, Offline test, Self-check mode)
• Cause of Stop*2 : Displays the reason for the interrupted data link.
[Normal] is displayed with normal data links.
(Stop disignat, D-Link time up, Testing line, Param not rcvd, Invlid Host
No., Set Rsvd Sta., Dup Host No., Dup CtrlSta No., Sta No. not set, Invlid
NTWK No., Host Para error, Params in comm., CPU stop error, CPU pwr
stp err)
4) Constant LS Displays the set contact link scan time.
• OUT Loop : Displays the OUT-side loop line status of the host station.
(Normal, LoopBK Trans, All Sta. NG)
• IN Loop : Displays the IN-side loop line status of the host station.
(Normal, LoopBK Trans, All Sta. NG)
5) LoopBK Info • OUT Loop Back Sta. : Displays the station number of the OUT-side loopback station.
[---] is displayed with normal loopbacks.
• IN Loop Back Sta. : Displays the station number of the IN-side loopback station.
• #of Loop Switching : Displays the accumulated number of switching loops.
• Parameter Setting : Displays [No parameters], [Common Param], [Unique param], or

[Common+unique].
• Reserved Sta : Displays whether a reserved station exists or not.
6) TsSt' Sta
• Communication Mode : Displays [Normal Mode] or [Constant LS].
• Transmission Mode : Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
• Transmission Stat : Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
*1 When the station is in the hardware test mode, self-loopback test mode, circuit test mode, or station-to-station test mode, [Offline
test] is displayed.
*2 For duplication of the control station or station number, [Dup CtrlSta No.] is displayed.
(2) Key functions

Key Function
 Display contents and keys functions when monitoring a master/local station on the CC-
Link IE field network
This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the functions of on-screen keys when the
GOT monitors a master station or local station on the CC-Link IE field network set as the host station.
1) 4)
5)
2)
6)
3)
• This Station's# : Displays the host station number.

1) TsSt' Info • NetWork# : Displays the network number of the host station.
• Group# : Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
• Spc Ctrl Sta : Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)

• Curr Ctrl Sta : Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
2) CtrlSt Info
• Com Info : Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
• SubCtrl Sta Com : Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
• Total of L-Sta : Displays the total number of stations on the monitored network set for
common parameters.
• Largest Nrm Sta : Displays the maximum station number of the station communicating
normally.
• Largest DL-Sta : Displays the maximum station number of the station performing a data
link.
• Com Status : Displays the current communication status of the host station.
(D-Link in prog., B-Pass excut, B-Pass stopped, Offline test, Offline)
3) D-Link Info
• Cause of Ssp*1 : Displays the reason for the interrupted communication.
[Normal Comm] is displayed with normal communications.
(Cable disconnct, Disconnct/retrn, Offline mode, Offline test)
• Cause of Stop : Displays the reason for the interrupted data link.
[Normal] is displayed with normal data links.
(Stop disignat, D-Link time up, No Slave Sta., Param not rcvd, Invlid Host
No., Set Rsvd Sta., Dup Host No., Dup Master Sta., Sta No. not set, Host
Para error, Params in comm., Station Type, CPU stop error, Ring
connection)
4) Constant LS Displays the set contact link scan time. 6

• PORT1 Loop : Shows the status of the PORT1-side loop.
• PORT2 Loop : Shows the status of the PORT2-side loop.
NETWORK MONITOR
5) LoopBK Info • Loop Back Sta.1 : Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback.
• Loop Back Sta.2 : Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback.
• #of Loop Switching : Displays the accumulated number of switching loops.
• Parameter Setting : Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)

• Reserved Sta : Displays whether a reserved station exists or not.
6) TsSt' Sta • Communication Mode : Displays [Normal Mode] or [Constant LS].
• Transmission Mode : Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
• Transmission Stat : Not displayed ([---] is displayed.)
*1 When the station is in the hardware test mode, offline test mode, or self-loopback test mode, [Offline test] is displayed.
(2) Key functions

Key Function
6.4.3 Other station monitor
This section describes the structure of the monitor screen and the common operations used when executing the other
station monitor.
 Display contents and keys functions: other station monitor menu

This section describes the other station monitor menu screen and the function of on-screen keys. The menu screen
for the other station monitor is displayed by touching a module number displayed on the host monitor screen.
By this other station monitor menu, each of the other station monitor can be specified.
2) 3)
1) 4)
5)
6)
Switches to the communication status monitor for other stations.*1

1) COM STA
( 6.4.4 Other station communication status monitor)
Switches to the data link status monitor for other stations.*2

2) D-Link
( 6.4.5 Other station data link status monitor)
Switches to the parameter status monitor for other stations.*1

3) P-MTR
( 6.4.6 Other station parameter status monitor)
Switches to the CPU operation status monitor for other stations.*3

4) CPU OP
( 6.4.7 Other station CPU operation status monitor)
Switches to the CPU RUN status monitor for other stations.*3

5) CPU RUN
( 6.4.8 Other station CPU RUN status monitor)
Switches to the loop status monitor for other stations.*4

6) Loop
( 6.4.9 Other station loop status monitor)
*1 This cannot be selected when a MELSECNET(II) local station is selected using the line monitor.
*2 This cannot be selected when a MELSECNET(II) master station or local station is selected using the line monitor.
*3 This cannot be selected when a remote I/O station is selected using the line monitor.
*4 The other station loop status monitor is not available in the following conditions.
• When a local station on the MELSECNET(II)network system is selected using the line monitor
• When a MELSECNET network system with coaxial cables is used
• When a station on the CC-Link IE controller network or CC-Link IE field network is selected using the line monitor
(2) Key functions

The table below shows the function of keys to be used for the other station monitor operations.
Key Function
to Switches to each monitor for other stations.
Exits the other station monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network monitor function
was started.
6.4.4 Other station communication status monitor
This section describes the screen configuration of the other station communication status monitor and the function of
keys displayed on it.
This screen cannot be displayed for a MELSECNET(II) local station.
3)
2)
1)
Displays the communication status by station number. (OK/ERR)

6
The station numbers displayed do not indicate the number of station numbers in the network, rather the maximum number of
1) communication stations.
For CC-Link IE field network, station number 1 to 120 are displayed regardless of the number of station numbers in the
network.
NETWORK MONITOR
2) Any station in an abnormal condition is highlighted.
3) Reserved stations are displayed as normal stations.
(2) Key functions

The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the other station communications status
monitor operations.
Key Function
Returns to the other station monitor.
Exits the other station communication statuses monitor screen and returns to the screen where the
network monitor was started.
Switches the screen display of stations. (1 to 80 stations/81 to 120 stations)
6.4.5 Other station data link status monitor
This section describes the screen configuration of the other station data link status monitor and the function of on-screen
keys.
This screen cannot be displayed for a MELSECNET(II) master station or local station.
3)
2)
1)
Displays the data link status by station number. (OK/NO)

network.
2) Any station to which data link is not performed is highlighted.
3) Reserved stations are displayed as having a data link established.
(2) Key functions

The table below shows the function of keys that are used for the operations of other station data link status
monitor.
Key Function
Exits the other station data link status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network
monitor was started.
6.4.6 Other station parameter status monitor
This section describes the screen configuration of the other station parameter status monitor and the function of on-
screen keys.
This screen cannot be displayed for a MELSECNET(II) local station.
2) 3)
4)
1)
6
Displays the parameter status by station number.
NETWORK MONITOR
network.
2) Any station whose parameters are monitored is highlighted.*1
3) Any station in an abnormal condition is highlighted.
*1 Only [Parameter Err Sta.] is displayed when connecting to a MELSECNET(II) master station.
(2) Key functions

The table below shows the function of keys that are used for the operations of the other station parameter status
monitor.
Key Function
Exits the other station parameter status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network
6.4.7 Other station CPU operation status monitor
This section describes the screen configuration of the other station CPU operation status monitor and the function of on-
screen keys.
This screen cannot be displayed for a remote I/O network system.
2)
3)
1)
Displays the CPU operation status by station number. (OK/ERR)

The station number displayed does not indicate the station number in the network, rather the maximum number of
network.
2) Any station that stays in an abnormal condition or out of operation is highlighted.
3) Reserved stations and unconnected stations are displayed as normal stations.
(2) Key functions

The table below shows the function of keys that are used for the operations of the other station CPU operation
status monitor.
Key Function
Exits the other station CPU operation status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the
network monitor was started.
6.4.8 Other station CPU RUN status monitor
This section describes the other station CPU RUN status monitor and the function of on-screen keys.
This screen cannot be displayed for a remote I/O network system.
2)
1)
No. Display contents 6

Displays the CPU operation status by station number. (RUN/STOP)
"DOWN" is displayed for stations with communication errors.
1) Up to 64 stations are displayed regardless of the number of stations in a network.
For CC-Link IE controller network or CC-Link IE field network, station number 1 to 120 are displayed regardless of the number
NETWORK MONITOR
of station numbers in the network.
"---" is displayed for a reserved station and the statuses of stations beyond the maximum communication stations, or when a
2)
MELSECNET(II) local station has been selected in the line monitor.
(2) Key functions

The table below shows the function of keys that are used for the operations of the other station CPU RUN status
monitor.
Key Function
Exits the other station CPU RUN status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network
6.4.9 Other station loop status monitor
This section describes the screen configuration of the other station loop status monitor and the function of on-screen
keys.
The other station loop status monitor is not available in the following conditions.
• When a local station on the MELSECNET(II)network system is selected using the line monitor
• When a MELSECNET network system with coaxial cables is used
• When a station on the CC-Link IE controller network or CC-Link IE field network is selected using the line monitor.
3)
4)
2)
1)
1) The F-loop (forward loop) status and the R-loop (reverse loop) status are displayed.
2)
communication stations.
3) Any station that stays in an abnormal condition is highlighted.
(2) Key functions

The table below shows the function of keys that are used for the operations of the other station loop status
monitor.
Key Function
Exits the other station loop status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network
6.5 Error Message and Corrective Action
The following shows the error messages that are displayed during the network monitor operation and how to handle
them.
Error message Contents of error Action to take
There is no channel for

Communication channel setup error Set the channel number in the Communication Settings of the utility.
communication.
• Check the connections between the controller and the GOT for
Communication could not be
Can not Communication disconnected connectors and cables.
established with the PLC CPU.
• Check if an error has occurred in the controller.
A keyword has been set in the

parameter when monitoring the
Key Word error Release the set keyword.
MELSECNET(II) master station of
the QnACPU.
NETWORK MONITOR
7. Q MOTION MONITOR
7.1 Features
The Q motion monitor enables the servo monitoring and parameter setting of the motion controller CPU.
The following are the features of the Q motion monitor.
 Various servo monitoring on multiple monitor screens

The Q motion monitor function has multiple monitor screens, on which you can monitor servo data in a variety of
patterns.
(Display examples)
Present Value Monitor Error List
Q MOTION MONITOR
• Monitors and displays the feed current values and actual • Displays the history of errors that occurred on and after the
current values of all running axes. leading edge of PLC ready (M2000).
( 7.4.4 Present Value Monitor screen) ( 7.4.6 Error List screen)
Positioning Monitor Error List Designated-Axis
• Monitors the details of the positioning data set to any axis. • Displays the latest errors that occurred on the specified axis.
( 7.4.8 Positioning Monitor screen) ( 7.4.7 Error List Designated-Axis screen)
7. Q MOTION MONITOR 7-1

7.1 Features
 Servo parameter setting by writing operation
(Write example: Changing the setting of the auto tuning function)
Parameter setting screen Parameter setting window appears Parameter setting screen
Change the auto tuning mode from "1" to "2". Parameter setting is changed.
1. By performing writing from the parameter setting screen, write the servo parameter setting (basic parameters/
adjustment parameters) to the motion controller CPU.
2. To change a servo parameter setting, enter the necessary numerical value or option number from the automatically
displayed key window, and write it to the motion controller CPU.
7-2 7. Q MOTION MONITOR

7.1 Features
7.2 Specifications
This chapter describes the system configuration of the Q motion monitor.

following.
 Target motion controller CPU of the Q motion monitor

Motion controller CPU
Motion controller CPU (Q series)*1*2
*1 Use the following production number motion controller CPU when using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU.
• For bus connection and direct CPU connection
Q172CPU: Production number K******* or later
Q173CPU: Production number J******* or later
• For a connection other than bus connection and direct CPU connection
Q172CPU: Production number N******* or later
Q173CPU: Production number M******* or later
*2 When using the OS (SV13 or SV22) with the Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN, install the following version.
SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later (00E or later when using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU with a bus connection or direct CPU 7
connection)
SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later (00E or later when using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU with a bus connection or direct CPU
connection)
Q MOTION MONITOR
 Connection type
(1) When the GOT is connected to a QCPU (Q mode), QnACPU, or motion controller CPU
MELSEC CC-Link
NET/H CC-Link IE connection
Serial Ethernet
Bus Direct CPU connection, controller
Name Description communication connection
connection connection MELSEC connection
connection *4
ID*2 G4*3
NET/10 *1
connection
Monitors the present

value, positioning error
Servo
and other servo-related
monitor
items on a variety of
monitor screens.
Parameter Changes the setting of

settings the servo parameter.

*4 When the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module is used, the Q motion monitor cannot be used.

7.2 Specifications

Write the package data that has the system application (Extended function) for the Q motion monitor to the GOT.
 Required special data

Write the Q motion monitor data to the GOT.
The available memory space of the user area for writing varies depending on the Q motion monitor data to be used.
Refer to the capacity of the Q motion monitor data in the following table and calculate the required space for writing.
For the procedure for writing to the GOT and for checking the available memory space of the user area and
information about the data using other user areas, refer to the following.
 Servo amplifiers whose parameter can be set

The Q motion monitor allows you to set the parameter of servo amplifiers shown below.
Motion controller CPU Servo amplifier
Q172CPU, Q173CPU MR-H-B, MR-J-B, MR-J2-B, MR-J2S-B, MR-J2M, MR-J2-03B5
Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU MR-J3-B, MR-J3-BS, MR-J3W-B, MR-J3-B-RJ006, MR-J3-B-RJ004
Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU MR-J3-B, MR-J3-BS, MR-J3W-B, MR-J3-B-RJ006, MR-J3-B-RJ004, MR-J3-B-RJ080W
MR-J3-B, MR-J3-BS, MR-J3W-B, MR-J3-B-RJ006, MR-J3-B-RJ004, MR-J3-B-RJ080W,

Q172DSCPU, Q173DSCPU, Q170MSCPU
MR-J4-B, MR-J4W-B

7.2 Specifications
7.2.2 Access range
7.2.3 Precautions
(1) Main OS software package for motion controller

The only Main OS software package that can be used is SV13 or SV22.
(2) When setting parameters for Q172HCPU or Q173HCPU
When setting parameters for Q172HCPU or Q173HCPU, after parameter entry, set the switch on the CPU to
STOP and RUN again, or reset the CPU.
Q MOTION MONITOR

7.2 Specifications
This section explains how to display the Q motion monitor screen after the GOT is turned on.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT.

Starting from the special function
Starting from the utility switch (Q motion monitor) set in
the project data

Refer to the following manual for how to set the special
touch [Monitor] [Motion monitor] from the Main Menu.
function switch.
for the GOT used. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
Set the channel number of the

controller monitoring the Q motion.
The System Configuration screen is

displayed.
Touch a motion controller CPU to

monitor. Touching Motion Monitor
displays the monitor menu.
Continued on the next page

(From preceding page)
Parameter setting
Motion monitor
Monitor menu screen appears.

Has the motion parameter No
changing password been
registered?
Yes
Enter the parameter changing password. 6.4.11
Parameter setting screen appears.
Select the menu item.
The monitor screen of the selected

function appears.
Perform operation for the selected

monitor function.
7
Present Value Mon 6.4.4
Select the servo parameter to be set. 6.4.11
SFC Error History 6.4.5
Q MOTION MONITOR
Error List 6.4.6
CHG
Error List Axis 6.4.7
Positioning Monitor Change the servo parameter setting. 6.4.11

6.4.8
Servo Monitor 6.4.9

Write the new servo parameter setting. 6.4.11
Present Value Hist. 6.4.10
POINT
After turning on the GOT, the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the Q motion
monitor only.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the Ch: button on
the Q motion monitor screen. ( 7.4 Operation Procedures)
The Q motion monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the
GOT.

Start
Utility Main Menu
or
Communication
setting window
END Ch:
System Configuration screen ( 6.4.1)

(Select the motion controller
Sys. Conf CPU to be monitored.)
Sys. Conf Parameter Set.
Motion Monitor
END END
Monitor menu screen ( 6.4.3) Password input key window ( 6.4.11)
Mon. Menu (Menu selection) Sys. Conf
Parameter setting screen

Monitor screen of selected function
( Refer to 6.4.4 and thereafter) ( 6.4.11)
END END
HINT
Screen displayed at next startup
At next startup, the last exited screen is displayed.
However, the last exited screen will not be displayed when the GOT is restarted due to an installation of the OS,
turning the GOT power from off to on, or a reset.
When the function is started with a special function switch to which a connection destination different from the one
at the last exit is set, the system configuration screen appears.

You can start the Q motion monitor from a user-created screen by selecting the connection destination with a
User-created screen
(special function switch System configuration The Q motion monitor is started.
(system launcher)) screen (Example: Monitor menu screen)
[×] key [Sys. Conf] key
[End] key
POINT
2. SYSTEM LAUNCHER
7
(2) Starting from the special function switch of a system application (Extended function) that has a
system configuration screen
Q MOTION MONITOR
When the system application set as a connection destination of the special function switch supports the system
launcher function, the system launcher switching notification dialog appears at the first startup, and the system
configuration screen of the system launcher function appears.
At the second or later startup, the set function screen appears when the system application is started from the
user-created screen.
User-created screen
(special function switch System configuration The Q motion monitor is started.
(Q motion monitor)) screen (Example: Monitor menu screen)
Application startup
(for the first time) Select the target function.
Application startup for the second time or later
[End] key
POINT
When the set connection destination does not support the system launcher function, a dialog appears at the startup
and the system configuration screen of the set connection destination appears.
2. SYSTEM LAUNCHER

This section explains screen operations to be performed when using the Q motion monitor.
The display screen of the Q motion monitor varies depending on the GOT used.
This section mainly uses the screen of the GT1575-V for explanation.
7.4.1 System configuration screen layout
This section describes the configuration of the System Configuration screen that is displayed after startup of the Q
motion monitor and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen.
 Displayed contents
2)
1)
2)
2)
No. Description
The CPU numbers are displayed for CPUs and the control CPU number for the installed module.
1) To choose the motion controller CPU for servo monitor/servo parameter setting, touch the respective display
position.
2) Displays the keys used with the operation on the System Configuration screen.(Touch input)
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the System Configuration screen.
Key Function
Exits the monitor and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
Selects the motion controller CPU where servo monitor/servo parameter setting is performed.
Changes the System Configuration screen to the monitor menu screen.

( 7.4.3 Monitor Menu screen)
Changes the System Configuration screen to parameter setting screen.

( 7.4.11 Parameter setting screen)
Scrolls the display one stage up or down to display the system configuration of the currently undisplayed stage
: Scrolls down one stage.
: Scrolls up one stage.
7 - 10 7. Q MOTION MONITOR
7.4.2 Setting method for other station monitoring
The following shows the setting methods for monitoring other stations with Q motion monitor.
1. In the communication setting window, select one from

channels No.1 to 4.
For the operation on the communication setting screen, refer
to the following.
2. When the channel No. is selected, the screen on the left is

displayed.
Set the network number of the target controller and the CPU
station number.
3. After selecting the station number, touch the enter key. The
Q MOTION MONITOR
communication setting window closes and the system
configuration of the set monitor destination is displayed.
7. Q MOTION MONITOR 7 - 11
3) 1) 2) 3) 1) 2)
4) 5)
No. Item Description Setting range
Set the CH No. for the target

1) CH No. input area 1 to 4
controller.
Differs depending on the connection type.

• Bus connection, direct CPU connection, and serial
communication connection: [0]
Set the network No. for the target • Ethernet connection, CC-Link IE controller network
controller. connection: [1] to [239]
• MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: [0] (host loop) / [1] to
[255] (specified loop)
• CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: [0]

Set the station No. of the target communication connection: [FF] (Host station)
controller. • Ethernet connection: [1] to [64]
3) Station No. input area When the station No. is set to the • MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: [0] (master station) /
host station (FF), set the network [1] to [64] (local station)
No. to 0. • CC-Link IE controller network connection: [1] to [120]
• CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: [0] (master station) / [1] to
[64] (local station)
4) CH No. selection key Select a CH No. -
Keys for operations in the

5) Keys communication setting window -
shown in (b). (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key Function

input area.
7.4.3 Monitor Menu screen
The Q motion monitor allows you to monitor various servo monitor data on multiple monitor screens.
To display any of the monitor screens, make a selection on the monitor menu screen.
Item Description
Monitors and displays the feed current values and actual current values of all running axes.
Present Value Mon.
( 7.4.4 Present Value Monitor screen)
Displays the history of errors that occurred in SFC programs from when the motion CPU was powered on or reset. 7
SFC Error History
( 7.4.5 SFC Error History screen)
Displays the history of errors that occurred on and after the leading edge of PLC ready (M2000).
Error List
( 7.4.6 Error List screen)
Q MOTION MONITOR
Error List Axis Displays the latest errors that occurred on the specified axis. ( 7.4.7 Error List Designated-Axis screen)
Positioning Monitor Monitors the details of the positioning data set to any axis. ( 7.4.8 Positioning Monitor screen)
Servo Monitor Monitors the servo monitor/servo amplifier. ( 7.4.9 Servo Monitor screen)
Displays the history of encoder present values, servo command values and monitor present values of the ABS axis
Present Value Hist.
at servo amplifier power-on/off or at home position return. ( 7.4.10 Present Value History Monitor screen)
7.4.4 Present Value Monitor screen
This section describes the display data of the Present Value Monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
4)
4)
1)
1) 2)
2) 3)
3)
No. Item Function
1) Ax The axis numbers of the running axes being monitored are displayed.
The feed present values or actual present values of the running axes are
displayed.Touching the display part of the monitored value switches to the
2) Feed PV/Actual PV
positioning monitor screen of the touched axis number.
( 7.4.8 Positioning Monitor screen)
Whether the servo ready signals, major/minor errors and servo error detection
signals are ON (lit) or OFF (not lit) are displayed.Touching the error indication part
3) SV RDY, ERR DT, SV ERR
" " switches to the Error List Designated-Axis screen of the touched axis number.
( 7.4.7 Error List Designated-Axis screen)
The common bit devices are always monitored and displayed.

4) Bit device screen • Error detection type bit devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displayed in red
• General status type bit devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displayed in green
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys used for operation of the Present Value Monitor screen.
Key Function
Touching the key alternates the monitor item between the "feed present value" and "actual present value".
(Only in the real mode)
/
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
Exits the present value monitor and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
Switches the displayed axis number.

(Displayed only for Q173CPU, Q173HCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, and Q173DSCPU
monitoring.)
Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following:
7.4.12 Hard copy output
The operation of this key is invalid.
7.4.5 SFC Error History screen
This section describes the display data of the SFC Error History screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
SFC Error History screen displays the history of error which occurs in the motion SFC programs.
5)
7
1) 2) 3) 4)
Q MOTION MONITOR
Displays the dates and time when SFC errors occurred.

The eight latest errors are displayed for the history of errors.
1) M/D H:M
The 128 errors are displayed for Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU,
Q172DSCPU, and Q173DSCPU.
2) Program No. Displays the SFC program numbers where SFC errors occurred.
3) Err Code Displays the error codes of the errors that occurred.
4) Error Definition Displays the definitions of the SFC errors that occurred.
Displays the page number and the total number of pages of the SFC error history.
5) Page (Only with Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, and
Q173DSCPU)
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys used for operation of the SFC Error History screen.
Key Function
Exits the SFC Error History screen and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
( 7.4.12 Hard copy output)
Clears the error history. (Only with Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, and Q173DSCPU)
Scrolls the history display up and down by eight histories when the SFC error history is displayed.
(by four histories for QVGA)
(Only with Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, and Q173DSCPU)
7.4.6 Error List screen
This section describes the display data of the Error List screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
The error list screen displays the error which occurs in the motion controller CPU.
(Errors occurred in motion SFC programs are also displayed.)
7)
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
The dates and time when errors occurred are displayed.

The eight latest errors are displayed.
1) M/D H:M
The 128 errors are displayed for Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU,
Q172DSCPU, and Q173DSCPU.
The axis numbers and axis types of the axes where errors occurred are
displayed.
2) Ax
Virtual axis : Virtual
Synchronous encoder axis : Sync
The servo program numbers that were being executed when the error occurred
are displayed.
3) SV P. No.
The execution destination of the servo program in error is not displayed.Using
the servo program number, refer to the execution destination.
Displays the types and error codes of the errors that occurred.
The error types are displayed as indicated below.
• Minor error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minor
• Major error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Major
• Servo error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servo
4) Err Code • Servo program setting error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servo P
• Real/virtual switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch
• Test mode request error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test
• Manual pulse generator setting error . . . . . . . . . . Manual
• PCPU ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-WDT
• SSCNET ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication error
5) Error Definition The definitions of the errors that occurred are displayed.
6) Set Data The program number in error is displayed if the set data has any errors.
Displays the page number and the total number of pages of the error list.
7) Page (Only with Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, and
Q173DSCPU)
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the Error List screen.
Key Function
Exits the Error List screen and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
Scrolls the history display up and down by eight histories when the error list is displayed.
(Only with Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, and Q173DSCPU)
Q MOTION MONITOR
7.4.7 Error List Designated-Axis screen
This section describes the display data of the Error List Designated-Axis screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
(In real mode) (In virtual mode)
6) 7) 6) 7)
1)
2)
5)
3)
4)
8)
9)
1) Axis No. Displays the axis number currently being monitored.
2) Out Module Displays the output module axis number currently being monitored.
3) Virt. Axis Displays the virtual axis number currently being monitored.
4) Sync. Enco. Displays the synchronous encoder axis number currently being monitored.
Displays the servo program numbers that were being executed when the error
5) Program No.
occurred.
Displays the error codes of the minor/major/servo error, servo program setting
error, real/virtual switching error information (error code: hexadecimal), personal
6) Err Code
computer link communication error code and motion CPU WDT error that are
currently occurring.
7) Error Definition Displays the definitions of the errors that occurred.
Each 1-Pulse
Displays the axes where a 1-pulse input magnification setting error occurred.
1M Error
MAN-PLS Ax Displays the errors of the axis numbers set to the manual pulse generators P1 to
8) MAN-PLS Axis ERR
ERR P3.
Each MAN- Displays the errors of the smoothing magnifications set to the manual pulse
PLS SM ERR generators P1 to P3.
9) Test REQ ERR Displays the axis numbers that are being started at a test mode request.
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation of the Error List Designated-Axis
screen.
Key Function
(Only in the real mode)
Switches the axes to be monitored.

/ /
(Only in the virtual mode)
(Display example: When axis 1 is
monitored)
Returns to the previous screen.
Exits the Error List Designated-Axis monitor screen and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor
was started.
7.4.12 Hard copy output 7
Q MOTION MONITOR
7.4.8 Positioning Monitor screen
This section describes the display data of the Positioning Monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
(In real mode) (In virtual mode)
1) 1)
2)
2)
3)
4)
5)
1) 7) 6) 7)
Displays the axis numbers of the running axes being monitored.

For the virtual axis, the axis type is displayed.
• Roller
1) Data Item
• Ballscrew
• Rotary table
• Cam
Displays the data during positioning control of the PCPU.
• Feed PV : Target address output to the servo amplifier (value

of the roller surface speed for the roller axis)
• Actual PV : Actually traveled present value (no value is
displayed for the roller axis)
2) Feed PV • Dvt. Counter : Difference between feed present value and actual
present value
• EXE Prog No. : Servo program number in execution
• Min/Major SV ERR : rror code of the latest minor/major/servo error
• M Code • T Limit : The M code and torque limit of the servo program
in execution
3) EXE Cam No. Displays the cam number currently controlled.
4) EXE Stroke Displays the stroke amount currently controlled.
5) Cam Ax. 1 Rev. Displays the present value within one cam axis revolution pulse.
Displays ON and OFF of the symbols that represent the axis-by-axis control statuses.
6) Status • In the ON status, the symbol is lit green.
• At error or servo error detection, the symbol is lit red.
Displays ON and OFF of the positioning command signals.

7) CMD Signal
In the ON status, the signal is lit green.
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys used for operation of the positioning monitor screen.
Key Function
Changes the axes to be monitored.

(Display example: When axis 1
is monitored)
Exits the positioning monitor and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
Q MOTION MONITOR
7.4.9 Servo Monitor screen
This section describes the display data of the Servo Monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
1)
2)
3)
4)
1) Ax Displays the axis number currently being monitored.
2) Motor Speed Displays the actual speed of the servo motor.
3) Motor Current Displays the motor current value at the rated current of 100%.
4) Servo Alarm Displays the alarm detected by the servo amplifier.
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for operation of the servo monitor screen.
Key Function

is monitored)
Exits the servo monitoring and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
7.4.10 Present Value History Monitor screen
This section describes the display data of the Present Value History Monitor screen and the key functions displayed on
the screen.
1)
2)
3)
4)
7
1) Ax Displays the axis number of the axis currently being monitored.
Displays the following values monitored at home position return.
Q MOTION MONITOR
• Home position return completion time
• Encoder present value
2) HP Data Multi-revolution data of absolute position reference point data
Within-one-revolution position of absolute position reference point data
• Servo command value
• Monitor present value
Displays the following present monitor values.

• Present time
3) MON Val Present multi-revolution data of encoder present value
Present within-one-revolution position of encoder present value
• Present servo command value
• Present monitor present value
Displays the four past present values of the ABS axis at servo amplifier power-on/off.
[At power-on]
• Power-on time
Multi-revolution data of initial encoder
Single-revolution data of initial encoder
• Servo command value after recovery
• Monitor present value after recovery
4) PWR ON/PWR OFF
• Alarm occurrence information at present value recovery (error code of minor/major error)
[At power-off]
• Servo amplifier power-off time
Multi-revolution data of encoder present value before servo amplifier power-off
Single-revolution data of encoder present value before servo amplifier power-off
• Servo command at servo amplifier power-off
• Monitor present value at servo amplifier power-off
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys used for operation of the Present Value History Monitor screen.
Key Function

is monitored)
Exits the Present Value History Monitor screen and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was
started.
7.4.11 Parameter setting screen
You can set the servo parameters (basic parameters/adjustment parameters) of the connected motion controller CPU.
This section describes the display data of the parameter setting screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
 Displayed screen
7
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the operation on the parameter setting screen.
Key Function
Q MOTION MONITOR
Changes the servo parameter setting of the selected item.
Selects the servo parameter setting item.
Changes the axis whose parameter setting will be made.
Returns to the System Configuration screen.
Exits the parameter setting and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
 Inputting the password
If you have set a password in [Motion Parameter Display] on GT Designer3 (GOT2000), the password input key
window appears when you try to access the parameter setting screen of the motion monitor.
For the details of the password setting, refer to the following.
(1) Function
• If the password matches, the parameter setting screen is displayed.
• If the password does not match, an error message is displayed. Touching Sys. Conf returns to the System
Configuration screen.
• Only numbers and letters A to F can be used for the password setting. (Up to 8 characters)
(2) Operations
(a) Inputting the password
Touch the key window and enter a password.
After entering the password, touch Enter to set the password.
To edit the input characters, touch Del to delete the characters, and then input the new characters.
(b) Canceling password input
Touch to return to the monitor screen.
 Parameter setting operation
The following describes the procedure of changing the setting of the [Auto Tuning] item as an example of the
parameter setting operation.
1. Select the item whose parameter is to be set

with the , keys, and touch the CHG
key.
(Touch)
2. As the parameter setting window appears,

enter the parameter setting with
Alphanumeric , and touch Enter to confirm
the setting.
To cancel the parameter setting operation, 7
touch at the top right of the screen to
close the parameter setting window.
Q MOTION MONITOR
(Touch)
3. As the confirmation window appears, touch

OK to write the parameter setting to the
motion controller CPU.
To cancel writing of the parameter setting,
touch Cancel .
(Touch)
4. After writing is completed, the parameter

setting screen whose display has been
updated to the new parameter setting is
displayed.
This section describes how to store a screen to the data strage in BMP/JPEG file format or print it with a printer when
executing the Q motion monitor.
Hard copy methods differ depending on the GOT to be used.
(1) GOT with VGA or higher resolution
Hard copy output operations are performed by touching the "Print Screen" or "Cancel Print" key displayed on the
screen.
Touch [Print Screen]
A BMP/JPEG file will be stored on the The Q motion monitor screen will be printed
data strage inserted in the GOT. with the printer connected to the GOT.
(2) GOT with QVGA resolution

Hard copy output operations are performed by turning ON/OFF the start or abort trigger device that has been set
in the GT Designer3 (GOT2000).
POINT
• Install the extended function OS (Printer) to the GOT when printing a Q motion monitor screen.
• The output target (data strage) of hard copy can be set in [Hard Copy] of GT Designer3 (GOT2000).
For details of hard copy setting, refer to the following.
This section describes the error messages that may be displayed during Q motion monitor operation and their corrective
action.
Error message Error definition Corrective action
Communication cannot be established • Check the status of the connection between the controller
No. PLC Communications with the PLC CPU of the monitor and the GOT (disconnected or cut cables).
target. • Check if an error has occurred in the controller.
A motion controller CPU that cannot Select a motion controller CPU that can be monitored on the
This PLC type is not supported be monitored was selected on the System Configuration screen. ( 7.2.1 Target motion
System Configuration screen. controller CPU of the Q motion monitor)
The motion controller OS installed in

the motion controller CPU (Q172CPU, Install SV13 or SV22 in the motion controller CPU (Q172CPU,
Controller's OS type is different
Q173CPU) of the monitor target is Q173CPU) of the monitor target as the motion controller OS.
other than SV13 or SV22.
The version of the motion controller

Install a motion controller OS that is compatible with the Q
OS installed in the motion controller
It is not a version for GOT motion monitor in the motion controller. ( 7.2.1 Target
CPU of the monitor target is not
motion controller CPU of the Q motion monitor)
compatible with the Q motion monitor.
The monitor data was not installed or

Monitor data not found Download the monitor data of the motion monitor.
was deleted.
The axis number selected has not • Select the axis number that has been set.
7
Unused axis selected
been set. • Set the axis using the relevant software.
During servo parameter setting, an

It is not possible to select item that cannot be set has been Select an item that can be set.
Q MOTION MONITOR
selected.
A value that is outside the setting

Incorrect setting range Set the value within the setting range.
range has been set.
Unmatched password The entered password is invalid. Input the correct password.
A communication driver that is

Communication channel setup error compatible with the Q motion monitor Install a compatible communication driver.
is not installed.
The number of the axis, which is set to

Select the number of the axis, which is set to a servo amplifier
Unsupport amp. selected a servo amplifier having no settable
having the settable parameter.
parameter, has been selected.
POINT
How to clear a displayed error message
For the error that occurs during the communication with a controller (such as a communication error), the error
message does not disappear even after the cause of the error has been removed.
To clear the error message, restart the GOT.
8.1 Features
With the intelligent module monitor, you can use dedicated screens to monitor the buffer memory of the intelligent
function module and make changes to the data.
In addition, you can monitor the signal statuses of the I/O modules.
The features of the intelligent module monitor are described below.
 Realized monitoring with dedicated screens

You can monitor the intelligent function module(s) and I/O module(s) and make changes to the data using dedicated
screens.
There is no need to create screens for monitoring or data changes, thereby reducing the drawing workload.
(1) For intelligent function module

As a menu of monitor items is displayed, select an item from the menu, and the corresponding monitor screen is
then displayed.
Details of the buffer memory and the I/O signal statuses between the buffer memory and the PLC CPU are
displayed in text, numerical values, and graphs on the monitor screens.
8
Select a monitor from the menu Monitor screen
INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR

Select a menu
(2) For I/O module

The status of I/O signals to and from an external module is monitored.
Monitor screen
8. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8-1

8.1 Features
 Enabled data change by write operations
The values are written into the buffer memory of the intelligent function module by writing values from the monitor
screen.
(Writing example)
Monitor screen When changing a change-permitted channel
Select writing
8-2 8. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR

8.1 Features
8.2 Specifications
This section describes the system configuration of the intelligent module monitor.
following.
 Targeted equipments for the intelligent module monitor

(1) PLC CPU
PLC
RCPU
QCPU (Q mode), motion controller (Q series)*1
QSCPU
LCPU
*1 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be
monitored.
(2) Intelligent function module
PLC CPU Intelligent function module
R60AD4, R60ADV8, R60ADI8, R60DA4, R60DAV8, R60DAI8, RD62P2, RD62P2E,

8
RCPU RD62D2, RD75P4, RD75D4, RD77MS , Input module (RX10, RX40C7, RX41C4,
RX42C4), Output module (RY40NT5P, RY41NT2P, RY42NT2P, RY10R2)
Q64AD, Q68ADV, Q68ADI, QD62, Q64DA, Q62DA, QD62D, QD62E, QD65PD2,

QCPU (Q mode) QD73A1, QD75D (N), QD75P (N), QD75MH, QD75M, QD77MS, Input module,
Output module
L60AD4, L60DA4, LD62, LD62D, LD75D, LD75P, LD77MH, LD77MS, Input module
LCPU
(LX40C6, LX41C4, LX42C4), Output module (LY10R2, LY41NT1P, LY42NT1P)
You can use the system monitor [BM MONITOR] to monitor intelligent function modules other than those listed
above.

8.2 Specifications
 Connection type
Function Connection type between GOT and PLC CPU
CC-Link IE CC-Link
Direct MELSECNET/H
Bus Serial controller connection
CPU Ethernet connection*7*10,
Name Description connection communication connection*2*7,
connection connection*9 MELSECNET/10 ID G4
*6*7*10 connection*6 CC-Link IE field
*6*8*10 connection*7*10 *4*6 *5*6*10
connection*3
Monitors buffer
memory of
Intelligen
intelligent function *1
t module
module and signal
monitor
statuses of I/O
modules
*1 For the MELSECNET/10 connection, use a QCPU and network module (QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, and
QJ71BR11) with the function version B or later.
*6 The QSCPU does not support the connection type.
*9 Intelligent module monitor cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.
*10 The RCPU does not support the connection type.

For the system applications (extended functions) required, refer to the following.

Write the package data that has the system application (Extended function) for the intelligent module monitor to
the GOT.
 Required memory space for use of the intelligent module monitor

To check the required memory space for use of the intelligent module monitor, refer to the following.
The memory space required for storing data into the internal memory of the GOT is the same as the memory space
required for storing data into the hard disk of a personal computer.

8.2 Specifications
8.2.2 Access range
 When using the bus connection, direct CPU connection, or serial communication
connection
• The intelligent module monitor can monitor intelligent function modules on the bases of the connected station and
other stations.
• In the serial communication connection, the intelligent module monitor is available only for the systems that use
the following combinations.
PLC CPU used Serial communication module used*1
QCPU (Q mode) QJ71C24
LCPU LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2
*1 For details of module names, refer to the GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1.
• The following restrictions apply when monitoring other stations of MELSECNET/II data link systems.
Only the host and master stations can be monitored when the connected station is a local station.
Regardless of the type of connected station, no stations other than ACPU can be monitored.
• When connected to a remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network system, the remote I/O station on the
MELSECNET/H network system is displayed as QCPU in the system configuration display of the intelligent
module monitor.
• A diagnosis of the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network system is not performed.
• Intelligent function modules on the base of remote I/O stations other than those on the MELSECNET/H network
system are not monitored.
 When using MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, or CC-Link IE controller network

connection 8
• The intelligent module monitor can monitor intelligent function modules on the bases of the control station and
normal stations.
• To monitor another network, routing parameters have to be set to the GOT side and PLC side. (Only with the
MELSECNET/H communication unit or CC-Link IE controller network communication unit)

For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following.
Routing parameter setting for the GOT
Routing parameter setting for PLC CPU
For MELSECNET/H communication unit
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
For CC-Link IE controller network communication unit
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual
 When using CC-Link IE field network connection

The intelligent module monitor can monitor intelligent function modules on the bases of the master station and local
stations.
To monitor another network, routing parameters have to be set to the GOT side and PLC side.
The User's Manual of the CC-Link IE field network system master/local module to be used
 When using CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station/via G4)

• The intelligent module monitor can monitor intelligent function modules on the bases of the master station and
local stations.

8.2 Specifications
 When using Ethernet connection
• The intelligent module monitor can monitor the intelligent function module on the base of the PLC CPU assigned
the IP address.
(The station assigned in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer2 can be monitored.)
• To monitor another network, routing parameters have to be set to the GOT side and PLC side.
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
 When the intelligent module monitor monitors the master station of the MELSECNET/II
network on which any remote I/O station exists
• Intelligent function modules on the base of remote I/O stations are not monitored.
8.2.3 Precautions
 Special function modules that cannot be monitored

Modules displayed as "SP" on the System Configuration screen cannot be monitored using the intelligent module
monitor.
To monitor these modules, use the system monitor function [BM MONITOR].
 Monitoring intelligent function modules with restrictions

(1) When monitoring an I/O module
Only the output signal can be monitored for an I/O module for which "Output " is displayed on the System
For input signals, monitor X of the PLC CPU device with the system monitor function.
 Editing and reusing intelligent module monitor data

The project data for the intelligent module monitor cannot be edited by modifying or adding an object.
 Display provided when the QA1S6 extension base unit is used with the QCPU (Q
mode)
This precaution pertains to a situation where the QA1S6 extension base unit is connected to the QCPU (Q mode)
in a station connected to the GOT.
In this case, the abbreviated format is displayed for the following intelligent function modules on the System
You can use the unit detail information to check the full format of the module displayed with the abbreviated format.
Unsupported intelligent function modules are displayed as "SP", and the corresponding modules cannot be
monitored.
Installed module Model name displayed
A1S63ADA 63ADA
A1SJ71PT32-S3 J71PT32-
A1SJ71ID1-R4
J71ID
A1SJ71ID2-R4-S1
A1S64TCTT(BW)-S1
64TCTT/R
A1S64TCRT(BW)-S1

8.2 Specifications
This section explains how to display the intelligent module monitor screen after the GOT is turned on.
Start
Starting from the special function Starting from

Starting from switch (intelligent module monitor) the MELSEC-L
the utility set in the project data troubleshooting
Display the utility. Touch the special function switch. Activate [Intelligent module monitor] on
the MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen.
Touch [Intelligent
module monitor].
After the utility is displayed,touch [Debug] Refer to the following manual for how to
[Intelligent module monitor] from the set the special function switch.
Main Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
User's Manual for the GOT used.
Set the channel number, network 8

number, station number.
Set the channel number, network number

and station number of the PLC CPU
connected to the GOT.

(Continued from previous page)
Display the System Configuration screen. The module format and related data are not displayed at
NET
the intelligent module monitor startup.
System Configuration NETWK No. [0] PLC STATION [FF] END
PC No.
MAIN
When reading of module data from the PLC CPU is
CPU OUT64 IN64 AJ71
PT32-S3 SP
IN64 AJ71
PT32-S3 complete, the module format and related data is displayed.
Y 0 Y 40 X,Y 80 Y 40 X,Y 80
X,Y A0
When using the RCPU, QCPU (Q mode), QSCPU, or LCPU,
Ext.1
IN16 OUT32 AJ71 A62LS A616DA
you can check the PLC CPU status (PC information monitor screen),
Y120 Y130 X,Y150 X,Y180 X,Y100
and the module error information and others (Unit Detail Info Screen).
Ext.2
A616AD
SP
A616TD
Refer to 7.4.1.
X,Y200 X,Y260
X,Y230
When END is selected, the intelligent module monitoring
ends and the display moves to the original screen where
the intelligent module monitor function was begun.
Specify the module to be monitored. Refer to 7.4.1 and 7.4.6.
Display the intelligent module monitor menu.

Refer to 7.4.6.
Select from the menu. The Intelligent Module Monitor Screen is displayed by
selecting it from the menu.
Refer to 7.4.6.
Display the monitor screen for the intelligent Refer to 7.4.5.

module. Refer to 7.5.
Check the data for the module with the
displayed contents.
Change the data. Carry out the following operation when changing the
current values of the buffer memory that is displayed
on the monitor screen.
Change the current value of the specified
area. Refer to 7.4.7.
POINT
After turning on the GOT, the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the intelligent
module monitor only.
ChNET
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the PLCNo. button on
the intelligent module monitor screen.
8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
The intelligent module monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded
to the GOT.

(1) When using RCPU, QCPU (Q mode), Q series motion controller CPU, QSCPU, or LCPU
Utility Main Menu At the first startup

or
Error details screen

Error cause/
Error record
Icon of
PLC CPU
System configuration screen System configuration screen

(Basic mode) (info. mode) PC information screen
(RCPU, QCPU, or LCPU)
Icons of the
I/O module Operation
log

I/O module monitor screen Operation details screen Continuous error release screen
(QSCPU only) (RCPU, and LCPU only)
Icon of Icon
intelligent
function
module Monitor menu Positioning monitor screen
Unit detail info screen
(LCPU only)
Menu
Intelligent module monitor screen I/O monitor screen High-speed counter monitor screen
(LCPU only) (LCPU only)
Current
value
Data area No. Set/Reset Data change window

setting window window

You can start the intelligent module monitor from a user-created screen by selecting the connection destination
with a special function switch to which [System Launcher] is set.
User-created screen The intelligent module monitor
(special function switch System configuration is started.
(system launcher)) screen (Example: Monitor menu screen)
[End] key
POINT
2. SYSTEM LAUNCHER
(3) Starting from the special function switch of a system application (Extended function) that has a
system configuration screen
When the system application set as a connection destination of the special function switch supports the system
launcher function, the system launcher switching notification dialog appears at the first startup, and the system
configuration screen of the system launcher function appears.
At the second or later startup, the set function screen appears when the system application is started from the
user-created screen.
User-created screen The intelligent module monitor
(special function switch System configuration is started.
(intelligent module monitor)) screen (Example: Monitor menu screen)
Application startup
(for the first time) Select the target function.
[End] key
POINT
When the set connection destination does not support the system launcher function, a dialog appears at the startup
and the system configuration screen of the set connection destination appears.
2. SYSTEM LAUNCHER
8 - 10 8. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR

This section describes the operations of the screens when using the intelligent module monitor.
8.4.1 Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions
This section describes the configuration of the System Configuration screen that is displayed after startup of the
intelligent module monitor and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen.
 When using the RCPU, QCPU (Q mode), QSCPU, or LCPU

1)
2)
3)
Item Description
1) Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station. 8
Displays the model name, I/O points, and start I/O number for the modules installed in the monitored station.
The model name of the module and related data are displayed at the end of the module data readout from the
PLC CPU.
For an intelligent function module that cannot be monitored, the model name is displayed as "SP".

The module icon becomes the key to switch to the screen where the monitoring of that module is performed.
2) The communication setting window is displayed for the MELSECNET/H connection or MELSECNET/10
connection.
Displays the CPU Nos. for the CPUs and the control CPU number for the installed modules when there are
multiple CPU systems.
3) Display keys used for the operations on the System Configuration screen shown in (2). (Touch input)
8. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8 - 11

(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the operation on the DEVICE MONITOR
screen.
Key Function
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
The screen switches to the PC Information monitor screen.

Icon of PLC CPU
8.4.3 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions
In intelligent module monitor mode:
Icon of intelligent function Switches to the screen where the intelligent module monitoring for that module is performed.
module In unit detail info mode:
Switches to the screen displaying detailed information of the selected module.
Switches the System Configuration screen to Info. mode.
8.4.4 Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions
Switches the System Configuration screen to Basic mode.
Operations can be performed when the system configuration has three or more extension bases.
: Scrolls one stage up.
: Scrolls one stage down.

The following shows the setting methods for monitoring other stations with intelligent module monitor.
1. When the intelligent module monitor is started for the first time,
the communication setting window is automatically opened by
displaying the system configuration screen.
Otherwise, touch the ChNET
PLCNo.
button in the System Configuration
screen to display the communication setting window.
2. In the communication setting window, select one from channels

No.1 to 4.
For the operation on the communication setting screen, refer to
the following.
8
3. When the channel No. is selected, the screen on the left is
displayed.
Set the network number of the target controller and the CPU

station number.
4. After selecting the station number, touch the enter key. The
communication setting window closes and the system
configuration of the set monitor destination is displayed.
For further operations, refer to the following.
8.4.6 Specifying a module to monitor and selecting
monitor menu

1) 3) 2) 3) 1) 2)
4) 5)
No. Item Description Setting range
Set the CH No. for the target

1) CH No. input area 1 to 4
controller.

communication connection: 0
Network No. input Set the network No. for the target • Ethernet connection, CC-Link IE controller network
2)
area controller. connection, CC-Link IE field network connection: 1 to 239
• MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: 0 (host loop) / 1 to 255
(specified loop)
• CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: 0

communication connection: FF (Host station)
Set the station No. of the target • Ethernet connection: 1 to 64
controller. • MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: 0 (control station) / 1 to
Station No. input
3) When the station No. is set to the 64 (normal station)
area
host station (FF), set the network • CC-Link IE controller network connection: 1 to 120
No. to 0. • CC-Link IE field network connection: 0 (master station) / 1 to
120 (local station)
• CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: 0 (master station) / 1 to 64
(local station)
4) CH No. selection key Set the CPU No. -
Keys for operations in the

5) Keys communication setting window -
shown in (b). (Touch input)
(b) Key functions
Key Function

input area.

This section describes the structure of the PC Information monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed on
screen. The PC Information monitor screen is displayed by specifying the RCPU, QCPU (Q mode), QSCPU, or LCPU on
the system configuration screen.
The GOT displays the PC Information monitor screen only when using the following controllers.
• RCPU
• QCPU (Q mode)
• QSCPU
• LCPU
 When using the RCPU, QCPU (Q mode), or LCPU

(1) The PC information monitor screen.
1) 2)
5)
3)
2)
4)
2) 8
Item Description

1) Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
2) Displays the keys that are used for the operation on the PC information monitor screen.
3) Displays the operating status of the PLC CPU.
Displays the currently occurring errors.

4) When using the LCPU, touch the error cause to display the error detail screen.
(2) Error details screen
Displays the error record.

The number of error histories to be displayed varies depending on the monitored PLC CPU.
• When monitoring the RCPU
Up to 16 error histories can be displayed.
5) • When monitoring the QCPU (Q mode) or LCPU
Up to 100 error histories can be displayed.
When using the LCPU, touch the error record to display the error detail screen.
(b) Key functions

The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the PC information
monitor screen.
Key Function
Switches the screen to the System Configuration screen.

Scrolls the display one page up or down.
: Scrolls one page up.
: Scrolls one page down.
This key is displayed when the RCPU or LCPU is monitored.

Shifts to the Continuation error clear screen.
(3) Continuation error clear screen

1) 2)
3)
Item Description
2) Displays the keys that are used for the operation on the error details screen.
Displays the common error information and individual error information based on the information stored in
SD4 and SD5 of the LCPU.
3)
For the common error information and the individual error information, refer to the following.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
(b) Key functions

The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the error details screen.
Key Function
Returns the screen to the PC Information monitor screen.


(3) Continuation error clear screen
1) 2)
2)
2)
3) 2)
Item Description
2) Displays the keys that are used for the operation on the Continuation error clear screen.
Displays the status of removable continuation errors , and error messages.

The following shows the continuous error status.
• Specification: User specification error
3)
• Minor: Minor error
When monitoring the LCPU, touch the check box of each continuation error to switch the status between
selected and unselected for removing the error.
8
(b) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the Continuation error
clear screen.

Key Function

Targets all continuous errors for the continuous error releasing.
Unselects all continuous errors for the continuous error releasing.
Scrolls the display one stage up or down.
The operation performed by pressing this key differs depending on the monitored PLC CPU.
• When monitoring the RCPU
All the continuous errors which have occurred are cleared.
• When monitoring the LCPU
The selected continuous errors are cleared.
POINT
Precautions for releasing continuous errors
(1) If the error messages are the same, the errors are released regardless of the error code. Therefore, some
error codes may be released even without the user intend to.
(2) The annunciator memorizes the number of annunciators detected in the CPU modules.
When canceling multiple annunciators, perform the error releasing multiple times.
(3) Even after executing the error releasing, the detected error record is not deleted.

 When using the QSCPU
(1) PC Information monitor screen
1) 2)
3) 4)
5)
6)
7) 2)
Item Description
1) Displays the channel number, network number, and station number of the monitored station.
2) Displays the keys that are used for the operation on the System Configuration screen shown in (b).
3) Displays the QSCPU operation status. (RUN/STOP)
4) Displays the safety CPU operation mode. (Safety mode/Test mode)
Displays the error being occurred.

Touching the error displays the Error details screen.
( When using the QSCPU (3) Error details screen)
No. : Displays the error code.

5) Detail : Displays the detail code of the error log.
([----] is displayed when no detail code exists.)
Error cause : Displays the error details.

Touching the item displays the Error details screen.
Date, Time : Displays the date and the time that the error occurs.
Set the items to be displayed in the log list.

6)
( When using the QSCPU (1) (b) Key functions)
Displays the operation status, error information, and others of the monitored PLC CPU. (Log list)
Type : Displays the log types. (Ope: Operation log, Err: Error log)
No. : Displays the operation codes or error codes.
Detail : Displays the 4-digit detail codes of the operation logs or the error logs for the errors
occurred in the CC-Link Safety system remote I/O module.
([----] is displayed when no detail code exists.)
Operation/Error message
7)
: Displays the operation details or error messages.
Displays "BROKEN OPERATION/ERROR LOG" when the log data is damaged.
Date, Time : Displays the dates and the time of operations or the dates and time that errors occur.
Touching an operation log displays the Operation details screen.

( When using the QSCPU (2) Operation details screen)
Touching an error log displays the Error details screen.
( When using the QSCPU (3) Error details screen)

(b) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the System
Key Function

Switches the log types to be displayed in the log list.
All log : Displays all the logs (error logs, operation logs).
Error log : Displays the error logs only.
Operation log : Displays the operation logs only.
Sorts the log list in ascending or descending order.
Switches the numbers of logs displayed in the log list.
32 items : Displays the latest 32 logs.

100 items : Displays the latest 100 logs.
(When the number of displayed logs is switched from 100 to 32, 100 logs are displayed before touching
the Update key.)
Obtains the latest log information from the PLC CPU and updates the log list.
(The displayed log data before touching the Update key is deleted.)
Scrolls the display one page up or down.
: Scrolls one page up.

: Scrolls one page down.
8
(2) Operation details screen
1) 2)

3)
4)
Item Description
3) Displays the information of the error touched in the PC information monitor screen.
Displays the detailed operating information according to the operation log information stored in the
4)
QSCPU.
(b) Key functions

Key Function


1) 2) 1) 2)
3) 3)
2)
4) 4)
(Example) Error details screen for (Example) Displaying individual error

safety CPU error information for safety remote I/O station
Item Description
3) Displays the information of the error touched in the PC information monitor screen.
Displays the common error information and the individual error information according to the information
stored in SD4 and subsequent devices of the QSCPU.
For the common error information and the individual error information, refer to the following.
QSCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
4)
When the individual error information for the safety remote I/O station is displayed, the numerical notation
of the displayed data can be switched between decimal and hexadecimal numbers. (When the CC-Link
Safety system master module cannot receive the error information from the safety remote I/O station,
[****] is displayed for unreceived items.)
(b) Key functions
Key Function

Switches the numerical notation of the displayed data between decimal and hexadecimal numbers. (Only
when the individual error information for the safety remote I/O station is displayed)

This section describes the structure of the Unit Detail Info screen that is displayed by specifying a module on the System
Configuration screen at Info. mode, and the key functions displayed on the screen.
The GOT displays the Unit Detail Info screen only when using the following controllers.
• RCPU
• QCPU (Q mode)
• QSCPU
• LCPU
1) 2)
3)
2)
Item
1)
Description
Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
8
2) Displays keys used for the operations on the System Configuration screen.
Displays the operating status, error information and other information of the targeted PLC CPU.
3)
Up to 10 error information events can be displayed.

 Key functions
The following table shows the functions of the keys used for the operation on the Unit Detail Info screen.
Key Function

Displayed only when displaying information of the LCPU built-in I/O module.
This button is available when [Positioning axis 1] or [Positioning axis 2] is set to [Use] in the parameter.
Shifts to the positioning monitor screen.
(1) Positioning monitor screen
This button is available when [High-speed counter 1] or [High-speed counter 2] is set to [Use] in parameter.
Shifts to the high-speed counter monitor screen.
(2) High-speed counter monitor screen
Shifts to the I/O monitor screen.
(4) I/O monitor screen.

(1) Positioning monitor screen
1) 2)
3)
2) 2)
Item Description
2) Displays the keys used for the operations in the positioning monitor screen.
Displays the operation status of the positioning function.

3)
The operation status is displayed or hidden according to the parameter settings of built-in functions.
(b) Key functions

The following table shows the functions of the keys used for the operation on the positioning monitor
screen.
Key Function
Return to the unit detail info screen.

/
Resets the error of the axis 1 or axis 2.
(Error reset)
/
(Home position return request Turns off the home position return request for axis 1 or axis 2.
OFF)
POINT
Precautions for using the positioning monitor screen.
When the parameter settings of a built-in function is changed by programming software or others of the connecting
device during the positioning monitor screen display, return to the unit detail info screen and display the position
monitor screen again.

(2) High-speed counter monitor screen
1) 2)
3)
4) 2)
Item Description
2) Displays the keys used for the operation in the high-speed counter monitor screen.
Displays the operation status of the high-speed counter function.

3)
The operation status is displayed or hidden according to the parameter settings of built-in functions.
Displays the current value of the CH1 and CH2.

4) Touch the current value and the data change window is displayed.
(3) Data change window
(b) Key functions

8
The following table shows the functions of the keys used for the operation on the high-speed counter
monitor screen.

Key Function

Reflects the preset value entered in the data change window to the PLC CPU.
/ Reset the error of CH1 or CH2.
POINT
Precautions for using the high-speed counter monitor screen.
(1) When the parameter settings of a built-in function is changed by programming software or others of the
connecting device during the high-speed counter monitor screen display, return to the unit detail info screen
and display the high-speed counter monitor screen again.
(2) The preset value preset from the high-speed counter monitor screen is valid for the subsequent presets,
unless it is set again in the sequence program.
(3) If the preset from the high-speed counter monitor screen and the preset by the sequence program are
executed simultaneously, the setting value by the sequence program may be preset.

(3) Data change window
2)
1)
2)
Item Description
1) Displays the entered value.
2) Displays the keys used in the operation of the data change window.
(b) Key functions

The following table shows the functions of the keys used for the operation on the data change window.
Key Function
Closes the data change window.
Changes the data change target.

/ / /
Sets the entered value to the preset value.
Deletes one character of the entered value.
Deletes all entered values.

(4) I/O monitor screen.
1) 2)
4)
3)
5)
Item Description
2) Displays the keys used for the operations in the I/O monitor screen.
3) Displays the status and values of functions assigned to the input signal.
4) Displays the status of functions assigned to the output signal.
5) Displays the setting status of the output mode during error, for the output signal.
(b) Key functions

The following table shows the functions of the keys used for the operation on the I/O monitor screen.
8
Key Function


8.4.5 Composition of the intelligent module monitor screen and key functions
This section describes the structure of the monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen. The
monitor screen is displayed by specifying a module on the system configuration screen in basic mode when the RCPU,
QCPU (Q mode), QSCPU, or LCPU is used.
1) 3)
2)
Item Description
1) Displays the model name of the module being monitored.
Displays the buffer memory data of the module in its current form or in a graph.
The status of I/O signals to and from PLC CPU is monitored.
2)
All data are displayed when the readout from the intelligent function module is completed.
When testing, execute testing after moving the cursor to the display position of the target data.
3) Displays keys used for the operations on the monitor screen.
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of keys that are used for the operations on the monitor screen.
Key Function
Starts testing (SET/RST) of the I/O signal between the PLC CPU and the intelligent function module.
Starts changing (writing) the current values of the buffer memory of the intelligent function module displayed on
the screen.
Closes the current monitor and returns to the screen displaying monitor menu.
This operation can only be used when the intelligent function module has a monitor menu.

8.4.6 Specifying a module to monitor and selecting monitor menu
This section uses the positioning module (AD71) as an example to describe the operations when starting the intelligent
module monitor to monitor a desired module.
Operation procedure
Display System Configuration screen. See Sec.6.4.1
Specify module to be monitored (Touch display position of module.)

(1) From among the modules installed in the
corresponding base unit, specify the intelligent
function module whose format is displayed.
* : For modules where the format is not displayed,
monitor with the system monitor function (See
Sec.2.).
Display screen that shows monitor menu. Specify input/output modules according to Sec. 6.6.
(2) Specify the menu corresponding to the type of

data to be monitored.
(3) With modules for which the monitor menu cannot all
be displayed in one screen, touch the keys
at the right of the screen to scroll the display menu.
8
Specify menu to be monitored (Touch display position of menu.)
(4) Check the contents of the display. Carry out the

Display monitor screen of specified menu.
subsequent operation according to Sec. 6.5.
(5) Carry out tests for the displayed data according to

Sec.6.4.7.
Change current value of buffer memory
Turn output signal from PLC CPU on and off
Proceed to Sec. 6.4.7 and Sec. 6.5

8.4.7 Testing of the intelligent function module
WARNING
• When testing the operation (changing a current buffer memory value) of the intelligent module monitor, read this
manual carefully to fully understand the operation.
For devices that perform significant operations for the system, never perform test operation to change data.
Doing so can cause accidents due to false outputs or malfunctions.
Testing can be performed for all buffer memory data displayed on the current monitor screen.
This section describes the operations for changing the current value of the buffer memory and turning on and off the
output signal from the PLC CPU to the intelligent function module.
POINT
(1) Perform testing for the buffer memory that can be written from the PLC CPU and output signals that
are output from the PLC CPU.
(2) It is recommended that testing be performed with the PLC CPU in STOP status.
If the PLC CPU is tested during RUN status, the test monitor display returns to display values output from the
sequence program and output statuses.
Operation procedure
Display monitor screen.
2)
Data SET/
(Touch)
Chg. , RESET
3)
1)

1)
Display key window on monitor screen. When Data is touched (changes current value of buffer memory)
Chg.
All of the following operations can be carried out by touching the keys
in the displayed key window.
When you touch at the upper left of the key window, the key window
closes and the display returns to the monitor screen.
(1) Move the cursor to the position where the data to be tested
is displayed. (*1) ( : Up/down : Left/right)
(2) Use the numeric keys to specify the value to be changed. (*2)
The DEL key can be used to clear individual characters among those
input.
SET/
When is touched (tests the I/O signal)
RESET
All of the following operations can be carried out by touching the keys
in the displayed key window.
(Touch: input confirmation) When you touch at the upper left of the key window, the key window
closes and the display returns to the monitor screen.
(Test continues) (1) Use the alphabetic character keys to specify the name of the device
3) to be tested, and then touch . (*1)
(Test ends)
(2) Use the numeric keys to specify the device number, and then touch
(Touch) .
(3) Use the numeric keys to specify "Set" or "Reset".
2) 0 : OFF 1 : ON
*1 Do not perform the following tests.

If these tests are performed, the module may not operate correctly or the buffer memory/input signal may return to the output
value/output status from the intelligent function module.
1) Testing of read-only buffer memory from the PLC CPU.
2) Testing of input signals from the intelligent function module to the PLC CPU.
8
*2 When testing buffer memory data, specify the change value in the following way.
1) For data where 16/32 bits are displayed with one number, specify a new value in decimal format.
2) For data where one number of 16/32 bits is displayed as a percent, such as with an A/D conversion module, specify a new
value corresponding to the percentage in decimal format.

Example:
When the set value of the offset or gain is 0 to 2000 and you intend to change it to "50%", input "1000".
3) For data where 16 bits are displayed with "0" or "1" for each bit, specify a new value with changing the data to a decimal.

8.5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens
To display the intelligent module monitor screen on the GOT, write special data (intelligent module monitor data) to be
monitored.
For the capacity of the special data to be written to the GOT and the writing procedure, refer to the following.
The intelligent module monitor screen differs depending on the connected module.
This section describes the screen using a typical intelligent module monitor screen.
The screen configuration may differ depending on the intelligent module monitor used.
For the buffer memory address of the module and others, refer to the following.
? User's Manual of the intelligent function module used
• Example) QD73A1 Positioning & Parameter Data Monitor Screen
2) 14)
3) 15)
4) 16)
5) 17)
6) 18)
19)
7)
8) 20)
1)
9) 21)
10) 22)
23)
11) 24)
25)
26)
27)
12) 13)

8.5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens
8.6 Operating I/O Module Monitor Screen
This section describes the operation of the various screens in the intelligent module monitor function, when monitoring
input or output modules.
8.6.1 Specifying the module to be monitored
This section describes how to start monitoring for an input or output module with the intelligent module monitor function.
Operation procedure
Display the System Configuration screen. See Sec. 6.4.1
Specify the module to be monitored (Touch the position at which the module is displayed.)
(1) From among the modules installed in the corresponding

base unit, specify the module whose "Input" or "Output"
is displayed.
Refer to Section 6.4.1 for the way to specify the intelligent
function module.
Display the monitor screen for the specified module. (2) For information on confirming the displayed contents and
subsequent operation, please see Sec. 6.6.2.
* Tests cannot be conducted on input or output modules.
8

To Sec. 13.2

8.6.2 Monitor screen configuration and key functions
This section describes the configuration of monitor screens displayed by specifying the input module on the system
configuration screen, and explains the functions of keys displayed on the screen.
 Displayed contents (for an input module)

1) 2)
3)
4)
Item Description
1) Displays the type of object module (input or output module).
2) Displays keys used for the operations on the monitor screen.
3) Displays the name of the signal being monitored (X or Y).
Displays the number and status of the I/O signal.

4) The statuses of input and output signals are displayed after they are read out from the corresponding module.
Displays up to 64 points.( : ON, : OFF)
 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of keys that are used for the operations on the monitor screen.
Key Function
Closes the current monitor and returns to the System Configuration screen.

This section describes the error messages displayed when the intelligent module monitor is executed, and corrective
action.
Check that the channel number is correctly set in the

Communication channel setup error There is no channel for communication.
Communication Settings.
Check the connection status between the PLC CPU and

Communication could not be established
Communications error the GOT (disconnected or cut cables).
with the PLC CPU.
Has an error occurred in the PLC CPU?
The special data (intelligent module

Download the special data (intelligent module monitor
Monitor Data Can Not Find monitor data) has not been downloaded
data) to the GOT.
to the GOT.
Use the PLC CPU supported by the intelligent module

The intelligent module monitor selected
This PLC type is not supported monitor.
an unsupported PLC CPU.

9. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR
9.1 Features
Various monitor functions, changes to the parameter settings and test operations can be performed on the servo
amplifier connected to the GOT.
The features of the servo amplifier monitor are described below.
 Real-time display of the servo amplifier status

9.4.3 Monitor functions, 9.4.4 Alarm function
SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR

A list of the status of the servo amplifier connected to the GOT and the alarm details can be displayed in real-time.
(Display examples)
Monitor Alarm display
• Displays monitor data of the servo amplifier in a list. • Displays the details (number, name, occurrence time and cause of
alarm) of the alarm currently occurring in the servo amplifier. The alarm
can also be reset.
 Various diagnostics of the servo amplifier can be performed

9.4.5 Diagnostics function
There are multiple diagnostics functions to enable various diagnostics of the servo amplifier to be performed.
(Display examples)
DI/DO display Amplifier information display
• Displays a list of the ON/OFF status of the external I/O signals of the servo • Displays the servo amplifier software number and servo motor information
amplifier. (model name, ID and encoder resolution).
9. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9-1

9.1 Features
 Writing of the servo parameters is enabled
9.4.6 Parameter setting
The servo amplifier parameters can be read, changed and written to the servo amplifier.
 Various test operations can be performed

9.4.7 Test operations
Various test operations can be performed on the connected servo amplifier.
(Display examples)
JOG operation Motor less operation
• The servo amplifier rotates while the Forward or Reverse key is touched. • Simulates motion of the servo motor within the servo amplifier even when the
servo motor is not connected.
9-2 9. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR

9.1 Features
9.2 Specifications
This section describes the system configuration of the servo amplifier monitor.
following.
 Servo amplifiers targeted for the servo amplifier monitor

Servo amplifier
MELSERVO-J2-Super series

MELSERVO-J2M series
MELSERVO-J3 series*1
MELSERVO-J4 series*2
*1 Only MR-J3- A is supported.

*2 Only MR-J4- A is supported.
 Connection type
Function Connection type between GOT and servo amplifier
Name Description Direct connection
9
Servo Servo amplifier monitor,
amplifier changing the servo parameter
monitor settings and test operations


Write the package data that has the system application (Extended function) for the servo amplifier monitor to the
GOT.

9.2 Specifications
 List of servo amplifier types that can be monitored and functions
The list of servo amplifier types that can be monitored and their functions is shown below.
(1) MELSERVO-J2-Super series and MELSERVO-J2M series
( : Monitoring is possible with the servo amplifier monitor : Monitoring is not possible with the servo amplifier monitor - : Function unavailable)
MELSERVO-J2-Super series MELSERVO-J2M series
Function
MR-J2S- A MR-J2S- CP MR-J2M-P8A MR-J2M- DU
Model selection
Baud rate*1
Station No. Selection*1 - -
Setup
Station selection
Axis selection - -
Automatic demo - -
Display all
High speed monitor
Monitor Multi-axis listing - -
Trend graph -
I/O Input/Output display - - - -
Display
Alarm History
Amplifier data
I/O display -
Function device
-
display
No motor rotation -
Total power-on time
Software number
display
Motor data display -
Diagnostic
Tuning data -
Amplifier information
Absolute encoder data -
Automatic voltage
- - -
control
Axis name setting -
Unit composition
- -
listing
Parameter list - -
Tuning -
Change list
IFU parameter - -
DRU parameter - -
Parameters
Parameter copy - - - -
Device setting -
Basic setting - - - -
Gain/Filter - - - -
Extension setting - - - -
I/O setting - - - -
Jog -
Positioning -
Operation w/o motor -
Test
Forced output -
Program test - -
Single-step feed - - -

9.2 Specifications
MR-J2-Super series MR-J2M series

Function
MR-J2S- A MR-J2S- CP MR-J2M-P8A MR-J2M- DU
Point-data Point table - - -
Machine analyzer - -
Gain search - -
Advanced-
function Machine simulation - -
Robust disturbance
- - - -
compensation
*1 Set the baud rate and station number setting with Communication Settings.
For how to set the connecting device settings, refer to the following.
(2) MELSERVO-J3 series and MELSERVO-J4 series


MELSERVO-J3 series MELSERVO-J4 series
Function
MR-J3- A MR-J4- A
Model selection
Setup Station selection
Connection Setting
Display all
Monitor I/O Monitor*1
Trend graph
Display
History
Alarm Onset Data
Drive Recorder
No motor rotation
-
9
Diagnostic System Configuration*2
Life Diagnosis
Machine Diagnosis -
*2
Amplifier information
Absolute encoder data
I/O Display*1
Parameter Setting
Parameters
Axis Name Setting
Jog
Positioning
Operation w/o motor
Test
Forced output
Program test
Test Mode Information
One-touch Tuning -
Tuning
Adjustment
Machine Analyzer
Advanced Gain Search
*1 It is displayed with "DI/DO display screen" in "Diagnostic".

*2 It is displayed with "Amplifier information display screen" in "Diagnostic".

9.2 Specifications
 Required special data
Download the package data in the servo amplifier monitor data above to the GOT.
The available memory space shown in the table above is required in the user area to download the servo amplifier
monitor to the GOT.
For the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data using
other user areas, refer to the following.
9.2.2 Access range
9.2.3 Precautions
(1) Before using the servo amplifier monitor

Read the manual of the connected servo amplifier carefully and make sure you understand the contents before
performing servo amplifier monitoring.
(2) Test operation
Be sure to read the precautions listed below before performing a test operation.
(3) Time displayed on the servo amplifier monitor
If the time data of the GOT is incorrect, the time on the servo amplifier monitor will not be displayed correctly.
Refer to the following for the GOT clock data.
(4) Setting details
Use the same settings for the servo amplifier monitor on the GOT (Setup screen ( 9.4.2)) and the servo
amplifier.
If the settings are different, proper communications may not be performed.
(5) Servo amplifier monitored
One servo amplifier can be selected to be monitored among 32 servo amplifiers.
If multiple servo amplifiers are connected, select one servo amplifier to monitor.
(6) Background processing during parameter being input or output
Do not monitor the device of the servo amplifier parameter by the function which is operated background (such
as device data transfer, logging, recipe, advanced recipe) while parameters are being input or output. Data may
not be written or read normally or a communication error may occur.

9.2 Specifications
9.3 Operations of Display
This section explains how to display the servo amplifier monitor screen after the GOT is turned on.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT. Starting from the special

function switch
(Servo Amplifier Monitor)
Starting from the utility set in the project data

After the utility is displayed, Refer to the following manual for how to set the special
touch [Monitor] [Servo amplifier monitor] function switch.
from the Main Menu.
for the GOT used.
Set the channel number of the servo

amplifier connected to the GOT.
9
Set the setup.
Set the model type etc. of the servo

amplifier to be monitored.
Continued to next page

From previous page
Select a function to monitor.
Select the servo amplifier monitor to use.
End
POINT
After turning on the GOT, the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the servo
amplifier monitor only.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the Ch: button on
the servo amplifier monitor screen.
( 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens)
The servo amplifier monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to
the GOT.

Start
At the second
or later startup
Utility
or
user-created
monitor screen

End
Touch Ch: .
Setup
Setup Fix
MENU
9
Setup ( Section 8.4.2)
End
Touch any of the functions. Monitor ( Section 8.4.3)
Menu Alarm ( Section 8.4.4)

Diagnostics ( Section 8.4.5)
Parameters ( Section 8.4.6)
Test ( Section 8.4.7)
HINT
To exit by touching End

At next startup of the servo amplifier monitor, the last exited screen is displayed.
If using the same screen frequently, exiting with the End button is convenient.
However, the last exited screen is not displayed if the servo amplifier monitor screen data was deleted due to an
installation of package data, turning the GOT power from off to on, or a reset.

9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
This section describes the operations of the screens when using the servo amplifier monitor.
The display screen of the servo amplifier monitor varies depending on the GOT used.
9.4.1 Servo amplifier monitor
With the servo amplifier monitor, various monitor functions, parameter setting changes and test operations can be
performed on the servo amplifier connected to the GOT.
To display a function, make a selection on the function selection menu screen.
(Function selection menu screen)
1)Setup . . . . . . . . . . Selects the servo amplifier type to monitor, the station number setting (station number selection), and the IFU station number.
( 9.4.2)
2)Monitor . . . . . . . . . Displays all monitor data of the servo amplifier in real-time.

( 9.4.3)
3)Alarm . . . . . . . . . . Displays the alarm that is currently occurring and the history. Also resets the alarm and clears the history.
( 9.4.4)
4)Diagnostics . . . . . . Performs the following various diagnostics on the connected servo amplifier.
( 9.4.5) • DI/DO display : Displays the ON/OFF status of the external I/O signals.
• Function device display : Displays the ON/OFF status of the I/O function devices.
• Amplifier information display : Displays the model name, ID and encoder resolution of the servo motor connected to the
servo amplifier.
• ABS data display : Displays the absolute position data of the absolute position detection system.
• Unit composition list display : Displays a list of servo amplifier unit composition.
5)Parameters . . . . . . Displays the parameter data and changes the parameter settings.
( 9.4.6)
6)Test . . . . . . . . . . . . Performs various test operations (JOG operation, positioning operation, motor-less operation and DO forced output).
( 9.4.7)
9 - 10 9. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR

9.4.2 Setup
This is used to set the communication with the servo amplifier.
POINT
(1) Before making the settings on the setup screen, also make the same settings on the servo amplifier
side.
If the settings on this screen and the settings on the servo amplifier do not match, proper communications
may not be performed.
(2) The settings on the setup screen return to the initial state when the GOT is turned off or reset.
After turning on the power to the GOT, perform the settings on the setup screen again.
 Setup screen
This section describes the display data of the setup screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.

1)
2)
3)
* [Axis number] and [Capacity setting] cannot be set.
1) Model Displays the model of the servo amplifier to be connected.
2) Station Displays the station number (00 to 31) of the servo amplifier to communicate with.
3) IFU Station Displays the serial communication station number of the IFU (interface unit).
9. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9 - 11

(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the setup screen.
Key Function
Sets the model of the servo amplifier to be connected.
Sets the station number (00 to 31) of the servo amplifier to communicate with.
*1
Sets the serial communication station number of the IFU (interface unit).
Sets the setup details and returns to the function selection menu screen.
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
*1 This is valid only when MR-J2M-P8A is connected.

9.4.3 Monitor functions
Displays all monitor data of the servo amplifier in real-time.
 Monitor screen
The following describes the display data of the monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
1) 10)
2) 11)
3) 12)
4) 13)
5) 14)
6) 15)

7)
8)
9)
Counts the feedback pulses from the servo motor encoder and displays the result.
1) Cumulative feedback pulses • When the set value exceeds "9999999", counting begins from "0".
• During reverse rotation, the – sign is added.
Displays the speed of the servo motor.

2) Servo motor speed • The value is displayed with the 0.1r/min unit rounded off.
• During reverse rotation, the – sign is added. 9
Displays the droop pulses of the deviation counter.
3) Droop pulses
• During reverse rotation, the – sign is added.
Counts the position command input pulses and displays the result.
• Since the value before multiplication of the electrical gear (CMX/CDV) is displayed, it may not match the
4) Cumulative command pulses
cumulative feedback pulse display.
• During reverse rotation command, the – sign is added.
Displays the frequency of the position command input pulse.

5) Command pulse frequency • The value before multiplication of the electrical gear (CMX/CDV) is displayed.
• During reverse rotation command, the – sign is added.
Analog speed command

voltage (during speed control Displays the input voltage of the analog speed command (VC).
6) mode)*1
Analog speed limit voltage

Displays the input voltage of the analog speed limit (VLA).
(during torque control mode)*1
Analog torque command

voltage (during position/speed Displays the voltage of the analog torque limit (TLA).
7) control mode)*1
Analog torque limit voltage

Displays the voltage of the analog torque limit (TC).
(during torque control mode)*1

Displays the ratio of the regenerative power to the permissible regenerative power in %.
8) Regenerative load ratio • The permissible regenerative power differs depending on the presence/absence of the regenerative brake option.
Set parameter No. 0 correctly according to the regenerative brake option. (Set to 80% or lower as a guide.)
Displays the continuous effective load torque.

9) Effective load ratio
• The effective value is displayed on the assumption that the rated torque is 100%.
Displays the maximum torque generated.

10) Peak load ratio
• The maximum value for the past 15 seconds is displayed on the assumption that the rated torque is 100%.
Displays the instantaneous torque.

11) Instantaneous torque
• The value of the generated torque is displayed in real time on the assumption that the rated torque is 100%.
Displays the within one-revolution position in the servo motor in pulse units of the encoder.
12) Within one-revolution position
• When the value exceeds the maximum pulse count, it returns to 0.
Displays the distance from the home position (0) in the absolute position detection system as the multi-revolution
13) ABS counter
counter value of the absolute position encoder.
Displays the estimated ratio of the servo motor shaft-equivalent load inertia moment to the servo motor's inertia
14) Load inertia moment ratio
moment.
15) Bus voltage Displays the voltage (between P and N) of the main circuit converter.
*1: This is displayed only when the MR-J2S- A is connected.
(2) Key functions

The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the monitor screen.
Key Function
Clears the values of [Cumulative feedback pulses] and [Cumulative command pulses] to 0.
Returns to the function selection menu screen.

9.4.4 Alarm function
The following alarms are displayed.

• Alarm display : Displays the alarm that is currently occurring. ( Alarm display screen)
• Alarm history : Displays the history of alarms that occurred. ( Alarm history screen)
The screen changes as follows after Alarm is selected on the function selection menu screen.

Function selection menu screen
Alarm display screen
Alarm history screen
POINT
If the alarm display screen data has not been downloaded to the GOT, the message "Monitor data not found" is
displayed and the subsequent screens are not displayed.

 Alarm display screen
The following describes the display data of the alarm display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
1)
2)
3)
1) Alarm Number Displays the number of the alarm that occurred.
2) Alarm Name Displays the name of the alarm that occurred.
Displays the date and time when the alarm occurred.

• The alarm occurrence time is displayed on the basis of the clock data of the GOT.
3) Time of Alarm • If there is an error in the servo amplifier before it is connected to the GOT, an alarm is displayed when the servo
amplifier is connected to the GOT.
In this case, the time when the servo amplifier is connected to the GOT is displayed as the alarm occurrence time.
(2) Key functions

The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for operations of the alarm display screen.
Key Function
Resets the alarm.

• The reset alarm is stored as the latest alarm.
Changes to the alarm history screen ( Alarm history screen).

 Alarm history screen
The following describes the display data of the alarm history screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

Displays the alarm history, starting from the latest alarm, in order.
1) Seq No. • Later alarms have smaller Seq Nos. (0 indicates the latest alarm)
• Up to six alarms can be displayed in the alarm history.
2) Alarm No. Displays the number of the alarm that occurred.
3) Alarm Name Displays the name of the alarm that occurred.
Displays the energization time of the servo amplifier until alarm occurrence on the assumption that the time at factory
4) Time (hour)
shipment is "0".
5) Detail (hex) Displays the code for detailed alarm information.

9
(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for operations of the alarm history screen.
Key Function
Clears the alarm history stored in the servo amplifier.
Changes to the Alarm Display screen ( Alarm display screen).

9.4.5 Diagnostics function
This function performs the following various diagnostics on the connected servo amplifier.
• DI/DO display : Displays the ON/OFF status of the external I/O signals.
( DI/DO display screen)
• Function device : Displays the ON/OFF status of the I/O function devices.
display ( Function device display screen)
• Amplifier information : Displays the model name, ID and encoder resolution of the servo motorconnected to the servo
display amplifier.
( Amplifier information display screen)
• ABS data display : Displays the absolute position data of the absolute position detection system.
( ABS data display screen)
• Unit composition list : Displays a list of servo amplifier unit compositions.
display ( Unit composition list display screen)

(1) Changing screens
The screen changes as follows after Diagnostics is selected on the function selection menu screen.
Depending on the model of the connected servo amplifier, some screens may not be displayed.
Refer to the following for the screens that cannot be displayed.
9.2.1 List of servo amplifier types that can be monitored and functions
[MR-J2M- DU monitor]

DI/DO display screen
Function device display screen Amplifier information display screen Unit composition list screen
ABS data display screen
POINT
If the DI/DO display screen data or function device display screen data (only when monitoring the MR-J2M- DU)
has not been downloaded to the GOT, “Monitor data not found” is displayed and the subsequent screens are not
displayed.

 DI/DO display screen
The following describes the display data of the DI/DO display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
1)
1) Input/Output Signal Displays whether the DI/DO signal is ON (lit) or OFF (not lit).
(2) Key functions

The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the DI/DO display screen.
Key Function
*1
Displays the DI/DO signal of the extension IO unit.
Changes to the function device screen ( Function device display screen).
Changes to the amplifier information screen ( Amplifier information display screen).
Changes to the unit composition list screen ( Unit composition list display screen).
Changes to the ABS data screen ( ABS data display screen).
*1 This is valid only when MR-J2M-P8A is connected.

 Function device display screen
The following describes the display data of the function device display screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
1) 1)

[When MR-J2S- CP is monitored]
1) Input/Output Function Displays the ON ( ) or OFF ( ) status for each I/O signal.
(2) Key functions

The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the function device display
screen.
Key Function
Changes to the DI/DO display screen ( DI/DO display screen). 9

Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format it with a printer.

 Amplifier information display screen
The following describes the display data of the amplifier information display screen and the key functions displayed
on the screen.
1)

*1 Displays the model name of the servo amplifier.
Servo amplifier model.
Amplifier Firmware Version Displays the software number of the servo amplifier connected to the GOT.
*1 Displays the cumulative time of the control power-on after the product was shipped from the factory.
Accumulated power-on time
Num. of inrush cur. sw. time*1 Displays the number of times the rush relay has been turned on/off after the product was shipped from the factory.
1) Displays the model name of the option card installed in the servo amplifier.
Optional card model*1
If no option card is installed, then "No connection" is displayed.
Motor model*2 Displays the model name of the servo motor connected to the servo amplifier.
Motor ID*2 Displays the ID of the servo motor connected to the servo amplifier.
*2 Displays the encoder resolution of the servo motor connected to the servo amplifier.
Encoder resolution
*1 This is displayed only for MR-J3- A or MR-J4- A.

*2 This is not displayed when monitoring the MR-J2M-P8A.
(2) Key functions

The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the amplifier information
display screen.
Key Function
Changes to the DI/DO display screen ( DI/DO display screen).

 ABS data display screen
The following describes the display data of the ABS data display screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
1)
2)

Displays the absolute position data in the absolute position detection system with the following items.
1) Absolute position data • Motor edge pulse value
• Command pulse value
Displays the encoder data with the following items.

Current position
• Absolute encoder data
• CYC (Motor edge pulse value)
• CYC (Command pulse value)
2) Encoder data • Number of motor rotations ABS
Position at power loss 9
• Absolute encoder data
• CYC0 (Motor edge pulse value)
• CYC0 (Command pulse value)
• Number of motor rotations ABS0
(2) Key functions

The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the ABS data display screen.
Key Function

 Unit composition list display screen
The following describes the display data of the unit composition list screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
1) Type name Displays the model name of the drive unit (DRU), interface unit (IFU) and option unit installed in each slot.
2) AxNo. Displays the axis number of the drive unit (DRU) and interface unit (IFU).
3) State Displays status of the drive unit (DRU) and interface unit (IFU) and the alarm/warning number.
4) Motor model Displays the model name of the motor connected to the drive unit (DRU).
5) S/W version Displays the software number of the drive unit (DRU) and interface unit (IFU).
(2) Key functions

The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the unit composition list
screen.
Key Function

You can use the parameter setting function to set the servo parameters (basic parameters/expansion parameter 1, 2) of
the connected servo amplifier.
If you have set a password in [Servo Parameter Display] on GT Designer3 (GOT2000), the password input key window
appears when you try to access the parameter setting screen of the servo amplifier monitor.
The screen changes as follows after Parameters is selected on the function selection menu screen.

Function selection menu screen ( Section 9.4.2)
Have you registered

the servo amplifier parameter No
changing password?
Yes
Password input key window
Enter the parameter changing password.

 Password input operation procedure
The following describes the procedure for inputting the password for changing the servo parameters.
(1) Functions
• If the input password matches, the parameter setting screen is displayed.
• If the input password does not match, an error message is displayed.
Touching returns to the function selection menu screen.
• Numerical numbers and letters A to F can be used for a password.
(2) Operations
(a) Inputting the password
Touch 0 to 9 and A to F to input the password.
After inputting the password, touch Enter to set the password.
To edit the input characters, touch Del to delete the characters, and then input the new characters.
(b) Canceling password input
Touch to return to the monitor screen.

 Parameter setting screen
The following describes the display data of the parameter setting screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
POINT
Parameters with an asterisk (*) preceding the name become valid after the parameters are set and the power of the
servo amplifier is turned off and then on again.
(1) Display screen

1) 2) 3) 4)
1) Pr. Displays the parameter number.
2) Name Displays the parameter name.

9
3) Value Displays the present set value of the parameter.
4) Unit Displays the setting unit for each parameter.
(2) Key functions

The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the operations on the parameter setting
screen.
Key Function
Displays the parameter items with scrolling a page up/down.
Changes the servo parameter settings read to the GOT internal memory.
Writes the servo parameter settings of the selected items to the servo amplifier.
Matches all parameter values presently displayed on the GOT with the servo amplifier parameter values.
Writes all parameter values presently displayed on the GOT to the parameters of the servo amplifier.
Reads all parameter values from the servo amplifier to the GOT and displays those values.
Returns all parameter values to their initial values.

Key Function
Switches between the parameter display for the drive unit (DRU) and interface unit (IFU) each time this is touched.
*1
*1
Selects the slot number of the drive unit (DRU).
*2
Changes the gain filter parameter.
Changes the extension setting parameter.

*2
*3
Changes the extension setting 2 parameter.
*3
Changes the extension setting 3 parameter.
*2
Changes the I/O setting parameter.
*1: This is displayed only when MR-J2M-P8A is connected.

*2: This is displayed only when MR-J3- A or MR-J4- A is connected.
*3: This is displayed only when MR-J4- A is connected.
POINT
Operations of when default is executed for the MR-J3- A parameters

The operation when default is executed differs depending on the displayed parameter screen, as shown in (1)
and (2) below.
(1) Basic setting, gain/filter or extension setting parameter screen
The 000BH processing (reference/writing is possible only for basic setting, gain/filter and extension setting
parameter) is performed.
(2) I/O setting parameter screen
The 000CH processing (reference/writing is possible for all parameters) is performed.

 Parameter setting operation
The following describes the procedure of changing the setting of the "Auto tuning" item as an example of the
parameter setting operation.
1. Touch the Read All key.

The parameter values within the servo amplifier are
displayed on the screen.

2. The parameter read confirmation window is
displayed.
Touch the OK key to read the parameter values
within the servo amplifier to the GOT.
3. The read parameter values within the servo

amplifier are displayed on the screen.
Parameters that cannot be written or read are not
9
displayed on the parameter setting screen.
4. Select the item whose parameter is to be set with

the or key, and touch the Change key.
(To next page)

(From previous page)
Parameter name
[setting field] (Setting
5. As the parameter setting window appears, enter the
range) parameter setting with alphanumeric keys, and
touch Enter to confirm the setting.
To cancel the parameter setting operation, touch
to close the parameter setting window.
6. The parameter setting is changed on the parameter
setting screen. Select the changed parameter item,
and touch the Write key.
If there are multiple parameter items with changed
settings, touch the Write All key to write all
parameter items with changed settings.
7. A confirmation window appears.

Touch the OK key to write the parameter
setting(s) to the servo amplifier.
To cancel writing of the parameter setting(s), touch
Cancel key.
This completes the writing operation of the
parameter setting.
POINT
(1) The changes to the parameter setting are written to the E2PROM of the servo amplifier.
Consequently, the written parameter setting is retained even if the power of the amplifier is off.
(2) If the following parameter settings are changed on the servo amplifier, be sure to also change the
settings on the GOT setup screen ( 9.4.2) in the same way.
If the settings on the setup screen and the servo amplifier do not match, normal communications with the
servo amplifier may not be performed.
• Station number setting • IFU station number setting

This function performs the following test operations on the connected servo amplifier.
• JOG operation : The servo motor rotates while the Forward or Reverse key is touched.
( JOG operation screen)
• Positioning operation : This operation starts when the Forward or Reverse key is touched, and the servo motor
rotates by the preset distance.
( Positioning operation screen)
• Motor-less operation : Simulates the motion of the servo motor within the servo amplifier even when the servo motor
is not connected.
( Motor-less operation screen)
• DO forced output : Forcibly turns the output signals ON/OFF regardless of the output conditions of the servo
amplifier output signals.
( )

9

(1) Changing screens
The screen changes as follows after Test is selected on the function selection menu screen.
Depending on the model of the connected servo amplifier, some screens may not be displayed.
Refer to the following for the screens that cannot be displayed.
9.2.1 List of servo amplifier types that can be monitored and functions
*1
JOG operation screen
*2
*1 *1
Positioning operation screen Motorless operation screen DO forced output screen
*1 Not displayed for MR-J2M-P8A monitor

*2 Not displayed for MR-J2M- DU monitor
POINT
If the JOG operation screen data has not been downloaded to the GOT, "Monitor data not found" is displayed and
the subsequent screens are not displayed.

 Precautions for test operations
The following describes the precautions when performing a test operation of the servo amplifier monitor.
WARNING
• Do not operate the servo amplifier switches with wet hands. Doing so can cause an electric shock.
• Do not perform operations with the front cover of the servo amplifier removed. Doing so can cause an electric shock
since the high-voltage terminals and live parts are exposed.
• Do not open the front cover of the servo amplifier when the power is on or during operation. Doing so can cause an
electric shock.
CAUTION
• Be sure to read the precautions for test operation in the manuals of the servo amplifier before performing a test
operation.
• Check parameters of the servo amplifier before starting operation. Unexpected operations may occur depending on

the machine.
• The heat sink, regenerative brake resistor, servo motor and other parts of the servo amplifier may be hot while the
power is on or for a period after the power is turned off; therefore, do not touch or bring parts (cables etc.) close to
them. Doing so can cause fire or damage to the parts.
(1) Servo on
For test operation of JOG operation/positioning operation, the SON digital input signal of the servo amplifier is
turned on automatically in the servo amplifier to start operation, regardless of the ON/OFF status of the SON
signal of the digital I/O signal of the servo amplifier.
In addition, the servo amplifier does not accept any external command pulses and input signals (excluding
emergency stop) until the test operation screen is exited.
The SON automatically turns on when touching the Forward or Reverse key on the JOG operation screen
or positioning operation screen of the servo amplifier monitor.
9
(2) Stop
POINT
To perform an emergency stop, turn off the emergency stop signal of the servo amplifier or turn off the input power.
(a) Use the following procedure to stop test operation from the servo amplifier monitor.
• JOG operation: Release the Forward or Reverse key.
• Positioning operation: Touch the Pause key.
(b) The servo motor stops if any of the following states occurs during test operation.
• The communication cable is disconnected.
• The screen is switched to another servo amplifier monitor screen or the servo amplifier monitor is exited.
However, during motor-less operation, the test mode is not canceled until the servo amplifier is powered
off.
 Preparations for test operations

When performing test operations, it is necessary to make the test operation settings on the connected servo
amplifier.
Refer to the manual of the connected servo amplifier for details of making settings on the servo amplifier to perform
test operations.

 JOG operation screen
This section describes the display data of the JOG operation screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
1)
2)
3)
1) Motor speed Displays the set speed of the servo motor.
2) Acc/dec time Displays the set acceleration/deceleration time constant.
3) Momentary Switch Operation Displays how to operate the JOG operation.
(2) Operation
(a) When selecting Momentary Switch Operation: Selecting Momentary
• Start operation
Touch the Forward or Reverse key.
• Stop operation
Release the Forward or Reverse key.
(b) When selecting Momentary Switch Operation: Not Selecting Momentary

• Start operation
• Stop operation
Touch the Pause key.

(3) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the JOG operation screen.
Key Function
Runs the servo motor in the forward rotation (CCW) direction.
Runs the servo motor in the reverse rotation (CW) direction.
Changes the speed of the servo motor.
Changes the acceleration/deceleration time constant.
Touching this changes the operation mode (momentary operation/no momentary operation).
Momentary Switch Operation: Selecting Momentary
The servo motor rotates while the Forward or Reverse key is touched. (Releasing your finger from these keys
stops the operation.)
Momentary Switch Operation: Not Selecting Momentary

The servo motor rotates while the Forward or Reverse key is touched, stops when the Pause key is
touched.
Changes to the positioning operation screen ( Positioning operation screen).
Changes to the motor-less operation screen ( Motor-less operation screen).
Changes to the DO forced output screen ( ).
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following: 9

 Positioning operation screen
The following describes the display data of the positioning operation screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
1)
2)
3)
1) Motor speed Displays the set speed of the servo motor.
2) Acc/dec time Displays the set acceleration/deceleration time constant.
3) Move distance Displays the set distance.
(2) Operation
(a) MELSERVO-J2-Super series and MELSERVO-J2 series
• Start operation
To resume operation that has been paused, touch the Forward key to resume forward rotation or the
Reverse key to resume reverse rotation.
• Stop operation
When the set distance has been reached, operation stops.
Touching the Pause key pauses the operation.
If touch the Pause key again after the operation is paused, the remaining distance is erased.
(b) MR-J3- A and MR-J4- A
• Start operation
To resume the operation that has been paused, touch the Restart key to resume the rotation.
• Stop operation
When the set distance has been reached, operation stops.
Touching the Pause key pauses the operation. If touch the Clear key again after the operation is
paused, the remaining distance is erased.

(3) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the positioning operation
screen.
Key Function
Runs the servo motor in the forward rotation (CCW) direction.
Runs the servo motor in the reverse rotation (CW) direction.
*1
Stops the rotation of the servo motor temporarily.
*2
Resumes the rotation of the paused servo motor.
*2
Deletes the remaining distance of the paused servo motor.
Changes the rotation speed of the servo motor.

Changes the acceleration/deceleration time constant.
Changes the distance.
Changes to the JOG operation screen ( JOG operation screen).
Changes to the DO forced output screen ( ).
9
*1: This is displayed only when MELSERVO-J2-Super series or MELSERVO-J2M series is connected.
*2: This is displayed only when MR-J3- A series or MR-J4- A is connected.

 Motor-less operation screen
The following describes the display data of the motor-less operation screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
POINT
Start and end of the motor-less operation with MR-J4- A.
Changing the parameter PC60 (*COPD) starts and ends the motor-less operation.
PC60 (*COPD) can be changed by [Ext. setting] in the parameter setting screen.
Parameter setting screen
• Start: After setting PC60 (*COPD) to 1, turn on the servo amplifier again.
• End: After setting PC60 (*COPD) to 0, turn on the servo amplifier again.
(2) Operation
• Start operation
Touch the Start key.
• Stop operation
To cancel the motor-less operation, turn the power of the servo amplifier off.
(3) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the motor-less operation
screen.
Key Function
Starts motor-less operation.
Changes to the DO forced output screen ( DO forced output screen).

Key Function
 DO forced output screen

The following describes the display data of the DO forced output screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.

ON/OFF status of output Displays the ON/OFF status of the servo amplifier output signals.
1)
signals • After this screen has been switched to another screen, all external I/O signals are turned off.
(2) Operation 9
When the name of an output signal is touched, the ON/OFF status of that signal is inverted and written to the
servo amplifier.
(3) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys used for the operations of the DO forced output screen.
Key Function
Touching the signal name of an output signal sets or resets the status for that signal.
• If the present output signal is ON, then the signal is turned off (RESET).
(Output signal name) • If it is OFF, then it is turned on (SET).
*1
Displays the external output signals of the extension I/O unit.
Stores the displayed screen to the m5emory card in BMP/JPEG file format or prints it with a printer.
*1: This is displayed only when the MR-J2M-P8A is connected.

This section describes how to store a screen to the SD card in BMP/JPEG file format it with a printer when executing the
amplifier monitor.
Hard copy output operations are performed by touching the "Print Screen" or "Cancel Print" key displayed on the screen.
Touch
[Print Screen].
BMP/JPEG file will be stored in the memory card The servo amplifier monitor screen will be
installed in the GOT. printed with the printer connected to the GOT.
POINT
The output target of hard copy can be set in [Hard Copy] of GT Designer3 (GOT2000).

This section describes the error messages that may be displayed during servo amplifier monitor operation and their
corrective action.
Error message Error definition Corrective action
The monitor data have not installed or Download the monitor data of the servo amplifier
Monitor data not found
have been deleted. monitor.
An item that cannot be set was

It is not possible to set. Select an item that can be set.
selected.
• Check the connection state between the servo

amplifier and the GOT (connector disconnection,
Communication can not be established cable wire break).
No AMP Communications with the servo amplifier set as the • Check if an error has occurred in the servo amplifier.
monitor destination. • Set the same values to the setup screen on the
servo amplifier monitor and the parameter setting on

the servo amplifier.
This test mode cannot be selected. Operation Another test operation function has
Exit the other test operation function.
without Motor rotation. started.
SON
The servo amplifier SON signal is ON. Turn off the servo amplifier SON signal.
Make sure that operation is at a stop.
A value outside the setting range was

Set the servo parameter of the servo amplifier within
Incorrect setting range set when setting the servo parameter of
the setting range.
the servo amplifier.
An alarm occurred on the connected

Servo alarm has occurred. Alarm:** Reset the alarm on the servo amplifier.
servo amplifier.
The drive unit is not installed in the

Unit not found Select the slot where the drive unit is installed.
selected slot.
Can't write to servo amp. Normally. Failed to write the parameter.

Check the write data. 9
Check the setup information.
Please confirm forward or reversal stroke end The servo amplifier LSP/LSN signal is
Turn on the servo amplifier LSP/LSN signal.
(LSP or LSN) OFF.
The channel No. setting or

Communication channel setup error communication driver setting is Check the communication settings.
incorrect.
• MR-J2M-P8A, MR-J3- A, or MR-

J4- A was selected with the station • Set the station No. selection setting to [Yes].
It is not possible to select. No. selection setting set to [No]. • Select a channel with a station number.
• A channel with no station number
was selected for the MR-J2M-P8A.

For using the backup/restoration function on GT21, refer to the following.

10.1 Features
Setting data, including a sequence program, parameters, and setting values, for a controller connected to the GOT can
be saved (backed up) in a memory card or USB memory in the GOT.
The following shows features of the backup/restoration function.
POINT
GOT backup
For backing up the GOT setting data, use the GOT data package acquisition function.
For the GOT data package acquisition function, refer to the following.
BACKUP/RESTORE
 Backing up or restoring system without personal computer for reducing downtime
Setting data for a controller connected to the GOT can be backed up, and the data can be restored to the controller.
With backing up setting data for a controller, the data can be restored to the controller with the GOT connected to the
controller even though the controller has to be replaced because of problems, including failures. As a result, the
system can be easily restored.
Backing up setting data to a data strage
10
Data strage
Restore the backup data

to the controller.
 Enabling creating the same system without personal computer

With restoring the backed up setting data to controllers in other systems, the same system can be created without a
personal computer.
10. BACKUP/RESTORATION 10 - 1
10.1 Features
 Improving security
When the backup/restoration function is used, browsing and changing setting data is limited with a password and the
security is improved.
Password authentication
Data strage
Password authentication
 Automatically backing up data with trigger

By setting the trigger device or the days and time, the GOT can automatically back up setting data for controllers.
By controlling the backup with the set trigger device, the GOT can automatically back up setting data for controllers
after the data are changed.
By setting the days and time, the GOT can back up setting data for controllers periodically.
Trigger device: X100 Setting GOT to back up data at 17:30 on Tuesdays
X100: Backing up
OFF ON Backing up setting data to
setting data to a data strage
a data strage X100: ON Tuesday
Detected 17:30
 Batch backup/restoration can be performed to multiple controllers on the network

Batch backup/restoration can be performed to multiple controllers on the network per channel.
Target controllers for the backup/restoration can be specified per station.
10.3.4 Network batch backup/restoration
Batch backup/restoration for

controllers on the network
NW No. : 1 NW No. : 1
Station No. : 2 Station No. : 3
Ethernet
NW No. : 1
Station No. : 1
 File register information at restoration

When restoration is executed, the PLC retains the data in the file register.
For the QCPU, the memory card ROM (Flash) cannot be set to save the file register.
10 - 2 10. BACKUP/RESTORATION
10.1 Features
10.2 Specifications
This section describes the system configuration for the backup/restoration function.
following.
Controller*1
RCPU
QCPU(Q mode)*2*3*4
LCPU
Motion controller CPU(MELSEC iQ-R Series)
Motion controller CPU(Q Series)*5*6
FXCPU*7
CNC C70
Robot controller*8
*1 When executing the network batch backup/restoration, use controllers compatible with the Ethernet connection.
BACKUP/RESTORE
For the controllers compatible with Ethernet connection, refer to the following.
*2 Excluding the Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU.
*3 Use a PLC CPU with the function version of B or later.
*4 The backup/restoration function cannot be used with the redundant CPU.
• For connections other than bus connection and direct CPU connection
*6
The operation system software of SV13 and SV22 are available only.
10
Use a motion controller CPU with the following OS installed when using the Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN.
• SW6RN-SV13Q :00H or later
(00E or later for using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU with the bus connection or direct CPU connection)
*7 To restore the backup data containing a special parameter, use the following version of CPU.
• FX3U(C) version: 3.10 or later
• FX3G(C) version: 2.00 or later
*8 For using CRnQ-700 or CRnD-700, use robot controllers with the following versions or later.
Robot controller Version
CRnQ-700 N8 or later
CRnD-700 P8 or later
10.2 Specifications
 Connection type
( : Applicable, : Partly restricted, : Inapplicable)
Serial
Bus connection Direct CPU Ethernet
Name Description communication
*1 connection connection
connection
Backs up setting data for a controller

Backup/ *4*6 *2*6 *5 *3*5
connected to the GOT and restores the
restoration
data to the controller.

*3 Backup/restoration cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.
*4 When the multiple CPU system is used, the restoration cannot be performed to a QCPU with the factory-settings or whose
memory is formatted.
*5 The restoration cannot be performed to a QCPU with the factory-settings or whose memory is formatted.
*6 The RCPU and motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) do not support the connection type.
The backup / restore, data storage is required.

Write the package data that has the system application (Extended function) for the backup/restoration to the
GOT.
 Required software to be installed

To restore the C language module backed up from the CNC C70, Remote Monitor Tool is required.
(1) How to obtain the software
Contact your local distributor.
(2) Operating environment
For the operating environment of the software, refer to the following.
MITSUBISHI CNC C70 / C64 Series Remote monitor tool Operating Manual
(3) How to install
For the installation instructions, refer to the following.
 Data to be backed up and restored

The following shows data to be backed up and restored.
Data other than the the following data cannot be backed up and restored.
(1) Basic model RCPU
Item Description File name
CPU parameter CPU.PRM
System parameter SYSTEM.PRM

Parameter
Unit parameter UNIT.PRM
Unit expansion parameter UEXmmmnn.PRM*1
10.2 Specifications
Sequence program *.PRG

Sequence program
FB file] *.PFB
Device comment Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller *.DCM
Device initial value Setting the device initial value *.DID
*2 File register *.QDR

Device memory
General-purpose file Files created by users Optional
Device data file File for storing device data DEVSTORE.QST
Global label setting file File for storing the data related to global labels GLBLINF.IFG
Label initial value File for storing the label initial value *.LID
Restoration information File for storing the restoration information *.CAB
Global label assignment Global label assignment information files that can be referred to from
GLBLNAME.IFG
information external devices
Logging common setting file LOGCOM.LCS

Logging setting file
Logging individual setting file LOG01.LIS to LOG10.LIS
Remote password Remote password settings 00000001.SYP

*1 Numbers are assigned for the "mmmnn" part automatically.
*2 Whether to retain the file register of a PLC at restoration is selectable.
10.3.1 Setting storage location for backup data
(2) Basic model QCPU
BACKUP/RESTORE
Parameter Parameter for operating a programmable controller PARAM.QPA
Intelligent function module

Parameter for intelligent function modules IPARAM.QPA
parameter*2
Sequence program Program that the CPU operates MAIN.QPG
SFC program Sequence program with the SFC programming format MAIN-SFC.QPG
*1*3 Data stored in file registers MAIN.QDR

File register
Device comment Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller MAIN.QCD
Device initial value Setting the device initial value MAIN.QDI

10
*1 The file register in the Flash card installed in the CPU is always restored without confirming saving.
Whether the file register in the SRAM card or standard RAM is restored or not can be selected in a dialog displayed at restoration.
When the file register is not restored, the existing file register is deleted.
Therefore, programs of the controller may not work normally.
If a problem occurs in the operation of the controller after restoration, perform the restoration again, including to the file register.
*2 The target is only parameters of the intelligent function modules controlled by the CPU module.
The parameters stored in the intelligent function module are not included.
(3) High Performance model QCPU

parameter*3
Program Program that the CPU operates (Including SFC program) ***.QPG
Device comment Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller ***.QCD
Boot operation specification

Batch file for starting programs stored in ROM and others AUTOEXEC.QBT
file
Device initial value Setting the device initial value ***.QDI
File register*1*4 Data stored in file registers ***.QDR
Sampling trace data that the specified device data is continuously

Sampling trace file*2 ***.QTD
collected with the specified timing
Failure history data*2 Failure history data that are recorded self-diagnostic results ***.QFD
10.2 Specifications
Programmable controller
Any user-created data stored in a memory card ***.*** (Optional)
user data
*2 The item can be backed up only.
(4) Universal model QCPU

parameter*3

file
*1*4 Data stored in file registers ***.QDR

File register

Programmable controller user

data
File for storing device data Device data used for the SP.DEVST and S.DEVLD instructions DEVSTORE.QST
Drive heading The heading of the drive QN.DAT
Remote password Remote password settings 00000000.QTM
Monitor sequence extension Data to increase the speed of monitors from other stations. MONITOR.Q0*
Stores the backup data for the latch data backup function to the
Latch data backup file LCHDAT00.QBK
standard ROM.
Whether to restore the file register stored in the SRAM card or standard RAM is selectable in a dialog appearing at restoration.
(5) LCPU

parameter

file
*1 Data stored in file registers ***.QDR

File register

10.2 Specifications
Programmable controller user

data
File for storing device data Device data used for the SP.DEVST and S.DEVLD instructions DEVSTORE.QST
Drive heading The heading of the drive QN.DAT
Remote password Remote password settings 00000000.QTM
Monitor sequence extension Data to increase the speed of monitors from other stations. MONITOR.Q0*
Stores the backup data for the latch data backup function to the
Latch data backup file LCHDAT00.QBK
standard ROM.
LOGCOM.QLG
Data logging setting file Setting the data logging LOG01.QLG to
LOG10.QLG
Menu definition file Menu defining files MENUDEF.QDF

(6) Motion controller CPU(MELSEC iQ-R Series)
CPU parameter CPU.PRM
System parameter SYSTEM.PRM
BACKUP/RESTORE
Common parameter
Unit parameter UNIT.PRM
Unit expansion parameter UNIT***.UDT
Basic setting mot_sys.csv
Servo network setting motnet01.csv to motnet02.csv
High-speed input request signal setting fsinput.csv
Mark detection setting markdt.csv

Motion CPU common
Limit output data setting limitout.csv
parameter
Manual pulse generator connection setting mpulser.csv 10
Vision system parameter vs_sys.csv, vs_prg.csv
Head module setting rioref.csv
Multiple CPU refresh (main cycle, operation cycle) setting fastref.csv
Axis setting parameter axpara01.csv to axpara32.csv
Motion control parameter Servo parameter svpara01.csv to svpara32.csv
Parameter block para_blk.csv
Servo program servo.prg
Motion SFC parameter motsfcpr.bin
Motion SFC program motsfc.prg

Program
Program difference file (F, G, K, SFC diagram) df_f0000.prg to df_f4095.prg,
df_g0000.prg to df_g4095.prg,
Online change file (F, G, K, SFC diagram) df_k0000.prg to df_k4095.prg,
df_sf000.prg to df_sf255.prg
Cam data cam0001.csv to cam1024.csv
Servo input axis parameter in_servo.csv

Advanced synchronous
Synchronous encoder axis parameter in_enc.csv
control data
Command generation axis parameter in_cmgen.csv
Synchronous parameter out01.csv to out32.csv
10.2 Specifications
Boot operation file boot01.csv to boot02.csv
Event history SYSEVENT.LOG
bootlog.txt,
Other data Boot log
bootlog.bak (previous boot log)
Digital oscilloscope setting osc01.csv
Digital oscilloscope sampling data ***.csv*1
Project management data for Label data *.IFG

the peripheral software Comment data *.DCM
*1 Numbers are assigned for the "***" part automatically.
10.2 Specifications
(7) Q series motion controller CPU
File where SFC code, G-code and F/FS code files are combined and
Motion SFC program
converted into CPU's Motion SFC program code memory storage sfcprog.cod
conversion file (control code)
format
Motion SFC program File where G list and F/FS list files are combined and converted into
sfcprog.bin
conversion file (text) CPU's Motion SFC program text memory storage format
sfcprmD.bin*1
Motion SFC parameter file Motion SFC control parameter setting information files
sfcprm.bin*2
K code file Internal code files of servo program svprog.bin
svsystemD.bin*1
System setting data file System setting data information files svsystemH.bin*3
svsystem.bin*4
svlatchD.bin*1
High speed read setting file High speed read setting information files
svlatch.bin*2
Optional data monitor setting svsysmonD.bin*1

Optional data monitor information files
file
svsysmon.bin*2
svdataD.bin*1
Axis data parameter block information files
svdataH.bin*3
BACKUP/RESTORE
Servo parameter information files svparaH.bin*3
Servo data file
svdata.bin*4
Servo parameter information files
svdata2.bin*4
Limit switch setting data information files svls.bin
Mechanical system program File after conversion of mechanical system program edit information
svmchprm.bin*5
conversion file file into internal codes
Cam data files of cam No.1 to 64 svcamprm.bin*5
Cam data files of cam No.101 to 164 svcampr2.bin*5

10
Cam data conversion file
Cam Edit data Cam Edit data files svcameditD.bin
Vision sensor parameter Vision sensor parameter setting information files visionD.bin
User safety sequence

Safety sequence program files safetyD.bin
program
Mark detection setting data Mark detection setting data svmarkD.bin
Q series PLC common

Data files of Multiple CPU setting, I/O assignment, and others param.wpa
parameter file

Multiple CPU high speed refresh setting information files svrefresh.bin*1
refresh setting
*1 The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, or Q170MSCPU.
*2 The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU, Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or
Q173CPUN.
*3 The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172HCPU or Q173HCPU.
*4 The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN.
*5 The data can be backed up or restored with the SV22 operating system software only.
*6 The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU, Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, or
Q170MSCPU.
10.2 Specifications
(8) FX CPU
Parameter Parameter for operating a programmable controller
Device comment Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller
Sequence program Program that the CPU operates
Special program*1 Positioning setting/Initial value parameter

INFO.FPG
File register Data stored in file registers
Extension file register*2 Data stored in extension file registers
Built-in CC-Link/LT setting*3 CC-Link/LT parameter
Special parameter*1 Special adapter/special block parameter saved in the main unit
*1 The data can be backed up or restored with the FX3U(C) series and FX3G(C) series only.
*2 The data can be backed up or restored with the FX3U(C) series only.
*3 The data are stored in the FX3U-32MT-LT-2 only.
(9) CNC C70
Machining program Program for running the CNC ALL.PRG
Parameter Parameter for operating the CNC ALL.PRM
Tool offset Offset of the tool length compensation and tool radius compensation TOOL.OFS
Offset of the workpiece coordinate system from the machine coordinate

Workpiece offset WORK.OFS
system
Common variable Common macro variables that can be used in different machining programs COMMON.VAR
User PLC Ladder program created by users USERPLC.LAD
C language module*1 C language module created by users APLC.O
*1 The data can be backed up or restored only when the version C4 or later of the CNC C70 is used.
To restore the data, use the version C0 or later of Remote Monitor Tool.
(10) Robot controller

Error log (all levels) AError.LOG
Error log (low level) LError.LOG

Error log
Error log (caution level) CError.LOG
Error log (high level) HError.LOG
Error count Total errors TTLERROR.DAT
Common parameter Common parameters COMMON.PRM
(Machine name) # (Machine

Mechanical parameter Parameter for robots
No. 1 to 3).PRM
Backup information Setting information on backup BKUP.SYS
Mechanical information Information on the robot MECHA.SYS
sysalgn.MB5/MB4
sysimac.MB5/MB4
System program System based program files Sysorg.MB5/MB4
Syssafe.MB5/MB4
Systembase.MB5/MB4
User program User-created robot programs ***.MB5/MB4
Robot serial Serial No. for robots RobotSerial.ser
Maintenance forecast
Information on maintenance forecast MFInfo.mfb
information
10.2 Specifications
(11) Data for software
Label program Data for GX Developer PROJINFO.CAB
Symbolic data Symbolic data for PX Developer #FBDQINF.BIN
Simple project SRCINFOM.CAB

GX Works2 data
Source (with label) SRCINFOM.C32
information Structured SRCINFOI.CAB
GX Works2 data
project SRCINFOI.C32
SRCINF1M.CAB
Simple project SRCINF2M.CAB
GX Works2 data
(with label) SRCINF1M.C32
New source SRCINF2M.C32
information SRCINF1I.CAB
Structured SRCINF2I.CAB
GX Works2 data
project SRCINF1I.C32
SRCINF2I.C32
 Backup setting
Backup settings are created when executing the backup, and are stored in a data strage with the following folder
structure.
Data strage Data strage in the drive set as the storage location for the backup setting
BACKUP/RESTORE
BKUPLIST
SYS1BKUP.G2B Backup setting file for CH No.1
SYS2BKUP.G2B Backup setting file for CH No.2
For how to set the storage location for the backup setting, refer to the following.
 Backup data 10
(1) Storing backup data
When backups for the same channel are executed several times, the backup data are stored in a data strage.
(Backup data stored in the data strage are not overwritten.)
(2) Storage location for backup
Backup data are stored in a data strage with the following folder structure.
Data strage Data strage in the drive set as the storage location for backup data
BACKUP
SYS1BKUP
YYMMDDXX Folder for storing backup data
SYS2BKUP
For how to set the storage location for backup data, refer to the following.
10.2 Specifications
(3) Folders for backup data
Backup data are stored by the folder, and a folder name (YYMMDDXX) is set as follows.
YYMMDDXX
Serial number (00 to 99)
Backup date (01 to 31)
Backup month (01 to 12)
Backup year (the last two digits of the year)
Example) Folder name for the 10th backup data for Ch.1 on September 15th, 2013
Folder name: 13091509
When names of folders for backup data include XX of 99, the backup data cannot be stored.
Up to 100 backups can be executed per channel in a day.
 Log files for backing up or restoring

When backing up or restoring, the controllers and files to be baked up or restored are recorded in log files (When
backing up or restoring, they are overwritten.)
Log files are created in the folder where each backup data is stored.
Backup data
(a) File format
Item Setting
File name, extension result.txt
File format SJIS format
(b) Format
Header
Backup setting
Start time
Backup/restore status
Target devices
Files
Backup/restore status
Item Setting
Header Displays the executed operation type. ([BACKUP]: Backup, [RESTORE]: Restore
Backup setting Displays the backup setting name.
Start time Displays the start time for backing up or restoring.
Displays the CH No., network No., station No., CPU No., unit type, and model of the
target device when backing up or restoring.
The following shows the display contents for unit types.
• PLC: PLC CPU
Target devices
• MC : Motion controller
• SV : Servo Amplifier
• INV : Inverter
• RC : Robot controller
Files Displays the backed up or restored flies.*1
Recorded only when network batch backing up or restoring.

Displays the number of controllers which the backup/restoration is completed, the
Backup/restoration status
number of all target controllers, the number of controllers which backup/restoration is
completed, and the number of errors, by station.
*1 For RCPU, the long file names specified on GX Works3 are displayed in an abbreviated form.
10.2 Specifications
10.2.2 Access range
(1) Access range with connection types

The following shows a target controller of the backup/restoration execution with each connection type.
Connection type Target controller
Bus connection, direct CPU connection, serial communication connection Host station
Ethernet connection Host station, Other station
(2) With multi-channel function

With the multi-channel function, the backup/restoration is executed per channel.
(3) Backing up/restoring data for multiple CPU system
For the backup, the batch backup for all CPUs or specified backup of CPU No. 1 to 4 can be selected with the
utility setting.
The restoration is executed with specifying CPU No. 1 to 4.
When the backup/restoration is executed with specifying CPU No. 1 to 4, multiple CPUs (CPU No. 1 to 4) can be
specified.
10.2.3 Precautions
 Precautions for backup

(1) Data that cannot be backed up
The GOT cannot back up device current values and data stored in device memories.
BACKUP/RESTORE
For collecting device current values, use the recipe function.
For how to use the recipe function, refer to the following manual.
For collecting data stored in device memories, use GX Developer.
(2) Names of files to be backed up
When characters other than the characters defined in the shift JIS code and ASCII code are used for file names,
the file names may not be correctly displayed with the data backed up on the GOT.
For using the backup/restoration function, use characters in the JIS code and ASCII code for file names.
10
(3) Backing up data stored in file registers
Because backing up data stored in file registers takes a long time, some file register data may have different
time stamps in one backup data. Therefore, synchronism of the data is not assured.
Backing up intelligent function module parameters
(4) Backing up intelligent function module parameters
For backing up an intelligent function module parameter (IPARAM.QPA), only the parameters that can be stored
in the PLC CPU are the target parameters.
To store other intelligent function module parameters than those, GX Configurator applied to GX Works2 and the
intelligent function module is required.
For the intelligent function module parameters that can be stored in the PLC CPU, refer to the following.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
10.2 Specifications
 Precautions for restore
(1) Communication status between GOT and target controllers
For restoring data, enable the target controllers of the restoration to communicate with the GOT.
When the target controllers of the restoration cannot communicate with the GOT, the restoration cannot be
executed.
(2) STOP status during restoration
CPUs for the programmable controller and motion controller are in the STOP status with the remote STOP
before the restoration.
For the CNC C70, the CNC ladder is in the STOP status.
The CPUs and CNC ladder remain in the STOP status after the restoration is completed.
Restart the controllers.
(3) When restoration is canceled
When the restoration is canceled, all the data are not restored to the controllers and the controllers may not
correctly operate.
When the restoration is canceled, be sure to execute the restoration again.
The CPUs and CNC ladder remain in the STOP status after the restoration is canceled.
Restart the controllers.
(4) System configuration with controllers for restoration
Set the same system configuration with the controllers for the restoration as those for the backup.
Failure to do so disables the GOT to restore data to the controllers.
When the system configuration with the controllers for the restoration is the same as those for the backup, the
GOT can restore data to the controllers even if the connection type and CH No. for the restoration differ from
those for the backup.
(5) Controller operations
Controllers may malfunction by changing set values, device values, and others during the restoration.
Check that data to be restored is the appropriate data, and then execute the restoration with paying attention to
the controller operations.
 Common precautions for backup and restore

(1) Password for backup/restoration
When a password for a controller is changed after setting the password for the backup/restoration, set a new
password for the backup/restoration.
For setting the password for the backup/restoration, refer to the following.
10.3.2 Security and password
(2) Precautions for GT Designer3 (GOT2000)
Do not execute the following operations with GT Designer3 (GOT2000) during the backup/restoration.
Operation with GT Designer3 (GOT2000)
BootOS installation,
package data, the communication driver, the standard monitor OS, and the extended function system application download
When the above operations are executed, the backup/restoration is stopped.

(3) Precautions for GX Developer
(a) Do not access the target controller of the backup/restoration with GX Developer during the backup/
restoration.
Doing so stops the backup/restoration.
(b) Do not execute the backup/restoration on the GOT while the target controller of the backup/restoration is
accessed by GX Developer.
Doing so causes a communication error on GX Developer. (The backup/restoration is executed.)
(4) Precautions for using multiple GOTs
Do not access the target controller of the backup/restoration with multiple GOTs at the same time.
Doing so stops the backup/restoration.
10.2 Specifications
(5) CPU with a security key
(a) When RCPU or the motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) is used
The backup/restoration can be executed even for a CPU module to which a security key is set.
(b) When QnUDVCPU, QnUDPVCPU, Q17nDSCPU, or Q170MSCPU is used
The backup/restoration cannot be executed on the CPU on which the security key is set.
(The RCPU and the motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) are excluded.)
To execute the backup/restoration, check the setting of the CPU.
When the target controllers of the backup/restoration include both the CPU with the security key and the
CPU without the security key, the backup/restoration is executed only for the CPU without the security key.
(6) Precautions for using the Flash card
In the Flash card, all pieces of backup data created by the backup/restoration function are saved in one file
(FlashCard.dat).
BACKUP/RESTORE
10
10.2 Specifications
 Precautions for QCPU
The restoration to QCPU with the factory-settings or whose memory is formatted is available only in the following
cases.
• For a single CPU system: When the connection type is the bus connection or direct CPU connection
• For a multiple CPU system: When the connection type is the direct CPU connection
However, in a multiple CPU system which includes a QCPU with the factory-settings or whose memory is formatted,
batch restoration to multiple controllers cannot be performed.
Restore each controller with the following procedure.
Restoring data to Restoring data to
controller No.1 controller No.2
Resetting Resetting
controller No.1 controller No.2
 Precautions for motion controller CPUs

(1) OS for motion controller CPU
The OS for the motion controller CPU cannot be backed up or restored.
For backing up or restoring setting data for the motion controller CPU, install an appropriate OS on the motion
controller CPU in advance.
(2) Backup/restoration target
The GOT backs up or restores data stored in the SRAM built in the motion controller CPU, regardless of the
operation mode.
For writing data to the FLASH ROM built in the motion controller CPU, restore the data to the SRAM, and then
write the data in the SRAM to the FLASH ROM with MT Developer.
(3) Backup
For backing up data for controllers including the motion controller CPU, do not set the motion controller CPU to
the installation mode.
When the motion controller CPU is set to the installation mode, the GOT does not back up data for the motion
controller CPU. (The GOT backs up data for the other controllers on the same base unit.)
(4) Restoration
For restoring data to controllers including the motion controller CPU, do not set the motion controller CPU to the
installation mode or test mode.
Doing so stops the restoration operation of the GOT.
When the restoration is stopped, be sure to execute the restoration again.
Failure to do so causes the GOT not to write all the data into the controllers, resulting in incorrect operations of
the controllers.
10.2 Specifications
 Precautions for FXCPU
(1) Attaching a memory cassette
When a memory cassette is attached to a FXCPU, data in the memory cassette is backed up.
When a memory cassette is not attached to the FXCPU, data in the built-in memory is backed up.
(2) Keyword setting
The following table shows whether the backup/restoration function is executed or not by each keyword setting.
(Executed: Not executed: )
Protection that cannot be disabled by
With keyword
keyword
Read/ All Without

Function Write All operation
Write operation Write protection Read/Write protection keyword
protection protection
protection protection
Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled
(Trigger) Backup
Restore
(3) Keyword for restoring data

When data are restored to a target FXCPU, a keyword in the FXCPU is held.
For setting or disabling a keyword for the FXCPU, refer to the following manual.
Programming manual for the FXCPU used
BACKUP/RESTORE
(4) Backup data which contains source information
When the target FXCPU of the restoration does not support source information, the backup data which contains
source information cannot be restored.
 Precautions for using the CNC C70

(1) Handling backup data
Although some backup data can be checked with a text editor, do not change the contents.
If the contents are changed, the data cannot be restored.
(2) Individual restoration of the C language module
The C language module cannot be restored on the individual restoration screen of the GOT.
10
To restore the C language module individually, use Remote Monitor Tool whose version is C0 or later.
For Remote Monitor Tool, refer to the following.
 Precautions for robot controller

(1) Restoration during program execution
The restoration cannot be performed during program execution.
(2) Confirmation before restoring
• Confirm the error cause in advance, since the error record is deleted by restoring.
• Confirm that the error C7500 "No battery voltage" does not occur when restoring.
(3) Restoration when replacing a robot
If models of robots are different, the restoration cannot be performed.
If a robot, motor, reducer, or belt is replaced, configure the origin setting.
If a robot controller is compatible with the maintenance forecast, reset the maintenance forecast when replacing
the robot or belt.
(4) Operations during backing up or restoration on the GOT
Do not execute [Program read], [Program save], [Backup/Restore] or others for robot controllers to be backed
up or restored from RT ToolBox2 or R56TB, while backing up or restoring on the GOT.
Doing so causes lack of consistency of data in a robot controller or acquired from RT ToolBox2.
(5) Version of the robot controller
The backed up data of the robot controller version R1d/S1d or later cannot be restored in the robot controller
version R1c/S1c or earlier.
10.2 Specifications
(6) Edit and restoration of backup data
The data backed up on the GOT can be edited and restored with RT ToolBox2.
To edit and restore data with RT ToolBox2, copy the data backed up on the GOT to the Backup folder in the
project folder in RT ToolBox2.
However, the following data cannot be restored on the GOT.
• Data edited with RT ToolBox2 after the backup on the GOT.
• Data backed up with RT ToolBox2 or R56TB.
10.2 Specifications
This section explains how to display the backup/restoration screen after the GOT is turned on.
Start
Starting from a special function Starting from

Starting from switch (Backup/Restore) set the MELSEC-L
the utility in the project data troubleshooting
Display the utility. Touch the special function switch. Activate [Backup/restoration] on the
MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen.
Touch [Backup
/restoration].
Refer to the following manual for how to
After the utility is displayed, touch
set the special function switch.
[Data control] [Backup/restore]
from the Main Menu. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
For how to display the utility, refer to the 11.4 Operation Procedures
GOT2000 User's Manual (Utility).
BACKUP/RESTORE
Backup/restoration
10
End
POINT
GOT2000 Series User’s Manual
(2) When GOT has no project data
The backup/restoration can be started with the utility even though the GOT has no project data.
Utility Main Menu
or
Controller list screen GOT data package acquisition
/ GOT data package
Restoration function (with controller list file)
Backup
function
Main menu
Progress screen (backup) Controller selection screen

(Restoration)
Input the password Restoration
10.3.2 Security and function
password (Without controller (Without controller Restoration function
list file) list file) (with controller list file)
Progress screen (restoration) Data list (restoration)

When the controller other than
Input the password CNC C70 is selected
10.3.2 Security and
password
Individual restoration (restoration)

When the CNC C70 is selected
(1) Starting from the special function switch of the system launcher functio
You can start the backup/restoration from a user-created screen by selecting the connection destination with a
User-created screen
(special function switch System configuration The backup/restoration
(system launcher)) screen screen is started up.
[×] key
[End] key
POINT
2. SYSTEM LAUNCHER
BACKUP/RESTORE
10
 Background processing stop
By the background processing stop signal (GS522.b0), background processing by other functions (alarm, logging,
device monitoring) can be stopped during the backup/restoration.
When background processing is performed, the backup/restoration and other functions are alternately performed.
Therefore, backup/restoration takes much time, but the monitoring of the controller continues.
When background processing is not performed, processing of other functions stop until the backup/restoration is
completed.
Therefore, the monitoring of the controller stops, but the backup/restoration takes less time.
・When background processing is performed ・When background processing is stopped

Backup/restoration and other functions alternately perform communication. Other functions stops communication until backup/restoration is completed.
Backup/ Backup/
restoration restoration
Other functions Other functions

(alarm, logging, (alarm, logging,
device monitoring, device monitoring,
etc.) etc.)
GOT special register Description
Background processing stop OFF In the backup/restoration, background processing is performed.

signal (GS522.b0) ON In the backup/restoration, background processing is not performed.
POINT
(1) Log file save setting
Before background processing is stopped, set the file saving for the functions that collect log data such as the
alarm and logging.
Without setting the file saving, all log data such as alarm data and logging data are lost after backup/
restoration is completed.
(2) Functions disabled during background processing stop
When background processing is stopped, in the backup/restoration, all functions stop except for the backup/
restoration.
Therefore, the following functions that collect log data cannot acquire the data in the backup/restoration.
• Alarm function
• Operation log function
• Logging function
• Recipe function
(3) Background processing stop for trigger backup
During the trigger backup, turning on the background processing stop signal (GS522.b0) does not stop
background processing.
Background processing is always performed.
Set the storage location that backup data are stored.

Set the storage location for backup data in the backup/restoration setting of the utility.
 Display procedure
Select [Utility] [Ext. func. set] [Backup restoration].
 Settings
BACKUP/RESTORE
Item Description
Drive for backup setting Specify the drive for storing backup settings, including parameters and passwords for controllers.
Drive for backup data Specify the drive for storing backup data. 10
Trigger backup setting The GOT automatically backs up data when triggers (Rise, Time) specified for each backup setting are met.
Set the maximum number of backup data to be stored.

Max. of backup data
(When 0 is specified, the GOT does not check the number of backup data to be stored.)
Set whether to enable the CPU No. setting or not.

Enable CPU No. setting (When [Enabled] is selected, the GOT starts to communicate with only the specified PLC. Therefore the network
batch backup/restoration on the multiple PLCs cannot be executed.)
Retain file register inf during restor Set whether to retain the file register at restoration.
POINT
Retain file register inf during restor
Executing restoration in the following cases may cause the PLC to operate incorrectly.
Delete all data in the PLC before the restoration.
• The file register backed up in the GOT data storage is changed.
• The size of the file register backed up in the GOT data storage differs from that stored in the PLC.
• The file space of the PLC is insufficient at restoration.
Setting on GT Designer3 (GOT2000)
The backup/restoration setting can also be set in the GOT setup on GT Designer3 (GOT2000).
For the GOT setup of GT Designer3 (GOT2000), refer to the following.
By setting the passwords, the password authentication is available when the backup/restoration is executed.
The password authentication uses the password for the backup/restoration and passwords for controllers.
Authentication of the password for the backup/restore

Automatic authentication of passwords for the controller
Backup
Data strage
Authentication of the password for the backup/restore

Restore
Automatic authentication of passwords for the controller
The following shows the passwords used for the backup/restoration.
Password Description
Password for the backup/restoration function

Password for backup/restoration Set the password on the GOT at the first backup.
Before setting the password, set passwords for controllers in advance.
Passwords set for the files for the target controllers of the backup/restoration
Passwords for controllers
Set the passwords with software for the controllers when writing the files to the controllers.
After the first backup (after setting the password for the backup/restoration), the user has no need to input the passwords
for the controllers. (The passwords for the controllers are automatically verified.)
The following shows the security advantages.
User Advantage
No need to disclose the passwords for the controllers to the operator

Administrator
(Preventing anyone other than the administrator to browse or edit setting data for the controllers.)
The backup/restoration is executed by using the password for the backup/restoration only.
Operator
(No need to input passwords for the controllers)
POINT
Before setting password for backup/restoration
When the user forgets the password for the backup/restoration, the backup/restoration cannot be executed.
In that case, execute the backup again by using a formatted or new data strage.
For how to set the password for the backup/restoration, refer to the following.
Setting password for backup/restoration
How to use the password for the backup/restoration, refer to the following.
How to use password for backup/restoration
 Setting password for backup/restoration
The password for the backup/restoration can be set only when the following condition is satisfied at the first backup.
• When passwords are set for the files for the backup target controller
At the first backup, the password authentication for the controller is required.
The following shows the operating procedure at the first backup.
Start
Touch [Backup function] in the main menu on

the GOT. (The first backup)
10.4 Operation Procedures FXCPU
Other than the FXCPU
No
Is a password set for the When a keyword is set,
file to be backed up? disable the keyword.
Yes
Input the password for the controller.

(When the password for the first file is verified,
the other files are automatically verified using
the password for the first file. When the
automatic verification fails, input the
corresponding password.)
BACKUP/RESTORE
No
Yes
The file is backed up.
Yes
Is there another file?
No
Yes Is there another unit?

10
(In the multiple CPU system)
No
Yes Is there another controller to

be backed up?
(when with controller list file)
No
Set the password for the backup/restore.
(Set 32 or less alphanumeric characters
for the password.)
Backup completed
POINT
(1) Setting password
For ensuring the security, setting a password of 8 or more characters that cannot be easily guessed is
recommended.
When the password is leaked, the same system can be created. Pay enough attention to managing the
password.
(2) Passwords for motion controller CPU
(a) File name
When a password for a motion controller CPU data is input, the GOT does not display the file name.
The GOT displays the data type only.
(b) Setting passwords for data without any contents
When contents of the following motion controller CPU data do not exist, do not set any passwords for the
data.
• SFC program • Mechanical system program • Cam data
When passwords are set for the data without any contents, the automatic password authentication is
unavailable when the GOT executes the backup.
As a result, the user must input the passwords each time.
(3) FXCPU keyword
To back up or restore data in the FXCPU, disable a keyword in advance.
10.4 Key functions
 How to use password for backup/restoration
(1) Backup
The following shows the operating procedure for the backup after setting the password for the backup/
restoration.
Start
Touch [Backup function] in the main menu on

the GOT. (The second or later backup)
Input the password for the backup/restore.
No Yes(FXCPU)
Is the password correct? When a keyword is set,
disable the keyword.
Yes(Other than the FXCPU)
No
Is a password set for the
file to be backed up?
Yes
The passwords for the controller stored as the
backup setting data are automatically verified
for each file.
BACKUP/RESTORE
No
Is the password correct? Input the correct password
for the controller.
Yes
The file is backed up.
Yes
No
10
Yes
Is there another unit?
No

be backed up?

(Set 32 or less alphanumeric characters for
No the password.)
Yes
Have the passwords for the
controllers ever been changed?
No
Backup completed
POINT
When passwords for controllers are changed
When the password input is cancelled and the backup is stopped, the backed up files until the backup is stopped
are all deleted.
(2) Restoration
The following shows the operating procedure for the restoration after setting the password for the backup/
restoration.
Start
Touch [Execute] in the data list (restoration).

Input the password for the backup/restore.

When a keyword is set,
No Yes(FXCPU) disable the keyword.
Is the password correct? When a programmable controller is
the RUN status, change the
status to the STOP status.
Yes(Other than the FXCPU)
Is a password set for the No

file to be restored?
Yes
The passwords for the controller contained in
the backup data are automatically verified.
No Input the correct password

for the controller.
Yes
The file is restored.
Yes
No
Yes Is there another unit?

No

be backed up?
No
Restoration completed
POINT
When passwords for controllers are changed
When the password input is cancelled and the restoration is stopped, the restored files until the restoration is
stopped remain in the controller.
When only any of the files are restored, the data can be inconsistent in the entire system.
When the password input is cancelled
The restoration is stopped, and the restored file remains in the controller.
CF card/
USB memory Controller
When a password for the controller is changed, File 1 File 1

Start the restoration.
the password verification is required. File 2 File 2
CF card/ CF card/ Not matched
USB memory Controller File 3 File 3
File 1 File 1 File 1 File 1
File 2 File 2 File 2 File 2 When the correct password is input
File 3 File 3 File 3 File 3 The restoration is completed.
CF card/
File 1 File 1
Input the password.
File 2 File 2
File 3 File 3
BACKUP/RESTORE
10
10.3.3 Trigger backup
The GOT can automatically back up setting data for controllers with the trigger device or the days and time set.
Setting the trigger type selects whether to execute the backup with the trigger device or with the days and time.
(1) When trigger type is set to [Rise]
The GOT executes the backup when the set trigger device turns on.
Use the backup with the trigger device for automatically backing up setting data for controllers after the setting
data are changed.
Trigger device: X100
X100:
OFF ON Backing up
setting data to
a data strage X100: ON
Detected
(2) When trigger type is set to [Time]

The GOT executes the backup at the specified time on the specified days.
Use the backup with the time for backing up setting data periodically.
Setting GOT to back up data at 17:30 on Tuesdays
Backing up
setting data to
a data strage
Tuesday
17:30
(3) Maximum number of backup data

With the trigger backup, the maximum number of backup data to be stored can be specified.
When the number of backup data exceeds the maximum number of backup data, the GOT automatically deletes
the oldest backup data.
Therefore, the GOT does not fail to store the latest backup data.
(4) Checking backup data changes
When performing backup, the GOT compares the previous backup data with the setting data, for each controller.
When the current setting data for any of the controllers differ from the previous backup data, the GOT backs up
setting data for all the controllers on the same base unit.
When the current setting data for all the controllers are the same as the previous backup data, the GOT does
not execute the backup.
Therefore, the GOT does not store the same backup data.
 How to set trigger backup
(1) Flow of settings
The following shows the flow of settings for using the trigger backup.
Execute the first backup. ( 10.3.2 Security and password )
Trigger type: [Time]

Trigger type: [Rise]
Set the trigger backup Set the devices to be used for

with GT Designer3. the trigger backup.
Download package data

to the GOT.
Set the trigger backup Set the days and time that the GOT executes
with the GOT utility. the backup.
For setting the trigger backup for the
first time, input the password for the
backup/restore.
BACKUP/RESTORE
The trigger backup settings
are completed.
POINT
Inputting password for backup/restoration
The GOT automatically executes the backup when the trigger condition is met.
The password authentication with the password for the backup/restoration is not executed.
By executing the password authentication with the password for the backup/restoration when setting the trigger 10
backup with the GOT utility, unauthorized users cannot execute the backup.
Without inputting the password for the backup/restoration when setting the trigger backup, an error occurs and the
GOT does not execute the backup even if the trigger condition is met.
Input the password for the backup/restoration in the trigger backup setting of the GOT utility.
For setting the trigger backup with the GOT utility, refer to the following.
(2) Setting items for trigger backup

Set the trigger backup with GT Designer3 (GOT2000) and the GOT utility.
For the setting items for GT Designer3 (GOT2000), refer to the following.
For the setting items for the GOT utility, refer to the following.
 Controlling backup with devices
The GOT controls the trigger backup with devices.
The following shows the devices to be used for the trigger backup.
• Trigger device
• Process notification device
• Backup error notification device
• Trigger backup processing setting No. notification (GS657)
• Trigger backup data send delay (GS521)
For the devices and how to set the devices, refer to the following.
(1) When normal backup is executed

(a) When trigger type is set to [Rise]
Turn on the trigger device, and then the GOT starts the backup.
When the backup is started, the process notification device turns on.
Turn off the trigger device right after the process notification device turns on. (The trigger device does not
automatically turn off.)
When the backup is completed, the process notification device turns off.
Trigger device
Backup processing
Process notification device
(b) When trigger type is set to [Time]

The GOT starts the backup at the time specified for the trigger backup.
When the backup is started, the process notification device turns on, and the time trigger automatically
turns off.
When the backup is completed, the process notification device turns off.
Specified time
The time trigger automatically turns off when the backup is started.
Time
Backup processing
Process notification device
(2) Error handling
When an error occurs during the trigger backup, the backup error notification device stores the trigger ID
corresponding to the trigger setting set for the backup with the error, and a system alarm occurs.
Check the system alarm, and then remove error causes.
For system alarms and corrective actions, refer to the following manual.
The backup error notification device stores 0 when the next trigger backup is executed.
Trigger device 1
Backup processing 1 Error occurs
Process notification
device 1
Backup error
0 1 0
notification device
Storing trigger ID Storing 0 when the next
corresponding to
backup with error trigger backup is executed
Trigger backup processing
setting No. notification 1 0 1
(GS657)
(3) Setting send delay time
BACKUP/RESTORE
The backup/restoration function can set the delay time for backup communication intervals.
Setting of the delay time can reduce the load of other processes (such as monitoring objects) with the backup
process.
The actually time set by the set value is listed as follows.
Set value Delay time
0 None
1 to100 Set value 5(ms)
101 or more 500(ms)

10
POINT
Setting of trigger backup data send delay
Backup communication times are longer than a default when the trigger backup data send delay is set.
Set the suitable delay time to match the processing condition of backup function and others (such as monitoring
objects).
 Precautions for trigger backup
The following shows precautions for the trigger backup.
(1) GOT operations during trigger backup
The GOT may take a long time to monitor devices and to operate during the trigger backup.
Execute the trigger backup when the operator does not operate the GOT.
Updating data with the functions that collect device values, including the logging function, may also take a long
time.
(2) Displaying device name on GOT
When the trigger device is set to [Rise], the GOT displays the device name of [??] without the device name
converter installed.
For displaying the device name correctly, install the device name converter on the GOT.
(3) First backup
The trigger backup is unavailable for the first backup.
Manually execute the first backup, and then set the password for the backup/restoration and passwords for
controllers. After the settings, set the trigger backup.
(4) Passwords for controllers
When passwords for controllers stored in the backup setting differ from current passwords for the controllers, the
backup operation is canceled.
For executing the trigger backup, check that passwords for controllers have no changes.
When the backup operation is canceled, manually execute the backup again, and then input correct passwords.
(5) Checking file register changes
When the trigger backup is frequently executed, set [Check the file register changes] to [Not execute] with the
GOT utility because data stored in file registers frequently changes.
When [Check the file register changes] is set to [Execute], the GOT backs up data stored in the file registers
every time the trigger condition is met even if the other setting data for the controller are not changed.
As a result, the number of backup data increases in the SD card. When the number of backup data exceeds the
maximum number of backup data, old backup data are deleted.
For obtaining data stored in file registers only, use the recipe function.
For how to use the ecipe function, refer to the following.
(6) Backup on a motion controller CPU, robot controller or FXCPU
If the following are to be backed up, the GOT does not compare the previous backup data with the controller
setting data.
• A motion controller CPU and robot controller are mounted on the same base unit.
• FXCPU
As a result, the GOT executes the backup even if the setting data for the controllers have no changes.
For backing up setting data only when the data are changed, set the trigger type to [Rise].
Create a sequence program so that the trigger device turns on only when the setting data are changed.
Therefore, the number of backup data can be minimized.
(7) Backup on a robot controller
The robot controller is not compatible with checking changes. Therefore, if the backup is executed in the
following way, the communication speed and program execution speed may slow.
• The trigger backup is frequently executed.
• Multiple robot controllers are connected.
Backup data is large, due to the large number of programs.
(8) Screens that trigger backup can be executed
The trigger backup can be executed only when the GOT displays a monitor screen.
(a) When the trigger condition is met while the GOT displays a screen other than monitor screens, including
the utility screen and ladder monitor screen, the GOT does not execute the backup.
When a screen other than monitor screens is switched to a monitor screen, the GOT executes the backup.
(b) When a monitor screen is switched to a screen other than monitor screens during the trigger backup, the
GOT stops the backup and the GOT deletes the data in process.
When the screen is switched to a monitor screen, the GOT executes the backup again.
(c) When the following are operated, the GOT does not execute the backup even if a screen other than
monitor screens is switched to a monitor screen.
• Restarting the GOT
• Changing the trigger backup setting with the GOT utility
(9) When another trigger condition is met during backup
The GOT cannot detect that another trigger condition is met.
Trigger device
(Trigger ID: 1)
Trigger device
(Trigger ID: 2) not
detected
Backup processing
(Trigger ID: 1)
BACKUP/RESTORE
Backup processing
(Trigger ID: 2)
device
(Trigger ID: 1)
device
(Trigger ID: 2)
10
setting No. notification 1 0
(GS657)
For ensuring the trigger backup, establish a handshake with the trigger device and the process notification
device.
An example of a handshake is shown on the next page.
Trigger device
(Trigger ID: 1)
Trigger device
(Trigger ID: 2)
Backup processing
(Trigger ID: 1)
Backup processing
(Trigger ID: 2)
device
(Trigger ID: 1)
device
(Trigger ID: 2)
setting No. notification 1 2
(GS657)
1. The trigger device (Trigger ID: 1) turns on, and then the GOT starts the backup (Trigger ID: 1).
2. When the backup is started, the process notification device (Trigger ID: 1) turns on, and the trigger backup
processing setting No. notification (GS657) stores the trigger ID.
When the process notification device turns on, the trigger device (Trigger ID: 1) turns off.
3. When the backup (Trigger ID: 1) is completed, the GOT recognizes that the trigger device (Trigger ID: 2) is
on and the GOT starts the backup (Trigger ID: 2).
4. When the backup is started, the process notification device (Trigger ID: 2) turns on, and the trigger backup
processing setting No. notification (GS657) stores the trigger ID.
When the process notification device turns on, the trigger device (Trigger ID: 2) turns off.
(10) When multiple trigger conditions are simultaneously met

The GOT executes the backup with the smallest trigger ID first.
(11) When trigger device is on at GOT startup
The GOT recognizes that the trigger condition is met, and then the GOT executes the backup.
Create a sequence program so that the trigger device turns off after the GOT checks that the process
notification device turns on.
GOT power
Backup trigger device
Backup processing
The backup/restoration can be executed to multiple controllers on the network system.
Batch backup/restoration for

controllers on the network
NW No. : 1 NW No. : 1
Station No. : 2 Station No. : 3
Ethernet
NW No. : 1
Station No. : 1
To backup or restore multiple controllers on the network, create a controller list file.
POINT
Before performing network batch backup/restoration
When backing up or restoring to controllers on the network, set the parameters to the controllers for communicating
BACKUP/RESTORE
with the GOT.
If the controller cannot communicate with the GOT, the backup/restoration cannot be performed.
For how to connect controllers with the GOT, refer to the following.
 Flow to perform the network batch backup/restoration

Create a controller list file with a personal computer. Creating a controller list file
10
Store the controller list file in the BKUPLIST folder. Creating a controller list file
Install a SD card or USB memory, in which the controller list file is stored,
on the GOT. GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Utility)
Display the Main Menu of backup/restoration 10.3 Operations for Display
Select a channel to be backed up or restored. 10.4.1 Main menu
Execute the backup/restoration. 10.4.1 Main menu
For the operation after executing the network batch backup/restoration, refer to the following.
Operation after executing the network batch backup or restoration
 Creating a controller list file
For the controller list file, set the network No. and the station number of the controller to be backed up or restored.
The controller list file can be set to each backup setting file.
(1) Controller list file specification
(a) Specification
Item Setting
SYSnNET.INI
File name, extension
(Assign the CH No. to be backed up or restored to "n" in the file name.)
File format Unicode text format
Encode format Little endian with UTF-16 BOM
(b) Format
Up to 64 controllers to be backed up or restored can be set. (The 65th or later are invalid.)
When performing the backup/restoration, the controller list file settings are executed from the top.
1)
2)
3)
4) 5) 6) 7)
No. Item Setting
1) Header Indicates that it is the controller list file.
Displays the data version of the controller list file.

2) Data version
Set the version to 1.
3) Controller list Indicates the title of the controller list.
4) Execution/non-execution Set whether to execute or not the backup/restoration. (0: Non-execution, 1: Execution)
5) Network No. Set the network No. of controllers to be backed up or restored. (0 to 239)
Set the station No. of controllers to be backed up or restored. (0 to 120)

6) Station No.
If the network No. is 0, 255 (host) can also be set.
Both 2-byte and 1-byte characters can be set.

7) Memo
Up to 30 characters are displayed in the controller list screen.
POINT
Precautions for creating a controller list file
(1) When " is entered
• Even if " is entered in the memo, it is not treated as a quotation mark for the character string, the text to the
line feed is considered a character string.
• If numerical values are put in "s, a format error occurs.
(2) When creating with a text editor
When the controller list file is created with a text editor, delimit data with tabs.
If unnecessary tabs are entered, a format error occurs.
(2) Controller list file creation
The controller list file must be created by the user. The following shows how to create it with Microsoft Excel
1. Start Microsoft Excel and set the controllers to be backed up or restored, according to the format.
For the format of the file, refer to the following.

2. Select [File] [Save As...] to display the [Save As...] dialog box.
3. Select [Unicode Text (*.txt)] in [Save as type].
4. Enter the file name according to the CH No. to be used and press the [Save] button with the extension INI.
For the specification of the file name, refer to the following.
(3) Controller list file storage
Store the created controller list file in the same folder as the backup setting.
BACKUP/RESTORE
For the storage location for the backup setting, refer to the following.
1. Check whether a storage folder for the backup (BKUPLIST) exists in the SD card or not.
(If the backup is executed, the folder is automatically created)
If no storage folder exists, create it.
10
Backup setting file
2. Store the created controller list file in the storage folder for the backup.
 Operation after executing the network batch backup or restoration
When the network batch backup/restoration is executed, the following operations are performed.
Start backing up or restoring after preparing a

controller list file
The controller list file of the channel selected

from the Main Menu is read.
Start backing up or restoring to the controller

set in the controller list file.
Can the GOT communicate No

with controllers?
Yes
Is the controller list file No

setting normal?
Yes
Execute the backup or restoration to each Notify errors and skip the backup or restoration
controller. of the target controller.
Yes Is there any controller not

backed up or not restored in the
controller list file?
No
Backup/restoration completed
(1) Operations if an error occurs during backup

If an error occurs, the backup being executed is canceled and the error dialog box is displayed. (The error is
displayed by the controller set in the controller list file.)
After the error dialog box is closed, the backup to the next controller set in the controller list file is continued.
However, the backup data cannot be written because a SD card is not installed or does not have sufficient
capacity, the backup to all controllers is canceled.
(2) Handling of the backup data when the backup is canceled
Backup data of controllers canceled for an error occurrence or a cancellation of password input on the controller
is deleted by the controller set in the controller list file.
Backup data backed up normally remains by the controller set in the controller list file.
(3) Operations if a password on the controller is set to the backup target
If the password input on the controller is canceled, the backup being executed is canceled and the backup to the
next controller set in the controller list file is continued.
If a password for backup or restoration is set on the GOT, a password on the controller can be input to the
controller, for which the password input was canceled, at the next time.
By inputting the correct password, password input is not required at the next execution.
For the password for backup or restoration, refer to the following.
(4) Operation for trigger backup
• The backup does not executed if the GOT cannot communicate with controllers because of a communication
error or others.
• If no previous backup data to be compared exists, the backup is executed.
• Even if the backup being executed is canceled for an error occurrence, the backup to the next controller set in
the controller list file is continued.
This section describes the backup/restoration display details and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen.
10.4.1 Main menu
The following describes the display and the key functions on the Bakcup/restoration function : Main menu screen.
 Display details
1)
BACKUP/RESTORE
No. Display details
1) Displays the target channel No. of the backup and the setting name for the backup/restoration (Fixed).
 Key functions
Key Function
Switches the target channels of the backup/restoration.

10
Available when the controller list file is stored in the same folder as the backup setting.
Shifts to the controller list screen.
If a SD card which stores the controller list file is installed on the GOT after displaying the Main Menu or switching
a channel, the [Device List] button is not valid.
To validate the [Device List] button, switch a channel and select the same channel again.
Backup function Starts the backup.
Restoration function Switches the screen to the Restoration function: Data list screen.
Switches the screen to the setting screen of the GOT data package acquisition.
GOT data package
Delete backup data Deletes the oldest data among backup data already stored in a SD card or USB memory in the GOT.
Ends the backup/restoration, and then the screen is switched to the backup/restoration startup screen.
Displays the FX keyword screen.

(This key is displayed only when the FXCPU is connected.)
For the operation of a keyword including disabling a keyword, refer to the following manual.
10.4.2 Progress screen (backup)
This following describes the display details and the key functions on the Backup function: Progress screen.
 Display details
1)
2)
6)
3)
4)
5)
No. Display details
1) Displays the setting name for the backup/restoration (Fixed).
2) Displays the backup data name.
Displays the channel No., network No., station No., CPU No., and module name for the target controller in a list.
When the CPU No. setting is enabled, select the controller to be backed up by touching it.
3)
Displays also the progress situation of each station when the network batch backup is executed. ([Progression: (Number of completed
controllers)/(Number of set controllers) NG = (Number of error controllers)])
Displays the target controller status of the backup.
: Backup target
4)
: Not backup target
: Access disabled
Displays the backup progress status.
5) Backing up : The backup is in processing.

Aborting : The backup cancellation is in processing.
Completed : The backup is completed.
6) Displays the file name in processing.
 Key functions
Key Function
Switches the screen to the Backup/restoration function: Main menu screen.
Cancels the backup.
10.4.3 Data list (restoration)
The following describes the display details and the key functions on the Restoration function: Data list screen.
 Display detail
1)
4)
2)
3)
No. Display details
BACKUP/RESTORE
Displays backup data stored in a SD card or USB memory.

2)
Select a backup data to be restored with touching the data.
3) Displays the channel No., network No., station No., module No., and unit name for the target controller of the restoration.
Displays the target controller status of the restoration.

Select a target controller of the restoration with touching the controller.
4) : Restoration target
: Not restoration target
: Access disabled 10
 Key functions
Key Function
Scrolls the data list up and down by one line.
Scrolls the data list up and down by one page.
Switches the number of target controllers of the restoration.

/ • Single selection: Select [Single selection] when selecting only one target controller of the restoration.
• Multiple selection: Select [Multiple selection] when selecting multiple target controllers of the restoration.
Return to the previous screen, before shifting to the Data list screen.
Starts the restoration.
10.4.4 Progress screen (restoration)
This following describes the display details and the key functions on the Restoration function: Progress screen.
 Display details
1)
2)
6)
3)
4)
5)
No. Display details
3) Displays the channel No., network No., station No., module No., and unit name for the target controller of the restoration.
Displays the target controller status of the restoration.
: Restoration target
4)
: Not restoration target
: Access disabled
? : Restoration failed
Displays the restoration progress status.
Restoring : The restoration is in processing.

Aborting : The restoration cancellation is in processing.
5) Completed : The restoration is completed.
Abort : The restoration cancellation is completed.
Comm.error : The restoration is failed with the communication failed.
Data error : The restoration is failed with backup data errors.
6) Displays the file name in processing.
 Key functions
Key Function
Cancels the restoration.
10.4.5 Controller list screen
The following describes the display details and the key functions on the Controller list screen.
 Display details
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
No. Display details
BACKUP/RESTORE
1) Displays the target channel No. of the backup/restoration and the setting name for the backup/restoration (Fixed).
2) Switches execution/non-execution of all settings.
3) Switches execution/non-execution of each setting.
4) Displays the network number.
5) Displays the station number.
6) Displays the memo.
7) Displays the target number of the backup/restoration. (Executed/all settings)
 Key functions 10
Key Function
Saves the edited information in the controller list file and switches the screen to the Backup/restoration function:
Main menu screen.
The edited information is deleted and switches the screen to the Backup/restoration function: Main menu screen.
10.4.6 Controller selection screen (Restoration)
The following describes the display and the key functions on the Restoration function: Controller selection screen.
 Display details
1)
2)
No. Display details
1) Displays the target channel No. of the backup/restoration and the setting name for the backup/restoration (Fixed).
Displays all settings in the controller list file.

2) By touching a line, whether restore or not each controller can be switched.
The controller in the highlighted line to be restored.
 Key functions
Key Function
Switches the screen to the Restoration function: Data list screen.
10.4.7 Individual restoration screen (Restoration)
This section describes the display data of the individual restoration screen (Restoration) and the key functions displayed
on the screen.
 Display details
1)
2)
3) 6)
4)
5)
No. Display details
BACKUP/RESTORE
Select files to be restored.

3)
When the target backup file does not exist, the circle of the file is displayed in gray.
4) Displays the type of the data to be restored.
Displays the restoration progress status.

• Restoring: The restoration is in processing.
5) • Aborting:
• Completed:
• Abort:
10
6) Displays the names of the files to which the restoration processing is completed.
 Key functions
Key Function
[Return] Returns to the screen displayed before the screen was shifted to the individual restoration screen.
[Cancel] Cancels the restoration.
[Sec./Can. All] Selects all files or deselects the selected files.
[Execute] Starts the restoration.
10.5 Backup Data Conversion Tool
Backup data are created by the backup/restoration function, and the backup data are stored in a SD card.
Backup Data Conversion Tool enables the backup data to convert into data editable with GX Developer. The tool also
enables backup data edited by GX Developer to convert into data for the restoration on the GOT.
POINT
Data to be converted
Only backup data created by the backup/restoration function can be converted with Backup Data Conversion Tool.
The following data cannot be converted with Backup Data Conversion Tool.
• Newly-created data by GX Developer
• Backup data with new files added by GX Developer
• Backup data for the Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, and FXCPU
10.5.1 Operating environment
Use Backup Data Conversion Tool in the following operating environment.

Item Description
Personal computer PC-AT compatible personal computer that the following OSs run on.
Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate (English version)*1
Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise (English version)*1
Microsoft Windows Vista Business (English version)*1
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium (English version)*1
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic (English version)*1
Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate (English version)*2*3*4
Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise (English version)*2*3*4
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (English version)
Microsoft Windows 7 Professional (English version)*2*3*4
Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Professional (English version)*1
Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium (English version)*2*4
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition (English version)*1
Microsoft Windows 7 Starter (English version)*1
Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise (English, Simplified Chinese,
Traditional Chinese, Korean, German versions)*2*4*5*6
Microsoft Windows 8 pro (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional
Chinese, Korean, German versions)*2*4*5*6
Microsoft Windows 8 (English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional
Chinese, Korean, German versions)*2*4*5
Microsoft Windows Vista : 800MHz or more
  (1GHz or more recommended)
Microsoft Windows 2000 : 200MHz or more
CPU
Microsoft Windows XP : 300MHz or more Microsoft Windows 7 : 1GHz or more
Microsoft Windows 8 : 1GHz or more
Microsoft Windows Vista : 512MB or more
Microsoft Windows 2000 : 64MB or more (1GB or more recommended)
Memory
Microsoft Windows XP : 128MB or more Microsoft Windows 7 : 1GB or more
Microsoft Windows 8 : 1GB or more
Display Resolution 640 480 dots or more
Hard disk space 500KB or more
Display color High Color (16 bits) or more
Others The mouse, keyboard, memory card, or card reader
*1 Only the 32-bit OS is available.

*2 The 32-bit OS and the 64-bit OS are available.
*3 Windows XP Mode is not supported.
*4 Windows Touch and Touch are not supported.
*5 Modern UI style is not supported.
*6 Hyper-V is not supported.
10.5.2 How to install and start Backup Data Conversion Tool
Installing Backup Data Conversion Tool is not required.

Start Backup Data Conversion Tool with the following procedures.
1. Copy BkupRstrDataConv.exe to the hard disk and others on the personal computer.
Get the above file from one of the followings.
• GTD3 folder on the personal computer
• Contact your local distributor.
2. Double-click the copied BkupRstrDataConv.exe, and then the tool starts. Refer to the following, and set the tool.
10.5.3 How to use Backup Data Conversion Tool
 Setting items
The following shows the setting items of Backup Data Conversion Tool.
BACKUP/RESTORE
Item Description 10
Conversion Target Specify data to be converted.
Specify the storage location of the backup data (setting data: UNITINFO.G2B) created with the backup/
Backup Data Folder*1
restoration function by clicking the Browse button.
Target Drive Select the PLC drive that has setting data to be converted.
Workspace Drive Setting Set the settings for editing backup data with GX Developer.
Specify [IC Card drive] to be specified for [Read IC memory card] and [Write IC memory card] on GX
Drive Name
Developer.
Folder to be assigned to a
Specify the target folder of [Drive Name] by clicking the Ref. button.
workspace drive*1
Click the item, and then [Folder to be assigned to a workspace drive] is assigned to [Drive Name].
([Folder to be assigned to a workspace drive] is automatically assigned to [Drive Name] normally. Use the
Drive Assignment
button when the drive assignment setting is canceled by clicking the Drive Release button and a drive
is assigned again.)
Drive Release Click the item, and then the drive assignment setting is canceled.
Import (GOT GX Developer) Converts the backup data to data editable with GX Developer
Export (GX Developer GOT) Converts data edited by GX Developer to data applicable to the backup/restoration.
End Ends Backup Data Conversion Tool.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
*1 Folder name and file name
(a) Number of characters set for folder and file names

The GOT recognizes the file location with a path as shown below.
Set the folder and file names so that the total number of characters in the path is within 78 characters.
The user can set the folder name and file name only.
(Other than the folder and file names are automatically set.)
Example) Path of QPG file to be stored in memory card
A :\ Folder name \ File name .QPG
(2 characters) (1 character) Extension

(4 characters)
Drive name
(1 character)
Max. 78 characters
 Operation flow
The following shows the operation flow for Backup Data Conversion Tool.
(1) Editing backup data with GX Developer
GOT Back up setting data with the backup/restoration function on the GOT.
Copy the backup data to the personal computer.
Specify [Backup Data Folder].
Specify [Target Drive].
Backup Data Specify [Drive Name] in [Workspace Drive Setting].

Conversion Tool
Specify [Folder to be assigned to a workspace drive].
Click the Import (GOT GX Developer) button.
GX Developer Execute [Read IC memory card] with GX Developer.
(2) Restoring data edited by GX Developer
GX Developer Execute [Write IC memory card] with GX Developer.
Specify [Backup Data Folder].
Specify [Target Drive].

Backup Data
Conversion Tool
Specify [Drive Name] in [Workspace Drive Setting].
Click the Export (GX Developer GOT) button.
Store the backup data in a memory card or others, and then insert the card into the GOT.
GOT Restore the backup data with the backup/restoration function on the GOT.
10.5.4 Precautions
 Precautions for the backup data conversion
BACKUP/RESTORE
(1) Backup data of a PLC CPU not compatible with the integrated circuit memory card
The Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, and FXCPU do not support the read/write IC memory card function of GX
Developer. Therefore, backup data converted with Backup Data Conversion Tool cannot be edited.
(2) Backup data of a sequence program created in GX Works2
Once backup data created with GX Works2 is converted by using Backup Data Conversion Tool, the data can be
edited with GX Works2. To edit the data with GX Works2, use GX Works2 Ver.1.73B or later.
10
10.6 Errors and Corrective Actions
 Common to backup and restoration
Error Cause Corrective action
The system application (Extended function) of the Install the system application (Extended function)
The backup/restoration function cannot be used.
backup/restoration is not installed on the GOT. on the GOT.
The backup setting is not stored in the data strage • Install data strage with the backup setting
in the GOT. stored.
The backup setting is not found.
No data strage is installed to the drive specified for • Check the storage location for the backup
storing the backup setting. setting with the utility.
The backup data are not stored in the data strage

• Install data strage with the backup data stored.
in the GOT.
The backup data are not found. • Check the storage location for the backup data
No data strage is installed to the drive specified for
with the utility.
storing the backup data.
• Check with the administrator of the system

The backup/restoration cannot be executed regarding the password for the backup/
The user does not remember the password.
because the user does not know the password for restoration.
The password is incorrect.
the backup/restoration. • Execute the backup again by using a formatted
or new data strage.
Check if the communication settings and

The communication settings and communication
communication driver for the GOT are correctly
driver for the GOT are incorrectly set.
set.
The backup/restoration cannot be completed
because a communication error occurs between Because parameters for the controller are Check if the parameters for the controller is
the GOT and a controller during the backup/ incorrectly set, the controller dose not recognize correctly set with tools, including GX Developer, for
restoration. the GOT. the controller.
The controller is turned off. Turn on the controller.
The cable is not correctly connected. Check the cable.
Check the format of the controller list file and

The description in the header part of the controller describe following the format.
The controller list file is abnormal.
list file is abnormal.
• Check the format of the controller list file and

• The description in the controller list file is invalid. describe following format.
• The network number and station number are
The controller list file is invalid. outside the range.
• The network number and station number are • Describe the network number and the station
overlapped. number so that they are not overlapped in the
available setting range.
 Backup
Install a data strage to the drive specified for storing the backup
No data strage is installed to the GOT.
setting or backup data.
Install a data strage with enough free space.

The data strage does not have free space.
Delete unnecessary files in the data strage.
The backup data cannot be written into Set the data strage to writable.
data strage. The attributes of backup data files stored in the data strage cannot
The data strage is set to write-protect.
be changed with the GOT. Set the files to writable with a personal
computer.
Check if the drive specified for storing the backup setting or

The drive does not exist. backup data exists. (Check if the data strage is connected on the
GOT.)
Check the following.

GOT
• Check if the cable is correctly connected to the GOT.
• Check if the correct communication driver is installed on the
Setting data (files and data) cannot be The GOT cannot communicate with the GOT.
obtained from the controller. controller. • Check if the communication settings are correctly set.
Controller
• Check if the parameters are set.
• Check if the cable is correctly connected to the controller.
• Check if the controller is turned on.
• The user does not remember the password.

The backup cannot be executed
The password is incorrect. (The first backup) Check with the administrator of the system regarding the
because passwords for files of the
• Passwords for files of the controller are passwords for files of the controller.
controller are set.
changed.
 Restoration
Check the following.

GOT
• Check if the cable is correctly connected to the GOT.
• Check if the correct communication driver is installed on the
The GOT cannot communicate with the GOT.
controller. • Check if the communication settings are correctly set.
Setting data (files and data) cannot be Controller
BACKUP/RESTORE
written into the controller. • Check if the parameters are set.
• Check if the cable is correctly connected to the controller.
• Check if the controller is turned on.
• Check if the system configuration for the restoration is the same

The target controller of the restoration is a
as that for the backup.
different kind of controller from the target
• Check if the target controller of the restoration is the same as
controller of the backup.
that of the backup or the same kind of controller.
The restoration cannot be executed

• The passwords for files written in the Check with the administrator of the system regarding the
because passwords for files of the
controller are changed. passwords for files of the controller.
controller are set.
Check the parameter [SLTn] or [Online] [Parameter] [Slot

10
The restoration to the robot controller list] in the workspace of RT ToolBox2 and to check if a program
cannot be executed because the A program name that does not exist in the robot name that does not exist in the robot controller is set or not to the
Initialization of the robot program is controller may be set to the slot. slot.
failed. If it is set, set a blank space for the program name and restore
again after restarting.
11. MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
11.1 Features
MELSEC-L troubleshooting enables you to display the status and errors of the LCPU connected to the GOT and the
errors of the GOT.
In addition, you can start the sequence program monitor or others from the MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen.
MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
11
11. MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING 11 - 1

11.1 Features
11.2 Specifications
This section describes the system configuration of the MELSEC-L troubleshooting.

following.
Controller
LCPU
 Connection type
Function Connection type between GOT and LCPU
Direct CPU Serial communication Ethernet CC-Link connection

Name Description
connection connection connection*4
ID*1 G4*2
MELSEC-L Displays the status and errors of the LCPU *3
troubleshooting and starts various monitor functions.

*4 MELSEC-L troubleshooting cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.

Write the package data that has the system application (Extended function) for the MELSEC-L troubleshooting
to the GOT.
11.2.2 Access range
 When using the direct CPU connection or serial communication connection

The LCPU of the host station can be monitored.
 When using Ethernet connection

The LCPU of the host and other stations can be monitored.
 When using CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station/via G4)

The LCPU of the master and local stations can be monitored.
11 - 2 11. MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING

11.2 Specifications
11.3 Operation for Display
This section explains how to display the MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen after the GOT is turned on.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT
Starting from the utility
Display the utility.

touch [Monitor] [MELSEC-L troubleshooting]
from the Main Menu.
For displaying the utility, refer to the following manual.

Set the channel No., network No.,
station No., of the LCPU connected
to the GOT.
( 11.4 Key functions )
The MELSEC-L troubleshooting starts.

( 11.4 Operation Procedures )
11
End

POINT
After turning on the GOT, the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the MELSEC-L
troubleshooting only.
ChNET
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the PLCNo
button on the
MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen.
The MELSEC-L troubleshooting can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been
downloaded to the GOT.
This section describes how to change the screen.
Start
At the second
or later startup
Utility
ChNET
PLCNo
Intelligent module monitor ( 8. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR)
Back Touch any ( 3. DEVICE MONITOR)

Device monitor
of the functions.
Sequence program ( 4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR
monitor (ladder)
Backup/Restore ( 10. BACKUP/RESTORATION)
Log viewer ( 12. LOG VIEWER)
MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen

This section describes the display details for the MELSEC-L troubleshooting and the functions of the keys displayed on
the screen.
2)
3)
1)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)

Displays the LCPU status. (Only LED of BAT, RUN, and ERR is lit.)
1) CPU status The LED on the screen and the LED display on the PLC body may not match depending on the error
status.
2) Channel information Displays the set channel number, network number, and station number.
3) CPU Info Displays the model and the operation status of the LCPU.
4) CPU Error Info Displays error information of the LCPU.
Displays error information of the GOT.
5) GOT Error Info The alarm can be canceled with the [Reset] button on the System alarm display screen.
6) Monitor/Diagnosis Displays buttons to start the intelligent module monitor and device monitor (ladder).
7) Ladder Check Displays buttons to start the sequence program monitor. 11
8) Backup/restoration Displays buttons to start the backup/restore and log viewer.
 Key functions
Key Function
[ChNET PLCNo]
Starts the intelligent module monitor.
[Intelligent module monitor]
Starts the device monitor.
[Device monitor]
3. DEVICE MONITOR
Starts the sequence program monitor (ladder).
[Seq. program monitor]
4. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER, R LADDER)
Starts the sequence program monitor (SFC).
[Seq. program monitor (SFC)]
5. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
Starts the backup/restore.
[Backup/restoration]
Starts the log viewer.
[Log viewer]
12. LOG VIEWER
Closes the MELSEC-L troubleshooting and returns the screen to the one for starting the MELSEC-L
[Back]
troubleshooting.

(a) Display monitor
1) 3) 2) 1) 3) 2)
4) 5)
The information shown in the table below is displayed.

5) Keys Displays the keys used in the operation in the communication setting window.
(b) Key functions
Key Function

When any of the CH No., network No., and station No. is not input and the monitor target is not set, the
communication setting window does not close.
input area.

The following shows the error messages for the MELSEC-L troubleshooting and the corrective actions.
Connections between the PLC CPU and the GOT

Communication could not be established
Communications error (disconnected or cut cables).
with the PLC CPU.
Has an error occurred in the PLC CPU.
11

12. LOG VIEWER
12.1 Features
With the log viewer function, the GOT displays the logging data acquired from the high speed data logger module, the
PLC CPU, and the BOX data logger, and controls the files.
The features of the log viewer are shown below.
 Displaying logging data without a personal computer

• Using the log viewer function, the logging data stored in the CF card attached to the high speed data logger
module or the BOX data logger, or the SD card attached to the PLC CPU is viewed on the GOT.
• The logging data can be stored in a SD card or USB memory attached to the GOT, and displayed on the GOT.
Ethernet
Trend graph
is displayed
Logging data is displayed

Logging data
 Logging data can be retrieved from GOT

The logging data acquired from the high speed data logger module, the PLC CPU, and the BOX data logger can be
retrieved from the GOT to the personal computer.
LOG VIEWER
Trend graph and
event list are
Data strage displayed
USB cable
or
LAN cable
Logging data is displayed

with GX LogViewer
12
Logging data
12. LOG VIEWER 12 - 1

12.1 Features
12.2 Specifications
This section describes the system configuration of the log viewer.
(1) High Speed Data Logger Module
Model
QD81DL96
(2) PLC CPU
PLC
RCPU, LCPU*1, QnUDVCPU
*1 L02SCPU and L02SCPU-CM are not available.
(3) BOX Data Logger
Model
NZ2DL
 Connection type
High Speed Data

Logger Module
GOT
PLC CPU or
BOX Data Logger Connection cable
PLC GOT Number of connectable

Connection cable*1 Max. distance*2
Model Connection type Option device Model equipment
QD81DL96*3
RCPU*4
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP),
LCPU*4 Ethernet connection Unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) 100m - (Built into GOT) GT27 16 GOTs
Category 3, 4 and 5
QnUDVCPU*4
NZ2DL*5
*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
*2 A length between a hub and a node.
*3 You cannot use the direct connection function of the high speed data logger module to connect the module to the GOT directly
without specifying an IP address.Use the Ethernet connection and specify an IP address to connect the module to the GOT.
For the system configuration of high speed data logger module, refer to the following manual.
High Speed Data Logger Module User's Manual
*4 For the system configuration of the PLC CPU with the built-in Ethernet interface, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-In Ethernet Function)
QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port)
*5 For the system configuration of the BOX data logger, refer to the following manual.
BOX data logger User’s Manual
12 - 2 12. LOG VIEWER

12.2 Specifications
A data strage is necessary in the following cases.
• Displaying or managing logging data stored in a data strage
• Reading out and displaying logging data of 4MB or more from the controller
12.2.2 GOT Side Settings
 Setting communication interface

To use the log viewer function, [GOT IP Address] must be set in any of the following procedures.
Setting method Reference section
Set [Destination I/F] of [Ethernet Download] in the [PC (Data Transfer)] dialog box. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi

Set the Ethernet driver in [Driver] in the [Controller Setting] dialog box.
Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Select [Communication Setting] of [Gateway] in the [Controller Setting] dialog box and select
the [Use the function of Gateway] check box.
After completing the setting on GT Designer3 (GOT2000), install the required OS to the GOT.

Write the package data that has the system application (Extended function) for the log viewer to the GOT.
LOG VIEWER
12.2.3 Access range
The high speed data logger module, the PLC CPU module, or the BOX data logger which is connected to the GOT
via the HUB using the Ethernet cable, can be monitored.
Monitoring via the Internet cannot be performed.
For details of the high speed data logger module, refer to the following. 12
For details of the PLC CPU module, refer to the following.
MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual

12.2 Specifications
12.2.4 Precautions
(1) Handling data strage during the access

Do not remove the data strage and do not open the SD card slot during the access.
Doing so may damage files in the GOT or in the data strage.
(2) Connection to the PLC CPU
To use the log viewer function using the PLC CPU, the FTP setting is required on the PLC CPU.
The FTP setting methods for GX Works3 and GX Works2 are described below.
• In case of GX Works3
Display the module parameter window of the CPU used, and select [FTP Server Setting] from the [Application
Setting] tree.
Select [Use] in [FTP Server Use or Not].
• In case of GX Works2
Display the parameter setting window of the CPU used, and select the [Built-in Ethernet Port setting] tab.
Click the [FTP Setting] button and select [Use] in [FTP].
For the details of GX Works3 and GX Works2, refer to the following.
GX Works3 Operating Manual
GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual (Common)
MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet User's Manual (Application)
(3) Access to storing files

[Storing file] is for use in temporarily storing the data currently collected by the high speed data logger module,
the PLC CPU, or the BOX data logger.
Precautions for accessing to [Storing file] are different according to the controller.
(a) High speed data logger module and BOX data logger
• During the file switching from [Storing file] to [saved file], [Storing file] and [saved file] may not exist
temporarily.
• When [Storing file] is selected and an error message saying that the file cannot be found appears, select
[Storing file] again.
• Since data is stored in [Storing file] as needed, the copied file size may be larger than the size of when
[Storing file] is selected.
• The data is also stored as needed even when [Storing file] is being copied, so the copying file size may
appear larger than the file size of when selected.
(b) PLC CPU
Reference and copying are not available since [Storing file] cannot be selected.
When [Storing file] is full, the data cannot be browsed until the file is switched to [saved file].
MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet User's Manual (Application)
QnUDVCPU/LCPU User's Manual (Data Logging Function)
The following shows the storage location of [Storing file] and [saved file].
/LOGGING Folder for log viewer function (the folder name is fixed)
/LOG01 Folder for setting No.1 (the folder name is specified by the user)
LOG01.CSV *1 [Storing file] (saved just below the user specified folder)
/00000001 [saved file] storage folder (automatically created in serial number)
[saved file] (moved to the [saved file] storage folder when [Storing file] becomes full)
00000001.CSV
00000002.CSV Referring and copying are enabled.
00000003.CSV
/00000101
/LOG02 Folder for setting No.2

LOG02.CSV *1 [Storing file]
/LOG03 Folder for setting No.3
LOG03.CSV *1 [Storing file]
*1 Operations such as referring or copying are not enabled. (Only confirmation of the file name is enabled.)

12.2 Specifications
This section describes the flow until the log viewer operation screen is displayed, after the log viewer (Option OS) is
installed in the GOT.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT
Starting from the special function Starting from

Starting from switch (Log viewer) set in the the MELSEC-L
the utility project data troubleshooting
Display the utility. Touch the special function switch. Activate [Log viewer] on the MELSEC-L
troubleshooting screen.
Touch
After the utility is displayed, touch Refer to the following manual for how [Log viewer].
[Monitor] [Log viewer] from the Main to set the special function switch.
Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility). 11.4 Operation Procedures
When no password is registered for When logging data saved in

the target controller at first start-up, Input the password. the programmable controller
or [Offline (view file)] is selected 12.4.2 How to operate target selection is displayed, and a password
is registered for the target
screen
controller
The main menu of log viewer

is displayed.
12.4.3 How to operate

Main Menu screen
LOG VIEWER
For [View logged device] For [Manage log file]
[Log viewer] screen is displayed. [Select files] screen is displayed.
12
12.5.1 Data log viewer screen 12.4.4 How to operate file

selection screen
End

POINT
(2) Displaying target setting window
For displaying the target setting window, touch the [Change CPU] button on the Main Menu screen of log
viewer.
To display the target selection screen, touch the [High speed data logger module / BOX data logger], [RCPU],
or [QnUDVCPU/LCPU] button.
Touch the [Offline (view file)] button to display the file selection screen.
The log viewer can be started with the utility even though the GOT has no project data.
12.3.1 Changing screens when view logged device is selected
Start
Utility Main Menu

or
12.3 Operations for

Display
12.4.3 How to operate Main

Menu screen

target selection screen
12.5 How to Operate

Data Log Viewer Access
authentication
window
12.4.2 Access
authentication window
12.5.5 Selecting data
Remote password
authentication
window *1
12.4.4 How to operate 12.4.2 Remote password

file selection screen authentication window
*1 Displayed only when LCPU is selected and the remote password is set.

12.3.2 Changing screens when manage log file is selected
Start
Utility Main Menu

or

Main Menu screen
12.4.4 How to operate 12.5.5 Selecting data 12.5 How to Operate

file selection screen Data Log Viewer
LOG VIEWER
12.4.4 Recently opened files
12

12.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens
This section describes each screen contents displayed in log viewer and the functions of the keys displayed on the
screen.
12.4.1 How to operate target setting window
Touch the [Change CPU] button in [Main Menu] to display the following screen.
Key Function
/ Closes the target setting window and returns to the Main Menu screen.
/
Displays the target selection screen.
/
12.4.2 How to operate target selection screen
Displays the Main Menu screen.

12.4.3 How to operate Main Menu screen

When [High speed data logger/BOX data logger], [RCPU], or [QnUDVCPU / LCPU] is selected in the target?setting
window, the following screen appears.
 Target selection screen

① ①
② ②
③ ③
When [High speed data logger module / BOX data logger] When [RCPU] or [QnUDVCPU/LCPU] is selected
is selected
Displays the list of the high speed data logger modules or the PLC CPUs which can be accessed from
Connection target list
1) the GOT.
display area
To select a high speed data logger module or a PLC CPU, touch it in the list.
Displays the selected IP address.

2) IP address display area
IP Address input window
Timeout time display Displays the Timeout time.

3)
area Timeout time input window
LOG VIEWER
12

(2) Key functions
Key Function
Closes the target selection screen and returns to the target setting screen.
/
Updates the displayed content of the connection target list.
Connects to the high speed data logger module or the PLC CPU selected from the connection target list
or the IP address.
When the password is set on the connected high speed data logger module or the PLC CPU, the access
authentication window appears.
12.4.2 Access authentication window
When no password is set on the connected high speed data logger module or the PLC CPU, the Main
Menu screen appears.
12.4.3 How to operate Main Menu screen
 IP Address input window

Touch the IP address input display area to display the following window.
1)
2)
1) IP address input area Set the IP address.
2) Input keys Keys for operations in the IP address input window.
(2) Key functions

Key Function
Closes the IP address input window and cancels the IP address input operation.
/
The IP address of the input numerical value is reflected.
Deletes one character of the entered numerical value.

 Timeout time input window
Touch the Timeout time display area to display the following window.
1)
2)
1) Timeout time input area Set the Timeout time.
2) Input keys Keys for operations in the Timeout time input window.
(2) Key functions

Key Function
Closes the Timeout time window and cancels the Timeout time input operation.
/
The Timeout time of the input numerical value is reflected.
Deletes one character of the entered numerical value.
LOG VIEWER
 Access authentication window
When the password is set to the connection target, touch the [Connect] button on the target selection screen to
display the following window.
12
1) 1)
2) 2)
3) 3)
For numerical input For alphabet input (upper case characters)
1) User name input area Set the user name to input.
2) Password input area Set the password to input.
3) Keys Keys for operations in the user name input area and password input area shown in (2).

(2) Key functions
Key Function
Closes the Access authentication window and cancels the user name and password input operation.
Switches the key type to the symbol.
A space is input at the cursor position.
Verifies the user name and password set in the user name input area and password input area.
When the remote password is set on the connected PLC CPU, the remote password authentication
window appears.
12.4.2 Remote password authentication window
When no remote password is set on the connected PLC CPU, the Main Menu screen appears.
12.4.3 How to operate Main Menu screen
 Remote password authentication window

When the remote password is set, the following window appears after access authentication is completed.
1)
2)
1) Password input area Set the password to input.
2) Keys Keys for operations in the password input area shown in (2).
(2) Key functions

The key functions are the same as those of [Access authentication].
For details of key functions, refer to the following.
Access authentication window (2) Key functions

12.4.3 How to operate Main Menu screen
After the target is selected, the following screen appears.
The following screen appears when [High speed data logger module / BOX data logger] is selected.
A similar screen also appears when [RCPU] or [QnUDVCPU/LCPU] is selected.
1)
2)
3)
Target controller display

1) Displays the target device name and IP address.
area
Displays the logging data stored in the target device as a graph.

2) View logged device
12.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
LOG VIEWER
Controls the logging data stored in the target device.
3) Manage log file
12.4.4 How to operate file selection screenn
 Key functions
Key Function
Closes the Main Menu and returns to the target setting screen.
/ 12.4.2 How to operate target selection screen 12
Displays the target setting window.

12.4.4 How to operate file selection screen
Select in the following procedure to display the file selection screen.

• Touch [View logged device] in the Main Menu screen
• Touch the folder icon on the data log viewer screen.
 File selection screen

3) 4)
1)
2)
5)
6)
1) Target drive list The corresponding drive can be selected.
2) Check box If the check box is selected, up to 512 files can be selected.
3) Path name Displays the path name of drive/folder which is currently displayed.
Displays the files stored in the selected drive in a list.

4) File list
The files in the CSV *1, BIN *2, XLS *3, or TXT *4 format are displayed.
Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection.
5) The size of drive
Not displayed when [Z:Target device] is selected.
6) Number of folders and files Displays the total number of displayed folders and files.
*1 Logging data acquired from the high speed data logger, LCPU, QnUDVCPU, or the BOX data logger can be displayed as a graph
in the data log viewer.
*2 Logging data acquired from the high speed data logger or the BOX data logger can be displayed as a graph in the data log
viewer.
*3 Cannot be displayed as a graph in data log viewer.
*4 Only logging data acquired from the RCPU can be displayed as a graph in the data log viewer.
POINT
Restrictions when [Z:Target device] is selected in select drive.
The logging data stored in the high speed data logger module, the PLC CPU, or the BOX data logger is displayed
in a list.
Regarding graph display, logging data of up to 4MB can be displayed as a graph. However, logging data exceeding
4MB cannot be displayed as a graph.
To display logging data exceeding 4MB as a graph, copy it to the USB memory/SD card of the GOT and select the
logging data in the copy destination.
The logging data stored in the CF card or the USB memory attached to the GOT cannot be copied to the high
speed data logger module, the PLC CPU, or the BOX data logger.

(2) Key functions
Key Function
Closes the file selection screen and returns to the target setting window.
Multiple files can be selected or canceled at once.

/
Touch the [Select all files] button to select all files.
If the number of the displayed files is exceeds 513, the first 512 files are selected.
Displays a list of recently opened files.

12.4.4 Recently opened files screen
Displays the selected file in log viewer.

Copies the selected file.*1
Moves the selected file.*1*2
Renames the selected file.*1*2
Creates a folder.*1*2
Deletes the selected file.*1*2
*1 For how to operate, refer to the following.

*2 If [Z:Target device] is selected in select drive, the key functions are disabled.
LOG VIEWER
12

 Recently opened files screen
Touch the [Recently opened files] button in the file selection screen to display the following screen.
1)
2)
Displays a list of recently opened files.

From the recently opened files, the latest one is displayed in the first line, and the oldest one is displayed
1) File list
in the last line.
(Up to 10 files)
Displays the path of the selected drive.

2) Target drive display area
Files in [Z:Target device] have also the information of connected controllers displayed.
(2) Key functions

Key Function
Closes the recently opened files screen and returns to the file selection screen.
/
Displays the selected file in log viewer.

POINT
Recently opened files screen history specifications
• Up to 10 files are saved, and when the 11th file is saved, the oldest file is deleted.
• Even if opening the same file multiple times, it is counted as one file.
• If files with the same path and file name are stored in multiple controllers, the history of opening each file is
counted as one file.
• The history is deleted when restarting GOT or when turning the GOT power supply OFF.
• The size at the last time the file was opened is displayed in the file list.
• If the selected drive is [Z:Target device], connection operation is performed to controllers which are not
connected to other devices. Also, if the controller is connected to another device, the connection operation is
performed to the newly selected controller.

On the data log viewer screen, the logging data stored in the high speed data logger module/PLC CPU/BOX data logger
or CF card/USB memory is displayed as a graph.
The following describes how to operate the data log viewer screen.
12.5.1 Data log viewer screen
This section describes the screen configuration displayed on the data log viewer screen and the functions of the keys
1)
1)
3)
2) 4)
1)
5)
6) 1)
LOG VIEWER
1) Keys Keys for operations in the data log viewer screen.
Data to be displayed in the graph display area can be selected.

2) Legend display area The line type and logging data name displayed in the graph display area are displayed.
12.5.2 Legend display
The trigger mark appears when the target data is the logging data to which the trigger is set.
When the trigger conditions are satisfied, it is displayed as [Occurred] in blue. When the trigger is
12
3) Trigger mark display area
restored, it is displayed as [Cancel] in red.
The trigger mark appears only when the target data is trigger logging.
Displays the data name, graph, and cursor of the target data.
The background of the selected graph is displayed in gray.
4) Graph display area
The maximum number of sampling points that are displayable on the graph differs according to
the GOT resolution.*1
Displays the scale of the target data.

Touch the scale display area to display the upper and lower limit values change window. Then the upper
5) Scale display area and lower limit values can be changed.
12.5.3 Upper and lower limit values setting
Touch the [Blue cursor]/[Red cursor] button in the cursor position information display area to move [Blue
cursor]/[Red cursor] displayed in the graph display area to any position. The time and value at the
Cursor position selected position of the graph are displayed.
6)
information display area The changed amount of the time and difference from [Blue cursor] to [Red cursor] is also displayed.
12.5.4 Cursor position information

For details of *1, refer to the following.
Name Resolution (dots) With legend display Without legend display
GT27**-X 1024 768 705 897
GT27**-S 800 600 482 674
GT27**-V 640 480 321 513
POINT
Graph display area
(1) Graph display when missing some logging data
When some logging data is missing, the corresponding part in the graph line is displayed with an interruption.
A long and short dash-alternate vertical line is displayed before and after the missing part.
The cursor position information will not be displayed when the missing part is between [Blue cursor]/[Red
cursor] or at the cursor.
(2) Graph horizontal axis display
When the logging data includes time information, the horizontal axis is displayed in time (hour: minute:
second).
When the logging data does not include time information, the horizontal axis is displayed in index number
(integer).
 Key functions
Key Function
Closes the data log viewer screen, and returns to the previous screen.
Displays the target setting screen.

Opens the file selection screen and displays the list of the files stored in the high speed data logger
module/PLC CPU or SD card/USB memory.
12.4.4 How to operate file selection screen
Select the data to view.

Enlarges vertically the graph selected in the graph display area.
Reduces vertically the graph selected in the graph display area.
Arranges the graph selected in the graph display area horizontally.
Cascades the graph selected in the graph display area.
Displays or hides the legend display area.

Searches the time/index data specified by the graph which is selected in the graph display area.
12.5.6 Searching data
Displays the help screen for icon.

12.5.7 Help
Scrolls the display area right and left by one sampling.

Key Function
Scrolls the display area right and left by one sampling.
Scrolls the display area to the beginning or end of the selected graph.
Enlarges/reduces the display area horizontally.
Moves the selected cursor right and left.
Switches the selected graph up or down.
The following explains the legend display.
1) 2) 3) 4)
LOG VIEWER
12
4)
1) Check box Select the checkbox to display the corresponding graph.
2) Line type display area Displays the line type of the target graph.
Displays the data name of the target graph.

3) Data name display area When the data name exceeds 12 characters, the first 10 characters are displayed. The rest of the
characters are displayed with [..].
4) Keys Keys for operations in the legend display window.

 Key functions
Key Function
Displays or hides all graphs.

/
12.5.3 Upper and lower limit values setting
The following explains the upper and lower limit values setting.
Touch the scale display area to display the following window.
The scale can be changed by changing the upper and lower limit values.
1)
2)
3)
4)
1) Target data display area Displays the data name and line type of the target data.
Upper limit value display

2) Set the value and exponent of the target data upper limit value.
area
Lower limit value display

3) Set the value and exponent of the target data lower limit value.
area
4) Keys Keys for operations in the upper and lower limit values setting window.
 Key functions
Key Function
Closes the upper and lower limit values setting window and cancels the upper and lower limit values
/ input operation.
The values which are input as upper and lower limits are displayed on the scales.

12.5.4 Cursor position information
The display screen shows the status that the red cursor is selected.
Time and value of the blue cursor/red cursor whose graph is selected are displayed in the graph area.
1) 2) 3) 4)
5)
Displays the color of the selected cursor.

1) Selecting cursor color
The above chart shows the status that [Red cursor] button is touched.
Displays the value of the intersection of graph and cursor selected in the graph display area.
2) Cursor read value
The above chart shows the value that [Red cursor] button is touched.
Displays the program name executed in the PLC CPU.

3) Program name
The program name is displayed only when the PLC CPU is selected.
Displays the step number of the program executed in the PLC CPU.
4) Step number
The step number is displayed only when the PLC CPU is selected.
Select a graph in the graph display area, to display the time at the cursor position and the value of the
intersection of the selected graph.
Touch the [Blue cursor]/[Red cursor] button to select the target cursor for operating.
5) Cursor display area The target cursor can be moved by touching the graph display area or the cursor moving buttons.
For [ Difference(blue → red)], the changed amount of [Red cursor] is displayed from [Blue cursor].
12.5.1 Data log viewer screen
LOG VIEWER
12

Data selection screen displays the data list of the files stored in the selected high speed data logger module/PLC CPU/
BOX data logger or CF card/USB memory.
Up to 16 pieces of data can be selected in the data selection screen.
The following explains the data selection screen.
1) 2) 3)
3)
1) Check box Graph is displayed in the data log viewer by selecting the check box.
Data name list display

2) Displays the data names.
area
3) Keys Keys for operations in the data selection screen.
 Key functions
Key Function
Closes the data selection screen, and returns to the log viewer screen.
/
The logging data selected in the data selection screen is displayed on the data log viewer.
Selects up to 16 logging data displayed in the data name list display area, from the top.
Cancels all the selected data.

12.5.6 Searching data
On the data search screen, input the time/index to search the data in the graph which is displayed in the data log viewer
screen and shows the data of the files stored in the high speed data logger module/PLC CPU/BOX data logger or CF
card/USB memory.
The following explains the data search screen.
3)
1)
2) 4)
4)
When the logging data includes time information When the logging data does not include time information,
Input the date to be searched.

1) Date input area
When this screen is displayed, the date on the right of the graph at screen opening is displayed.
Input the time to be searched.

2) Time input area
When this screen is displayed, the time on the right of the graph at screen opening is displayed.
Input the index number to be searched.

3) Index number input area
When this screen is displayed, the index on the right of the graph at screen opening is displayed.
4) Keys Displays the key to be used at the operation in the data search screen.
 Key functions
Key Function
LOG VIEWER
Closes the data search screen.
/
Searches the graph displayed in the data log viewer screen with the values input in the data search
screen.
12

12.5.7 Help
The following explains the help window.

Help window displays the contents of icons.
1)
Displays functions of the icons in the window.

Help window display
1) Help window closes by touching any place in the help window display area.
area
While the help window is displayed, touching other than the help window display area is invalid.

This section describes the error messages for the log viewer and the corresponding corrective actions.
Error message Error Corrective action

(1) Check the communications between the GOT
and the high speed data logger module or the
PLC CPU, and make sure that the GOT
Failed to communicate with the specified
The GOT cannot communicate with the high communicates with the high speed data logger
destination (IP address).
speed data logger module or the PLC CPU. module or the PLC CPU.
Confirm the IP address and communication line.
(2) Check that the GOT and the high speed data
logger module or the PLC CPU are connected in
a connection type that can be communicated.
Authentication failed. The GOT cannot authenticate because the
Please enter operator name and password operator name and password are incorrect in Enter the correct operator name and password.
again. access authentication.
Authentication failed. The GOT cannot authenticate because the
Enter the correct password.
Please enter password again. password is incorrect in remote password.
The GOT cannot access the file in which the Select the file in which the logging data is stored on
Failed to obtain the data.
logging data is stored. the log viewer screen.
The GOT cannot display the selected data
The selected data is not the data of data logging.
because it does not comply with data log Select a file which complies with log viewer.
Please check the file.
viewer.
The log file cannot be viewed because the file
The size of the log file is too large to view with size of the view target log file is larger than Select a logging data with a file size compatible with
this function. the file maximum size that can be viewed log viewer.
with log viewer.
The selected file was not found.
The file structure may have been changed since The file selected in the recently opened files
Select a file from the file selection screen.
the file was previously viewed. list screen does not exist.
Select a file from the file selection screen.
Data has not been selected.
No data is selected. Select the data to display in log viewer.
Select data.
The maximum number of data has already been Data cannot be selected additionally because
selected and additional data cannot be selected. the number of selected data reaches the Cancel unnecessary data and select data again.
Cancel unnecessary data and select data again. upper limit (16) on the data selection screen.
The entered value is invalid.
The GOT cannot search because the entered
Review the value of year, month, date, hour, Enter the correct value.
LOG VIEWER
date and time value is invalid.
minute, and second.
Error
The GOT cannot display the value because it Enter numerical values that comply with the
The entered value is invalid.
is invalid during the upper and lower limit following.
The result should be as follows.
values setting. Upper limit > lower limit
Upper limit > lower limit
12

13.1 Features
The FX ladder monitor enables you to monitor the sequence program within the target controller and change device
values.
It is intended to troubleshoot and maintain the PLC system efficiently.
The features of the FX ladder monitor are shown below.
 The program with ladder symbols can be monitored

You can monitor PLC CPU programs in ladder diagram format and save displayed screens in BMP or JPEG format.
( 13.4 Operation Procedure Common)
(Display example)
FX LADDER MONITOR
 The display format, device comment display and language can be switched
The following can be switched. ( 13.5 Switching the Display Format)
• Display format of device values, timer and counter values
• Comment display/non-display of the target device
(Display example)
13
13. FX LADDER MONITOR 13 - 1

13.1 Features
(1) Switching the display format
The present value of a word device is displayed in a decimal of hexadecimal number in the lower area of the
screen.
13.5.2 Display switching of decimal numbers/hexadecimal numbers
(2) Device comment display
Comments of the devices used in the sequence program (comments written in the controller) are displayed.
13.5.3 Switching comment/no-comment display
 Enhanced interaction with objects

Only by touching an object on a user-created screen, a target device can be searched and displayed. (One-touch
ladder jump function)
Even a person who is not the operator familiar with the equipment inside can trace the source of the equipment error
without fail by simple operations, reducing time to stop the error.
Example) Coil searching by touching a touch switch
(User-created screen)
The ladder monitor starts

Operation flow screen
and searchs for coil "M53"
Home position automatically.
Lifter down Lifter down
Hand close Hand open
Lifter up Lifter up
Lifter lower end Hand close
Back X13 M52 M54
Forward
M53 Lifter up
M53
Touch the button of error process
Lifter upper end Lifter up

X10 M53 M55
M54 Forward
M54
"Forward operation M54" was not turned

on since the lifter upper-end sensor (X10)
was not turned on.
13 - 2 13. FX LADDER MONITOR

13.1 Features
13.2 Specifications
This section describes the system configuration of the FX ladder monitor.

following.
Controller
FXCPU*1
*1 The FX3G does not support the FX ladder monitor function.
 Connection type
Function Connection form between GOT and controller Reference

section
Name Description Direct CPU connection Ethernet connection
Search Device search, defect search,

13.6
operation etc.
Displaying word devices in

DEC or HEX
Display
13.5
switching Displaying device comments,
etc.
Test *1*2 *1*2

Changing device values, etc. 13.7
operation
Storing FX ladder monitor

Hard copy 13.4.2
screen in BMP/JPEG format
*1 The present value of V and Z cannot be changed.

*2 The set values of T and C cannot be changed.
FX LADDER MONITOR
Write the package data that has the system application (Extended function) for the FX ladder monitor to the
GOT.
(2) System application (extended function) size 13
 Display screen for the FX ladder monitor

A sequence program of up to 8 lines (one line: up to 11 contacts (12 or more contacts will be looped back)) is
displayed on a single screen.
In addition, the current values of up to 8 word devices (9 or more devices are displayed by switching the display with
the arrow key) etc. are displayed.

13.2 Specifications
Device monitor
Device Device range Ladder display Search operation
display
Input X000 to X337 (octadecimal)
Output Y000 to Y337 (octadecimal)
Auxiliary relay M0 to M8511
State S0 to S4095
Timer contact T0 to T511
Counter contact C0 to C255
Data register D0 to D8511
Index register V0 to V7
Index register Z0 to Z7
Nesting N0 to N7
Pointer P0 to P4095
I00* to I30* (four points) : Fx0

I00* to I50* (six points) : Fx1, Fx2
Interrupt pointer
I6** to I8** (three points) : Fx1, Fx2
I010 to I060 (six points) : Fx1, Fx2
Extension register R0 to R32767
13.2.3 Access range
For the FX ladder monitor can monitor only the host station.

13.2 Specifications
13.2.4 Precautions
(1) Precautions to be taken while the FX ladder monitor is activated

While the FX ladder monitor is activated, do not perform the following for the GOT.
Otherwise, the stored data may be deleted or the FX ladder monitor may not operate normally.
• Open or close the SD card cover
• Installing/removing the data strage
(2) Ladder display
Up to 24 lines can be displayed per ladder block.
If a sequence program is written in which 24 or more lines are used in a ladder block, the ladder cannot be
correctly displayed. It is advisable to divide such programs.
(3) During PLC reading
During PLC reading, only the host station is read.
(4) Notes on reading the contents
(a) An STL (step ladder) command, a dedicated command for the FXCPU, is displayed as shown below.
Ladder monitoring by GOT Display example of
STL command
STL S0
Y0000
X0000
SET S20
X0000
SET S21
(b) How an INV command is displayed

Ladder monitoring by GOT
X000
Y0000
(c) When searching an STL command, use "S (state)" in a device search.
FX LADDER MONITOR
(d) The 32-bit counters are displayed in 32-bit fixed display in the device monitor.
(e) When using FX3U(C), if the memory capacity is set to 32,000 or higher with the GX Developer PLC
parameters, sequence programs cannot be displayed.
When displaying a sequence program with the GOT, set the memory capacity to 16,000 or less.
(f) Changes to T/C set values are reflected on the ladder monitor display only when they are made with the
device monitor or test function.
When a value is changed by numerical input or other object, the change is reflected on the display after the
GOT is restarted.
(5) Reading comment files
Only files with the file names (program names) with one-byte alphanumeric characters are applicable to the 13
GOT.
When project data are created on GX Developer, use only one-byte alphanumeric characters for file names
(program names).

13.2 Specifications
POINT
Reflecting value changes in display of FX ladder monitor screen
For opening the test menu screen from the device monitor screen or user-created screen, even if the set values of
the timer and counter are changed, the changed values are not reflected in the display of the ladder monitor
screen.
For reflecting the changed values in the display of the ladder monitor screen, read the program again.
(a) The following shows the GOT operation when the program in a safety function block has the target of the
search operation.
Search operation GOT operation
The GOT adds and displays the ladder block that shows the FB definition name in the
Device search
application instruction format in the last row.
Contact point search
For the continuous search, when the program in the safety function block has multiple target
Coil search
devices, the ladder block is added to the last row only one time.
The GOT displays the ladder block that shows the FB definition name in the application
Step search
instruction format corresponding to the searched step.
The GOT adds and displays the ladder block that shows the FB definition name in the
Defect search application instruction format in the last row and ends the defect search.
(The operaiton is the same as that when all the defective devices are searched.)

13.2 Specifications
This section describes the operation procedure from turning on the power to the GOT to ladder monitor function display.
For the ladder monitor start operation when using one-touch ladder jump function, refer to the following.
Start operation when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
 Start operation for the FX ladder monitor

(1) Normal operation
This subsection describes the flow until the FX ladder monitor operation screen is displayed after an FX ladder
monitor is installed in the GOT.
Start
Starting from the special

Starting from function switch (ladder monitor)
the utility set in the project data
Refer to the following manual for how to

After the utility is displayed, set the special function switch.
touch [Monitor] [FX Ladder monitor] GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
from the Main Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility).
Read the PLC and display the

sequence program.
FX LADDER MONITOR
End
13
POINT
The FX ladder monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the
GOT.

 Start operation when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
By using the special function switch, advanced user alarm display, or others, start the FX ladder monitor, and
sequence program files can be read automatically and devices can be searched automatically.
The following shows objects which can use the One-touch Ladder Jump function.
Object
Special function switch, Alarm display, Simple alarm display
POINT
Before executing the automatic PLC read
(1) Setting the automatic PLC read
When reading a sequence program file or a comment file from controllers, the automatic PLC read have to be
set on GT Designer3 (GOT2000) or in the utility.
For the setting of automatic PLC read, refer to the following.
(2) Specifying an automatic PLC read file
With the special function switch or advanced user alarm display, the target sequence program of automatic
PLC read can be specified in each object setting.
However, the operation differs depending on the automatic PLC read setting on GT Designer3 (GOT2000) or
in the utility.
Automatic PLC read setting of File name specification in

Operation
GT Designer3/utility objects
Done The specified sequence program file is read automatically.

Done
None All sequence program files are read automatically.

To search automatically, if a sequence program file of the specified
Done
file name among the sequence program files read in the GOT
None exists, it is executed.

None To search automatically, if a sequence program file read in the GOT
exists, it is executed to all files.

(2) Starting from the special function switch
Select [FX ladder monitor] in [Switch Action], and the [Use One-touch Ladder Jump] check box of the special
function switch. By touching this switch, FX ladder monitor can be started.
( : Set, : Not set)
Setting Operation for touching the special function

Search Method Specify Search File switch
(a)
Specify Search Device*1
(b)
*1 When [Specify Search Device] is selected, set [Ladder Search Device] and [Ladder Search Mode].
The setting of PLC station number is included in the [Ladder Search Device] setting.
(a) Operations for searching a device with specifying the file name
FX ladder monitor
Automatic PLC read Automatic search for
screen
Start FX ladder monitor (The set sequence Ladder Search Device
(The search result is
program file) (Coil/Factor)
displayed.)
(b) Operations for searching a device without specifying the file name
FX ladder monitor
screen
Start Ladder Editor (All sequence program Ladder Search Device
files) (Coil/Factor)
displayed.)
HINT
Operations for the special function switch when not using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
When the [Use One-touch Ladder Jump] is not selected, the operation for touching the special function switch is
the same as when starting from the utility.
FX LADDER MONITOR
In this case, the automatic PLC read is not executed.
Start operation for the FX ladder monitor
13

(3) Starting from the alarm display or simple alarm display
By selecting an alarm in the alarm display or simple alarm display and touching the key code switch (setting the
key code of [Display Ladder]), the FX ladder monitor can be started and the device of alarm can be searched.
Operation at start differs depending on the setting contents of the advanced user alarm observation.
For the setting items for advanced user alarm observation, refer to the following.
( : Set, : Not set)
Ladder search setting Operation for touching the special function

Ladder Search Mode Specify Search File switch
(a)
(b)
(a) Operations for setting the Ladder Search Mode and file name
FX ladder monitor
screen
Start Ladder Editor (The set sequence Ladder Search Device
program file) (Coil/Factor)
displayed.)
(b) Operations for setting the Ladder Search Mode
FX ladder monitor
screen
Start Ladder Editor (All sequence program Ladder Search Device
files) (Coil/Factor)
displayed.)

Screen changes of the FX ladder monitor is the same.
Start the ladder monitor.

For further information, refer to the following.
"Operation for display"
When performing the FX ladder When ladder data has already been read Display format change/
monitor first after starting the GOT after the GOT was started search/Menu window
screen display
Menu
( 3.3.3 Display) ( 3.3.3 Display)
Exit Enter Exit Ladder PLCRD.
PLC reading setting PLC reading screen

window display
FX LADDER MONITOR
PLCRD.
( 3.3.3 Display)
( 3.3.3 Display)
Exit
13
Exit Exit
When the ladder monitor has When the ladder monitor has been started
been started from the utility by the special function switch
Switches to the Main Switches to the

Menu screen. user-created screen.

13.3.1 Display
This subsection describes the procedure for reading the PLC to read the sequence program from the target controller
when the FX ladder monitor is executed, and until the FX ladder monitor screen is displayed.
Utility display
procedure
Section 12.3
PLC reading screen

1. Touch the , , , and keys to specify the
following items listed under "READ SECTION."
SETTING/NON SETTING for comment reading
POINT
Displaying the FX ladder monitor screen
The MELSEC-FX ladder monitor screen displays the
sequence program that was executed when the PLC was
read. If any of the set values of the sequence program is
changed, re-read the PLC.
When no keyword is registered

in the target controller
When a keyword is
registered in the 2. Touch the Keyword key to enter the keyword registered in
target controller the target PLC CPU.
For the FX CPU keyword, refer to the following.

(From previous page)
3. The sequence program is read.

• The message "EXECUTING" is displayed.
• The entire size of the program and the portion already read
are displayed.
Portion already read/entire program size
• The reading of the PLC stops by touching the Break key.
4. The reading of the sequence program is completed.

The message "OPERATION COMPLETE" is displayed.
EXIT Ladder
Touch Touch
FX LADDER MONITOR
When the ladder monitor is activated When the ladder monitor is activated
from the utility by the special function switch Ladder monitor screen
The screen switches to the The screen switches to

main menu. the user-created screen.
13
POINT
Reading the PLC in the following operations
Once the PLC is read, you do not have to read it in the following operations.
However, it must be re-read after you read it and then downloaded project data and when the power to the GOT is
turned on again.

13.3.2 Searching from the monitor screen
When starting an FX ladder monitor with object, coil-search/defect search can be automatically performed to the read
sequence program and the result can be displayed on the monitor.
 Usable objects and functions list

The following table shows the types of objects can be searched from a monitor screen and functions usable in each
object.
For object setting to display searching result on ladder monitor, refer to the following manual.
( : Applicable : Inapplicable)
Function
Object
Automatic PLC read Specify Search File Coil Factor
Special Function Switch
Alarm Display
Simple Alarm Display
 Searching operation
The following explains the procedure from touching the Key Code Switch for advanced alarm display or Special
Function Switch and performing coil-search or defect search to display of a ladder block.

1. Touch a key in monitor screen.
Equipment
2. After the read program is searched, the result is displayed.
3. Touching the button searches consecutively.

Touching the Exit button completes searching halfway.
Touch
4. If the searched device is not found in the read program, the

message "DEVICE NOT FOUND" appears and searching
is completed.
After searching, the program that has been read first is
displayed on the FX ladder monitor screen.
When the searched

device is found
Exit
When the searched

device is not found
The ladder The user-created

monitor screen screen is
FX LADDER MONITOR
is displayed.* displayed.
* After coil-search, monitoring of the displayed ladder starts

automatically.
13

13.4 Operation Procedure Common
This section describes the information and key functions displayed on the FX ladder monitor screen.
13.4.1 Information and key functions displayed on the screen
POINT
After executing PLC reading, if the controller comment or comment capacity is changed, the comment may not be
correctly displayed on the FX ladder monitor screen.
When changing the comment or comment capacity, re-start the GOT.
(1) When the FX ladder monitor is executed

(a) Display monitor
4)
When comment is not displayed :maximum 8 lines

When comment is displayed :maximum 3 lines
1) ON/OFF status display for ladder monitor

ON status
OFF status
* The MCR command is normally displayed as .

2)
3)
The information shown in the table below is displayed.
No. Description
Sequence program is displayed.

A maximum of 11 contact points is displayed in one line of a ladder; for 12 contact points or more, move to the next line.
1) When a comment display is specified, a comment is also displayed; expanded comments are given priority.
For the method of displaying comments, see the following:
A maximum of eight devices is displayed for the word device current value, timer and counter current value (upper row), and
set value (lower row). When the set value is an indirect specification, the value of the indirectly specified device is displayed.
2) To switch between decimal and hexadecimal for the displayed value, see the following:
Display the keys used with the operation on the FX ladder monitor screen shown in (b)
3)
(Touch input).
4) The display step number (left) and the remaining step number (right) are displayed.

(b) Key functions
Key Function
Exit Returns the screen to the one displayed when the FX ladder monitor was activated.
Switches the screen to the PLC reading screen to read from the controller the sequence program to be monitored.
PLCRD. For further information about PLC reading, see the following:
13.3.1 Display
Mon. Starts monitoring the displayed sequence program.
Menu Displays the Menu window for FX ladder monitor ( (2) Menu window for the FX ladder monitor).
Starts the list editor for FX.

List For details on the FX list editor, refer to the following.
15. FX LIST EDITOR
Scrolls the information upward by a ladder block.
Scrolls the information downward by a ladder block.
When the number of devices whose present and set values are within the display range shown in 2) on the preceding
page is nine or more, the devices to be displayed are switched.
Scrolls the information downward by a screen.

In search operation, a search is continuously performed under the same conditions.
Print For further information about hard copies, see the following:
Screen
Cancel The operation of this key is invalid.

Print
FX LADDER MONITOR
13

(2) Menu window for the FX ladder monitor
(a) Display screen
(b) Key functions
Key Function
Displays the ladder block containing the specified device.

Dev.Sea.
13.6.1 Device search
Displays the ladder block containing the specified device.

Cont.Sea
13.6.2 Contact point search
Displays the ladder block containing the specified coil.

Coil.Sea. 13.6.3 Coil search
Search
operation Displays the ladder block containing the specified step number.
Step.Sea
13.6.4 Step search
Displays the last ladder block of the sequence program.

End.Sea.
13.6.5 Ladder end search
Searches the ladder blocks for the status of continuity/non-continuity of the contact point that turned
Xref. on or off the coil on the sequence program.
13.6.6 Defect search
Switches the word device and timer/counter values displayed on the FX ladder monitor
16/32Bit screen to the 16-bit (one-word) or 32-bit (two-word) module.
13.5.1 Display switching of 16-bit (one-word)/32-bit (two-word) modules
Display
Switches the word device and timer/counter values displayed on the FX ladder monitor screen to
format
Dec.Hex. decimal or hexadecimal numbers. 13.5.2 Display switching of decimal numbers/hexadecimal
switching
numbers
Switches whether to display the comments added to the word and bit devices displayed on the FX
Cmnt.
ladder monitor screen. 13.5.3 Switching comment/no-comment display
Changes device values on the screen when the FX ladder monitor is executed. For further information,
Test see the following:
TEST
operation
13.7 Test Operation

This section describes how to store an FX ladder monitor screen to the data strage in BMP/JPEG file format or print it
with a printer.
Touch [Print
Screen]
A BMP/JPEG file will be stored on the

standard CF card inserted in the GOT.
POINT
• The output target of hard copy can be set in Hard Copy of GT Designer3 (GOT2000).
FX LADDER MONITOR
• When outputting a hard copy, the display can be inverted between white and black.
For invert colors setting, refer to the following.
13

13.5 Switching the Display Format
You can switch the display format (16-bit (one-word) module/32-bit (two word) module or decimal number/hexadecimal
number) of word device and timer/counter values displayed on the FX ladder monitor screen, and whether to display the
comments to the target devices.
13.5.1 Display switching of 16-bit (one-word)/32-bit (two-word) modules
During monitoring, the present values of word devices (except timers and counters) are displayed in the 16-bit or 32-bit
module. These modules switch alternately each time you press the 16/32Bit key.
POINT
Displaying timers and counters
You cannot switch the 16-bit (one-word) or 32-bit (two-word) module with regard to the present and set values of
timers and counters. The GOT automatically selects to display them in the 16-bit (one-word) or 32-bit (two-word)
module.
(Operation example: Switch 16-bit (one-word) module display to 32-bit (two-word) module display.)
1. Touch Mon. .
Touch "Mon."
Device values displayed
2. Touch Menu .
Touch "Menu"
Menu window 3. Touch 16/32Bit .
Touch
"16/32Bit"
4. The word devices are displayed in the 32-bit (two-

word) module.

During monitoring, the present values of word devices and the present values (upper values) and set values (lower
values) of timers/counters are displayed in decimal or hexadecimal numbers. The display formats switch alternately each
time you press the Dec.Hex. key.
(Example of operation: Switching the decimal display to the hexadecimal display.)
1. Touch Mon. .
Touch "Mon."
Device values displayed
2. Touch Menu .
Touch "Menu"
Menu window
3. Touch Dec.Hex. .
FX LADDER MONITOR
Touch
"Dec.Hex."
4. The values are displayed in hexadecimal

numbers.
13

Comments written in the target controller are displayed. Comment display and no-comment display switch alternately
each time you press the Cmnt. key.
1. Touch Menu .
Touch "Menu"
Touch "Cmnt."
2. Touch Cmnt. .
3. Comments are displayed.

Each comment is displayed in five characters on
three lines.

13.6 Search Operation
This section describes device search, contact point search, coil search, step search, ladder end search, defect search,
and touch search.
13.6.1 Device search
Device search displays the ladder block that contains a specified device.
<Operation procedure>
1. Touch Menu .
Touch "MENU"
Menu window
2. Touch Dev.Sea. .
Touch "Dev.Sea."
3. Using the and keys, switch the input

area, and enter a device name and its number. *1
Example: Specify D0.
After the device name and its number are entered,
FX LADDER MONITOR
touch the Enter key. Input is completed, and the
keyboard closes.
*1 The data entered can be corrected with the
following keys:
Del key: Used to delete a character of the

entered information.
AC key : Used to delete all characters

entered.
4. The ladder block containing the specified device is

13
displayed.
The device is highlighted as shown in the display
example below.
(Display example)
D0

POINT
(1) Continuous read based on the same device
After a search, a continuous search can be performed based on the same device by touching on the
screen.
If you touch another key, the continuous read function will be canceled.
(2) FX ladder monitor display after a search
The ladder block containing the searched device is displayed.
Example) 1) When the entered device you want to search is "D0"
2) When the same search is continued
The ladder is displayed

on the following line.

13.6.2 Contact point search
Contact search displays the ladder block that contains a specified contact point.
1. Touch Menu .
Touch "MENU"
Menu window
2. Touch Cont.Sea .
Touch
"Cont. Sea."
3. Using the and keys, switch the input area,

and enter a device name and its number. *1
Example: Specify X1.
keyboard closes.
following keys:

AC
FX LADDER MONITOR
key: Used to delete all characters
entered.
4. The ladder block containing the specified contact

point is displayed.
The contact point is highlighted as shown in the
display example below.
(Display example)
X1
13

POINT
(1) Continuous read based on the same contact point
After a search, a continuous search can be performed based on the same contact point by touching on
the screen.
The ladder block containing the searched contact point is displayed.
Example) 1) When the entered contact point you want to search is "X1"


13.6.3 Coil search
Coil search displays the ladder block that contains a specified coil.
1. Touch Menu .
Touch "MENU"
Menu window
2. Touch Coil.Sea. .
Touch
"Coil Sea."
3. Using the and keys, switch the input

area, and Enter a device name and its number.*1
Example: Specify T0.
keyboard closes.
following keys:

FX LADDER MONITOR
entered.
4. The ladder block containing the specified coil is

displayed.
The coil name is highlighted as shown in the
display example below.
(Display example)
T0
13

POINT
(1) Continuous read based on the same coil
After a search, a continuous search can be performed based on the same coil by touching on the
screen.
The ladder block containing the searched coil is displayed.
Example) 1) When the entered coil you want to search is "M120"


13.6.4 Step search
Step search displays the ladder block that contains a specified step number.
1. Touch Menu .
Touch "MENU"
Menu window
2. Touch Step.Sea. .
Touch
"Step.Sea."
3. Enter a step number.*1

Example: Specify step No. 40.
After the step number is entered, touch the
Enter key. Input is completed, and the keyboard
closes.
*1 The data entered can be corrected with
the following keys:
Del key: Used to delete a character of
the entered information.
FX LADDER MONITOR
entered.
4. The ladder block is displayed with the specified

step number at the top.
(Display example)
The ladder block of step No. 40 is displayed.
13

13.6.5 Ladder end search
Ladder end search displays the last ladder block of the sequence program.
1. Touch Menu .
Touch "MENU"
Menu window 2. Touch End.Sea. .
Touch
"End.Sea."
3. The last ladder block is displayed (the end

command is not displayed).
The message "CIRCUIT_END" will be displayed.

13.6.6 Defect search
Defect search searches the ladder block for the status of conductive/non-conductive of the contact point that turned on or
off the coil on the sequence program.
1. Touch Mon. .
Touch "Mon."
2. Touch Menu .
Touch "MENU"
3. Touch Xref. .
Touch "Xref."
4. Select a coil, if necessary.

Using the and keys, switch the input area,
and enter the device name and its number of the
selected coil.*1
Example: Specify M120.
FX LADDER MONITOR
keyboard closes.
*1 The data entered can be corrected with
the following keys:
Del key: Used to delete a character of
the entered information.
entered.
5. A search for the device begins, and the research 13

result is displayed.
To cancel a defect search, touch ESC .
During a defect search, all key operations except
ESC and Exit are invalid.

POINT
Operation before a defect search
In the case of the FX ladder monitor, touch Mon. before starting a defect search.
If you touch Xref. without touching Mon. , the message "NO MONITORING" will be displayed.
(1) Search result

Search results reveal any occurrences of the search device. They are useful when you determine whether a
defective device is conductive or nonconductive.
If any occurrence of the search device is not found as a result of the search, a message appears on-screen,
telling that "PROGRAM NOT FOUND."
(a) When an occurrence of the search device is found:
If an occurrence of the search device is found as a result of the search, the search for another defective
device will automatically be started.
Example: After searching for Device M120 that is in the OFF state, "M669" will be displayed as a device
that caused a failure.
After searching for Coil M120 that is in the OFF state,

"M669" is displayed as a device that is not conductive.
Example:
* After searching for a device that is in the ON state, a
device that is conductive is displayed. The entire field of
the device name and number is highlighted on-screen.
Example:
After searching for Coil M669 that is in the OFF state,

"M111" is displayed as a device that is not conductive.
Example:
When there is no more defect, the "FACTOR SEARCH

STOP" will be displayed, and the defect search will end.
The next defect is automatically

searched.

(b) When two occurrences of the search device are found.
If there are two or more devices that caused a failure, the "the defect search is interrupted" message
appears and the defect search is terminated.
Example: After searching for Device M120 that is in the OFF state, "M669" and "M23" will be displayed as
devices that caused a failure.
After searching for coil M120 that is in the OFF state, “M669“ and “M23” are
displayed as devices that are not conductive.
Example: ,
* After searching for a device that is in the ON state, devices that are conductive
are displayed. The entire field of the device name and number is highlighted on-
screen.B
Example: ,
When resuming the defect search, specify either of the found contacts M669 and X0025. After touching ESC
to change it into Menu , execute the defect search.
POINT
Precautions for making defect search
(1) When the contact point searched is a b contact point
If a B-contact is found defective as a result of the defect search, a search for the cause of the ON/OFF state
will be automatically switched.
(2) Screen display after a defect search
After the end of the defect search, the GOT stops monitor and displays the search result.
Hence, the monitor screen of the GOT shows the result retained during the defect search.
(3) Display of defect search results
While the search result is displayed after the end of the defect search, the searched ladder can be displayed
backwards by pressing (single ladder block scroll) or JUMP JUMP .
Up to 100 ladders can be displayed on-screen. The following messages will appear at the start or the end of
FX LADDER MONITOR
the search results.
• When viewing the start of search results: "This is the start of search results."
• When viewing the end of the search results: "This is the end of search results."
(4) Display of contact point and coil ON/OFF
1) During automatic search execution
Displays ON/OFF in the entire ladder displayed on the screen.
2) During search result display
The ON/OFF of the ladder block searched last and the monitor results of word devices are displayed.
(5) Switching the Menu / ESC key switch
When the defect serch starts, Menu change into ESC .
13
Touch ESC during the defect search to stop the defect search and display the search result.
Further, touch ESC to change ESC into Menu and display the normal ladder.
(6) Screen display during a defect search
1) If the display data exceeds one screen during the defect search
The screen is scrolled automatically.
2) If the ladder step searched during the defect search exceeds one screen
The screen is scrolled automatically to the last line of the ladder step.

(7) Screen display when you touch the ESC key
Touching ESC can stop the defect search. Search results are continuously displayed on-screen until ESC
is touched.
The ladder step searched last is displayed as described below.
ON/OFF display is not provided.

13.7 Test Operation
You can change device values and turn on and off bit devices on the screen when the FX ladder monitor is executed.
This section describes how to display the test menu screen.
For the procedure for changing device values and turning on and off bit devices, see the following.
13.7.1 Displaying the test menu screen
(1) Displaying the test menu screen

The procedure for displaying the test menu screen during FX ladder monitoring is described below.
1. Touch Menu .
Touch "MENU"
2. Touch TEST .
Touch "Test"
Word device values displayed
3. The test menu screen is displayed.

Change device values by operating the window.
FX LADDER MONITOR
For further information about the operation
procedure, see the following:
3.3.8 Test operation for the monitor device
([Test])
POINT
The present and set values of word devices are
hidden behind the test menu screen.
You can display hidden present and set values by 13
scrolling them to the right or left using the or
Test menu screen
key.

13.7 Test Operation
This section describes the error messages displayed when the FX ladder monitor function is executed, and corrective
action.
The specified keyword is different from the

Check the keyword that is registered in the object PLC CPU
ENTRY CODE MISMATCH keyword that is registered in the object
and specify again.
PLC CPU.
(1) An attempt was made to switch to the FX

ladder monitor screen when a sequence
program had not been read. Read the sequence program that written in the object PLC
FILE NOT FOUND
(2) When the file is selected and the "Read" CPU.
key is pressed, the selected file does not
exist in the PLC drive.
Check and correct the following:

(1) Does the specified PLC CPU exist?
(1) Cannot communicate with PLC CPU of
(2) Is it online? (Data communication status?)
PLC COMMUNICATION ERROR the specified network No. or station No.
(3) Has an error occurred?
(2) The specified drive does not exist.
(4) Power on the GOT again.
and so on.
The sequence program has no END Check the sequence program with the peripheral device (GX
No END instruction.
instruction. Developer).
The sequence program has an abnormal Check the sequence program with the peripheral device (GX
Instruction code abnormal.
command code. Developer).
The sequence program has an abnormal Check the sequence program with the peripheral device (GX
Ladder creation bad.
circuit. Developer).
Communication is not possible because a

Please release the keyword. keyword is registered in the target PLC. (For Release the keyword for the target PLC.
FX3U(C) only)
A keyword is set to the PLC that is targeted

The keyword is registered. to the PLC reading on the PLC reading Release the keyword for the target PLC.
screen.
The sequence program is protected by a

PLC is protected. block password at the PLC reading. (For Release the block password for the sequence program.
FXCPU only)

14. MOTION SFC MONITOR
14.1 Features
With Motion SFC Monitor, the GOT can monitor motion SFC programs in the motion controller CPU (Q series) connected
to GOT and device values.
The following describes the features of the motion SFC monitor.
■1. SFC diagram display

SFC diagrams of motion SFC programs can be displayed.
■2. Starting from the special function switch

The motion SFC program automatic PLC reading at motion SFC monitor startup and the SFC diagram display of the
set motion SFC program can be executed by touching the special function switch placed on the user-created screen.
For the required settings for the special function switches, refer to the following.
(2) Start operation using the special function switch
MOTION SFC MONITOR

(User-created screen) (SFC diagram monitor screen)
Motion SFC
Monitor
Motion SFC
monitor startup
Touch the special function switch with the following settings. Motion SFC programs are read automatically
14
Special function switch setting from the motion controller CPU, and the motion
SFC programs with the set file name are displayed.
Display Screen: SFC Diagram
File Name: MainProgram
14. MOTION SFC MONITOR 14 - 1

14.1 Features
14.2 Specifications
This section describes the system configuration of the motion SFC monitor.
following.

Error messages, error codes, and number of steps for errors that occur in the FX PLC can be checked.
Details can be checked immediately even for errors that occur during list editing.
Controller
Motion controller CPU(Q Series)*1*2
• For connections other than bus connection and direct CPU connection
*2 The operation system software of SV13 and SV22 are available only.
Use a motion controller CPU with the following OS installed when using the Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN.

( : Applicable, : Inapplicable)
MELSECNET/H CC-Link
Serial
Bus Direct Ethernet connection, CC-Link IE connection
Name Description communication
connection connection connection*4 MELSECNET/10 controller*1
connection ID*2 G4*3
connection
Motion SFC Motion SFC

monitor program monitoring

*4 Motion SFC monitor cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.
■3. Required extended function OS, option OS, and option function board
The following extended function OS, option OS, and option function board are required.
Write the package data that has the system application (Extended function) for the motion SFC monitor to the
GOT.
When testing the operation, write the package data, where the system application (Extended function) for the
device monitor has been installed, to the GOT.
14 - 2 14. MOTION SFC MONITOR

14.2 Specifications
Hardware
Data storage (Such as an SD card and USB memory)
The following table lists the devices and the ranges that can be monitored with the motion SFC monitor.
( : Possible, : Inapplicable)
Device Device range Program display Current value monitor
Input relay (X/PX) X0 to 1FFF
Output relay (Y/PY) Y0 to 1FFF
Internal relay (M) M0 to 12287
Special relay (M) M9000 to 9255
Latch relay (L) L0 to 8191
Link relay (B) B0 to 1FFF
Annunciator (F) F0 to 2047
Special relay (SM) SM0 to 2255
Data register (D) D0 to 8191
Special register (D) D9000 to 9255
Link register (W) W0 to 1FFF
Special register (SD) SD0 to 2255
Motion register (#)*1 #0 to 8191
Coasting timer (FT) FT
Multiple CPU area device (U3E \G) U3E \G10000 to 24335
*1 To monitor the motion register, the following should be set in the [Controller Setting] dialog box of GT Designer3 (GOT2000).
• Select a type compatible to the motion controller to be used in the [Controller Type] of the CH to connect the motion controller.
For the setting methods of the [Controller Setting] dialog box and the types compatible to motion controller CPUs, refer to the
following.
MOTION SFC MONITOR

14.2.3 Access range
14.2.4 Readable motion SFC programs

14
Motion SFC monitor can read the following programs.
• Control codes (SFC diagram. F/FS and G)
• Text (F/FS and G)

14.2 Specifications
14.2.5 Displayable character codes
The displayable character code of comments and program names on the motion SFC monitor differs according to the
language selected in the utility.
Displayable character code Language of utility
SJIS Japanese
ASCII English, Chinese (Traditional)
GB Chinese (Simplified)
KS Korean
For switching the language of the utility, refer to the following.

14.2.6 Precautions
(1) Operations when using motion SFC monitoring

Do not execute the following operations to GOT while using motion SFC monitor.
Doing so may delete stored data and cause the motion SFC monitor to operate incorrectly.
• Opening and closing the SD card cover
(2) Settings that make the motion SFC monitor unavailable
The motion SFC monitor function is not available when [Locus] is set for line graphs.
(3) Motion SFC programs with soft security key
When Q17nDSCPU or Q170MSCPU is protected with a security key, the GOT cannot read the motion SFC
program.
For the security key, refer to the following.
MT Developer2 Help

14.2 Specifications
This section describes the operating procedure from when the GOT is powered on until the motion SFC monitor screen
appears.
■1. Start operation for the Motion SFC Monitor

(1) Normal operation
The following explains how to display the Motion SFC monitor screen after the GOT is turned on. The GOT must
have the required system application (extended function) installed on it.
Start
Starting from an extended

function switch (motion SFC
Starting from the utility monitor) set in the project data
After the utility screen is displayed, select [Monitor] Refer to the following manual for how to set the special
[Motion SFC Monitor] from the main menu. function switch.
Set the channel No., network No. and

station No. for the motion controller CPU,
which is connected to the GOT.
13.4.6 Communication setting
window
MOTION SFC MONITOR

Select a motion SFC program to display
the SFC diagram.
13.4.5 Program batch monitor
window
Program batch monitor window
14
The SFC diagram monitor screen is
displayed.
13.4.1 SFC diagram monitor
screen
End

POINT
(2) Reading data from PLC when reclosing GOT
Save the motion SFC program in the SD card for the motion SFC monitor.
Reading the motion SFC program is not required when restoring the power supply of the GOT.
14.3.1 Setting motion SFC program storage location
(3) When GOT has not project data
The motion SFC monitor can be started with the utility even though the GOT has no project data.
(2) Start operation using the special function switch

If a special function switch with the following settings is touched, the motion SFC monitor can be launched.
• Select [Motion SFC Monitor] in [Action] and select [Program Batch Monitor Window] or [SFC Diagram] for
[Display Screen].
( : Set, : Not set)
Setting Operation for touching the special function switch
Select [Program Batch Monitor Window] in [Display Screen].

(a)
(Set [CH No.] and [Network] as well.)
Select [SFC Diagram] in [Display Screen].

(b)
(Set [CH No.], [Network] and [File Name] as well.))
(a) Operations for selecting [Program Batch Monitor Window]
Motion SFC monitor Automatic read of the Program batch monitor

startup motion SFC program window
(b) Operations for selecting [SFC Diagram]
SFC diagram monitor

Motion SFC monitor Automatic read of the screen (File name set for
startup motion SFC program the motion SFC
program)

■2. Changing screens
Start
Utility Main Menu

or
13.4.6 Communication setting window

Password for reading or
writing is set for the motion
SFC program.
13.4.4 Active step list window
13.4.7 Password input window
13.4.3 Step list window

The program is locked.
The program is locked.
13.4.5 program batch
monitor window

MOTION SFC MONITOR
13.4.2 Detalied program window

13.4.1 SFC diagram monitor screen
14
POINT
Screen transition when using the special function switch
For the screen transition when using the special function switch for the automatic read of the motion SFC program
and the display of the SFC diagram monitor screen, refer to the following.
14.2.6 (2) Settings that make the motion SFC monitor unavailable

14.3.1 Setting motion SFC program storage location
The motion SFC program read from the motion controller CPU is stored in the storage location that stores ladder data for
the ladder monitor function.
Only the [A:Built-in SD card] or [B:Memory card] is available for storing motion SFC programs.
• When setting with GOT utility
• When setting with GT Designer3(GOT2000)

This section describes the display contents of the SFC diagram monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed
on the screen.
■1. When the SFC diagram monitor is executed

(1) Display screen
1)
2)
3)
2)
4)
2)
5) 6) 7)
Target controller display Displays CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the motion controller CPU set as the target.
1)
area • CH No. network No.-station No./CPU No.
2) Keys Keys for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
Displays the program name of the program displayed in the SFC diagram display area.
MOTION SFC MONITOR

Touching a tab displays the corresponding program in the SFC diagram display area.
3) Program switching tab
Tabs displayed to the right of the touched tab are removed.
If the detailed program window is open, the tabs will be closed.
Displays the SFC diagram of the motion SFC program.

Active steps are displayed in yellow, and waiting steps are displayed in red.
The locked step or transition is shown as below.
• Inactive : Gray
• Active : Pongee
• Waiting : Dark red
4) SFC diagram display area For displayed motion SFC diagram symbols, refer to the following.
(2) Motion SFC diagram symbol
The followings can be selected in the SFC diagram display area.
• Valid/invalid of comment display 14
• Valid/invalid of automatic scroll
(2) (b) Display menu
Displays [Scrolling automatically] when the automatic scroll mode is valid.

Automatic scroll status Nothing is displayed when the automatic scroll mode is invalid.
6)
display area When the automatic scroll is valid, the automatic scroll turns invalid by touching the automatic scroll
status display area.
Displays the number of active steps.

Number of active steps
7) Active step list window is displayed by touching this area.
display area

(2) Motion SFC diagram symbol
The following describes the motion SFC diagram symbols displayed in the SFC diagram display area.
Classification Name Symbol Function
Indicates the program entrance by the program

START Program name name.
Program start/end
END END Indicates the program end (exit).
Motion control step Kn -
Once execution type

operation control step Fn Detailed program window is displayed by touching
this area.
Scan execution type 14.4.2 Detailed program window
FSn
Step*1 operation control step
Touch this to add a tab with the name of the program

Subroutine call/start step Program name which is set for the subroutine call/start step, to the
right of the program switching tab.
The program corresponding to the added program
CLR switching tab is displayed in the SFC display area.
Clear step Program name If the detailed program window is open, the tab will be
closed.
Shift
Gn
Shift Y/N
WAIT Touch this to display the detailed program window.

Gn 14.4.2 Detailed program window
WAIT Y/N
The device name of the set bit device is displayed on
Transition*1
WAITON and WAITOFF.
WAITON ON bit device Even if the label is set to the bit device, the device
name is displayed.
WAITOFF OFF bit device
Normal Pn
Jump
Coupling Pn Touch this to search the jump/pointer of the same

number.
Found jump/pointers are displayed in the SFC
Normal Pn diagram display area.
Pointer
Coupling Pn
*1 Touching the locked step or transition displays the password input window.
POINT
Precautions for changing the motion controller CPU to the debug mode
When MT Developer/MT Works2 changes the motion controller CPU to the debug mode, Shift Y/N and WAIT Y/N
in active status may not be highlighted in yellow.
Check the active status of Shift Y/N and WAIT Y/N with MT Developer/MT Works2.

■2. Motion SFC diagram monitor screen
(1) Key functions
The following describes key functions for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
Key Function
Displays the Find menu.

(2) (a) Search menu

(2) (b) Display menu
Closes the motion SFC monitor and returns to the screen for starting the motion SFC monitor.
(2) Menus
The following shows the operations for menus displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
(a) Search menu
Key Function
Displays the step list window.

(b) Display menu
MOTION SFC MONITOR
Key Function
Sets valid/invalid of the comment display.

14
Comment display valid Comment display invalid

Key Function
Switches the automatic scroll to valid/invalid.

When the automatic scroll is valid and all the following conditions are satisfied, the active steps are
displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen by automatically scrolling the screen.
• No active step is displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
• The displayed motion SFC program has an active step.
The step status becomes An active step in the block

inactive. is displayed by automatically
scrolling the screen.
Displays [Scrolling automatically] in the automatic scroll status display area of the SFC diagram
monitor screen when the automatic scroll is valid.
Displays the active step list window

Displays the program batch monitor window.

14.4.5 Program batch monitor window


14.4.2 Detailed program window
■1. Displayed contents

The following describes the contents of the detailed program window and the key functions displayed on the screen.
1)
3)
2)
4)
5) 6)
1) Number display area Displays the step/transition number.
2) Keys Displays the keys for operations on the detailed program window.
Displays the arithmetic control program/transition program.

When the automatic scroll is valid and the active step is changed, the arithmetic control program/
transition program of the active step is displayed.
When the locked step becomes active, the displayed contents do not change in the detailed program
window.
3) Program display area (2) (b) Display menu
The arithmetic control program/transition program of the touched step/transition is displayed by touching
the step/transition on the step list window or active step list window.
Displays the devices (device name/device No./data type) which is used in the arithmetic control
program/transition program displayed in the program display area.
MOTION SFC MONITOR

Data type is only displayed when the device is the word device (32-bit integer type/64-bit floating point
number type).
D2012L
Data type (L: 32 bits, F: 64 bits)
Device number
Device name
The number of displayable devices differs according to the device type.
Up to 288 points can be displayed when the devices are counted in the following way.
4) Device display area • Bit device (1 bit): 1 point
• Bit device (16 bits): 2 points
• Bit device (32 bits): 4 points
• Word device (16-bit integer type): 2 points
• Word device (32-bit integer type): 4 points
• Word device (64-bit floating point number type): 8 points 14
When the label is set to the motion SFC program, the displayed name varies depending on the
connected motion controller CPU.
• Q172DSCPU and Q173DSCPU: The label name is displayed. However, the current value is not
displayed.
• Other than the above: The device name is displayed.

Displays the current value of the device which is used in the arithmetic control program/transition
program displayed in the program display area.
If the current value cannot be acquired from the motion controller CPU, the value will not be displayed.
The following shows the displayed contents of each device.
• Bit device (1 bit) : Yellow is displayed at ON, and is displayed at OFF.
• Bit device (16 bits/32 bits): the lowest digits of 16-bit/32-bit portion of the initial device are displayed
side-by-side.
5) Current value display area The contents are displayed only when the device No. of the specified initial device is a multiple of 16.
When the device is ON, the background of the device No. is displayed in yellow.
Example) The current value display of Bit device X18 (16 bits)
7654 3210 FEDC BA98
X27, X26, ····················· , X19, X18

• Word device: Displays in the display format set in the display format display area.
Displays the display format of the word device which is used in the arithmetic control program/transition
program displayed in the program display area. (Not displayed when using bit device.)
The following shows the display format types.
• K (±) : Signed decimal
• K (+) : Unsigned decimal
•H : Hexadecimal (H is displayed on the head of the value in the current value display area.)
Display format display • BIN : Binary
6)
area • FLOAT : Floating-point number (The current value is displayed in the exponential representation.)
Display format can be changed by touching the display format display area.
By touching the area, display format changes in the following order.
· 16/32Bit : K(±) K(+) H BIN
· 64Bit : FLOAT H
■2. Key functions
Key Function
Close the detailed program window.

Step list window displays the steps and transitions.
1)
2) 1)

1) Keys Keys for operations on the step list window.
Displays the step/transition numbers and comments set in the step/transition.
Active steps are displayed in yellow, and waiting steps are displayed in red.
The locked step or transition is shown as below.
• Inactive : Gray
• Active : Pongee
• Waiting : Dark red
Touching the step or transition displays the step or transition on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
In addition, the program is displayed on the detailed program window. (When the step or transition is
locked, the authentication is needed on the password input window.)
The following shows the types of steps and transitions.
2) Step display area
• Kn : Motion control step
• Fn : Once execution type operation control step
• FSn : Scan execution type operation control step
• GSUB : Subroutine call/start step
• Gn : Shift, Shift Y/N, WAIT and WAIT Y/N
• WAITON : WAITON
MOTION SFC MONITOR

• WAITOFF : WAITOFF
Depending on the step/transition, the displayed contents of comments may be as follows.
• GSUB (Subroutine call/start step) : Call destination/startup destination program name
• WAITOFF and WAITOFF : Bit device name
POINT
in active status may not be highlighted in yellow.
14
■2. Key functions
Key Function
Closes the step list window and displays the active step list window.
Closes the step list window

Displays the active steps.
1)
2) 1)
1) Keys Keys for operations on the active step list window.
Displays the active step numbers and comments set in the active step.
The step or transition is displayed as below.
• Not locked : Yellow
• Locked : Pongee
Touching the step or transition displays the step or transition on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
In addition, the program is displayed on the detailed program window. (When the step or transition is
locked, the authentication is needed on the password input window.)
The following shows the types of steps and transitions.
• Kn : Motion control step
2) Active step display area
• Fn : Once execution type operation control step
• FSn : Scan execution type operation control step
• GSUB : Subroutine call/start step
• Gn : Shift, Shift Y/N, WAIT and WAIT Y/N
• WAITON : WAITON
• WAITOFF : WAITOFF
Depending on the step/transition, the displayed contents of comments may be as follows.
• GSUB (Subroutine call/start step) : Call destination/startup destination program name
• WAITOFF and WAITOFF : Bit device name
POINT
in active status may not be displayed in the active step display area.
■2. Key functions

Key Function
Closes the step list window and displays the active step list window.
Closes the active step list window.

The following shows the operation for selecting the motion SFC program to display on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
1) 2)
Displays the program No., program name and program status of the motion SFC program read from the
motion controller CPU.
The program is displayed as below.
• Unlocked and running program : Yellow
• Locked program : Gray
Program status display • Locked and running program : Pongee
1) Touching a program name closes the program batch monitor window and displays the corresponding
area
program on the SFC diagram monitor screenIf the detailed program window is open, the tabs will be
closed.)
Touching the locked program displays the password input window.
2) Keys Keys for operations on the program batch monitor window.
■2. Key functions
MOTION SFC MONITOR

Key Function
Closes the program batch monitor window.
14

Sets the motion controller CPU for monitoring.

1) 3) 4) 2) 1) 3) 4) 2)
5) 6)
(When the CH No. is input) (When the network No., station No., and CPU No. are input)

■2. Key functions
Key Function

When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is not
set, the communication setting window does not close.
The operation differs depending on the status at touch.

• When the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No. input area:
Moves the cursor.
• When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station
No. are completed:
The communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.
Displays the password input window when the read motion SFC program requires a password.
When the program does not require any password, the program batch monitor window appears.

Executes the password authentication of the motion SFC program.

After the password authentication has succeeded, the password is authenticated automatically with the same password
for the following time. (The password input window is not displayed.)

1) 1)
2) 3) 2) 3)
1) 1)
(For alphabet input ) (For numerical input)
1) Keys Keys for operations in the password input window.
Displays the type of the password to be input.

2) Password type • SFC program password : The password for writing or reading
• Unlock password : The password for unlocking the program
■2. Key functions

Key Function
Closes the password input window and cancels the password input operation.
Switches the key type to the symbol.
MOTION SFC MONITOR

Authenticates the password set in the password input area.
14

15. FX LIST EDITOR
To use the FX list editor on GT21, refer to the following.

15.1 Features
The MELSEC-FX list editor enables you to change the sequence program in the FX PLC.
This function is intended to troubleshoot the PLC system and to streamline maintenance operations.
The features of the MELSEC-FX list editor are described below.
 Parameters and sequence programs are easy to maintain.

You can check or partly correct, change or add FX PLC CPU parameters and sequence programs simply by
operating keys.
You can easily edit sequence programs without preparing any peripheral unit other than the GOT.
(Example of changing sequence program commands)

Changed
LD X000 LD X000
OUT Y020 OUT Y030
LD X001 LD X001
 Combination with the FX ladder monitor

You can open the MELSEC-FX List Editor window from the Ladder Monitor screen with a single touch.
You can edit PLC program while checking the ladder.
You can also display a list from the step line displayed by the ladder monitor.
FX LIST EDITOR
15
15. FX LIST EDITOR 15 - 1

15.1 Features
 Errors that occur during list editing can be checked easily.
Error messages, error codes, and number of steps for errors that occur in the FX PLC can be checked.
Details can be checked immediately even for errors that occur during list editing.
 Commands and devices can be searched and displayed.

Commands and devices used in sequence programs can be searched.
The correction position can be searched for cases such as when you want to correct a specific device.
Searched device
M800
Displays the searched device.
LD M 800
OUT T 10
K 100
LD X 002
15 - 2 15. FX LIST EDITOR

15.1 Features
15.2 Specifications
This section describes the system configuration of the MELSEC-FX list editor.
following.
 Controllers that can be edited with the MELSEC-FX list editor

Target controller
FXCPU
 Connection forms
Function name Connection form between GOT and PLC
Name Description Direct CPU connection Ethernet connection*1
Sequence program writing, parameter setting, *2

MELSEC-FX list editor
PLC diagnostics and keyword registration, etc.
*1 MELSEC-FX list editor cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.
*2 Available only when using FX3U or FX3UC.

Write the package data that has the system application (Extended function) for the intelligent module monitor to
the GOT.
FX LIST EDITOR
15

15.2 Specifications
 Functions list and monitor conditions
The following shows the memory that can be monitored by the MELSEC-FX list editor and the FX PLC status
conditions.
( : Can be monitored : Can be monitored under certain conditions : Cannot be monitored)
Memory that can be monitored *2
EEPROM
memory EPROM FX PLC
Function RAM memory Reference
Built-in memory cassette, flash memory status
cassette
memory cassette
cassette
Displaying sequence Section

Reading programs 5.4.3
RUN/
sequence
Searching commands/ STOP Section
programs
devices 5.4.4
Section
Writing Writing commands
5.4.5
sequence
programs Changing operands/set Section
values 5.4.6
*1
For Stop Section
Inserting commands
only 5.4.5
Section
Deleting commands
5.4.7
Section
Sequence program all clear
5.4.8
Section
PLC diagnostics RUN/ 5.4.9
STOP
Display
Section
Parameter setting For Stop
Set *1 5.4.10
only
RUN/ Section
Keyword
STOP 5.4.11
*1 The operation is available only when the protect switch is OFF.

*2 The available memory differs depending on the FX PLC being used.
For further information, see the following.
The hardware manual of the FX PLC being used

15.2 Specifications
15.2.2 Access range
For the FXCPU in Ethernet connection, the GOT can monitor only the host station.
The access range other than the above is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller.
15.2.3 Precautions
(1) Using other peripheral equipment for sequence program/parameter change

When using the MELSEC-FX list editor, do not change programs or parameters in the PLC CPU from other
peripheral equipment.
If you make a change, temporarily exit the MELSEC-FX list editor after the change is made, then start the
MELSEC-FX list editor again.
If you carelessly change the program on one PLC from multiple units of peripheral equipment (including GOT),
the contents of the program in the PLC CPU and the peripheral equipment may not be the same, resulting in an
unintended operation of the PLC CPU.
(2) Sequence program change
Stop the FX PLC before changing (writing, inserting, deleting) a sequence program or changing parameters.
Operation is not possible with the FX PLC running.
(3) If you press the GO key but the system does not proceed to the next operation (for example, a
search)
Check the input contents (applied instruction number, device value, etc.).
(4) When used together with the FX ladder monitor
Even if you execute the MELSEC-FX list editor with the FX ladder monitor activated, edited information will not
be reflected on the FX ladder monitor screen.
To reflect such edited information, perform the PLC reading of the FX ladder monitor again.
(5) When using list monitor
Only devices to be used for basic instructions can be monitored.
The status of devices (word, bit) to be used for application instructions cannot be monitored.
FX LIST EDITOR
15

15.2 Specifications
This subsection describes an outline until the device monitor screen is displayed after List editor for MELSEC-FX (Option
OS) is installed in the GOT.
Start
Starting from the special function

When starting the List
Starting from the switch (MELSEC-FX list editor) editor for MELSEC-FX
utility set in the project data from the ladder monitor
Display the utility. Touch the special function switch. Activate the MELSEC-FX list editor
on the Ladder monitor screen.
Example)
After the utility is displayed, touch Touch "List"
[Monitor] [MELSEC-FX List editor] Refer to the following manual for
from the Main Menu. how to set the special function switch.
For how to display the utility, refer
to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000)
Help
GOT2000 Series
User’s Manual (Utility) 12. FX LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION
Set the Channel No.
Set the channel number of

the controller targeted to the
MELSEC-FX list editor.
Communication
setting window
When no keyword When a keyword is

is registered in the registered in the
connected FX PLC connected FX PLC
Enter the keyword.
13.4.11 Keywords
The MELSEC-FX list editor is started.
End

POINT
After turning on the GOT, the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the MELSEC-
FX list editor only.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch [ChNo.] on the
MELSEC-FX list editor screen. ( 15.4 Operation Procedures)
The MELSEC-FX list editor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to
the GOT.
FX LIST EDITOR
15

 Change screens
This section describes how to change the screen.
Start
Utility Main Menu

or
[ChNo.]
MORE
MORE
OP
CLR OP
CLR
[PLC
GO
diagnostics]
[Parameter
setting] GO
[Keyword
setup] GO
*1
[List
Monitor] GO
*1 With setting special function switches (FX list monitor), the list monitor can be started on the monitor screen.
When the list monitor is started on the monitor screen, the list editor cannot be used.

This section describes the contents of the MELSEC-FX list editor and the key functions displayed on the screen.
15.4.1 Key arrangement and a list of key functions
The arrangement and functions of the keys displayed on the MELSEC-FX List Editor window are described below.
1) 2)
3)
4) 5)
Displays the currently selected channel number.

Touching "ChNo." displays the communication setting window.
1) Channel No.
The communication setting window is not displayed if the MELSEC-FX list editor is started from the FX
ladder monitor.
Displays a mode for MELSEC-FX list editor.
( 15.4.2 Selection and operation of modes)

2) Mode
[Monitor] is displayed when the list monitor is executed.
( 15.4.12 List monitor)
Displays the contents of errors that occur with the MELSEC-FX list editor.
3) Error message
( 15.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions)
Displays the sequence program in list format (12 digits).

4) List display area
The position (line) that can be edited is displayed with a bar.
5) Key area Displays the keys that can be used with the MELSEC-FX list editor.
FX LIST EDITOR
15

 Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the MELSEC-FX list editor screen.
Key Function
The communication setting window is not displayed if the MELSEC-FX list editor is started from
the FX ladder monitor.
Selects a mode for MELSEC-FX list editor. ( 15.4.2 Selection and operation of modes)
Displays the PLC diagnostics, parameter setting, and keyword selection menu.
Switches between command keyboard 1 and command keyboard 2.

( Keyboard switching)
When inputting commands: Cancels the key input when only part of the command has been input.
( 15.4.14 Action for an incorrect key input)

When option menu is displayed: Closes the option menu.
Commands cannot be deleted with this key.
( 15.4.7 Deleting commands)
Space key.
This key is used when setting timers and counters, writing applied commands, etc.
Displays the list from a specified step No. when the step No. is input.
Moves the list display area bar up and down and switches the line being edited.
Determines the key operation.
Inputs commands, device names, etc.

to , The key contents depend on the input contents.
The commands that can be used differ depending on the target FX PLC.
Refer to the manual for the FX PLC to be used.
to , etc.
Exits the MELSEC-FX list editor.
 Keyboard switching
Touching the MORE button switches the command keyboard 1 and command keyboard 2.
When you touch the button for a keyboard function, the optimum keyboard for input for that function is displayed
automatically.
Command keyboard 1 Command keyboard 2
Touch
Touch

15.4.2 Selection and operation of modes
The MELSEC-FX list editor has four modes: READ, WRITE, INSERT, and DELETE.
Select an appropriate mode for the intended operation.
For more information on the mode to select, refer to the function operations from subsection 5.4.3 onward.
 How to change modes

Touch the MODE button.
Each time you touch this button, the mode changes.
Touch the button.
The current mode is displayed.
 In the case the mode cannot be changed

In the following cases, only READ mode is allowed.
If you try to change to other than READ mode, an error message is displayed.
To change to other than READ mode, take the action below.
Error Message Description Corrective action
PLC is running The FX PLC is in the RUN status. Stop the FX PLC.
The protect switch of the EEPROM memory cassette Switch off the protect switch of the EEPROM
is on. memory cassette.
Can not write.
Set a memory other than EPROM as the memory to
The EPROM memory cassette is enabled.
write to.
FX LIST EDITOR
15

15.4.3 Sequence program display
Sequence programs are read from the FX PLC to the GOT and displayed.
There are two displaying methods: specifying the step number, and scrolling one screen at a time.
 Display using cursor keys

(1) Operation
Scroll with or .
(2) Example
Scroll one line upward or downward.
128 MPP
129 DIV 23
D56
K200
Scrolling one line upward Scrolling one line downward
128 MPP 128 MPP

129 DIV 23 129 DIV 23
D56 D56
K200 K200
 Display specifying the step number

(1) Operation
STEP Input the step number. GO
(2) Example
Displaying step number 123.
0 LD X 000
1 OUT Y 000
2 LDI M 100
3 MOV 12
STEP
Step number
123 Input the step number
3 MOV 12
GO
123 MOV 12
K 200
D 58
128 MPP
HINT
When the specified step number is the operand of an applied instruction
If the specified step number is a timer (T) or counter (C) set value or the operand of an applied instruction, that
command section is displayed at the head.

 Display scrolling one screen at a time
(1) Operation
MODE GO
(Read mode)
(2) Example
Displaying with scrolling one screen at a time.
ChNo.[1] < WRITE >
MODE
ChNo.[1] < READ > Set the READ mode.
GO
123 MOV 12
K 200 Displaying with scrolling
D 58 one screen at a time.
128 MPP
FX LIST EDITOR
15

15.4.4 Searching commands and devices
Displays a command or device by searching it in sequence program from Step 0.
 Command search
(1) Operation
*1 *2 *3
MODE Select the command Input the device name and GO GO
to search for. device number.
(Read mode)
*1 If the command you want to search for is not on the keyboard, touch the MORE key to switch to the other keyboard.
When searching for an applied instruction, touch the FNC key and input the applied instruction number.
When searching for a label, touch P or I and input the pointer number.
( 15.4.5 Writing applied instructions

*2 Input only when searching for commands requiring a device name and device number.
*3 After the search results are displayed, you can continue searching with the same conditions by touching the GO key.
Touching any key other than the GO key ends the search.
(2) Example
Searching for LD M8000
Search command
ChNo.[1] < WRITE > LD
3 MOV 12
MODE
M 8 0 0 0 GO
Set the
ChNo.[1] < READ > READ mode. 8 LD M 8000
9 OUT T 10
K 100
12 LD X 002
LD ( Select the command
to search for. )
(Continue to search with the
GO
same conditions)
24 LD M 8000
25 OUT T 0
K 100
28 OUT T 1
POINT
Pointer (P, I) searches
For pointer searches, only labels are searched.
Pointers specified as operands in applied instructions are not searched.

 Device search
(1) Operation
*1
Input the device name and
MODE SP device number. GO GO
(Read mode)
*1 After the search results are displayed, you can continue searching with the same conditions by touching the GO key.
Touching any key other than the GO key ends the search.
(2) Example
Searching for LD M8000
Search device
ChNo.[1] < WRITE > M8000
3 MOV 12
MODE
GO
ChNo.[1] < READ > Set the

READ mode. 8 LD M 8000
9 OUT T 10
K 100
12 LD X 002
SP M 8 0 0 0
GO
(Continue to search with the
same conditions)
24 LD M 8000
25 OUT T 0
K 100
28 OUT T 1
POINT
Devices that cannot be searched
The following devices cannot be searched.
• Pointers, interrupt pointers
• Constant K, constant H, constant E
• Bit devices with specifying numbers only
• Special function unit/block buffer memory
• Devices specified with the operand of an applied instruction
Pointers and interrupt pointers can be searched for with command searches.
( Command search ) FX LIST EDITOR
15

15.4.5 Writing commands
Writes a sequence program to the FX PLC. (Overwrite/Insert)
 Writing basic commands

(1) Operations
(a) Inputting command only (Ex.: ANB, ORB command etc.)
Stop the FX PLC MODE Input the command GO
For overwriting: (WRITE mode)

For insertion: (INSERT mode)
(b) Inputting command and device (LD, AND commands etc.)

Stop the FX PLC MODE Input the command

Input the device name and device number GO
(c) Inputting command, No. 1 device, No. 2 device (MC, OUT (T, C) commands, etc.)
Stop the FX PLC MODE Input the command Input the device name and device number

SP Input the device name and device number GO
POINT
Moving the cursor to the position to write the command
When starting to write a command, place the cursor on the command line (the line on which the step number is
displayed).
You cannot write a command with the cursor on an operand or set value line.
2 LDI M 100 Command line (Place the cursor on this line.)
3 MOV 12
D 0
D 10 Operand, set value line (Cannot operate on this line.)
(2) Example
(a) Writing ORB command
Stop the FX PLC
4 LDI X 004
ChNo.[1] < WRITE > 5 AND X 005
6 NOP
7 NOP
MODE
ORB GO
Set the
ChNo.[1] < READ > WRITE or
INSERT 4 LDI X 004
mode 5 AND X 005
6 ORB
7 NOP
With or , move the
cursor to the position to
overwrite/insert the command.

(b) Inputting LD X000
Stop the FX PLC
0 NOP
ChNo.[1] < WRITE > 1 NOP
2 NOP
3 NOP
MODE
LD X 0 GO
Set the
INSERT 0 LD X 000
mode. 1 NOP
2 NOP
With or , move the 3 NOP
(c) Inputting OUT T100 K19
Stop the FX PLC

100 OUT M 100
101 NOP
102 NOP
103 NOP
ChNo.[1] < WRITE >
OUT T 100
MODE
100 OUT M 100

Set the 101 OUT T 100
INSERT 103 NOP
mode.
SP K 19 GO
With or , move the
cursor to the position to 100 OUT M 100
overwrite/insert the command. 101 OUT T 100
K 19
104 NOP
 Writing applied instructions

(1) Operations
*1
Stop the FX PLC MODE FNC D Applied instruction number
For overwriting: (WRITE mode) FX LIST EDITOR

*1
Input the device name and
P SP device number. GO
*2
*1 D (double word command) and P (pulse execution format command) can also be input after the applied instruction number is
input.
Inputting in the order P D is also possible. 15
*2 When a command specifies multiple devices for operations, input the SP key followed by the device name and device number.

POINT
(1) Moving the cursor to the position to write the command
When starting to write a command, place the cursor on the command line (the line on which the step number
is displayed).
You cannot write a command with the cursor on any other line.

3 MOV 12
D 0
(2) Commands using a text string constant for a command operand (such as ASC command)
With the MELSEC-FX list editor, text string constants cannot be written as operands. (such as ASC
commands)
Use GX Developer for writing such commands.
(2) Example
Input "DMOVP D0 D2".
Stop the FX PLC
200 FNC
ChNo.[1] < WRITE > 201 NOP
202 NOP
203 NOP
MODE *1
D 1 2 P SP
Set the
ChNo.[1] < READ > WRITE or 200 DMOVP 12
INSERT
mode.
With or , move the 203 NOP
D 0 SP D 2 GO
200 NOP
201 NOP
202 NOP 200 DMOVP 12
203 NOP D 0
D 2
FNC 209 NOP
*1 The MOV command is FNC12.

15.4.6 Changing operands, set values
Changes the operand section of an applied instruction and OUT (T, C) command set value.
 Operation
Stop the FX PLC MODE SP Input the device name and device number GO
Read mode
*1 For decimal numbers, input K, then the number.
For hexadecimal numbers, input H, then the number.
POINT
Moving the cursor to the line on which the operand or set value is to be changed
When starting to change an operand or a set value, place the cursor on the line of the operand or set value to be
changed (the line on which the step number is not displayed).
If you place the cursor on the command line, the input operation is not possible.
2 LDI M 100 Command line (Cannot

3 MOV 12 operate on this line.)
D 0 Operand, set value line
D 10 (Place the cursor on this line.)
 Example
Changing "MOV D0 D10" to "MOV D0 D123"
Stop the FX PLC
3 MOV 12
< WRITE > D 0
ChNo.[1]
D 10
8 LD M 10
MODE
SP D 1 2 3
Set the
WRITE or
ChNo.[1] < READ >
INSERT 3 MOV 12
mode. D 0
D 123
Move the cursor to the changed 8 LD M 10
location with or
FX LIST EDITOR
15

15.4.7 Deleting commands
Deletes one command at a time from a sequence program.
 Operation
Stop the FX PLC MODE Move the cursor to the command to be deleted. GO
(DELETE mode)
POINT
When moving the cursor to the position where the command is to be deleted.
Place the cursor on the command line (the line on which the step number is displayed).
You cannot delete the command if the cursor is placed on the line of an operand or set value.

3 MOV 12
D 0
 Example
Deleting "OUT T10 K100"
Stop the FX PLC
8 LD M 10
< WRITE > 9 OUT T 10
ChNo.[1]
K 100
12 LD X 002
MODE
GO
Set the
WRITE or 8 LD M 10
ChNo.[1] < READ >
INSERT 9 LD X 002
mode. 10 OR X 020Z1
13 AND D 1500.F
Move the cursor to the command to be
deleted with , or the STEP key. *1

15.4.8 Sequence program all clear
Clears all the sequence programs.
 Operation
Stop the FX PLC MODE NOP A GO
(WRITE mode)
 Example
Clears all the sequence programs.
Stop the FX PLC
! Caution
ChNo.[1] < WRITE > The program will be erased.
Press "OK" to continue.
MODE OK Cancel
Set the
ChNo.[1] < READ > WRITE OK
mode.
0 NOP
NOP 1 NOP
2 NOP
3 NOP
0 NOP
1 OUT Y 000
2 LDI M 100
3 MOV 12
A GO
POINT
Items cleared when All Clear for a sequence program is performed
When All Clear is executed, the parameters before program execution are initialized and Latch Clear is executed.
The memory space becomes the default value, the comment area a 0 block, the file register space a 0 block, and
keywords unregistered.
After All Clear, set the above parameters etc. again.
FX LIST EDITOR
15

15.4.9 PLC diagnostics
Displays the FX PLC error message, error code, and step at which the error occurred.
 Operation
OP [PLC diagnostics] GO
OP Select [PLC diagnostics] with or
GO
 PLC diagnostics screen

The following describes the contents displayed on the PLC diagnostics screen and the function of on-screen key.
1) 2) 3)
Displays the error message. (I/O configuration error/PLC hardware error/PC/HPP

1) Error message communication error/Serial communication error/Parameter error/Syntax error/Circuit error/
Operation error)
2) Detail Displays the error code.
Displays the step number in the sequence program at which the error occurred.
3) Step
(This is displayed only for a syntax error, circuit error, or operation error.)

HINT
Error details
For details on an FX PLC error, refer to the following.
Programming manual for the FX CPU used
(2) Key functions

The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the PLC diagnostics screen.
Key Function
Exits the PLC diagnostics.
FX LIST EDITOR
15

Sets FX PLC parameters.
 Parameters that can be changed and change targets

(1) Parameters that can be changed
The parameters that can be changed with the MELSEC-FX list editor and the target FX PLCs are as follows.
( : Can be set/changed : Cannot be set/changed)
Target CPU
Item FX0(S)
FX1 FX2(C) FX1S FX1N(C) FX2N(C) FX3S FX3G(C) FX3U(C)
/FX0N
Memory space setting
File register space setting *1
Latch range setting *2 *2 *2
RUN terminal setting
Initialization of parameters
*1 When connecting an FX0(S), set "0".

Setting other than "0" causes a parameter error.
*2 When the parameters are initialized, the display on the MELSEC-FX list editor is different from the FX PLC default values, but do
not change the latch range. Changing the latch range causes an error.
(2) Change targets

When a memory cassette is mounted, the parameters in the memory cassette are targeted for changes.
 Operation
*1
Stop the FX PLC OP [Parameter setting] GO
*1
Stop the FX PLC
OP Select [Parameter setting] with or .
GO
*1 When checking parameters (not changing), it is not necessary to stop the PLC.

 Parameter setting screen
The following describes the contents displayed on the PLC diagnostics screen and the function of on-screen keys.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Sets the memory space (number of steps).

1) Memory capacity
If you touch the *K section, you can change the memory space.
Sets the memory space (number of blocks) allocated to the file register.
2) File reg. capacity
Touch the section and input the number of blocks.
Sets the latch range (power failure hold area).

3) Latch range
Touch the number display section and input the value.
Sets whether or not to use one of the FX PLC input terminals for RUN input.
4) RUN terminal input
Touch the section and set the device to be set for the RUN terminal.
5) Default Initializes the parameters
POINT
Memory space for kana comments after changing memory space, file register space
If the memory space is set smaller than the total of the file register space and kana comment space, the kana
comment space is automatically reduced.
(With the MELSEC-FX list editor, the kana comment space is not displayed.)
Note that if any setting as described below is made, the kana comment space is reduced.
(Settings that reduce kana comment space and the kana comment space after setting change)
Settings resulting in Nm < Nf 500 + Nk 500 + 500
Nm - Nf x 500 - 500
Kana comment space (steps) after setting change =
500
Nm : Memory space after change (steps)
Nf : File register space after change (blocks)
Nk : Comment space before change (blocks)
FX LIST EDITOR
HINT
Settable range and default value
The settable range and the default value depend on the FX PLC type.
For details of the settable range and the default value, refer to the following.
Programming manual for the FX PLC used 15

(2) Key functions
The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the parameter setting screen.
Key Function
Initializes the parameters
Completes the changed setting contents.
Ends parameter setting.

15.4.11 Keywords
Registers, deletes, releases protection for, and sets protection for the FX PLC keywords.
 Function usability of the MELSEC-FX list editor for keyword protection levels
The functions that can be used with the MELSEC-FX list editor depend on the keyword protection level.
Keyword protection level
All operation protect Read/Incorrect write Incorrect write Keyword not

Function Reference
(All on-line protection (Read/ protect (Write registered/keyword
*2 *2 *2 protection canceled
operation protect) write protect) protect)
Displaying sequence
Reading 5.4.3
programs
sequence
programs Searching commands/
5.4.4
devices
Writing Writing commands 5.4.5

sequence Changing operands/set
programs 5.4.6
values
Inserting commands 5.4.5
Deleting commands 5.4.7
Sequence program all clear 5.4.8
PLC diagnostics *1 5.4.9
Parameter setting 5.4.10
*1 When the 2nd keyword is set to an FX PLC that supports 2nd keyword, it becomes " " (cannot be used).
*2 The names within the parentheses ( ) are for when a keyword + 2nd keyword is set.
 Operation
OP [Keyword setup] GO
OP Select [Keyword setup] with or .
FX LIST EDITOR
GO
15

 Keyword screen and protection level
When [Keyword setup] is selected with the MELSEC-FX list editor, the keyword screen is displayed.
For the keyword operation, refer to the following.
HINT
Keywords
For details of the keyword, refer to the following.
Programming manual for the FX PLC used

15.4.12 List monitor
The status of contacts and coils in a sequence program is displayed.
 Operation
OP [ List Monitor ] GO
OP Select [List Monitor] with or .
GO
When the list monitor is started on the FX list editor screen,

the step numbers displayed on the FX list editor screen is
displayed on the list monitor screen.
POINT
Starting list monitor with special function switches (FX list monitor)
With setting special function switches (FX list monitor), the list monitor can be started on the monitor screen.
When the list monitor is started on the monitor screen, the list editor cannot be used.
FX LIST EDITOR
15

 Displays and key functions
The following describes the displays for the list monitor.
3)
1)
2)
No Item Display contents
1) List display area*1 The status of contacts and coils is displayed on the left of device displays.
The same operations as in the READ mode of the FX list editor can be executed.
2) Keys
15.4.3 Sequence program display
Ends the list monitor.

3) When the list monitor is executed on the FX list editor screen, the screen is switched to the FX
list editor screen.
*1 The status of contacts and coils is displayed as below.
Status
Type of instructio Description
Displayed Not displayed
LD, AND, ORC(ontact instruction (Normal open)) Contact ON OFF
LDI, ANI, ORI(Contact instruction (Normal close)) Contact OFF ON
TC: Coil ON OFF

OUT, SET
Except TC: Contact ON OFF
TC: Reset ON OFF
Word device Value: 0 Value: Except 0

RST
Except TC and word device:
OFF ON
Contac
MC, STL Contact ON OFF
LDP, ANDP, ORP, LDF, ANDF, ORF

Not monitored Always not displayed
(Rise or fall contact instruction)

Screens of the MELSEC-FX list editor can be stored to a data strage in BMP/JPEG file format.
Refer to the following for the hard copy.
• Starting the MELSEC-FX list editor from the FX ladder monitor

• Setting the hard copy with GT Designer3 (GOT2000)
15.4.14 Action for an incorrect key input
If an incorrect key is input, cancel the input contents.
 Operation
(1) Before touching the GO key (before reading/writing the input contents)
Before touching the GO key, touch the CLR key.
(2) After touching the GO key (after reading/writing the input contents)
Write the command again. ( 15.4.5 Writing commands)
Commands finalized by writing and inserting operations are revised (overwritten) with the program writing.
FX LIST EDITOR
15

This section describes the error messages displayed when the MELSEC-FX list editor is executed, and corrective action.
Error Messeage Description Corrective action
Can not display while protected. • Check the protected operation.

The all-operation protect, anti-plagiarism, or • Clear the keyword protection or delete the keyword.
Can not operate while incorrect write protect keyword is set.
protected. 15.4.11 Keywords
PLC parameter error. An FX PLC parameter is defective. Set correct parameters in the FX PLC.
• Check the FX PLC, cable, and GOT for abnormality.

The communication with the FX PLC is
PLC communications error. • Check whether the communication settings are correct or
defective.
not.
A writing operation etc. has been made

PLC is running. Stop the FX PLC.
while the FX PLC is running.
• The memory to write to is EPROM. • Set other than EPROM for the memory to write to.
Can not write.
• The protect switch of the EEPROM is on. • Switch off the protect switch of the EEPROM.
The specified step number exceeded the

Step number is out of a range. Specify a step number below the maximum value.
maximum number.
Not found. The specified command cannot be found. Proceed to the next operation.
Not found. The specified device cannot be found. Proceed to the next operation.
Check the program memory space and delete commands to

The program may exceed the available keep it within the space.
Step overflow.
space. (Writing is not executed.)
15.4.7 Deleting commands
An invalid command (non-existent

Command error. Input the correct command.
command) was specified.
The sequence program is protected by a

Protected by a block password. Release the block password for the sequence program.
block password at the PLC reading.
POINT
How to erase an error message
An error message is not erased even if the cause of the error is eliminated.
To erase an error message, touch a key on the MELSEC-FX list editor screen.

16. R MOTION MONITOR
16.1 Features
The R motion monitor enables the servo monitoring and parameter setting of the motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R
series).
The following are the features of the R motion monitor.
■1. Various servo monitoring on multiple monitor screens

The R motion monitor function has multiple monitor screens, on which you can monitor servo data in a variety of
patterns.
(Display examples)
• Present Value Monitor
➠ 16.4.4 Present value monitor screen
• Positioning Monitor
Monitors the details of the positioning data set to any axis.
➠ 16.4.7 Positioning monitor screen
R MOTION MONITOR
16
16.1 Features 16 - 1
• Error List Designated-Axis
Displays the latest errors that occurred on the specified axis.
➠ 16.4.6 Error list designated-axis screen
■2. Servo parameter setting by writing operation

Write example: Changing the setting of the auto tuning function
Parameter setting screen Parameter setting window appears Parameter setting screen
Change the auto tuning mode from "1" to "2". Parameter setting is changed
Step 1. By performing writing from the parameter setting screen, write the servo parameter setting (Basic
parameters and adjustment parameters) to the motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).
Step 2. To change a servo parameter setting, enter the necessary numerical value or option number from the
automatically displayed key window, and write it to the motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).
16 - 2 16.1 Features
16.2 Specifications
16.2.2 Access range
16.2.3 Precautions

This section describes the system configuration of the R motion monitor.
following.
■1. Target motion controller CPU of the R motion monitor

Motion controller CPU
Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series)

(1) When the GOT is connected to the motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series)
MELSECNET/H CC-Link IE CC-Link IE CC-Link

Direct Serial Ethernet
Bus connection, Controller Field connection
Name Description CPU communication connection
connection *3
MELSECNET/10 Network Network
connection connection ID*1 G4*2
connection connection connection
Monitors the present

value, positioning error,
Servo
and other servo-related
monitor
items on a variety of × ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ×
monitor screens.
Paramete Changes the setting of

r settings the servo parameter.

*3 When the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module is used, the R motion monitor cannot be used.
■3. Required system application (Extended function)

Write the package data that has the system application (Extended function) for the R motion monitor to the GOT.
R MOTION MONITOR

■4. Required special data

Write the package data, which contains the R motion monitor data, to the GOT.
The required space of the user area for writing depends on the R motion monitor data to be used.
For the R motion monitor data size and how to write the data to the GOT, refer to the following.
➠ GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help 16
16.2 Specifications 16 - 3
■5. Servo amplifiers whose parameter can be set
The R motion monitor allows you to set the parameter of servo amplifiers shown below.
Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) Servo amplifier
MR-J4-B, MR-J4W-B, MR-J3-B, MR-J3-B-RJ006, MR-J3-B-RJ004, MR-J3-B-RJ080, MR-J3W-B,

R32MTCPU, R16MTCPU
MR-J3-BS
16.2.2 Access range

16.2.3 Precautions
■1. Operating system software package for the motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series)
The usable OS software package is SV22 (advanced synchronous control type) only.
16 - 4 16.2 Specifications
This section explains how to display the R motion monitor screen after the GOT is turned on.
Step 1. Turn on the power to the GOT.
Step 2. Display the R motion monitor screen.

Use either of the following display methods.
• Starting from the special function switch (R motion monitor) set in the project
After the utility is displayed, touch [Monitor] → [R Motion monitor] from the Main Menu.
Step 3. Set the channel number.

Set the channel number of the controller for which the R motion monitor is performed.
After the GOT is powered on, the communication setting window is displayed automatically only at the first
startup of the R motion monitor.
To display the communication setting window after the first startup, touch the [ChNET PCNo] key on the R
motion monitor screen.
➠ 16.4 Operation Procedures
Step 4. Start the R motion monitor.

The System Configuration screen is displayed after the channel number is selected.
Touch a motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) to monitor.
Touching the [Parameter Set.] key displays the parameter setting screen.
Touching the [Motion Monitor] key displays the monitor menu.
R MOTION MONITOR
16
16.3 Operations for Display 16 - 5

Step 5. Touch the [Parameter Set.] key to display the parameter setting screen.
When you have set a password in [Motion Parameter Display] on GT Designer3 (GOT2000), enter the
password.
➠ 16.4.10 Parameter setting screen
Select the servo parameter to be set.

Change the servo parameter setting and write the new servo parameter setting to the motion.
Step 6. Display the R motion monitor screen.

Select an item on the menu to display the selected monitor function.
• [Present Value Mon.]

• [Error History]
➠ 16.4.5 Motion error history monitor screen
• [Error List Axis]
• [Positioning Monitor]
• [Servo Monitor]
➠ 16.4.8 Servo monitor screen
• [Present Value Hist.]
➠ 16.4.9 Present value history monitor screen
16 - 6 16.3 Operations for Display

Start
Utility Main Menu
or
Communication
setting window
END Ch:
System Configuration screen

(Select the motion controller
Sys. Conf CPU to be monitored.)
Sys. Conf Parameter Set.
Motion Monitor
END END
Monitor menu screen Password input key window
Mon. Menu (Menu selection) Sys. Conf

Monitor screen of selected function
END END
R MOTION MONITOR

However, the last exited screen will not be displayed when the GOT is restarted after package data is written or the
GOT is powered on, off, or reset.
When the function is started with a special function switch to which a connection destination different from the one at
the last exit is set, the system configuration screen appears.
16

This section describes the operations of the screens when using the R motion monitor.
The display screen of the R motion monitor varies depending on the GOT used.
➠ 16.4.1 System configuration screen
16.4.2 Setting procedure for monitoring other stations
16.4.3 Monitor menu screen
16.4.4 Present value monitor screen
16.4.5 Motion error history monitor screen
16.4.6 Error list designated-axis screen
16.4.7 Positioning monitor screen
16.4.8 Servo monitor screen
16.4.9 Present value history monitor screen
16.4.1 System configuration screen

This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the R motion monitor is executed.
■1. Display contents and key functions of the R motion monitor

The following describes the structure of the system configuration screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the
screen after the R motion monitor is started.
2) 2)
2)
1)
2) 2)
1) Motion controller CPU status display

The CPU numbers are displayed for the CPUs, and the control CPU numbers are displayed for the installed
modules.
To choose the motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) for servo monitor/servo parameter setting, touch
the respective display position.
2) Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the system configuration screen.
16 - 8 16.4 Operation Procedures

(2) Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the system configuration screen.
1) 2) 3)
6)
5)
4) 6)
1) Motion controller CPU status display

Select the motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) where servo monitor/servo parameter setting is
performed.
2) [ChNET PCNo] key

3) [END] key
Exits the monitor and returns to the screen where the R motion monitor was started.
4) [Motion Monitor] key

Changes the System Configuration screen to the monitor menu screen.
➠ 16.4.3 Monitor menu screen
5) [Parameter Set.] key
Changes the System Configuration screen to the parameter setting screen.
➠ 16.4.10 Parameter setting screen
6) Scroll key
16.4.2 Setting procedure for monitoring other stations

The following shows the setting procedure for monitoring other stations with R motion monitor.
Step 1. In the communication setting window, select one from channel No.1 to 4.
For the operations of the communication setting screen, refer to the following.
➠ ■1. Communication setting window
R MOTION MONITOR
16
16.4 Operation Procedures 16 - 9

Step 2. When the channel No. is selected, the screen below is displayed.
Set the network number and the station number of the target controller.
Step 3. After selecting the station number, touch the [Enter] key. The communication setting window closes and the
system configuration of the set monitor destination is displayed.
■1. Communication setting window

(1) Displayed screen
1) 3) 2) 1) 3) 2)
4) 5)
When the CH No. is input When the network No., station No.,
and CPU No. are input
1) CH No. input area

Set the CH No. for the target controller.

Set the network No. for the target controller.
The following shows the setting range for each connection type.
• Serial communication connection: [0]
• Ethernet connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, CC-Link IE Field Network connection: [1] to
[239]
• CC-Link (ID) connection: [0]

The following shows the setting range for each connection type.
• Serial communication connection: [FF] (Host station)
• CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, CC-Link IE Field Network connection: [1] to [120]
• CC-Link (ID) connection: [0] (master station), [1] to [64] (local station)

Select a CH No.
5) Keys
Keys used for operations in the communication setting window

(2) Key functions
1)
2)
3) 4) 5)
1) [×] key
When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is not set,
the communication setting window does not close.

3) [Enter] key
Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No. input area.
When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station No. are
completed, the communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.
4) [Del] key
5) [AC] key
16.4.3 Monitor menu screen

The R motion monitor allows you to monitor various servo monitor data on multiple monitor screens.
To display any of the monitor screens, make a selection on the monitor menu screen.
1) 4)
2) 5)
3) 6)
R MOTION MONITOR
1) [Present Value Mon.] key

16

2) [Error History] key
Displays the history of errors that occurred in the motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).
➠ 16.4.5 Motion error history monitor screen
3) [Error List Axis] key
Displays the latest errors that occurred on the specified axis.
4) [Positioning Monitor] key
Monitors the details of the positioning data set to any axis.
5) [Servo Monitor] key
Monitors the servo monitor/servo amplifier.
➠ 16.4.8 Servo monitor screen
6) [Present Value Hist.] key
Displays the history of encoder present values, servo command values and monitor present values of the ABS
axis at servo amplifier power-on/off or at home position return.
➠ 16.4.9 Present value history monitor screen
16.4.4 Present value monitor screen

This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the present value monitor is executed.

The following describes the display data of the present value monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed on
the screen.
1) 2) 3) 4)
1) [Ax]
Displays the axis numbers of the operating axes being monitored.
2) [Feed PV] and [Actual PV]

Displays the feed present values or actual present values of the operating axes.
Touching the display part of the monitored value switches to the positioning monitor screen of the touched axis
number.

3) [SV RDY], [ERR DT], and [SV ERR]
Displays the ON (lit)/OFF (not lit) status of the servo ready signal, major/minor error and servo error detection
signal.
Touching the error indication part [○] switches to the Error List Designated-Axis screen of the touched axis
number.
4) Bit device screen
The common bit devices are always monitored and displayed.
• Bit devices for error detection: marked with a red circle
• Bit devices for general status display: marked with a green circle
(2) Key functions
The following describes the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the present value monitor
screen.
1) 2) 3)
4)
4)
5) 6)
1) [Feed PV] key, [Actual PV] key

Touching the key alternates the monitor item between the "feed present value" and "actual present value".
2) [Mon. Menu] key

3) [END] key
Exits the present value monitor and returns to the screen where the R motion monitor was started.
4) Keys for switching displayed axis numbers

Switches the displayed axis number.
5) [Print Screen] key

Stores the displayed screen to the SD card in the BMP or JPEG format.
For the details of the hard copy, refer to the following.
➠ 16.4.11 Hard copy output
R MOTION MONITOR
6) [Cancel Print] key

The touch operation of the key is disabled.
16

16.4.5 Motion error history monitor screen
This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the motion error history monitor is
executed.
■1. Motion error history monitor screen

The following describes the display data of the motion error history monitor screen and the functions of the keys
The motion error history monitor screen displays the history of error which occurs in the motion controller CPU
(MELSEC iQ-R series).
Up to 128 errors are displayed from the latest one in the order of [M/D H:M].
5)
1) 2) 3) 4)
1) [M/D H:M]
Displays the date and time when the error occurred in the motion controller CPU.
2) [Err Class]
Displays the classifications of the errors that occurred.
The following shows the error classifications to be displayed.
• [Wrng]
• [Min.]
• [Mid.]
• [Maj.]
3) [Err Code]
Displays the error code of the error occurred.
4) [Error Definition]
Displays the definition of the error that occurred in the motion controller CPU.
5) Title display area

Displays the screen name.
Displays the page number of the currently displayed page and total number of pages.
Up to eight pages can be displayed.
If no error history exists, "1/1" is displayed.

(2) Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the motion error history monitor
screen.
1) 2)
5)
3) 4) 6) 6)
1) [Mon. Menu] key

2) [END] key
Exits the motion error history monitor and returns to the screen where the R motion monitor was started.

5) [History Clear] button

Clears the error history.
6) Scroll buttons
Scrolls the motion error history up or down by 16 error events.
If no further error event exists, the history is not scrolled.
R MOTION MONITOR
16

16.4.6 Error list designated-axis screen
This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations used when executing the error list
designated-axis.
■1. Display contents and keys functions

This section describes the display data of the error list designated-axis screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
3) 4)
1)
2)
5)
6)
1) Axis No.
Displays the axis number currently being monitored.
2) [Program No.]
Displays the servo program numbers that were being executed when the error occurred.
3) [Err Code]
Displays the error codes of the errors that occurred.
4) [Error Definition]
Displays the error definitions that occurred.
5) [MAN-PLS Axis ERR]

 [Each 1-Pulse IM Error]
Displays the axes where a 1-pulse input magnification setting error occurred.
 [MAN-PLS Ax ERR]
Displays the errors of the axis numbers set to the manual pulse generators P1 to P3.
 [Each MAN-PLS SM ERR]
Displays the errors of the smoothing magnifications set to the manual pulse generators P1 to P3.
6) [Test REQ ERR]

Displays the axis numbers that are being started at a test mode request.

(2) Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the error list designated-axis
screen.
2) 3) 4)
1)
5) 6)
1) [Ax] key
2) [RET] key
3) [Mon. Menu] key

4) [END] key
Exits the error list designated-axis monitor and returns to the screen where the R motion monitor was started.

R MOTION MONITOR
16

16.4.7 Positioning monitor screen
This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the positioning monitor is executed.

The following describes the display data of the positioning monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed on
the screen.
3) 4)
1)
2)
1) Data Item
Displays the number of the operating axis being monitored.
2) Positioning control data

Displays the data during positioning control of the PCPU.
 [Feed PV]
Target address output to the servo amplifier
 [Actual PV]
Actually traveled present value
 [Dvt.Counter]
Difference between feed present value and actual present value
 [EXE Prog No.]
The number of the servo program being executed
 [Min/Major SV ERR]
The error code of the latest minor/major servo error
 [M Code · T Limit]
The M code and torque limit of the servo program in execution
3) [Status]
Displays ON and OFF of the symbols that represent the control status by axis.
• In the ON status, the symbol is lit green.
• Upon detection of an error or servo error, the symbol is lit red.
4) [CMD Signal]
Displays ON and OFF of the positioning command signal.
In the ON status, the symbol is lit green.

(2) Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the positioning monitor screen.
2) 3) 4)
1)
5) 6)
1) [Data Item Ax]

2) [RET] key
3) [Mon. Menu] key

4) [END] key
Exits the positioning monitor and returns to the screen where the R motion monitor was started.

R MOTION MONITOR
16

16.4.8 Servo monitor screen
This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the servo monitor is executed.

The following describes the display data of the servo monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the
screen.
1)
2)
3)
4)
1) Axis
Displays the number of the axis being monitored.
2) [Motor Speed]
Displays the actual speed of the servo motor.
3) [Motor Current]
Displays the motor current value by using the rated current as 100%.
4) [Servo Alarm]
Displays the alarm detected by the servo amplifier.
(2) Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the servo monitor screen.
2) 3)
1)
4) 5)
1) [Ax] key
2) [Mon. Menu] key

3) [END] key
Exits the servo monitoring and returns to the screen where the R motion monitor was started.

16.4.9 Present value history monitor screen

This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the present value history monitor is
executed.
■1. Present value history monitor screen

The following describes the display data of the present value history monitor screen and the functions of the keys
1)
2)
3)
4)
1) Axis
Displays the number of the axis being monitored.
2) [HP Data]
Displays the following values monitored at home position return.
• Home position return completion time
Multi-revolution data of absolute position reference point data
Within one-revolution position of absolute position reference point data
• Servo command value
• Monitor present value
3) [MON Val]
Displays the following present monitor values.
• Present time
R MOTION MONITOR

Present multi-revolution data of encoder present value
Present within one-revolution position of encoder present value
• Present servo command value
• Present monitor present value
4) PWR ON/PWR OFF

Displays the four past present values of the ABS axis at servo amplifier power-on/off.
At power-on
• Power-on time
Multi-revolution data of initial encoder 16
One-revolution data of initial encoder
• Servo command value after recovery
• Monitor present value after recovery
• Alarm occurrence information at present value recovery (error code of a minor/major error)
At power-off

• Time immediately before servo amplifier power-off
Multi-revolution data of encoder present value before servo amplifier power-off
One-revolution data of encoder present value before servo amplifier power-off
• Servo command immediately before servo amplifier power-off
• Monitor present value immediately before servo amplifier power-off
(2) Key functions
2) 3)
1)
4) 5)
1) [Ax] key
2) [Mon. Menu] key

3) [END] key
Exits the present value history monitor and returns to the screen where the R motion monitor was started.


This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations used when executing the parameter setting.
■1. Display contents and keys functions

You can set the servo parameters (basic parameters/adjustment parameters) of the connected motion controller CPU
(MELSEC iQ-R series).
This section describes the display data of the parameter setting screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
1)
1) Parameter setting screen

Displays the servo parameter of the selected item.
(2) Key functions
1) 2) 3)
4) 5)
6) 7)
R MOTION MONITOR
1) [AxNo.] key
Changes the axis whose parameter setting will be made.
2) [Sys. Conf] key

Returns to the System Configuration screen.
3) [END] key
Exits the parameter setting and returns to the screen where the R motion monitor was started.
4) Item selection key

5) [CHG] key 16
Changes the servo parameter setting of the selected item.

Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP/JPEG file format.
■2. Inputting the password

If you have set a password in [Motion Parameter Display] on GT Designer3 (GOT2000), the password input key
window appears when you try to access the parameter setting screen of the motion monitor.
(1) Function
• If the password matches, the parameter setting screen is displayed.
• If the password does not match, an error message is displayed.
Touching the [Sys. Conf] key returns to the System Configuration screen.
• Only numbers and letters A to F can be used for the password setting. (Up to 8 characters)
(2) Operations
Enter a password.
Touch the key window and enter a password.
After entering the password, touch the [Enter] key to set the password.
To edit the input characters, touch the [Del] key to delete the characters, and then input the new characters.
To cancel the password input, touch the [×] key to return to the monitor screen.
■3. Parameter setting operation

The following describes the procedure of changing the setting of the [Auto tuning] item as an example of the parameter
setting operation.
Step 1. Select the item whose parameter is to be set with the item selection keys, and touch the [CHG] key.
Step 2. As the parameter setting window appears, enter the parameter setting with the key window.
Touch the [Enter] key to confirm the setting.
To cancel the parameter setting operation, touch [×] at the top right of the screen to close the parameter
setting window.

Step 3. As the confirmation window appears, touch the [OK] key to write the parameter setting to the motion
controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).
To cancel writing of the parameter setting, touch the [Cancel] key.
Step 4. After writing is completed, the parameter setting screen whose display has been updated to the new
parameter setting is displayed.

This section describes how to store a screen to the SD card in the BMP/JPEG file format when executing the R motion
monitor.
Hard copy output operations are performed by touching the [Print Screen] key or [Cancel Print] key displayed on the screen.
R MOTION MONITOR
The output target (data storage) of hard copy can be set in [Hard Copy] of GT Designer3 (GOT2000).
16

This section describes the error messages that may be displayed during R motion monitor operation and their corrective
action.
• Check the communication setting.

• Check the status of the connection between the controller and the
Communication cannot be established with the
Communication error GOT (disconnected or cut cables).
PLC CPU of the monitor target.
• Check if an error has occurred in the controller.
• Check if the R motion monitor supports the PLC CPU.
A motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) Select a motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) that can be
This PLC type is not supported that cannot be monitored was selected on the monitored on the System Configuration screen.
System Configuration screen. ➠ 16.2.1 ■1. Target motion controller CPU of the R motion monitor
The motion controller OS installed in the motion Install the motion controller OS, SV22 (advanced synchronous control
Controller's OS type is different controller CPU (R32MTCPU, R16MTCPU) of type), on the monitored motion controller CPU (R32MTCPU or
the monitor target is other than SV22. R16MTCPU).
The version of the motion controller OS, which

is installed on the motion controller CPU Install a motion controller OS supporting the R motion monitor to the
It is not a version for GOT
(MELSEC iQ-R series) of the monitor target, motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).
does not support the R motion monitor.
The monitor data is not installed, or was

Monitor data not found Download the motion monitor data.
deleted.
• Select the axis number that has been set.

Unused axis selected The axis number selected has not been set.
• Set the axis using the relevant software.
During servo parameter setting, an item that

It is not possible to select. Select an item that can be set.
cannot be set has been selected.
A value that is outside the setting range has

Incorrect setting range Set the value within the setting range.
been set.
Communication Channel Setup A communication driver supporting the R

Install a communication driver that supports the R motion monitor.
Error. motion monitor is not installed.
The number of the axis, which is set to a servo

Select the number of the axis, which is set to a servo amplifier having the settable
Unsupport amp. selected amplifier having no settable parameter, has
parameter.
been selected.
POINT
How to clear a displayed error message
For the error that occurs during the communication with a controller (such as a communication
error), the error message does not disappear even after the cause of the error has been
removed.
To clear the error message, restart the GOT.
16 - 26 16.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action

17. CNC MONITOR 17
CNC MONITOR
17.1 Features
For the MELDAS and other CNCs connected to the GOT, the CNC monitor enables the functions equivalent to the MELDAS
dedicated display as follows: the position display monitor, alarm diagnosis monitor, tool compensation parameter monitor,
program monitor, and the APLC release screen display.
Position Display Monitor Alarm Diagnosis Monitor
Tool Compensation Parameter Monitor Program Monitor
APLC Release Screen
17.2 Specifications
17.2.2 Access range
17.2.3 Precautions

This section describes the GOTs that support the CNC monitor, the target CNCs, and the connection types between the
GOT and the CNC.
For connection type settings, precautions regarding the communication unit/cable, and connection type, refer to the
following.
■1. GOT
The CNC monitor is available on GT27-X, GT27-S, and GT25-S.

Controller
CNC C70, MELDAS C6/C64

Function Connection type between GOT and CNC
Name Description Bus connection Ethernet connection*3 MELSECNET/10 connection
Monitors CNC C70 or

CNC monitor MELDAS C6/C64, and ○*1 ○*4 ○*2
changes its parameter.
*1 Available only for CNC C70.

*2 Available only for MELDAS C6/C64.
*3 When the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module is used, the CNC monitor cannot be used.
*4 Applicable only with the Display I/F connection.

For the system application (Extended function) required, refer to the following.
Write the package data that has the system application (Extended function) for the CNC monitor to the GOT.
(2) Space for the system application (Extended function)
■5. CNC function that can be monitored
17
The following functions can be monitored with the CNC monitor.
For the details of each function, refer to the manual of each CNC.
Item Description CNC C70 MELDAS C6/C64
CNC MONITOR
Position ○ ○
Coordinate ○ ○
Command ○ ○
Position display Program search ○ ○
PLC switch × ○
Common variable ○ ○
Local variable ○ ○
Alarm message ○ ○
Servo monitor ○ ○
Spindle monitor ○ ○
PLC interface diagnosis ○ ○
Absolute position monitor ○ ○
Adjustment × ○
NC data sampling ○ ×
Operation history ○ ○
Alarm diagnosis Configuration ○ ○
Data input × ○
Data output × ○
Program erase ○ ○
Program file ○ ○
Program copy ○ ○
Flash ATA card I/F × ○
Auxiliary axis parameter × ○
Auxiliary axis monitor × ○
Wear data (L system) ○ ○
Tool length data (L system) ○ ○
Tool nose data (L system) ○ ○
Tool life management (L system) ○ ○
Tool compensation (L system/M

○ ○
Tool compensation parameter system)
Tool registration (L system) ○ ○
Workpiece coordinate ○ ○
Machining parameter ○ ○
I/O parameter × ○
Other parameters ○ ○
MDI ○ ○
Program
Edit ○ ○
APLC release screen APLC release screen ○ ○
17.2.2 Access range
■1. For bus connection
With a single GOT, up to 2 CNCs can be switched for monitoring.
Up to 5 GOTs can simultaneously monitor a single CNC.
■2. For Ethernet connection

With a single GOT, up to 64 CNCs can be switched for monitoring.
Up to 8 GOTs can simultaneously monitor a single CNC.
■3. For MELSECNET/10 connection

GOT can monitor only the control station.
17.2.3 Precautions
■1. Before using the CNC monitor
Read the manual of the connected CNC carefully and make sure you understand the contents before using the CNC
monitor.
■2. Available controllers

The CNC monitor can be used with CNC C70 and MELDAS C6/C64.
(1) CNC C70
Use a CNC C70 with the system software version BND-1006W000-A0 or later.
(2) MELDAS C6/64
Use a MELDAS C6/C64 with the system software version BND-377W010-D0 or later.
17.3 Operations for Display 17
This section explains how to display the CNC monitor screen after the GOT is turned on.
CNC MONITOR
Step 2. Display the CNC monitor screen.
• Starting from the special function switch (CNC monitor) set in the project
After the utility is displayed, touch [Monitor] → [CNC monitor] from the Main Menu.

Set the channel number of the controller to be monitored with the CNC monitor.
After the GOT is powered on, the communication setting window is displayed only at the first startup of the
CNC monitor.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the [ch:] key on the
CNC monitor screen.
Step 4. Start the CNC monitor.

The CNC monitor screen is displayed after the channel number is selected.

■1. Start operation using the special function switch
The CNC monitor can be launched using special function switches.
If a special function switch with the following settings is touched, the CNC monitor screen of the set controller can be
displayed.
• Select [CNC Monitor] in [Switch Action] and select [Specify the destination to connect the screen of CNC Monitor].
For Q buss connection, input 2 or larger for [CPU No.] in [Network].

Start
At the second or
Utility
later startup
or

Communication
setting window
RET
When exiting the CNC monitor function by touching RET ,

the last exited screen will be displayed when the CNC monitor
function is started next time.

However, the last exited screen will not be displayed when the GOT is restarted after package data is written or the
GOT is powered on, off, or reset.

17.4 Operation Procedures 17
This section describes the display data of the CNC monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8)
CNC MONITOR
9)
11) 10)
12)
Alphanumeric/symbol key Cursor moving key
1) [MONITOR] key
Switches the monitor screen to the position display monitor screen.
2) [DIAGN IN/OUT] key

Switches the monitor screen to the alarm diagnosis monitor screen.
3) [TOOL PARAM] key

Switches the monitor screen to the tool compensation parameter monitor screen.
4) [EDIT MDI] key

Switches the monitor screen to the program monitor screen.
5) [F0] key
Switches the monitor screen to the APLC release screen.
When the monitoring target CNC does not have the APLC release function, the screen becomes blank
(Nothing is displayed in the black screen.).
(When the screen is blank, switch the screen to the one for other functions with the keys of the function
switching section.)
6) [Ch:] key
7) [CNC CHG] key

• For bus connection
The key does not function. (Specify the monitoring target in the communication setting window.)
• For Ethernet connection
This key switches CNCs for monitoring when multiple CNCs are connected.
The target CNCs are switched in the order set in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3.
• For MELSECNET/10 connection
The key does not function because the monitoring target is the control station only (switching not required).
8) [RET] key
Exits the CNC monitor and returns to the monitor screen or the utility of the GOT.
9) Monitor screen
The position display, alarm diagnosis, tool compensation parameter, and program functions, which are
equivalent to the MELDAS dedicated display, are available.
The graphic trace function and ladder edit function are not available.
The [Menu1] to [Menu5] keys switch the monitor screens that correspond to each item in the menu.
When the above screen is displayed, touching each key displays the following contents.
When the CNC-dedicated HMI is enabled, the message [Other display operating] and [Key operation right]
menu appear.
To operate the keys with the GOT, select the [Key operation right] menu.

 [Menu1] key
Position
 [Menu2] key
Coordinate
 [Menu3] key
Command
 [Menu4] key
Program search
 [Menu5] key
Menu switching
10) Next page key

Displays the next page when multiple pages exist on the display screen.
11) Previous page key

Displays the previous page when multiple pages exist on the display screen.
12) Software key board

Used to configure the data setting on the monitor screen.
 Alphanumeric and symbol keys
Input alphabets (capital letters only), numbers, spaces, and symbols.
To input a symbol displayed in gray, touch the [Shift] key and then the symbol key.
 Cursor movement keys
Move the cursor (The repeat function is enabled.).
 [INS] key
Switches the insert mode.
 [DEL] key
Deletes one character at the cursor position.
 [CAN C-B] key
Deletes one block while editing the machining program.
To delete all the blocks displayed on the screen, touch the [Shift] key and then the [CAN C-B] key.
 [EOB] key
Inputs EOB (;) to the machining program.
 [Input] key
Confirms the input.
 [SHIFT] key
Switches the key functions.

17.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action 17
This section describes the error messages displayed when the CNC monitor is executed, and corrective action.
When multiple errors described below occur, a higher-priority error is displayed.
CNC MONITOR
Priority Error message Description Corrective action
Higher Install the compatible communication driver in the GOT.

Support communication Bus(Q)
The compatible communication driver
driver is not installed. (CNC • For Ethernet connection
is not installed in the GOT.
MONITOR) Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700, Gateway
• For MELSECNET/10 connection
MELSECNET/H (used in the MNET/10 mode)
The IP address of CNC to

The IP address of the CNC has not After setting the IP address of the CNC to be monitored in the Ethernet
monitor is not setup. (CNC
been set. setting of GT Designer3, write the project data to the GOT.
MONITOR)
Communication channel There is no channel for Check that the channel No. is correctly set in the communication
Lower setup error communication. settings.
17.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action 17 - 9

17 - 10 17.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action
18. CNC DATA I/O
18
18.1 Features
CNC DATA I/O

With the CNC data I/O function, the GOT can copy, compare, and delete machining programs, parameters, and others in the
CNC connected to the GOT.
Data strage
Copy, compare or delete the CNC data.
18.2 Specifications
This section describes the GOTs that support the CNC data I/O, the target CNC, and the connection types between the GOT
and the CNC.
following.
■1. GOT
The CNC data I/O is available on GT27-X, GT27-S, and GT25-S.

Controller
CNC C70

(○: Available, ×: Unavailable)
Name Description Bus connection Ethernet connection*2
Data I/O between the CNC and

CNC data I/O ○ ○*1
GOT

*2 When the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module is used, the CNC data I/O cannot be used.

Write the package data, which contains the system application (Extended function) for the CNC data I/O, to the GOT.
Data storage is required for the CNC data I/O.
■6. CNC data which can be handled

The following data can be input, output, or compared with the CNC data I/O.
For details of each function, refer to the manual of the CNC to be used.
File unit
Target data Description File name
Input Output Compare
Machining program Machining program ALL.PRG, O_.PRG ○ ○ ○*2
Parameter Parameter ALL.PRM ○ ○ ○*3
Tool offset data Tool offset data TOOL.OFS ○ ○ ○
Workpiece offset data Workpiece offset data WORK.OFS ○ ○ ○
Common variable Common variable COMMON.VAR ○ ○ ○
CNC ladder USERPLC.LAD ○ ○ ×
R resister data RREG.REG × ○ ×
C resister data CREG.REG × ○ ×
Maintenance data T resister data TREG.REG × ○ ×
Operation history data TRACE.TRC × ○ ×
CNC sampling data NCSAMP.CSV × ○ ×
SRAM data files SRAM.BIN × ○ ×
Sampling related package file ALL.SMP ○ ○ ×
Sampling setting file SAMPLING.PRM ○ ○ ×
PLC data collection setting file FLCSAMP.CTF ○ ○ ×

Cycle monitor data
PLC draw setting file PLCSAMP.MMG ○ ○ ×
PLC collection data file PLCSAMPH.CSV *1 ○ ×

○
CNC collection data file NCSAMPH.CSV ○*1 ○ ×
*1 PLC collection data file (PLCSAMPH.CSV) and CNC collection data file (NCSAMPH.CSV) can be input when the sampling
related package file (ALL.SMP) is selected.
*2 When the software version of the CNC is earlier than D2, machining programs cannot be compared.
*3 When the software version of the CNC is earlier than D2, the parameter files in type ll cannot be compared.
18.2.2 Access range
One GOT can execute the CNC data I/O on up to two CNCs by switching the CNCs.
18
One GOT can execute the CNC data I/O on up to 64 CNCs by switching the CNCs.
18.2.3 Precautions
CNC DATA I/O

■1. Before using the CNC data I/O
Read the manual of the connected CNC carefully and make sure you understand the contents before using the CNC
data I/O.
■2. File name and folder name

(1) Setting a hierarchy to a folder
When setting [Folder Name], enter \ between folder names.
\ is counted as one character.
Up to 20 hierarchy levels can be created.
Example)
[Folder Name]: PROJECT1\ABC
PROJECT1
ABC
(2) Number of characters set for folder and file names

The GOT recognizes the file location with a path as shown below.
Set the folder and file names so that the total number of characters in the path is within 78 characters.
The user can set the folder name and file name only.
(Other than the folder and file names are automatically set.)
A :\ Folder name \ File name .PRG
(2 characters) (1 character) Extension

(4 characters)
Drive name
(1 character)
Max. 78 characters
(3) Characters which can be used in folder names and file names
(a) Character strings which can be used in folder names and file names
The following character strings can be used.
• Capital of one-byte alphanumeric characters
• Symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{}.)
A one-byte space cannot be used.
(b) Character strings which cannot be used in folder names and file names
The following character strings cannot be used regardless of capital or small letters.
• COM1 to COM9
• LPT1 to LPT9
• AUX
• CON
• NUL
• PRN
• CLOCK$
(c) Folder names and file names which cannot be used
The following folder names and file names cannot be used.
• Folder name starting with G2
• Folder and file names starting with . (period) or \
• Folder and file names ending with . (period) or \
• Folder and file named as only . (one period) or .. (two periods)
The following folder and file names are not displayed correctly.
• Multi-byte code
• Kanji, hiragana, katakana, one-byte katakana
■3. Machining program edit protection

When the data protection key 1, 2, and 3, and the edit lock B and C are enabled, the data I/O is restricted.
Comparison can be performed even though the data protection key 1, 2, and 3, and the edit lock B and C are enabled.
However, when the software version of the CNC is earlier than D2, cancel the data protection key 1, 2, and 3 and edit
lock B and C before performing the comparison.
For the data protection key 1 to 3 and edit lock B and C, refer to the following.
➠ C70 Series Instruction Manual
■4. Changing CNC file names

When outputting a file in the CNC and changing the file name, do not change the extension of a maintenance data file.
If the extension is changed, the maintenance data file is not recognized.
➠ ■1. Displayed contents
■5. Highlight display in the comparison error detail window

The comparison of parameter files is performed not only for the parameter values but also the values of the format.
Therefore, the part which is not a parameter value may be highlighted when the values are different between the data
storage side and CNC side.
➠ ■3. Compare
■1. Start operation of the CNC data I/O
The following explains how to display the CNC data I/O screen after the GOT is turned on.
18
Step 2. Display the CNC data I/O screen.

CNC DATA I/O

• Starting from the special function switch (CNC data I/O) set in the project
After the utility is displayed, touch [Monitor] → [CNC data I/O] from the Main Menu.

Set the channel number of the CNC connected to the GOT.
If [×] is touched to close the communication setting window without setting a channel number, the channel
number is set to [1].
CNC data I/O.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the [Ch:] key on the
CNC data I/O screen.

Step 4. The CNC data I/O starts after the channel number is selected.

The CNC data I/O can be started using special function switches.
If a special function switch with the following settings is touched, the CNC data I/O screen of the set controller can be
displayed.
• Selecting [CNC Data I/O] in [Switch Action], and checking [Specify the destination to connect the screen of CNC
Data I/O]

Start
At the second
Utility
or later startup
or

Communication
setting window
Rtn
Rtn the last exited

For exiting the CNC data I/O by touching Rtn,
screen is displayed when the CNC data I/O starts next time.

This section describes the display data of the CNC data I/O list screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
18
1) 2) 3)
5) 4)
CNC DATA I/O

9)
6)
7) 10)
8)
11)
6)
7)
14)
15)
12) 13)
1) Channel key
2) [CNC Chg] key

This key switches CNCs for monitoring when multiple CNCs are connected.
The switching order differs depending on the connection type used.
The monitoring target is switched in order of the module number.
The monitoring target is switched in the order set in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3.
3) [Rtn] key
Exits the CNC data I/O and returns to the monitor screen or the utility of the GOT.
4) CNC device name

Each connection type displays different contents.
Displays the CPU number and module name.
Displays the station number and module name.
5) [Function] key
Displays the function selection window. Select a function to be executed.
The following shows the items to be selected.
• [Copy]
Copies a file between the CNC and data storage.
➠ ■2. Copy
• [Compare]
Compares files between the CNC and data storage.
➠ ■3. Compare
• [Delete]
Deletes a file in the CNC or data storage.
➠ ■4. Delete
• [Create a directory]
Creates a directory in the data storage.
➠ ■5. Creating a directory
• [USB Driver Stop]
Stops the USB drive selected in the [Device] key.

6) [Device] key
Displays the device selection window. Select the target to which the function selected with the [Function] key is
executed.
The following shows the items to be selected.
• [CNC]
• [A:Standard SD card]
• [B:USB drive]
• [E:USB drive]
• [F:USB drive]
• [G:USB drive]
7) [Directory] key
The operations and display contents differ depending on the item selected with the [Device] key.
• When [CNC] is selected
The CNC data selection window is displayed. Select the target to which the function selected with the
[Function] key is executed.
• When an item other than [CNC] is selected
The [Directory] key cannot be touched.
The directory of the file selected in the list is displayed on the right side of the [Directory] key.
Up to 28 characters can be displayed.
8) [File name]
Displays the file name selected in the list.
9) Status display
Displays the information of the item selected with the [Device] key.
The display contents depend on the item selected with the [Device] key.
[Entry], [Remain]:
Displays the number of the programs registered as the user's machining programs and the remaining
number of the programs that can be registered.
[Character], [Remain]:
Displays the number of the characters registered in the user's machining programs and the remaining
number of the characters that can be registered.
The remaining number is displayed in increments of 250 characters.
[Used], [Remain]:
Displays the used space and the available space of the data storage.
10) List
Displays files of the item selected with the [Device] key.
When an item other than [CNC] is selected with the [Device] key, the directory is displayed with < >.
Touching < > displays the files in the touched directory.
Touching <...> displays the files in the upper directory.
11) Scroll key

Scrolls up or down the contents in the list in increments of 10 or 50 items.
12) [Area chg] key

Switches the setting targets (frame on the left side of the screen) up and down.
The files in the directory in the frame are displayed in the list.
When [Delete] is selected with the [Function] key, the setting targets cannot be switched.
13) [Refresh] key

Updates the list.
14) [Disp Filename] key

Changes the display contents in the list each time the key is touched.
The display contents depend on the item selected with the [Device] key.
The contents can be switched only when [Machine program] is selected with the [Directory] key.
The following shows the contents to be switched.
File name and comment File name and number of characters

The following shows the contents to be switched.
File name File name and file size File name and date and hour
18
15) [Exec] key
Executes the settings.
CNC DATA I/O

■2. Copy
Files can be copied between [CNC] of the monitoring target and data storage.
Select a copy source and copy destination as follows.
Copy source
Copy destination
When [CNC] is selected for the copy source, only the data storage can be selected for the copy destination.
Also, when a data storage is selected for the copy source, only [CNC] can be selected for the copy destination.
The following describes the copy procedure.
Example)
When copying the machining program [1.PRG] of [CNC] into [A:Standard SD card]
Step 1. Touch the [Function] key to display the function selection window.
Step 2. Touch the [Copy] key on the function selection window.
1.
2.

Step 3. Touch the [Area chg] key to switch the frame to the copy source target.
3.
Step 4. Touch the [Device] key of the copy source target to display the device selection window.
Step 5. Select [CNC] in the device selection window.
4.
5.
Step 6. Select the copy source file [1.PRG] in the list.
Step 7. Touch the [Area chg] key to switch the frame to the copy destination target.
6.
7.
Step 8. Touch the [Device] key to display the device selection window.

Step 9. Select [A:Standard SD card] in the device selection window.
18
CNC DATA I/O

8. 9.
Step 10. Touch the [Exec] key to display the copy confirmation window.
Step 11. Touching the [OK] key copies [1.PRG] to [A:Standard SD card].
When the copy is completed, a completion message is displayed.
11.
10.
■3. Compare
Files in the data storage can be compared with the files in the CNC of the monitoring target.
The following describes the comparison procedure.
Example)
When comparing the file [ALL.PRG] in the data storage with a file in the CNC
Step 2. Touch the [Compare] key on the function selection window.
1.
2.

Step 4. Touch [A:Standard SD card] on the device selection window.
3.
4.
Step 5. Select the file to be compared from the list.
Step 6. Touch the [Exec] key to start the comparison.
5.
6.
• When the files match
A completion message is displayed.
• When the files do not match
The comparison error detail window is displayed.
➠ (1) Comparison error detail window
When the software version of the CNC is earlier than D2, the comparison error detail window does not
appear.

(1) Comparison error detail window
The line number of the mismatched data is displayed.
The method for displaying line numbers differs between the GOT side and CNC side.
• GOT side
A head line (0 number) is displayed as the first line. 18
• CNC side
A head line (0 number) is displayed as the zeroth line since the head line (0 number) is treated as a file name.
CNC DATA I/O

1)
3)
2)
4) 5)
1) Compared file information (GOT side)

Displays the device name on the GOT side, compared file name, and line number of the mismatched data.
2) Compared file information (CNC side)

Displays the device name on the CNC side, compared file name, and line number of the mismatched data.
The line number is displayed only when the machining programs are compared.
3) Details display
Displays the contents of the line which is found to be inconsistent in comparison.
The first inconsistent character is highlighted.
Up to 250 characters can be displayed in a single line.
However, characters are not highlighted in the following cases.
• The first inconsistent character is the 251st character or later.
• The corresponding line does not exist in the comparison source file or comparison target file.
4) [Continue] key
Closes the window and continues the comparison.
5) [Cancel] key
Closes the window and stops the comparison.

■4. Delete
Files stored in [CNC] of the monitoring target or the data storage can be deleted.
The following describes the deletion procedure.
Example)
Deleting the machining program files [1.PRG], [2.PRG], and [3.PRG] of [CNC]
Step 2. Touch the [Delete] key on the function selection window.
1.
2.
Step 4. Touch the [CNC] key on the device selection window.
3.
4.
Step 5. Select the file [1.PRG] at the head of the list to delete.
To delete one file only, follow the procedure in Step 7.

Step 6. Select the file [3.PRG] in the list to delete.
Then, the files [1.PRG], [2.PRG], and [3.PRG] are all selected.
In addition, when [ALL.PRG] is selected, only [ALL.PRG] is selected.
18
CNC DATA I/O

Step 7. Touch the [Exec] key to display the deletion confirmation window.
Step 8. Touch the [OK] key to delete the selected files.

When the deletion is completed, a completion message is displayed.
8.
7.
POINT
Precaution for deleting files
When [ALL.PRG] displayed in the list is deleted, files to be deleted differ depending on the
selected [Device].
• For [CNC]
When [ALL.PRG] is deleted, all files displayed in the list are deleted.
• For data storage
When [ALL.PRG] is deleted, only [ALL.PRG] is deleted.
■5. Creating a directory

Creates a directory in the data storage.
The following describes the procedure for creating a directory.
Example)
Creating the directory "SAMPLE01" in [A:Standard SD card]
Step 1. Touch the [Area chg] key to switch the frame to the copy source target.
For the copy source target, refer to the following.
➠ ■2. Copy

Step 3. Touch [A:Standard SD card] on the device selection window.
2.
3.
1.
Step 5. Touch the [Create a directory] key on the function selection window to display the key window.
4
4..
5.
Step 6. Input SAMPLE01 on the key window.
Step 7. Touch the [ENTER] key to determine the directory name and close the key window.
Input value display area
Key operation using a USB keyboard is also available.

➠ (1) Inputting characters using a USB keyboard

Step 8. The list is updated, and the SAMPLE01 directory is created.
When the directory creation is completed, a completion message is displayed.
18
CNC DATA I/O

(1) Inputting characters using a USB keyboard
When the key window is displayed, a USB keyboard can be used for key input.
For the corresponding keys, refer to the following.
Key Description
Press the key on the USB keyboard corresponding to the key displayed in the key window to
Characters, numbers, symbols
input it into the input value display area.
Shift + Delete Deletes all characters in the input value display area.
Backspace Deletes one character to the left of the cursor in the input value display area.
Delete Deletes one character to the right of the cursor in the input value display area.
Esc Closes the key window without reflecting the values in the input value display area.
Enter Closes the key window after reflecting the values in the input value display area.
For how to set the USB keyboard, refer to the following.

■6. Changing a file name when outputting the file

When a file is copied to the data storage, the file name in the copy destination can be changed.
The following describes the procedure for changing the file name at the file output.
Example)
Changing the machining program name [ALL.PRG] of [CNC] to [SAMPLE.PRG] and outputting the program to
[A:Standard SD card]
Step 1. Touch the [Area chg] key to switch the frame to the copy destination target.
For the copy destination target, refer to the following.
➠ ■2. Copy
Set [A:Standard SD card] for the copy destination device.

Select the following items using the [Device] key and [Directory] key of the copy source.
• [Device] key: [CNC]
• [Directory] key: [Machine program]
2.
2.
1.
1.
Step 3. Touch [ALL.PRG] in the list and the [Exec] key to display the copy confirmation window.
Step 4. Touch the [Name Change] key on the copy confirmation window to display the key window.
Touch the [AC] key to delete the existing file name from the input value display area.
Input value display area
Key operation using a USB keyboard is also available.

➠ (1) Inputting characters using a USB keyboard

Step 5. Input "SAMPLE.PRG".
Touch the [ENTER] key. The key window closes and the copy confirmation window appears.
Touching the [OK] key starts copying the file with the new file name.
When the copy is completed, a completion message is displayed. 18
CNC DATA I/O

■7. Contents displayed in the list
The following describes the file names displayed in the list of the CNC data I/O screen.
Target data Description File name displayed in the list
Machining program*1*2 Machining program ALL.PRG, O_.PRG
Parameter*3 Parameter ALL.PRM
Tool offset data Tool offset data TOOL.OFS
Workpiece offset data Workpiece offset data WORK.OFS
Common variable Common variable COMMON.VAR
CNC ladder USERPLC.LAD
R resister data RREG.REG
C resister data CREG.REG
Maintenance data T resister data TREG.REG
Operation history data TRACE.TRC
CNC sampling data NCSAMP.CSV
SRAM data files SRAM.BIN
Sampling related package file ALL.SMP
Sampling setting file SAMPLING.PRM
PLC data collection setting file FLCSAMP.CTF

Cycle monitor data
PLC draw setting file PLCSAMP.MMG
PLC collection data file PLCSAMPH.CSV
CNC collection data file NCSAMPH.CSV
*1 When the base specifications parameter of #1166 fixpro is set to 1, the fixed cycle program is the target data.
When the CNC has machining programs, ALL.PRG is displayed at the top of the list.
*2 When the software version of the CNC is earlier than D1, machining programs cannot be compared.
*3 When the software version of the CNC is earlier than D1, the parameter files in type ll cannot be compared.

This section describes the error messages displayed when the CNC data I/O is executed, and the corrective actions.
• The CNC is powered OFF, the cable is disconnected,

or the connected controller is not a CNC.
• Correct the connection and settings.
Communication error • The communication failed when a communication
• Turn on the CNC again.
driver is selected in the communication setting
window, or when the [CNC Chg] button is touched.
Unable to exec : PLC built in CNC Stop the operation of the PLC CPU built in the CNC, and
The PLC CPU built in the CNC is in operation.
running execute the CNC data I/O again.
The CNC is busy because it is executing the other input/

CNC is busy Please wait a moment and execute it again.
output.
Failed to stop USB drive The GOT fails to stop the USB drive. Check the USB memory.
The GOT cannot execute the CNC data I/O because the Stop the CNC operation, and execute the CNC data I/O
Unable to exec : Program running
CNC is in operation. again.
Reserve enough space of the memory by operations

The size of the data to be written exceeds the CNC
Out of memory such as deleting unnecessary machining programs, and
memory capacity.
then execute the CNC data I/O again.
The directory name cannot be created because the

The same name exists Enter another name.
same name already exists.
The CNC data I/O cannot be executed because

In sampling Stop sampling and execute the CNC data I/O again.
sampling is in execution.
Correct the settings, and then execute the CNC data I/O
File not found The copy source file does not exist.
again.
The file cannot be used for comparison because of any

of the following reasons: • Check the file type and select a file again.
The file cannot be compared • The file is not the target of the comparison function. ➠ 18.2.1 ■6. CNC data which can be handled
• The software of the CNC does not support the • Update the software version of the CNC.
comparison function.
Timeout The GOT fails to communicate with the CNC. Check the connection.
Communication Channel Setup Error. The specified channel does not exist. Correct the communication settings.
• Directories cannot be created when the device is set

to the CNC.
• The data storage is not ready to write.
• The number 99 exists in the serial number when a
Can't create a directory The directory cannot be created.
sampling related package file (ALL.SMP) is output.
Example)
A directory named SMP14041999 exists on April 19th,
2014.
Correct the directory settings, and then execute the CNC

Directory illegal The directory cannot be displayed because it is invalid.
data I/O again.
Check that the data protection key and the edit lock are
Data protect The data is protected.
set to be invalid, and execute the CNC data I/O again.
The maximum number of registration allowed for Delete unnecessary machining programs, and execute
No. of registration over
programs is exceeded. the CNC data I/O again.
The directory name cannot be created because the path

Path is too long Reconsider the directory/file name.
is too long.
Files cannot be displayed because the number of files

Too many files Reduce the number of files/directories to 1024 or less.
and directories in the data storage is too large.
The [Exec] key is pressed even though a file is not

File is not specified Specify a file, and execute the CNC data I/O again.
specified.
A file system error occurred.

Some error found in file system An error occurred in the file system.
Format the NC memory.
• Check if the copy destination device is ready for data

writing.
Can not write file The file cannot be written to the copy destination device.
• TRACE.TRC and NCSAMP.CSV cannot be copied to
the CNC.
Can not write file The file cannot be written because of invalid parameter
Check the parameter formats.
Format Error formats.
18 - 20 18.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions

Can not write file The file cannot be written because of invalid parameter
Check the parameter values.
Range Over values.
Can not write file The file cannot be written to the CNC because sampling
In sampling is in execution.
Write the file to the CNC after sampling is completed.
18
The superposition waveform cannot be set because the
parameters of the wave type 1 and the wave type 2 are
Can not write file
not matched when the wave type 2 is input. For Correct the parameter settings and input data.
Can't set superposition waveform
example, [Superposition] is set to [OFF] in the
CNC DATA I/O

parameters of the cycle monitor.
Check if the copy source device is ready for data

Can not read out file The copy source file cannot be read.
reading.
Check the file name, and execute the CNC data I/O
Filename illegal The file name is invalid.
again.
Memory Card not exist No data storage is inserted into the GOT. Check that the data storage is inserted into the GOT.
The CNC cannot be connected because the combination

The Ethernet settings of the monitoring of N/W No. and station No., which are specified in the Correct the settings of the special function switch and
target CNC are not correct. project data created with GT Designer3, does not exist in Ethernet.
the Ethernet settings.
Turn off the GOT and CNC. Check data in the data
Error Other errors storage and the connection status. Then, execute the
CNC data I/O again.
18.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 18 - 21

19. CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT
19.1 Features 19
The machining program and MDI program of the CNC connected with the GOT can be edited.
CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT

Edit the machining programs
19.2 Specifications
This section describes the GOT for which the CNC machining program edit is available, the target CNC, and the connection
type between the GOT and CNC.
following.
■1. GOT
The CNC machining program edit is available on GT27-X, GT27-S, and GT25-S.

Controller
CNC C70

( ○ : Available, ×: Unavailable)
Name Description Bus connection Ethernet connection*2
CNC machining program edit Editing CNC matching programs ○ ○*1

*2 When the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module is used, the CNC machining program edit cannot be used.

Write the package data, which contains the system application (Extended function) for the CNC machining program
edit, to the GOT.
(2) Space for the system application (Extended function)
19.2.2 Access range
With a single GOT, up to 2 CNCs can be switched for editing processing programs.

With a single GOT, up to 64 CNCs can be switched for editing processing programs.
19.2.3 Precautions
■1. Before using the CNC machining program edit
Carefully read the manual of the connected CNC and fully understand the operating procedures before using the CNC
machining program edit.
■2. Machining program edit protection

When the data protection key 3, edit lock B and C are enabled, the machining program edit is restricted.
Even when the data protection key 3, edit lock B and C are enabled, the machining program can be opened.
For the data protection key 3, edit lock B and C, refer to the following.
■3. Software version of the CNC used

(○: Available, ×: Unavailable)
Function
Software version of CNC
Display of the machining program list Machining program edit
BND-1006W000-D6 or earlier ○ ×
BND-1006W000-D6 or later ○ ○
■1. Start operation of the CNC machining program edit
The following explains how to display the CNC machining program edit screen after the GOT is turned on.
Step 2. Display the CNC machining program edit screen.

Use either of the following display methods. 19
• Starting from the special function switch (CNC machining program edit) set in the project

After the utility is displayed, touch [Monitor] → [CNC machining program edit] from the Main Menu.

Set the channel number of the CNC connected to the GOT.
If [×] is touched to close the communication setting window without setting a channel number, the channel
number is set to [1].
CNC machining program edit.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the [Ch:] key on the
CNC machining program edit screen.
Step 4. The CNC machining program edit starts after the channel number is selected.

The CNC machining program edit can be started using special function switches.
If a special function switch with the following settings is touched, the CNC machining program edit screen of the set
controller can be displayed.
• Selecting [CNC Manufacturing Program Editor] in [Switch Action], and checking [Specify the destination to connect
the screen of CNC Manufacturing Program Editor]

Start
At the second
Utility
or later startup
or
Rtn
When exiting CNC machining program edit by touching

Rtn, the last exited screen will be displayed at the next
Rtn
startup of CNC machining program edit.

This section describes the screen and software keyboard used in the CNC machining program edit.
For how to edit machining programs and MDI programs, refer to the following.
■1. List screen

The following describes the display data of the CNC machining program edit list screen and the functions of the keys
displayed on the screen. 19
1) 2) 3)
4)

6)
7)
5)
8)
9)
10)
11)
1) Channel key
2) [CNC Chg] key

Switches the CNCs for monitoring when multiple CNCs are connected.
The switching order differs depending on the connection type used.
The monitoring target is switched in order of the module number.
The monitoring target is switched in the order set in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3.
3) [Rtn] key
Exits the CNC machining program edit and returns to the monitor screen or the utility of the GOT.
4) CNC device name

The display contents differ according to the connection type.

Used to input the machining program name.
Inputting [.PRG] in the CNC machining program name is not required.
For details of the software key board, refer to the following.
➠ ■3. Software key board
6) Capacity
 [Entry], [Remain]
Displays the number of the programs registered as the user's machining programs and the remaining number
of the programs that can be registered.
 [Character], [Remain]
Displays the number of characters registered in the user's machining programs and the remaining number of
characters that can be registered.

7) Machining program list
Displays the CNC machining program list.
The machining programs are displayed in ascending order of the program numbers.
Machining programs are not displayed correctly if the program comment contains multibyte codes (such as
shift JIS codes).
8) Scroll key
Scrolls up or down the contents of the machining program list in increments of 10 or 50 items.
9) Message
Displays the guide or error messages.
For the details of error messages, refer to the following.
➠ 19.5 Error Messages and Corrective actions
10) Input section
Input a machining program name.
11) Menu
 [Open] key
Opens an existing machining program.
When a machining program is selected or a machining program name is input in the input section and the
[INPUT] key is touched, the machining program is opened.
Jumping to the block number of a sequence number is enabled at the same time as the machining program is
opened.
Input characters in the "Machining program name/Sequence number/Block number" format into the input
section, and touch the [INPUT] key.
Example)
When jumping into the position of the sequence number 110 and block number 0 of 123.PRG
Input 123/110/0 or 123/110 in the input section and touch the [INPUT] key.
 [New] key
Creates a new machining program.
When a machining program name is input into the input section and the [INPUT] key is touched, the new
machining program opens.
 [Delete] key
Deletes an existing machining program.
When a machining program is selected or a machining program name is input in the input section and the
[INPUT] key is touched, the confirmation dialog box is displayed.
Touch the [OK] key to delete an existing machining program.
 [MDI] key
Opens an MDI program.
The screen is switched to the edit screen to start the MDI program edit.
 [Refresh] key
Updates and displays the program list.

■2. Edit screen
4) 7) 5) 6) 8) 9) 10) 1)
2)
19
11)
3)

12)
13)
14)
15)
1) [Rtn] key
Exits the CNC machining program edit and returns to the monitor screen or the utility of the GOT.
2) CNC device name

The display contents differ according to the connection type.

Used to edit the program.
For details of the software key board, refer to the following.
➠ ■3. Software key board
4) Program name
Displays the name of the edited program.
The program name is displayed as MDI.PRG when an MDI program is edited.
5) System name display

Displays a system name when the MDI program is displayed and the MDI setting system can be switched.
6) Program comment
Displays the comment of the edited program.
No program comment is displayed for MDI programs.
The following program comments are not displayed correctly.
• A comment containing multibyte codes
• A comment containing Kanji, hiragana, katakana, or one-byte katakana
7) Editing mode
Indicates that the program is being edited.
This item appears only when the program is being edited.
8) MDI status
Displays the status of the MDI when the MDI program is opened.
• No MDI setting
Indicates that the MDI program cannot be operated.
To complete the setting, move the cursor to any position of the program, and then touch the [INPUT] key.
• MDI setting completed
Indicates that the MDI program can be operated.
The background color of the set line number becomes light blue.
When you start editing, the background color disappears.
• MDI in operation
Indicates that the MDI program is being operated.
9) Insert or overwrite
Indicates that the insert mode or overwrite mode is being selected.

10) Scroll key
Scrolls the contents in the editing area up or down by 10 or 50 items.
11) Line number

Displays the line numbers.
• Start line: Displays the display start line in the editing eara.
• Line number: Displays the last four digits of the line numbers.
12) Editing area

Used to display and edit a program.
The display size is 22 lines × 40 characters.
When the editing area is touched, the cursor moves to the touched position.
When a position with no character is touched, the cursor moves to the nearest position where characters can
be input.
When any key on the menu is on, touching the editing area turns off the key.
However, the cursor moves to the beginning of the inverted characters during the string search.
13) Message
Displays the guide or error messages.
For the details of error messages, refer to the following.
➠ 19.5 Error Messages and Corrective actions
14) Input section
Whether inputting characters is available depends on the mode of each menu.
15) Menu
 [Program Comment] key
Used to input the comment of the machining program.
When a comment is input into the input section and the [INPUT] key is touched, the input value is reflected.
Up to 18 characters can be input as a program comment.
A comment cannot be input into the MDI program.
 [Line Jump] key
Used to move to a specified line.
When you enter a line number in the input area and touch the [INPUT] key, the specified line is displayed at
the start of the editing area.
When you enter a line number that does not exist in the program, E, or EOR in the input area, you jump to the
last line.
 [NB Jump] key
Used to move to the block number of a sequence number.
When you enter characters in the form of "Sequence number/Block number" in the input area and touch the
[INPUT] key, the specified block is displayed at the start of the editing area.
When a block number is not input, 0 is applied as the block number.
Example)
When jumping into the position of the sequence number 110 and block number 0
Enter "110/0" or "110", and then touch the [INPUT] key.
 [String Search] key
Searches for the text and moves to it.
When you enter the text in the input area and touch the [INPUT] key, the text is searched for from the position
where the cursor is placed.
If the search reaches the end of the program without locating the target text, the search continues from the
start of the program.
Up to 11 characters can be searched for.
 [System Change] key
Switches the system to configure the MDI setting.
 [MDI Register] key
Registers the MDI program as the CNC machining program.
To perform the MDI registration, enter a machining program number in the input area, and then touch the
[INPUT] key.
An MDI program can be registered only when the program is opened.
 [INSERT] key
Switches between the insert mode (ON) and the overwrite mode (OFF).
• ON: Insert mode
• OFF: Overwrite mode
 [To Lists] key
Switches the screen to the list screen.

■3. Software key board
1) 1)
19

4) 5) 4) 5)
3) 6) 3) 6)
7) 7)
2) 2)
8) 9) 8) 9)
[SHIFT] OFF [SHIFT] ON
1) Alphanumeric and symbol keys

Used to input alphabets, numbers, spaces, and symbols.
Symbols shown in gray can be input when the [SHIFT] key is turned on.
 [EOB] key
Inputs EOB (;).
2) Cursor movement keys

Moves the cursor.
3) Left tab key

The key operation differs according to the cursor position.
• When the cursor is displayed in the editing area
The cursor moves to the beginning of a word.
When the cursor is placed at the beginning of a word, the cursor moves to the beginning of the previous
word.
• When the cursor is displayed in the input area
The cursor moves to the first character.
4) Right tab key

The cursor moves to the beginning of the next word.
The cursor moves to the last character.
5) [C.B] key, [CAN] key

The [CAN] key is enabled when the [SHIFT] key is turned on.
 [C.B] key
Deletes all characters of the block at the cursor position.
Deletes all characters in the input sarea.
 [CAN] key
Deletes all characters on the displayed page.
Deletes all characters in the input area.
6) [DEL] key
Deletes the character to the right of the cursor.
7) [BS] key
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.

8) [SHIFT] key
Switches between different character sets in the display.
9) [INPUT] key
Saves the contents being edited during the machining program edit.
Saves the contents being edited and completes the setting during the MDI program edit.
Confirms the entry and executes it.
■4. Inputting characters using a USB keyboard

A USB keyboard and software keyboard may have different key operations.
Key USB keyboard operation
Shift+Tab
Tab
Shift+Delete, Home
Shift+Home
Enter
Shift+Page Up
Shift+Page Down
Page Up, Page Down
• List screen
F1: Open, F2: New, F3: Delete, F4: MDI, F9: Refresh
Menu • Edit screen
F1: Program comment, F2: Line No. jump, F3: NB jump, F4: String search, F5: MDI registration, F7: System switching, F8:
INSERT, F9: Move to the list
No corresponding key
For how to set the USB keyboard, refer to the following.


19.5 Error Messages and Corrective actions
This section describes the error messages displayed when the CNC machining program edit is executed, and the corrective
actions.
The CNC version does not support the CNC machining

CNC version not compatible Update the CNC version.
program edit.
Cannot execute except in MDI mode

The parameter value set for the MDI setting lock (#1144
mdlkof) is 0 (MDI setting disabled). The MDI setting
Change the operation mode to the MDI mode, or correct 19
the parameter setting.
cannot be configured unless in the MDI mode.
The CNC machining program edit cannot be executed Stop running the machining program, and execute the
Unable to execute: Program running
for the machining program being run. CNC machining program edit again.

A block number that does not exist is specified for the
NB not found Input the correct block number.
NB jump.
The INPUT key is touched before the machining Specify the machining program, and touch the [INPUT]
Program not designated
program is specified. key.
Program does not exist The machining program that does not exist is specified. Input the correct machining program number.
The specified machining program number cannot be

Program No. duplicate Input the correct machining program number.
registered since the same number already exists.
Program No. illegal The specified machining program number is invalid. Input the correct machining program number.
Reserve enough space of the memory by operations

Memory over The memory capacity is exceeded. such as deleting unnecessary machining programs, and
then execute the CNC machining program edit again.
Since even one of the data protection key 1, 2, and 3, Check that the data protection key 1, 2, and 3, and the
Data protected and the edit lock B and C is valid, the CNC machining edit lock B and C are set to be invalid, and execute the
program edit cannot be executed. CNC machining program edit again.
The maximum number of registration allowed for Delete the unnecessary machining programs, and
No. of registrations over
programs is exceeded. execute the CNC machining program edit again.
Input error The data is input in the incorrect format. Input the data in the correct format.
An error found in file system An error occurred in the file system. Format the CNC memory.
Cannot write file A machining program cannot be written. Format the CNC memory.
Cannot read file A machining program cannot be read. Format the CNC memory.
The machining program cannot be displayed due to the

Program display locked Check the parameter values.
program display lock C (#1122pglk_c).
While the machining program is edited, the change of

the program comment, NB jump, string search, MDI Cancel the editing mode, and execute those operations
Unable to execute: Editing
registration, and the scrolling outside the editing area again.
cannot be executed.
The editing screen is displayed on the monitored CNC Switch the editing screen to another screen on the
side. monitored CNC side.
The same program is displayed on the other GOT. Close the program on the other GOT.
While the machining program is edited by the other

After 60 seconds have passed since the GOT was
device, the GOT is turned on and immediately the same
Unable to execute: Another device is turned on, open the program again.
program is attempted to be opened.
connecting
The number of machining programs opened by the
target CNC has reached the maximum number allowed Close the program on the other GOT.
(10 programs).
The other GOT is executing the file access, including the After the process is completed on the other GOT,
input/output and verification of the target file. execute CNC machining program edit again.
The maximum number of characters allowed for the Reduce the input characters, and then execute the CNC
No. of characters over
input area is exceeded. machining program edit again.
Time-out The GOT fails to communicate with the CNC. Check the connection.
• Check that the CNC is powered on, the cable is

The GOT fails to establish the initial communication with
Communication error connected, and the connection target is the CNC.
the CNC.
• Configure the proper connection and settings.
Turn off the GOT and the CNC, and check the
connection.
Error Other errors
Check the format of the CNC memory, and execute the
CNC machining program edit again.
19.5 Error Messages and Corrective actions 19 - 11

19 - 12 19.5 Error Messages and Corrective actions
20. NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY
20.1 Features
The network status display function monitors the network status using a communication unit mounted on the GOT.
You can check the LED status, error status, and others of the network module.
20
NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY

20.2 Specifications
■1. Target communication units
The network status display function monitors the network status using the following communication units.
• CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit (GT15-J71GP23-SX)
• CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit (GT15-J71GF13-T2)
• CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13)
• MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13)
■1. Starting the network status display
The following describes how to display the network status display screen after the GOT is turned on.
Step 2. Display the network status display screen by one of the following methods.
• Starting from the special function switch (Network status display) set in the project
In the utility, touch [Monitor] → [Network status display] from the Main Menu.

Start
Utility Main Menu

or
[×] key
Network status display

20.4 Display Contents
The following describes the display data of the network status display screen.
■1. CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

For the corrective actions for errors, refer to the following.
➠ CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual
2)
20
1)
4)

3)
5)
6)
1) LED status
Displays the operation status of the CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit.
➠ (1) LED status
2) Loop information
Displays the loop status of the CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit.
➠ (2) Loop information
3) Data link information
Displays the data link information of the CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, including the
communication status, cause of a communication suspension, and cause of a communication stop.
➠ (3) Data link information
4) Transient status
Displays the number of transient transmission errors and the error codes.
➠ (4) Transient status
5) Link scan time information
Displays the link scan time information.
➠ (5) Link scan time information
6) Host station line status
Displays the connection status of the CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit.
➠ (6) Host station line status
20.4 Display Contents 20 - 3

(1) LED status
LED
Item Lit Not lit Blink
color*1
Hardware failure or WDT

[RUN] Operating normally -
error
Communication error in a
CC-Link IE Controller CC-Link IE Controller
[PC] station, or station numbers
Network established Network not established
Green duplicated
[ONLINE] Online mode Other than online mode
[TEST] Test mode Other than test mode
[OFFLINE] Offline mode Other than offline mode
Duplicate control station or

[M/S.ERR] Red Not detected
station No. detected -
[MANAGER] Control station in operation Other than control station
Sub-control station in
[S.MANAGER] Green Other than sub-control station
operation
[NORMAL] Normal station in operation Other than normal station
[PARAM.ERR] Parameter error detected

Red Not detected
[F LOOP ERR] IN-side error detected
[SD] Data being sent Data not sent -
[RD] Data being received Data not received?
[TOKEN PASS] Baton pass being executed Baton pass not executed
Data link being executed

Data link being executed
[DATA LINK] (Cyclic transmission in Data link not executed
(Cyclic transmission stopped)
progress)
Green
• Hardware test in progress
• Offline
• Self-loopback test in
progress • Online
[GOT R/W]
• Internal self-loopback test • Line test in progress -
in progress
• Station-to-station test in
progress
[R LOOP ERR] Red OUT-side error detected Not detected
*1 The monochrome display shows the LED statuses as follows:

• Lit: ■
• Not lit: □
(2) Loop information

Item Description
Displays the connection status of the host station on the IN side.

[IN: Loop Sts.] • [Normal]
• [Rev connect]
Displays the station number of the IN-side loopback station.

[IN: LoopBK Sta] • No loopback executing station: [---]
• Station No.: [1] to [120]
Displays the cause of the loopback.

• [No LoopBK Sta.]
[IN: LoopBK factor] • [OUT: cable disconnection]
• [OUT: connecting a line]
• [OUT: wrong cable connection]
Displays the connection status of the host station on the OUT side.
[OUT: Loop Sts.] • [Normal]
• [Rev connect]
Displays the number of the station that is executing a loopback on the OUT side.
[OUT: LoopBK Sta] • No loopback executing station: [---]
• Station No.: [1] to [120]
20 - 4 20.4 Display Contents

Item Description
Displays the loopback factor on the OUT side.

• [No LoopBK Sta.]
[OUT: LoopBK factor] • [IN: cable disconnection]
• [IN: connecting a line]
• [IN: wrong cable connection]
(3) Data link information

Item Description
Displays the communication (Data link) status of the host station.

• [D-Link in prog.]
• [D-Link stopped]
[Com Status] • [B-Pass exec]
• [B-Pass stopped]
20
• [Testing Offline]
• [Offline]
Displays the cause for which the communication (Transient transmission) of the host station is disabled.

• [Normal Comm]
• [Cable disconnection]
• [Wrong cable connection]
[Cause of Ssp] • [Checking cable IN/OUT]
• [Disconnecting/returning to system]
• [Offline]
• [Offline test]
• [Self-check mode]
Displays the cause for which the data link (Cyclic transmission) of the host station is disabled.
• [Normal Comm]
• [StopOrder]
• [D-Link observation timer time up]
• [Testing Line]
• [Param not rcvd]
• [Host out of range]
• [Host reservation]
[Cause of Stop]
• [Dup Host No.]
• [Dup CtrlSta]
• [Sta.No. not set]
• [Invalid Network No.]
• [Param Err]
• [Params in comm.]
• [CPU stop error]
• [CPU pwr stp err]
(4) Transient status

Item Description
[Transmission Err] Displays the number of transient transmission errors.
[ErrCode] A history of 16 errors is displayed in 16 rows, starting from the latest one.
(5) Link scan time information

Item Description
[Current LS time] Displays the current link scan time.
[Max. LS time] Displays the maximum link scan time.
[Min. LS time] Displays the minimum link scan time.
[Constant LS time] Displays the link scan time set in the parameter.

(6) Host station line status
Item Description
Displays the connection status of the host station.

• [Normal]
• [IN: Loop Back (OUT: cable disconnection)]
• [IN: Loop Back (OUT: connecting a line)]
• [IN: Loop Back (OUT: wrong cable connection)]
• [OUT: Loop Back (IN: cable disconnection)]
• [OUT: Loop Back (IN: connecting a line)]
• [OUT: Loop Back (IN: wrong cable connection)]
[Connction] • [Disconnect (IN: cable disconnection, OUT: cable disconnection)]
• [Disconnect (IN: cable disconnection, OUT: connecting a line)]
• [Disconnect (IN: cable disconnection, OUT: wrong cable connection)]
• [Disconnect (IN: connecting a line, OUT: cable disconnection)]
• [Disconnect (IN: connecting a line, OUT: connecting a line)]
• [Disconnect (IN: connecting a line, OUT: wrong cable connection)]
• [Disconnect (IN: wrong cable connection, OUT: cable disconnection)]
• [Disconnect (IN: wrong cable connection, OUT: connecting a line)]
• [Disconnect (IN: wrong cable connction, OUT: wrong cable connction)]
[IN: cable disconnct count]
[IN: line err count] • [0]: No error

[OUT: cable disconnct count] • [1] or larger: Number of accumulated errors
[OUT: line err count]

■2. CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit
➠ User's manual of the CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module used
2)
1)
4)
20
3)

5)
6)
1) LED status
Displays the operation status of the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit.
➠ (1) LED status
2) Link information
Displays the link status of the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit.
➠ (2) Link information
Displays the data link information of the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, including the
communication status, cause of a communication suspension, and cause of a communication stop.
4) Unit error information
Displays the number of unit errors and the error codes.
➠ (4) Unit error information
5) Link scan time information
Displays the link scan time information.
➠ (5) Link scan time information
6) Host station line status
Displays the connection status of the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit.
➠ (6) Host station line status
(1) LED status
LED
color*1
• Hardware failure
• WDT error occurred
[RUN] Operating normally
• Communication unit being
reset -
Operating as a station other

[MST] Green Operating as master station
than master station
• For online mode: • For online mode:

Data link in progress Data link stopped
[DLINK] Data link being executed
• For test mode: • For test mode:
Test completed Test being executed

LED
color*1
Communication error • Normal Data link faulty station

[ERR]
Red occurred • Unit being reset detected
[LERR] Receive data error Receive data normal
[SD] Data being sent Data not sent -
[RD] Green Data being received Data not received
[MODE] Online mode Offline mode Test mode
PORT1 side receive frame PORT1 side receive frame

[LER1]
error normal
Red
PORT2 side receive frame PORT2 side receive frame
[LER2]
error normal
-
[LINK1] PORT1 side linking up PORT1 side linking down
[LINK2] Green PORT2 side linking up PORT2 side linking down
[GOT R/W] Access from GOT No access from GOT

• Lit: ■
• Not lit: □
(2) Link information

Item Description
Displays the link up status of the host station PORT1 side.

[Host PORT1 link info.] • [Linking up]
• [Linking down]
Displays the link up status of the host station PORT2 side.

[Host PORT2 link info.] • [Linking up]
• [Linking down]

Item Description

• [D-Link in prog.]
• [D-Link stopped]
[Com Status] • [B-Pass exec]
• [B-Pass stopped]
• [Testing Offline]
• [Offline]
• [Normal Comm]
• [Cable disconnection]
• [Disconnecting/returning to system]
[Cause of Ssp]
• [Offline]
• [Offline test - H/W test]
• [Offline test - self-loopback test]
• [Offline test - shipping test]
• [Normal Comm]
• [StopOrder]
• [D-Link observation timer time up]
• [Slave stations do not exist]
• [Param not rcvd]
• [Host out of range]
[Cause of Stop]
• [Dup Host No.]
• [Dup Master Sta.: Master detected]
• [Sta.No. not set]
• [Param Err(Other)]
• [Params in comm.]
• [CPU stop error]
• [Invalid ring configuration]
(4) Unit error information

Item Description
[Unit error] Displays the number of unit errors.

Item Description
(5) Link scan time information

Item Description
[Current LS time] Displays the current link scan time.
[Max. LS time] Displays the maximum link scan time.
[Min. LS time] Displays the minimum link scan time.
[Constant LS time] Displays the link scan time set in the parameter.
(6) Host station line status

Item Description
20
Displays the connection status of the host station.
• [Normal (PORT1: communicating, PORT2: communicating)]
• [Normal (PORT1: communicating, PORT2: cable disconnected)]

• [Normal (PORT1: in loopBK communication, PORT2 cable disconnected)]
• [Normal (PORT1: cable disconnected, PORT2: communicating)]
[Connction]
• [Normal (PORT1: cable disconnected, PORT2: in loopBK communication)]
• [Disconnect (PORT1: cable disconnected, PORT2: cable disconnected)]
• [Disconnect (PORT1: cable disconnected, PORT2: connecting a line)]
• [Disconnect (PORT1: connecting a line, PORT2: cable disconnected)]
• [Disconnect (PORT1: connecting a line, PORT2: connecting a line)]
[PORT1: cable disconnct count]
[PORT1: line err count] • [0]: No error

[PORT2: cable disconnct count] • [1] or larger: Number of accumulated errors
[PORT2: line err count]

■3. CC-Link communication unit
➠ Displays the cause for which the data link (Cyclic transmission) of the host station is disabled.
2)
1)
1) LED status
Displays the operation status of the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13).
➠ (1) LED status
Displays the data link startup status and errors of the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13).
(1) LED status
LED
color*1
• WDT error
[RUN] Green Operating normally -
• Unit being reset
Communication error in a
All station communication • No communication error
[ERR.] station, or station numbers
error • Unit being reset
duplicated
Red • Cable disconnection

• No responses from all
[TIME] stations due to Responses from all stations
transmission path affected
by noise

[MST] Green Operating as master station
than master station
[SW] Switch setting error No switch setting error

Red
[LINE] Cable disconnection error No cable disconnection error
-
Operating as standby master Operating as a station other
[S MST] Green
station than standby master station
Master station duplication No master station duplication

[M/S] Red
error error

[LOCAL] Green Operating as local station
than local station
[PRM] Red Parameter error No parameter error
[GOT R/W] Green Access from GOT No access from GOT

• Lit: ■
• Not lit: □

Item Description
Displays the data link startup status.

• [D-Link in prog.]: Data link being executed
• [D-Link Offline]: Data link stopped
• [Initialize]: Set to the initial status
• [Parameter wait]: Parameter not received
• [Disconnect (No Polling)]: In cut-off status with no inquiry from master station
[D-Link Boot Status]
• [Disconnect (Line Err)]: In cut-off status due to line error
• [Disconnect (Other)]: In cut-off status due to other causes
• [Testing Line]: Line test being executed
• [Testing Pram Setup]: Parameter setting test being executed from master station
• [Auto Reconnecting]: Return processing being executed automatically
• [Reset. in prgr.]: CC-Link communication unit being reset (GOT reset status) 20
Displays the status of the current error.
• [Normal]: Normal status
• [Invalid TransPath]: Transmission path error detected
• [Invalid Parameter]: Parameter error detected

[Error Status] • [CRC Error]: Receive data error detected
• [Time Out Error]: Timeout error detected in data reception
• [Abort Error]: Error detected in data communication
• [Invalid Setup]: Invalid station number, station type, transmission speed, or mode setting detected
• [Other Abnormality]: Error due to some other cause detected

■4. MELSECNET/H communication unit
➠ Reference manual of the MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC network) used
2)
1)
4)
3)
GT15-J71LP23-25
2)
1)
4)
3)
GT15-J71BR13
1) LED status
Displays the operation status of the MELSECNET/H communication unit.
➠ (1) LED status
2) Loop information
Displays the loop status of the MELSECNET/H communication unit.
➠ (2) Loop information
Displays the data link information of the MELSECNET/H communication unit, including the communication
status, cause of a communication suspension, and cause of a communication stop.

4) Transient status
Displays the number of transient transmission errors and the error codes.
➠ (4) Transient status
(1) LED status
LED
Item Lit Not lit
color*1
[RUN] Data link normal Data link error
Operating as a station other than control

[MNG] Operating as control station
station
[S.MNG] Operating as sub-control station

Operating as a station other than sub-control
station
20
[D.LINK] Data link being executed Data link stopped
Green
[T.PASS] Baton pass being executed Baton pass not executed

[SW.E.] Switch setting error
[M/S.E.] Station No. or control station duplication error Normal
[PRM.E.] Parameter error
[GOT R/W] Access from GOT No access from GOT
[CRC] Code check error
[OVER] Data entry delay error
[AB.IF] All receive data: 1
[TIME] Red Time limit exceeded Normal
[DATA] Receive data error
[UNDER] Send data error
[LOOP] Forward/reverse loop receive error
[SD] Data being sent -

Green
[RD] Data being received -

• Lit: ■
• Not lit: □
(2) Loop information

Item Description
Displays the status of the F loop.

[F loop]*1 • [Normal]
• [NG]
Displays the status of the R loop.

[R loop]*1 • [Normal]
• [NG]
Displays the F loopback execution status.

[FLoopBK Sta]*1 • [No per]
• Number of the loopback executing station
Displays the R loopback execution status.

[RLoopBK Sta]*1 • [No per]
• Number of the loopback executing station
Displays the loopback status.

[Loop Back]*1 • [No per]: Loop normal, forward loop error, reverse loop error, data link not possible
• [Perf]: During loopback
*1 For the GT15-J71BR13, [---] is displayed.

Item Description

• [D-Link in prog.]: Data link in progress
• [D-Link Stop(A)ss]: Cyclic transmission stopped from other station
• [D-Link Stop (H)]: Cyclic transmission stopped by host station
• [B-Pass exec (No Area)]: Host B/W send no allocation
[Com Status] • [B-Pass exec (Param Err)]: Error in host parameters
• [B-Pass exec (Param unreceived)]: Common parameters not received
• [Disconnect (No B-Pass)]: Station numbers duplicated, cable not connected
• [Disconnect (Line Err)]: Cable not connected
• [Testing]: Testing online/offline
• [Reset. in prgr.]: Hardware failure
• [Normal Comm]: Communicating normally
• [Offline]: Offline
• [Offline test]: Testing offline
• [Initialize]: Error (error code: F101, F102, F105)
• [Change Ctrl Sta]: Error (error code: F104, F106)
• [Testing Online]: Error (error code: F103, F109, F10A)
• [Baton Missing]: Error (error code: F107)
• [Baton Duplicated]: Error (error code: F108)
[Cause of Ssp]
• [Dup Sta No]: Error (error code: F10B)
• [Dup Ctrl Sta]: Error (error code: F10C)
• [Rcv Retry Err]: Error (error code: F10E)
• [Send Retry Err]: Error (error code: F10F)
• [Time Out Err]: Error (error code: F110)
• [Abnormal Line]: Error (error code: F112)
• [Disconnection]: Error (error code: F11B)
• [No Own Sta Baton]: Error (error code: F11F)
• [Other (error code)]: Error (error code: displayed)
• [Normal]: Communicating normally
• [StopOrder]: Cyclic transmission of all stations stopped from host station or other stations
[Cause of Stop] • [No Shared Param]: Parameters not received
• [Bad Shared Param]: Set parameter error
• [Bad Self Sta CPU]: A medium/critical error occurred in the host CPU
• [Com Aborted]: Host data link error occurred
(4) Transient status

Item Description
[Transmission Err] Displays the number of transient transmission errors.

21. iQSS UTILITY
21.1 Features
With the iQSS utility function, the GOT can display information of the selected iQSS-compatible device by mounting a data
storage having profile data of iQSS-compatible devices on the GOT.
You can also start, operate, and maintain the selected iQSS-compatible devices.
Mount a data storage

in which profile data is
stored on the GOT.
21
The GOT displays the
information of the selected
device and allows startup, GOT
iQSS UTILITY
operation, and maintenance.
Centralized management PLC

with an engineering tool,
such as GX Works2
iQSS-compatible devices
computer
21.2 Specifications
21.2.2 Access range
21.2.3 Precautions

This section explains the GOTs that support the iQSS utility, the target PLCs, and the connection types between the GOT
and PLC.
following.
For the connection between iQSS-compatible devices and a PLC, refer to the following.
➠ MELSEC-Q/L AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual

Controller
QCPU (Q mode)*1
LCPU*2
*1 Excluding Q12DCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-VG, Q24DHCCPU-LS, QJ72BR15, QJ72LP25G, and QJ72LP25-25

*2 Excluding LJ72GF15-T2
Function Connection type between the GOT and controller
CC-Link IE CC-Link
Direct MELSECNET/H Controller connection
Bus Serial Ethernet
CPU connection*1, connection*1*5
Name Description connection communication connection
connection MELSECNET/10 , CC-Link IE
*1 connection *3
*2 Field ID*8 G4*9
connection*1*4
connection*6*7
Displaying the status of

iQSS iQSS-compatible
devices ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
utility
Changing parameters

*2 When connecting the GOT with the LCPU, use L6ADP-R2.
*3 L02SCPU or L02SCPU-P cannot be used.
*4 For the MELSECNET/10 connection, use a QCPU and network module (QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25,
QJ71LP21G, and QJ71BR11) with the function version B or later.
*5 This connection type indicates the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection.
*6 This connection type indicates the CC-Link IE Field Network connection.
*7 This connection type cannot be used to connect a Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU
or Q25HCPU.
*8 This connection type indicates the CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station).
*9 This connection type indicates the CC-Link connection (via G4).

For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
(1) System application (extended function)
Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the iQSS utility to the GOT.

A data storage is required to use the iQSS utility.
■5. Applicable non-Mitsubishi equipment

The iQSS utility supports the following devices.
For the details of each device, refer to the manual of the device used.
(1) AnyWireASLINK
The AnyWireASLINK equipment manufactured by Anywire Corporation is applicable to the iQSS untility.
The following lists the supported devices and functions.
Function
Type Model Reading/writing parameters
Acquiring the device list Monitoring the device
from/to the device
B280SB-02U-C1220,
B280SB-02US-C1220,
B281SB-02U-CC20,
B281SB-02US-CC20,
ASLINKER (Input) ○ ○ ○
B298SB-02U-M12,
B298SB-02US-M12,
BL287SB-02F-CC20,
BL287SB-02FS-CC20
B280PB-02U-C1220, 21
B280PB-02US-C1220,
B281PB-02U-CC20,
B281PB-02US-CC20,
ASLINKER (Output) ○ ○ ○
B298PB-02U-M12,
iQSS UTILITY
B298PB-02US-M12,
BL287PB-02F-CC20,
BL287PB-02FS-CC20
B280XB-02U-C1220,
B280XB-02US-C1220,
B281XB-02U-CC20,
ASLINKER (I/O B281XB-02US-CC20,
○ ○ ○
combined) B298XB-02U-M12,
B298XB-02US-M12,
BL287XB-02F-CC20,
BL287XB-02FS-CC20
B289SB-01AF-CAM20,
Fiber ○ ○ ○
B289SB-01AF-CAS
ASLINKAMP B289SB-01AK-CAM20,
Proximity ○ ○ ○
(Input) B289SB-01AK-CAS
Photo B289SB-01AP-CAM20,
○ ○ ○
electronic B289SB-01AP-CAS
B283SB-01-1KC, B283SB-
ASLINKSENSOR (Input) ○ ○ ○
01-1KR, B283SB-01-1K
ASLINKSENSOR
B283SB-01-1KP ○ ○ ○
(Output)
ASLINKTERMINAL BL296SB-08F-20,
○ ○ ○
(Input) BL296SB-08FS-20
ASLINKTERMINAL BL296PB-08F-20,
○ ○ ○
(Output) BL296PB-08FS-20
ASLINKTERMINAL (I/O BL296XB-08F-20,

○ ○ ○
combined) BL296XB-08FS-20
■6. Multiple-language display

For profile data that contains information in multiple languages, multiple-language display is supported.
Some parts of profile data support multiple languages and some parts do not.
To the parts that do not support multiple languages, the system language of the GOT is applied.
When the data storage has no profile data supporting multiple languages, the language is not switched.
For the details of system language switching, refer to the following.
21.2.2 Access range
The access range is the same as when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For the details of the access range, refer to the following.
21.2.3 Precautions
■1. Precautions for the device list information screen and parameter information screen
While the following operations are in progress, do not perform operations that use the control signal (Y signal).
• Updating information by using the [Update list] key on the device list information screen
• Reading or writing parameters by using the [Read parameters] key or [Write parameters] key on the parameter
information screen
21.3 Preparing profile data

To display iQSS-compatible devices with the iQSS utility, store profile data in a data storage with GT Designer3 and mount
the storage on the GOT.
For information on how to store profile data, refer to the following.
21 - 4 21.3 Preparing profile data

This section explains the procedure to display the operation screen of the iQSS utility.
Step 1. Mount a data storage in which profile data is stored on the GOT.
Step 3. Display the iQSS utility screen by one of the following methods.
• Starting from the special function switch (iQSS utility) set in the project
For information on how to set special function switches, refer to the following.
In the utility, touch [Monitor] → [iQSS utility] from the main menu.
For information on how to display the utility, refer to the following.
Step 4. The [Select channel] window appears only at the first startup of the iQSS utility.
Set the channel number of the PLC connected to the GOT.
When the channel number is not set, touching the [×] key closes the [Select channel] window and sets the
iQSS UTILITY
channel number to [1].
Select channel key
Step 5. The iQSS utility screen appears.

To change the connection destination, touch the channel selection change key on the iQSS utility screen.
➠ 21.5 Operating Procedure

21.4.1 Screen transition
Start
[×] key
At the second [×] key

and subsequent Utility Main Menu
startups or
Select channel key Select channel key
Select channel key
Select channel key
[×] key
[N/W mod. list]

key [N/W mod. list] key
[N/W mod. [OK] key

list] key
[×] key
[Device list [Parameter

info.] key info.] key
[Monitor [Device list

info.] key info.] key
[Parameter info.] key
[Monitor info.] key

21.5 Operating Procedure
This section explains screen operations for the iQSS utility.
The display screen of the iQSS utility differs depending on the GOT used.
➠ 21.5.1 iQSS utility screen
21.5.2 Device list information screen
21.5.3 Monitoring information screen
21.5.4 Parameter information screen
21.5.1 iQSS utility screen

This section explains the structure of the screen and the common operations when the iQSS utility is executed.

The following explains the structure of the system configuration screen and the function of the keys displayed on the
screen after the iQSS utility is started.
21
3) 3)
iQSS UTILITY
1)
2)
3)
3)
1) Title display area

Displays the title and the number of modules on the connection destination.
2) Module list display area

Lists modules that can be monitored.
3) Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the iQSS utility screen
21.5 Operating Procedure 21 - 7

(2) Key functions
The following shows the functions of the operation keys on the iQSS utility screen.
1) 2)
3)
Knob
4)
3)
5)

2) [×] key
Exits the iQSS utility.
3) Scroll key
Scrolls the contents in the list up or down by one item.
4) Scroll bar
Touch an area above or below the knob to scroll one page up or down.
You can also scroll the page by sliding the knob.
5) [OK] key
Displays the device list information screen of the selected device.

21.5.2 Device list information screen
This section explains the structure of the screen and the common operations on the device list information screen.

The following explains the display data of the device list information screen and the functions of the keys displayed on
the screen.
1) 1)
1) 2)
1)
21
3)
iQSS UTILITY
4)
1)
1) 1) 1)
1) Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the device list information screen
2) Network information display area

Displays the network information of the connection destination.
3) Device list display area

Lists devices that can be monitored.
4) Selected device information display area

Displays the information of the device selected in the device list display area.

(2) Key functions
1) 2)
3)
4)
Knob
5)
4)
9)
6) 7) 8)

2) [×] key
3) [Update list] key

Updates the information in the device list display area.
4) Scroll key
5) Scroll bar
6) [Monitor info.] key

Switches the screen to the monitoring information screen.
7) [Parameter info.] key

Switches the screen to the parameter information screen.
8) [Next err/alarm] key

Moves the cursor to the device in which an error or alarm has occurred.
9) [N/W mod. list] key

Switches the screen to the iQSS utility screen.

21.5.3 Monitoring information screen
This section explains the structure of the screen and the common operations on the monitoring information screen.

The following explains the display data of the monitoring information screen and the functions of the keys displayed on
the screen.
1) 1)
2)
21
iQSS UTILITY
3)
1)
1) 1) 1)
1) Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the monitoring information screen
2) Monitored device status display area

Displays the status of the device being monitored.
➠ (a) Monitored device status display area
3) Error status display area
Displays the error code, content, and corrective action if an error occurs in the device being monitored.

(a) Monitored device status display area
The following explains the display data of the monitored device status display area and the functions of the keys
displayed in the area.
1)
3)
2)
4)
1) [Model name]
Displays the model of the device being monitored.
2) [Status]
Displays the status of the device being monitored.
The following shows the items displayed in [Status].
If multiple states are detected, the state having the highest priority is displayed.
Displayed item Priority
[Slave module voltage drop]

High
[Sensing level drop]
[I/O disconnection]
↓
[I/O short-circuit]
[I/O volt. drop]

Low
[Normal]
3) [Sensing level]
Displays the current sensing level in a numerical value and bar graph when an ASLINKAMP or
ASLINKSENSOR is selected on the device list information screen.
In the bar graph, the current value is always refreshed while the monitoring information screen is being
displayed and the left side from the current value is filled in green.
When the sensing level value is outside the range, [0%] is displayed.
4) [I/O status]
Displays the I/O status of the device being monitored.
When the device being monitored has no I/O, no item is displayed.

(2) Key functions
The following shows the functions of the operation keys on the monitoring information screen.
1) 2)
3)
21
Knob
4)
3)
iQSS UTILITY
5) 6) 7)

2) [×] key
3) Scroll key
4) Scroll bar
5) [Parameter info.] key

Switches the screen to the parameter information screen.
6) [Device list info.] key

Switches the screen to the device list information screen.


21.5.4 Parameter information screen
This section explains the structure of the screen and the common operations on the parameter information screen.

The following explains the display data of the parameter information screen and the functions of the keys displayed on
the screen.
1) 1)
2)
1)
3)
1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
1) Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the parameter information screen
2) Parameter display area

Lists the parameters of the device being monitored. Parameter change is available.
Up to 128 parameters are displayed.
The 129th parameter and later are not displayed.
3) Detailed parameter information display area

Displays the details of the parameter selected in the parameter display area.

(2) Key functions
The following shows the functions of the operation keys on the parameter information screen.
1) 2)
3)
Knob
4)
21
3)
iQSS UTILITY
5) 6) 7) 8) 9)

2) [×] key
3) Scroll key
4) Scroll bar
5) [Monitor info.] key

Switches the screen to the monitoring information screen.
6) [Read parameters] key

Reads the parameter information of the device being monitored and refreshes the parameter display area.
7) [Write parameters] key

Writes the parameter information changed in the parameter display area to the device being monitored.
8) [Device list info.] key

Switches the screen to the device list information screen.


For the error messages displayed in the iQSS utility and the corrective actions, refer to the following.
➠ MELSEC-Q/L AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual

22. MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR
This function is available for a motion controller OS special model.

For details of this function, please contact us.
22
MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR
22 - 1
22 - 2
23. MOTION PROGRAM I/O
This function is available for a motion controller OS special model.

For details of this function, please contact us.
23
MOTION PROGRAM I/O
23 - 1
23 - 2
REVISIONS
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date * Manual Number Revision
Sep., 2013 SH(NA)-081196ENG-A First printing : GT Works3 Version1.100E
Nov., 2013 SH(NA)-081196ENG-B Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.104J

• Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed
• Abbreviations and generic terms changed
• NZ2DL is added to the compatible models for the BOX data logger.
Apr., 2014 SH(NA)-081196ENG-C Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.112S
• GT25 supported
Jun., 2014 SH(NA)-081196ENG-D Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.117X

• Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed
• Network monitor supports R120CPU, R32CPU, R16CPU, R08CPU, and R04CPU.
• Intelligent module monitor supports R120CPU, R32CPU, R16CPU, R08CPU, and R04CPU.
• Backup/restoration supports R120CPU, R32CPU, R16CPU, R08CPU, R04CPU,
Q173NCCPU, and Q172NCCPU.
• Log viewer supports R120CPU, R32CPU, R16CPU, R08CPU, and R04CPU.
• R motion monitor supported
• CNC monitor supported
• CNC data I/O supported
• CNC machining program edit supported
Jul., 2014 SH(NA)-081196ENG-E Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.118Y

• Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications changed
• Backup/restoration supports R32MTCPU and R16MTCPU.
Oct., 2014 SH(NA)-081196ENG-F GT Works3 Version1.122C is supported.

• Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS has been changed.
• Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications have been changed.
• GT21 has been supported.
• GT2512-S has been supported.
• The CNC monitor, CNC data I/O, CNC machining program edit are now available on
GT2512-S.
Jan., 2015 SH(NA)-081196ENG-G GT Works3 Version1.126G is supported.

• Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS has been changed.
• The system launcher is supported.
• The iQSS utility is supported.
• The backup/restoration function has been expanded.
Feb., 2015 SH(NA)-081196ENG-H GT Works3 Version1.127H is supported.

• Descriptions of the sequence program monitor (ladder, R Ladder) have been partially
changed.
Apr., 2015 SH(NA)-081196ENG-I GT Works3 Version1.130L is supported.

• The motion program editor is supported.
• The motion program input/output is supported.
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this
manual.
© 2013 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
REVISIONS - 1
REVISIONS - 2
WARRANTY
Please check the following product warranty details before using this product.
■1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the
gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's
discretion.
Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the
failed module.
(1) Gratis Warranty Term
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty-six (36) months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the longest
gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty-two (42) months.
The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
(2) Gratis Warranty Range
(a) The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified.
If requested by the customer, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure
diagnosis at the customer’s expense.
The primary failure diagnosis will, however, be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation.
(b) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods, and usage environment, etc., which follow the
conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product.
(c) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged in the following cases.
• Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the user's
hardware or software design.
• Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
• When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures,
judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had
been provided.
• Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or
replaced.
• Replacing consumable parts such as a battery, backlight, and fuse.
• Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure such as
earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
• Failure caused by reasons that could not be predicted by scientific technology standards at the time of shipment from
Mitsubishi.
• Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
■2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production

(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Mitsubishi shall not accept a request for product supply (including spare parts) after production is discontinued.
■3. Overseas service

Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center.
Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ.
■4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to
be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special
damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to
products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test operation and other
tasks.
■5. Changes in product specifications

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals, or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
■6. Product application

(1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident
even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that backup and fail-safe functions are
systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc.
Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by
respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway
companies or Public service shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical, railway applications,
incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation equipment, recreation and amusement devices, safety devices, shall also be
excluded from the graphic operation terminal.
Even for the above applications, however, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application, provided
that the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention, the application is clearly defined and any special quality is
not required, after the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative.
MELDAS, MELSEC, iQ Platform, MELSOFT, GOT, CC-Link, CC-Link/LT, and CC-Link IE are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows NT, Windows Server, SQL Server, Visual C++, Visual C#, Visual Basic, Excel,
and Access are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States.
MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA.
DeviceNet is a trademark of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.).
VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries.
Unicode is a trademark or registered trademark of Unicode, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
PictBridge is a registered trademark of Canon Inc.
Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates in the United States and other countries.
QR Code is a trademark or registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan, the United States, and/or
other countries.
Other company and product names herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
SH(NA)-081196ENG-I
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor)
MODEL GOT2000-U-MONITOR-E
MODEL 1D7MJ7
CODE
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy,
SH(NA)-081196ENG-I(1504)MEE Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan, April 2015.

GOT2000 - UserManual Monitor - SH 081196 I PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GOT2000 - UserManual Monitor - SH 081196 I PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GOT2000 - UserManual Monitor - SH 081196 I PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]

5. SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)

8. INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR

9. SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR

11. MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING

12. LOG VIEWER

13. FX LADDER MONITOR

14. MOTION SFC MONITOR

15. FX LIST EDITOR

16. R MOTION MONITOR

17. CNC MONITOR

18. CNC DATA I/O

19. CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT

20. NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY

21. iQSS UTILITY

22. MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR

■1. List of Manuals for GT Designer3(GOT2000)

GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual -

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help -

(2) Connection manuals

(3) GT SoftGOT2000 manuals

GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual SH-081201ENG

(4) GOT2000 manuals

GT27-X GT2715-X GT2715-XTBA, GT2715-XTBD

GT2712-S GT2712-STBA, GT2712-STWA, GT2712-STBD, GT2712-STWD

GT27 GT27-V GT2710-V GT2710-VTBA, GT2710-VTWA, GT2710-VTBD, GT2710-VTWD

GT27-S GT2708-S GT2708-STBA, GT2708-STBD

GT2708-V GT2708-VTBA, GT2708-VTBD

GT25-S GT2512-S GT2512-STBA, GT2512-STBD

GT25 GT2510-V GT2510-VTBA, GT2510-VTWA, GT2510-VTBD, GT2510-VTWD

GT2310-V GT2310-VTBA, GT2310-VTBD

GT21-R GT2104-R GT2104-RTBD

GT SoftGOT2000 GT SoftGOT2000 Version1

GOT1000 Series GOT1000 Series -

GOT900 Series GOT-A900 Series, GOT-F900 Series -

GOT800 Series GOT-800 Series -

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL,

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15-J71GP23-SX

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13

Wireless LAN communication unit GT25-WLAN

Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M

Connection conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S

Field network adapter unit GT25-FNADP

■3. Option unit

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

Printer unit GT15-PRN

Video input unit GT27-V4-Z (A set of GT16M-V4-Z and GT27-IF1000)

RGB input unit GT27-R2, GT27-R2-Z (A set of GT16M-R2-Z and GT27-IF1000)

RGB output unit GT27-ROUT, GT27-ROUT-Z (A set of GT16M-ROUT-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Multimedia unit GT27-MMR-Z (A set of GT16M-MMR-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Video signal conversion unit GT27-IF1000

External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR